Contents

Yamaha 9000 Pro Keyboard Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 250
1 of 250

Summary of Content for Yamaha 9000 Pro Keyboard Owner's Manual PDF

2

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graph- ics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction sec- tion.

The exclamation point within the equi- lateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operat- ing and maintenance (servicing) instruc- tions in the literature accompanying the product.

The lightning ash with arrowhead sym- bol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the products enclosure that may be of sufcient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is prop- erly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims led under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modied. Implied warranties may also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be cor- rect at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specications without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the pro- duction methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approx- imately ve years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualied service representative to perform the replacement.

Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incin- erate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from chil- dren. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid- ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and fed- eral regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manu- facturers warranty, and are therefore the owners responsi- bility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

92-469- (rear)

3

1

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe- cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including con- nection to the main supply.

2. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualied service personnel.

3. Main Power Supply Verication: Yamaha products are manufactured specically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for sup- ply voltage verication and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Mes- sage Section of this manual.

4. DANGER-Grounding Instructions: This product must be grounded and therefore has been equipped with a three pin attach- ment plug. If this product should malfunction, the ground pin pro- vides a path of low resistance for electrical current, reducing the risk of electrical shock. If your wall socket will not accommodate this type plug, contact an electrician to have the outlet replaced in accordance with local electrical codes. Do NOT modify the plug or change the plug to a different type!

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not seriously contribute to their oper- ating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers etc., should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca- tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Exam- ples of wet /damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components sup- plied or; a cart ,rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufac- turer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activ- ity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qual- ied service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain; or d. The product does not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli- er and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs.

14. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or acces- sory mounting xtures that are either supplied as a part of the prod- uct or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional xtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-3

4

2

PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, re or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not attempt to dis- assemble or modify the internal components in any way.

Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings.

If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sud- den loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instru- ment inspected by qualied Yamaha service personnel.

Only use the voltage specied as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

Always connect the three-pin attachment plug to a properly grounded power source. (For more information about the main power supply, see page 14.)

Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it.

CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radia- tors, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-con- nector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause over- heating in the outlet.

Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disguration or damage to the inter- nal components.

Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televi- sions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect proper operation of the other products.

Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might acci- dentally fall over.

Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thin- ners, solvents, cleaning uids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

Do not place objects in front of the instrument's air vent, since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.

Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncom- fortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

SAVING USER DATA Always save data to a oppy disk frequently, in order to help prevent the

loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

(2)-6

5

3

Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks Be sure to handle oppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below.

Compatible Disk Type 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type oppy disks can be used.

Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks To insert a oppy disk into the disk drive:

Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Care- fully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out.

To eject a oppy disk: Before ejecting the disk, be sure to conrm that the FDD is

stopped (check if the DISK IN USE lamp is off). Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand.

If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly. The eject but- ton may become stuck in a half-pressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the oppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure.

Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off during recording, reading and playing back. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive.

Be sure to remove the oppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A oppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors.

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs

a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic parti- cles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors.

To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head- cleaning disks.

Never insert anything but oppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or oppy disks.

About the Floppy Disks To handle oppy disks with care:

Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep oppy disks in their protec- tive cases when they are not in use.

Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids.

Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the oppy disk inside.

Do not expose the disk to magnetic elds, such as those pro- duced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic elds can partially or completely erase data on the disk, render- ing it unreadable.

Never use a oppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a oppy

disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper loca- tion.

To protect your data (write-protect tab): To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disks

write-protect tab to the protect position (tab open).

Data backup For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep

two copies of important data on separate oppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged.

When the 9000Pro is turned on, the LED below the oppy disk slot will be lit indicating that the Disk Drive is ready to use.

This lamp is always on when the power is on, regardless of the disk oper- ation.

DISK IN USE This lamp lights during disk read/write opera- tions, such as when a disk has been inserted, during recording, play- back, formatting, etc.

Write protect tab ON (locked or write pro- tected)

Write protect tab OFF (unlocked or write enabled)

6

4

Congratulations! You are the proud owner of an extraordinary electronic keyboard. The Yamaha 9000Pro combines advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical versatility. The advanced Auto Accompaniment, Vocal Har- mony, and Sampler features, in particular, are brilliant examples of how Yamaha technology can signi- cantly expand your musical horizons. A large-size graphic display and easy-to-use interface also greatly enhance the operability of this advanced instrument. In addition, the 9000Pro lets you add optional Plug- in Boards, giving you access to an exciting and wide array of various synthesizer voices plus the ability to edit those voices and create your own original sounds. In order to make the most of your 9000Pros features and vast performance potential, we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference.

Packing List Your 9000Pro includes the following items:

9000Pro x 1

AC Power Cord x 1 ............................................................................................................................................. page 14

Music Stand x 1 .................................................................................................................................................. page 14

Floppy Disk (Disk Styles and MIDI Driver) x 1 ................................................................................................ page 25

Floppy Disks (Factory Data Backup Disk No.1/2) x 2 ..................................................................................... page 54 These include the following factory-set data: One Touch Setting, Registration Memory, Music Database, Multi Pad, Flash Style and Setup.

Floppy Disk (Plug-in Custom Voice Disk) x 1 .................................................................................................. page 42 This includes the voice les for Plug-in Boards

Owners Manual

Trademarks: Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business MachinesCorporation. Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

Unauthorized copying of copyrighted software for purposes other than the purchasers personal use is prohib- ited.

This product (9000Pro) is manufactured under license of U.S.Patents No.5231671, No.5301259, No.5428708, and No.5567901 of IVL Technologies Ltd.

GM System Level 1 GM System Level 1 is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer.

XG XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specication which signicantly expands and improves on the GM System Level 1 stan- dard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive con- trol, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By using the 9000Pros XG voices, it is possible to record XG-compatible song les.

XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The 9000Pro is capable of dis- playing lyrics when an XF le containing lyric data is played.

Vocal Harmony Vocal Harmony employs state-of-the-art digital signal pro- cessing technology to automatically add appropriate vocal harmony to a lead vocal line sung by the user. Vocal Har- mony can even change the character and gender of the lead voice as well as the added voices to produce a wide range of vocal harmony effects.

The logos printed on the 9000Pro panel indicate the standards/formats it supports and special features it includes.

Panel logos

7

How to use the manual Starting Up........................................................................................................................page 14

Before going on to any other part of the manual, we strongly suggest you read this section rst. It shows you how to get started playing and using your new 9000Pro.

Top Panel & Connections................................................................................................page 10

Rear Panel & Connections ..............................................................................................page 12 Use this section to nd out about all of the buttons and controls of the 9000Pro.

Contents .............................................................................................................................page 8 All topics, features, functions, and operations are listed here in the order they appear in the manual, for easy reference.

Basic Operations .............................................................................................................page 44 This section introduces you to the basic operating conventions of the 9000Pro, such as editing values and changing settings, and shows you how to use the convenient Direct Access functions.

Function Tree....................................................................................................................page 50 This lists all functions of the 9000Pro according to their hierarchical structure, letting you easily see the rela- tionship of the various functions and quickly locate desired information.

Reference..........................................................................................................................page 56 Once youre familiar with everything above, lightly go over this comprehensive guide to all functions. You wont need (or want) to read everything at once, but it is there for you to refer to when you need information about a certain feature or function.

Installing Optional Hardware ........................................................................................page 180 This section provides detailed instructions for installing each of the 9000Pro's supported options (SIMM, Hard disk unit, and Plug-in Boards).

Appendix.........................................................................................................................page 192 This contains various important lists such as the Voice List, Preset Style List, Effect List, MIDI Data Format, and MIDI Implementation Chart.

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................page 188 If the 9000Pro does not function as expected or you have some problem with the sound or operation, consult this section before calling your Yamaha dealer or service center. Most common problems and their solutions are covered here in a very simple and easy-to-understand way.

Index................................................................................................................................page 190 This section alphabetically lists virtually all topics, features, functions, and operations with their respective page numbers, letting you quickly and easily nd the information you need.

Quick Guide ............................................................................................. page 16 Unless you enjoy reading manuals, youre probably eager to start playing your new 9000Pro right now. If so, read this section.

5

DOC The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series.

Style File Format The Style File Format SFF is Yamahas original style le format which uses a unique conversion system to pro- vide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. The 9000Pro uses the SFF internally, reads optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Style Creator function.

Plug for XG This system offers powerful expansion and upgrade capa- bilities for XG-Plug-in-compatible tone generators. The XG Plug-in System enables you to equip the 9000Pro with the latest and most sophisticated technology, ensuring that you keep pace with the rapid and multi-faceted advances in modern music production.

Contents

8

Packing List..................................................6 Panel logos ..................................................6 How to use the manual ................................7

Contents ......................................................... 8 Top Panel & Connections............................ 10

Music stand................................................10 Rear Panel & Connections.......................... 12 Starting Up ................................................... 14

Lamp..........................................................15

Quick Guide Playing Voices .............................................. 16

Playing a Voice...................................................16 Playing Two or Three Voices Simultaneously .....17 Playing Different Voices with the Left and

Right Hands ..........................................18 Adjusting the Octave setting ..............................18 Organ Flutes ......................................................19

Auto Accompaniment.................................. 20 Using Auto Accompaniment...............................20 Accompaniment Sections ..................................22 One Touch Setting..............................................24 Track Muting & Volume Control ..........................24 Disk Direct Function...........................................25

Music Database............................................ 26 Using the Music Database .................................26 Searching the Music Database ..........................27

Registration Memory ................................... 28 Using the Preset Registration Memory ..............28 Registering the Panel Settings...........................29

Disk Song Playback..................................... 30 Playback of Song Disks .....................................30

Vocal Harmony ............................................. 32 Setting Up ..........................................................32 Vocal Harmony with Accompaniment Playback...32 Vocal Harmony with Song Playback ..................33

The Multi Pads.............................................. 34 Playing the Multi Pads........................................34 Chord Match ......................................................34

Voice Effects................................................. 35 Applying the Voice Effects..................................35

Song Creator ................................................ 36 Quick Recording.................................................36 Multi Track Recording.........................................38

Sampling....................................................... 40 Recording a Sample ..........................................40

Using the Optional Plug-in Board .............. 42 Playing a Plug-in Voice.......................................42

Basic Operation Display-based Controls............................... 44

Display Messages ............................................. 45 Name Entry ....................................................... 46 Computer Keyboard Functions.......................... 46 Direct Access .................................................... 48

Function Tree................................................ 50 Memory Structure........................................ 54

Reference Demonstration ............................................. 56 Voices ........................................................... 57

Parts: Right1, Right2, Right3 and Left............... 57 Voices................................................................ 58 PITCH BEND Wheel & MODULATION Wheel.... 59 Voice Effects...................................................... 60 Other Keyboard-related Functions .................... 61

Organ Flutes................................................. 62 Plug-in Voices............................................... 64

Plug-in Manager................................................ 66 Auto Accompaniment.................................. 70

Chord Fingerings............................................... 70 Fade-ins and Fade-outs .................................... 72 Tempo Control................................................... 72 Synchro Stop..................................................... 73 One Touch Setting............................................. 73 Style Manager ................................................... 74

Music Database ........................................... 76 Creating the Music Database............................ 76

The Multi Pads ............................................. 77 Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off.......... 77

Disk Song Playback..................................... 78 Selecting a Song ............................................... 78 Other Functions: Viewing the Lyrics and

Fast Forward/Reverse.......................... 79 Song Setup ....................................................... 79

Vocal Harmony............................................. 80 Applying the Vocal Harmony Effect ................... 80 Selecting/Producing the Vocal Harmony effect . 81 Changing the Vocal Harmony/Microphone

Settings................................................ 82 Sampling ...................................................... 84

Recording a Sample.......................................... 86 Importing Wave Files from Disk ........................ 87 Clearing Wave Data .......................................... 87 Editing Wave data ............................................. 88

Custom Voice Creating................................ 92 Easy Editing ...................................................... 93 Full Editing ........................................................ 94

6

9

Contents

Creating Plug-in Custom Voices............... 100 Voice Editing ....................................................102 Native System Parameter Editing ....................105 Voice Editing on a Computer............................106 Board Custom Voice Backup............................108

Song Creator .............................................. 110 Track Setting for Recording

(Multi Track Recording) .......................112 Track Setting for Recording

(Quick Recording)...............................113 Song Edit Functions (Multi Track Recording).....114 Song Setup (Multi Track Recording).................115 Step Recording (Multi Track Recording)...........116 Chord Step (Quick Recording) .........................122

Style Creator .............................................. 126 Style Assembly Creating a Style .................129 Revoice (Easy Edit)..........................................130 Groove & Dynamics (Easy Edit).......................131 Style Recording (Full Edit) ...............................132 Style Editing (Full Edit).....................................134 Custom Style Recording via an External

Sequence Recorder............................138 Step Recording (Full Edit) ................................140

Multi Pad Creator ....................................... 141 Multi Pad Recording.........................................142 Clear ................................................................142 Copy.................................................................142 Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off ........142 Step Recording ................................................143

Mixing Console .......................................... 144 Part Settings ....................................................144 Effect Type Settings..........................................146 Master Equalizer Settings ................................147 Line Out Settings .............................................148

Disk/SCSI Operations................................ 150 Loading Data from a Disk to Flash ROM .........152 Saving Data from Flash ROM to a Disk ...........153 Copying Files & Copying Floppy Disks ............154 Backing Up/Restoring the Data in Flash ROM ..154 Converting les ................................................155 Renaming/deleting Disk Files ..........................155 Renaming/deleting/creating Directories ...........156 Formatting a Disk.............................................156 Checking a Disk ...............................................157

The 9000Pro Functions .......................... 158 Master Tuning/Scale Tuning .............................158 Split Point/Chord Fingering ..............................159 Controller Assignment......................................159 Registration/Freeze Group/Voice Set Settings ..163 Harmony/Echo Settings ...................................164 Video Monitor Settings.....................................165 Talk Setting ......................................................165 Utility Settings ..................................................166

MIDI Functions........................................... 168 System Settings .............................................. 175 Transmit Settings............................................. 175 Receive Settings ............................................. 176 Root Settings................................................... 177 Chord Detect Settings ..................................... 177 Storing the MIDI Settings ................................ 177 MFC10 Settings .............................................. 178

Installing Optional Hardware .................... 180 Optional Plug-in Board Installation................. 181 Optional Hard Disk Installation....................... 184 Optional SIMM Installation .............................. 185

Troubleshooting......................................... 188 Index ........................................................... 190

Appendix Voice List ......................................................... 192 Keyboard Drum Assignments.......................... 200 Plug-in Voice List............................................. 204 Style List.......................................................... 212 Multi Pad Bank List.......................................... 213 Parameter Chart.............................................. 214 Effect Type List ................................................ 220 Effect Parameter List ....................................... 222 Effect Data Value Assign Table........................ 227 MIDI Data Format............................................ 228 MIDI Implementation Chart ............................. 244 Specications .................................................. 246

7

Top Panel & Connections

10

q POWER ON/OFF switch.................................... 14 w MASTER VOLUME control.............................. 14 e PITCH BEND wheel .......................................... 59 r MODULATION wheel....................................... 59 t SONG buttons .............................................. 30, 78 y STYLE buttons ................................................... 20

u ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL buttons ......... 20 i MENU buttons.................................. 150, 158, 174 o TRANSPOSE buttons......................................... 61 !0 DIGITAL STUDIO buttons.................. 36, 40, 84, 92,

100, 110, 126, 141 !1 MULTI PAD buttons............................. 34, 77, 141

t y i

!0

!1

o

u

e r

w

Keyboard... page 162 The keyboard of the 9000Pro is equipped with a touch response feature (initial touch and after touch) that lets you dynamically and expressively con- trol the level of the voices with your playing strength just as on an acous- tic instrument.

INPUT VOLUME control

Floppy Disk Drive... page 25, 30, 150 The 9000Pro also features a built-in disk drive that lets you save all your important original data to oppy disk for future recall. The 9000Pro is compatible with a wide variety of disk formats, allowing you to playback song data on commercially available XG, GM , DOC, and Disklavier Piano Soft disks.

PHONES jack... page 13 Music stand The 9000Pro is supplied with a music stand that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the holes as shown.

8

11

Top Panel & Connectionsl i

!2 Data dial.............................................................. 44 !3 DEMO button ..................................................... 56 !4 VOICE EFFECT buttons .............................. 35, 60 !5 MUSIC DATABASE button ......................... 26, 76 !6 ONE TOUCH SETTING button ................. 24, 73 !7 REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons ................ 28

!8 MEMORY button ......................................... 28, 73 !9 VOICE buttons.............................................. 16, 58 @0 PLUG-IN VOICE buttons............................. 42, 58 @1 PART SELECT buttons ...................................... 57 @2 PART ON/OFF buttons........................... 17, 18, 57 @3 UPPER OCTAVE buttons................................... 18 @4 VOCAL HARMONY buttons....................... 32, 80

!2

!3

!4

!5 !9

@0

@2

!8

@3

@4

@1!6

!7

Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and Related Buttons/Controls ... page 44

Large multi-function LCD display panel with display-based buttons, plus comprehensive display prompts and messages, makes operation easy and intuitive.

Related Buttons/Controls : LCD(A-J) buttons LCD(1-8) buttons DIRECT ACCESS button MAIN MIXER button PART ON/OFF button EXIT button PAGE CONTROL buttons LCD CONTRAST control

Air vent Do not place objects on the instruments air vent, since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.

q

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owners manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from your instrument.

9

Rear Panel & Connections

12

Stereo System

INPUTOUT

Effector

An optional lamp can be connected to the 9000Pro. This is especially convenient when using the 9000Pro in situations of low available light. See page 15 for details.

The LOOP SEND jacks deliver the output of the 9000Pro for connection to external signal processing devices, such as dis- tortion or lter effects. The output from the signal processor can be returned to the AUX IN/LOOP RETURN jacks letting you apply the desired effect(s) to the overall sound of the 9000Pro and return the processed sound back to the 9000Pro.

The LINE OUT jacks are used to send the 9000Pro output to a keyboard amplier, stereo sound sys- tem, mixing console, or tape recorder. If you are connecting the 9000Pro to a mono sound system, use only the L/L+R jack. When only this jack is con- nected (using a standard phone plug), the left and right channels are combined and output through this jack allowing you have a mono mix of the 9000Pro's stereo sound. Refer to page 148.

The TRIM control allows the input sensitivity of the AUX IN L/L+R and R (LOOP RETURN) jacks to be adjusted for optimum level matching with the con- nected equipment.

Since the 9000Pro has no built-in speakers, you need to monitor its sound output via external audio equip- ment. Alternatively, you could use a pair of head- phones.

CAUTION

Make sure that the POWER switch is in the OFF (extended) position before making any connections. If you make connections while the POWER switch is on, you risk damaging external equipment such as the amp or speakers.

You can connect a computer keyboard to the 9000Pro for inputting song and le names or Voice/Style/Song/Regis- tration Memory numbers. This function is also very con- venient in Step recording. Please note that Macintosh computer keyboards cannot be used with the 9000Pro. Refer to pages 46, 167.

A computer keyboard can only be used if it has been con- nected to the 9000Pro before turning the power on. If you have connected a computer keyboard after turning the power on, simply turn the power off and back on again.

Refer to page 14.

10

13

Rear Panel & Connectionsl i

MFC10

Television

[VIDEO IN]

An optional lamp can be con- nected to the 9000Pro. This is especially conve- nient when using the 9000Pro in situations of low available light. See page 15 for details.

This SCSI-2 50-pin connector (D-sub, half-pitch) can be used to connect to an external SCSI data storage device allowing you to conveniently save and store large quantities of data. Refer to page 150.

You can connect the 9000Pro to a television or video monitor to display the lyrics and chords in your song data on a larger screen. Refer to page 165.

Computer (with music software) Refer to page 172.

An optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller connected to this jack can be used to con- trol volume and a range of other impor- tant functions. Refer to page 159.

The sophisticated MIDI func- tions give you powerful tools to expand your music performance and creation possibilities. Refer to page 168.

One or two optional Yamaha FC5 foot- switches connected to these jacks can be used to control sustain and a range of other important functions. Refer to page 160.

PHONES jack A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice or late-night playing. Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume of the head- phone sound.

MIC/LINE IN jack The 9000Pro includes a microphone/line input jack which is compatible with virtually any standard microphone or line-level source, accepting either 1/4 phone plugs or XLR connectors. The micro- phone or line input can be used with the 9000Pros vocal harmony function.

Depending on the SCSI device, you may need a special connecting cable or adap- tor to connect the device properly to the 9000Pro. Make sure to conrm the con- nection conguration of both the 9000Pro and the SCSI device before purchasing the device.

The SCSI ID number of the 9000Pro is xed at 7. Make sure to set the ID num- ber of the external SCSI device to a num- ber other than this (i.e., 0 - 6).

The MIC/LINE jacks can be used with either 1/4 phone plugs or XLR connectors; however, they are special differential input connectors. For phone plugs, the tip and ring of the plug correspond to + and -, respectively. Because of this arrangement, connecting a stereo signal (such as from a CD player) with a stereo phone jack to the 9000Pro results in the left and right signals cancelling each other out. To properly connect a CD player or other stereo source, make sure to use a mono input, either left or right, or a mix of the stereo signal (pages 32, 80).

The 9000Pros default setting for the external televi- sion/video monitor signal is PAL. Depending on your particular locale, the standard may be different and the setting should be changed accordingly. (For example, NTSC is generally used in North America.) Check the standard used by your television or video monitor, and if it is not PAL, change the setting in the VIDEO OUT display to NTSC (page 165).

11

Starting Up

14

Use the following procedure to start up the 9000Pro.

1 Make sure that the POWER switch is in the OFF position.

2 Securely plug the female end of the AC power cord supplied with the 9000Pro into the rear-panel AC cord socket.

3 Plug the power cord into a convenient AC outlet. To disconnect the AC power cord, set the POWER switch to OFF, then unplug the AC power cord from the AC outlet, and disconnect it from the 9000Pro AC INLET.

4 Make all necessary connections (pages 12 and 13), making sure rst that all level controls on those devices are set to the minimum. (Refer to the owners manuals of the devices you are using for more information on connections.) Since the 9000Pro has no built-in speakers, you need to monitor its sound output via external audio equipment. Alternatively, you could use a pair of headphones.

5 Turn the power ON. If youve connected any external devices to the 9000Pro, turn on the power of those devices in the following order:

When turning off the power, make sure that all level controls on those devices above are set to the minimum and simply reverse the above order.

6 Turn up the volume of the external audio equipment, as nec- essary.

7 After the main display appears, play and adjust the volume.

WARNING Make sure your 9000Pro is rated

for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (as listed on the rear panel). Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard!

Use only the AC power cord supplied with the 9000Pro. If the supplied cord is lost or dam- aged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replace- ment can pose a re and shock hazard!

The type of AC power cord pro- vided with the 9000Pro may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased (a third prong may be provided for grounding purposes). Improper connection of the grounding conductor can create the risk of electrical shock. Do NOT modify the plug provided with the 9000Pro. If the plug will not t the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualied electrician. Do not use a plug adapter which defeats the grounding conductor.

Press the [POWER] switch. After a while, the main diaplay below appears.

z MIDI controller x 9000Pro c Audio equipment

12

15

Starting Upi

The 9000Pro features two Lamp terminals (at either end of the rear panel) for connect- ing an optional lamp. This is especially convenient when using the 9000Pro in situa- tions of low available light. To turn on the lamp, use the switch/dimmer control at the left end of the rear panel (as viewed from the keyboard side).

Only use lamps conforming to the following specications: Lamp: 12V 5W Connector: 4-pin XLR

1 Make sure that the POWER switch is off.

2 Connect a lamp to one of the terminals on the rear panel. Firmly push the lamp connector into the socket until it locks.

3 Turn the power on by pressing the [POWER] switch.

4 Use the [DIMMER] control to turn the lamp on.

Lamp

0 - 10V DC

Either or both terminals can be used, letting you connect up to two lamps.

Use this to turn the lamp on and off and control the brightness.

Pin 1, 2: No connection Pin 3, 4: 0-10V DC

WARNING To avoid possible damage to the instrument, follow these precautions: Only use lamps that conform

to the specications listed at left.

Do not attempt to insert any- thing other than a proper lamp to the Lamp terminals.

Do not short-circuit the ter- minals.

Do not apply electrical volt- age (power) to the Lamp ter- minals.

WARNING Make sure the gooseneck of

the lamp is 12 inches or shorter. Goosenecks of longer lengths may be unsta- ble.

The connected lamp becomes very hot after being on for a while. Make sure you let the lamp cool before trying to touch it.

The light bulb will burn out over a long period of use. When this happens, replace the bulb with a new one. You can extend the life of the bulb by turning the [DIMMER] control down toward [MIN] when using the lamp.

To disconnect the lamp: First, make sure the lamp is off (the [DIMMER] is set to OFF ), then unplug the lamp while holding down the PUSH latch on the rear panel.

13

Playing Voices

16

Q u

ic k

G u

id e

Reference on page 57

Playing a Voice

1 Press the [R1] LCD button to turn the RIGHT1 part on.

2 Select a voice group.

3 Select a voice.

4 Play the voice.

Voice related buttons

F

G

H

I

J

RIGHT3RIGHT2

UPPER

LEFTLEFT HOLD

LOWER

RIGHT1

PART ON/OFF

PART SELECT

The voice selected here is called voice RIGHT 1. See page 57 for more informa- tion on voice RIGHT1.

For this example, STRINGS is selected.

For this example, Live! Orch is selected.

A

B

C

D

E

Press the corresponding buttons to select the various pages.

14

Playing Voices

17

Playing Two or Three Voices Simultaneously

1 Press the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT2] button to turn the RIGHT2 part ON.

2 Select a voice group. For example, select CHOIR & PAD.

3 Select a voice. For example, select Hah Choir.

4 Play the voices. The voice selected for R1 (page 16) and the voice selected here are sounded simultaneously in a layer.

Voice RIGHT 3 can be set in the same way described above, by using the [RIGHT3] button instead.

Try out some of these other voices...

Automatically turned on

RIGHT3RIGHT2

UPPER

LEFTLEFT HOLD

LOWER

RIGHT1

PART ON/OFF

PART SELECT

Brass Live! Horn Stereo sampled powerful horn section. Sforzando style is also available.

Saxophone Sweet Tenor Smooth tenor sax with natural vibrato.

Sweet Sprno Soprano sax with natural vibra- to. Very expressive. Play long notes.

Sweet Clari Jazzy clarinet with natural vi- brato.

Flute Sweet Flute Flute with natural vibrato. Very expressive. Play strongly to get realistic overblown sample.

Sweet Pan Authentic pan flute with natural vibrato

Choir&Pad Live!Gospel Stereo choir with individual, smooth vibrato

Live! Vocal Very dynamic. The vocal "words" change depending on your playing strength. Play bass vocals with your left hand.

DreamHeaven Beautiful synth pad Synthesizer Matrix Expressive synth lead. Play

long notes. Percussion Live!StdKit Stereo sampled drums with ve-

locity switching of up to 4 lay- ers. Also check out Live! Funk Kit.

Live!Brush Stereo sampled drums played by brush. Check out toms and cymbals.

Live!Cuban / Live!PopLtn

Stereo sampled percussion with various playing styles.

Category Voice Name CommentCategory Voice Name Comment Piano Live! Grand Stereo-sampled grand piano,

with realistic sound over entire keyboard range.

E.Piano Galaxy EP Rich and dynamic DX-type Electric Piano.

Stage Ep 3 different dynamics sampled for realistic and expressive tim- bre changes.

Organ Cool! Jazz Organ sample with authentic chorus vibrato.

Rotor Organ Organ sample with real rotary speaker.

Accordion Musette Realistic, French type accordi- on.

Guitar Live! Nylon Stereo sampled nylon guitar. Dedicated flageolet sample for high velocities.

Cool! J.Gtr Dynamic, fingered jazz guitar. Carlos Gtr Soulful guitar sound with natu-

ral distortion. Strings Live! Strs Rich, stereo sampled strings

orchestra. Live! Arco Rich, stereo sampled strings

orchestra with fast attack. Trumpet Sweet Trump Expressive trumpet with natu-

ral vibrato. Sweet Tromb Realistic trombone with natural

vibrato. SweetMuteTp Jazzy muted trumpet with natu-

ral vibrato. SweetFlugel Soft, breathy flugelhorn with

natural vibrato.

15

Playing Voices

18

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands

1 Press the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the LEFT part ON.

2 Select a voice group. For example, select STRINGS.

3 Select a voice. For example, select Symphon. Str.

4 Play the voices. The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while the notes you play with your right sound a different voice (or voices).

Voices RIGHT 1~3 are meant to be played with the right hand. Voice LEFT is played with the left hand.

Adjusting the Octave setting The [UPPER OCTAVE] button allows the RIGHT1, RIGHT2, and RIGHT3 parts to be simultaneously transposed up or down by one octave.

RIGHT3RIGHT2

UPPER

LEFTLEFT HOLD

LOWER

RIGHT1

PART ON/OFF

PART SELECT

Automatically turned on

Split Point

Voice L (Lower)

Voice R1, R2, R3 (Upper)

The point on the keyboard that separates voice LEFT and voice RIGHT1~3 is called the split point. Refer to page 159 for instruc- tions on setting the split point.

UPPER OCTAVE

RESET

More detailed octave-related settings for each part can be made by using the Mixing Con- sole function (page 145).

16

Playing Voices

19

Organ Flutes The 9000Pro uses advanced digital modeling technology to recreate the legendary sound of vintage organs. Just as on a traditional organ, you can create your own sound by increasing and decreasing the levels of the ute footages.

1 Press the [ORGAN FLUTES] button.

2 Use the LCD [1] - [8] buttons to adjust the footage settings. The footage settings determine the basic sound of the organ utes. The term footage is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs, in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet).

3 Store the Organ Flutes settings. (Refer to page 62.) The Organ Flutes settings above are stored to Flash ROM. For details about Flash ROM, refer to Memory Structure on page 54.

Try out the preset Organ Flutes voices The 9000Pro provides 10 pre-programmed Organ Flutes voices.

Reference on page 62

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Use button [1] to adjust the 16 or 8 footage. You can select the desired footage (16 or 8) with the [E] LCD button.

F

G

H

I

J

Press the [H] LCD button to call up the Organ Flutes pre- set voices display, then select an Organ Flutes voice.

17

Auto Accompaniment

20

Reference on page 70

Using Auto Accompaniment

1 Select a style group.

2 Select a style.

3 Turn Auto Accompaniment on. The specied left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the Auto Accompa- niment section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style.

4 Turn Sync Start on. The beat lamp also ashes in time with the tempo. This condition is called syn- chronized start standby.

Style related buttons

Auto Accompaniment related buttons

For this example, BALLROOM is selected.

The 9000Pro styles are divided into two groups : Preset styles and Flash styles. For details about Flash styles, see page 55.

F

G

H

I

J For this example, Jive is selected.

The point on the keyboard that separates the auto accompani- ment section and the right- hand section of the keyboard is called the split point. Refer to page 159 for instructions on setting the split point.

Auto Accompaniment section

Split Point

SYNC STOP SYNC START

18

Auto Accompaniment

21

5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

6 Try playing other chords with your left hand. For information on how to enter chords, see Chord Fingerings on page 70.

7 Press the [START/STOP] button again to stop the accompa- niment.

Try out some of the other styles...

Metronome and Bass Chord Hold These are two special styles designed for practice purposes; they do not have any of the normal rhythm or accompaniment patterns of the other styles. To call them up, select Page 2 of the Ballroom category by pressing the [P2] button.

Metronome This style plays back only a metronome click, without any other rhythm parts. Use this as you would a normal metronome, practicing in time with the click. You can adjust the tempo with the data dial. Playing chords in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard produces corresponding bass notes and chords, just as in Bass Chord Hold below. There are ve dif- ferent metronome settings, each with a different time signature.

Bass Chord Hold Even with the auto accompaniment turned on, this style does not play any rhythm parts, but simply holds the bass note and chord that correspond to the chord you play in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. this is convenient for practicing chords without hav- ing to play along with a rhythm. There are ve different bass note/chord settings, each with different voices.

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

Category Style Name Comment 8 BEAT Heart Beat Standard 8-beat pop. Enjoy the

sound of the strumming guitars. Spicy Beat Modern 8-beat that uses the Hit and

Live! Standard drum kits. 8Beat Adria This gorgeous style evokes the north

Mediterranean, but can be used well for a variety of songs.

AcousticBld An unplugged style with a half-time 3/4 feel. Check out the great guitar sounds.

16 BEAT Slow & Easy This style evokes the sophisticated, relaxed atmosphere of a modern jazz club.

Smooth Jazz Enjoy the Latin feel of this modern fu- sion style.

DANCE House Musik Analog synths, techno drums, rave beat todays modern dance music at your fingertips.

DiscoChoco Try starting this classic 70s disco style with Intro III.

Flip Hop This contemporary hip hop rhythm features sine wave acid lines and high-pitched snare. Rap along with this!

Category Style Name Comment SWING& JAZZ

Big Band 3 Traditional big band style especially suited for ballads and slow blues.

Swingfox Check out the different major and mi- nor patterns for Intro III. This style is good for a wide wide range of songs.

BBandBallad This style is perfect for recreating the sound and atmosphere of the great big bands and orchestras of the swing era.

Piano Swing A swinging Pianist style. Turn the CHD1 (chord) part on and off for dif- ferent arrangements.

R&B SoulShuffle Check out the dynamic sounds of the Live! Standard drum kit, especially in the Break fill pattern.

GospelBros Check out the different gospel grooves in the Main A - D patterns.

Boogie 1 Start this out without the drums and bass, then bring them in for a full-tilt boogie band.

RockShuffle This heavy rock shuffle features the distortion effect on the guitar.

COUNTRY Country 2/4 This driving country-pop style can be used for a variety of other music styles as well.

LATIN Samba City This contemporary Samba-pop style features dynamic toms from the new Live! drum kit. Check out Ending III.

BALLROOM Engl.Waltz A fully orchestrated, luscious waltz style, perfect for elegant ballroom dancing.

19

Auto Accompaniment

22

Accompaniment Sections There are various types of Auto Accompaniment sections that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. They are: Intro, Main, Fill-in & Break and Ending. By switching among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a professional-sounding arrangement in your performance.

1 - 4 Use the same operations as in Using Auto Accompani- ment.

5 Press any of the [INTRO] buttons.

6 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

When the playback of the intro is nished, it automatically leads into main sec- tion.

7 Press any of the accompaniment section buttons as desired. (See the Accompaniment Structure Diagram on the next page.)

8 Press any of the [ENDING] buttons. This switches to the ending section. When the ending is nished, the auto accompaniment automatically stops.

INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section.

MAIN VARIATION

This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures, and repeats indefinitely until another sections button is pressed.

FILL IN & BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional.

ENDING This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically.

Style related buttons

Auto Accompaniment section buttons

TAP TEMPOINTRO

TAP

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

FILL IN & BREAK

FADEIN/OUTENDING/rit.

20

Auto Accompaniment

23

Accompaniment Structure Diagram

Other Controls

FADE IN/OUT The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs when starting and stopping the accompaniment.

TAP TEMPO The auto accompaniment can be started at any tempo you desire by tapping out the tempo with the [TAP/TEMPO] button. For details, see page 72.

SYNCRO STOP When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop completely when all keys in the auto-accompaniment section of the keyboard are released. Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as a chord or note is played. For details, see page 73.

INTRO

MAIN VARIATION

MAIN VARIATION

A

MAIN VARIATION

B

via FILL IN B

via FILL IN Avia FILL IN D

MAIN VARIATION

C

MAIN VARIATION

D

via FILL IN C

via FILL IN B

via FILL IN D via FILL IN A

via FILL IN C

via BREAK

via FILL IN A via FILL IN B via FILL IN C via FILL IN D

via BREAK via BREAK via BREAK

Press the one of the [ENDING] buttons.

INTRO I INTRO II INTRO III

ENDING

ENDING I ENDING II ENDING III

You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same [ENDING] button again while the ending is playing back.

You can use one of the intro sections even in the middle of the song by pressing one of the [INTRO] buttons during the song.

If one of the [FILL IN & BREAK] buttons is pressed after the nal half beat (eighth note) of the measure, the ll-in or break will begin from the next measure.

You can begin the accompaniment by using any of the other sections, as well as the intro sections.

If you press one of the [INTRO] buttons while the ending is playing, the intro section will begin playing after the ending is nished.

If you press one of the [FILL IN & BREAK] buttons while the ending is playing, the ll-in or break will immediately start playing, con- tinuing with the main section.

FADEIN/OUT

TAP TEMPO

TAP

SYNC STOP

21

Auto Accompaniment

24

One Touch Setting One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appro- priate panel settings (voice number, etc.) for the currently selected style, with the touch of a single button.

1 Select a style. For example, select SWING & JAZZ category and try out BBand Ballad (on P2).

2 Press one of the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] buttons. Auto Accompaniment and Sync Start will automatically be turned on. In addition, various panel settings (such as voices, effects, etc.) that match the selected style can be instantly recalled with just a single button press (see page 214).

3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts.

4 Play melodies with your right hand and play various chords with your left hand.

5 Try out other One Touch Setting setups. You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups. For details, refer to page 73.

Track Muting & Volume Control

1 Turn Auto Accompaniment on and start the accompaniment (page 20).

2 Turn individual tracks ON or OFF (muted) as required. 1) Press the [PART ON/OFF] button. 2) Press the LCD button corresponding to the part you wish to turn on or off.

DISK DIRECT button

MAIN MIXER and PART ON/OFF buttons

ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons

1 2

3 4 PROGRAMMABLE

ONE TOUCH SETTING

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

1 2

3 4 PROGRAMMABLE

ONE TOUCH SETTING

The **PART** mark below the [PART ON/OFF] button indi- cates that pressing the button repeatedly switches among various different displays. However, in the example expla- nation shown here, only the accompaniment parts are dis- played; no other displays can be called up, no matter how many times the button is pressed. Other displays can be called up when Song Player (page 30) is set to on, or when the Digital Recording mode is active.

PART ON/OFF

PART

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

22

Auto Accompaniment

25

3 Adjust the volume to set the optimum level balance between the accompaniment and your right hand performance. 1) Press the [MAIN MIXER] button. 2) Press the LCD button corresponding to the part of which the volume you

wish to adjust.

4 Stop the accompaniment (page 21).

Disk Direct Function The 9000Pro can play back style les contained on the included oppy disk.

1 Insert the Disk Styles disk supplied with the 9000Pro into the disk drive. It may take a short while for the data on the disk to be read, before you can go on to the next steps.

2 Press the [DISK DIRECT] button.

3 Select a style. For example, select 16Balad3.

4 Play the auto accompaniment (page 22).

About the Style Data This diagram illustrates the relationship among the style data stored to different types of memory. Refer to Memory Structure on page 54.

M A I N MIXER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

It may be necessary to wait for a while in step #3 until the 9000Pro can play the accom- paniment, since it takes some time to read the style data from the oppy disk.

Accompaniment playback

Style Creator

Style Manager

Disk Direct

Preset Style Flash Style Disk Style Save

Store

Load

See page 74.

See page 126.

See above.

23

Music Database

26

Reference on page 76

If you want to play in a certain genre of music but dont know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Database can help you out. Simply select the desired genre from the Music Database and the 9000Pro automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style! For a list of Music Database setup parameters, refer to page 214.

Using the Music Database

1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

2 Select a Music Database.

For example, try out Category Great Pop Songs and Music Database Called to say.

3 Play along with the accompaniment playback.

MUSIC DATABASE button

MUSIC DATABASE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

You can use the Data dial to select the desired Music Database.

Select the desired Music Data- base. Use button [4] or [5] to move the cursor to the desired location and press the [OK] LCD button to actually call up the Music Data- base. Move the cursor to the desired location by using button [6] or [7] to call up the Music Database. (You need not press the [OK] LCD button.)

Select the desired Category.

Press this to actually call up the Music Database

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

24

Music Database

27

Searching the Music Database

1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

2 Press the LCD [F] button to call up the Search display.

3 Select a category and set the tempo range.

4 Press the LCD [I] button to execute the Search operation.

5 Select a Music Database (see step #2 on page 26) and play along with the accompaniment playback.

You can also create your own Music Database setups. For details, refer to page 76.

MUSIC DATABASE

F

G

H

I

J

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

F

G

H

I

J

2

3

4

Press this button to call up the Keyword dis- play, from which you can enter a keyword and search the Music Database.

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

25

Registration Memory

28

Reference on page 163

The Registration Memory gives you a convenient way to select the style, voice, and effect settings that will suit a particular type of music. You can instantly change panel settings with the touch of a single button. The Registration Memory provides up to 512 complete control-panel setups (64 banks, 8 setups each) that can be recalled instantly during your performance. For a list of Registration Memory setup parameters, refer to page 214.

Using the Preset Registration Memory

1 Select a Registration Bank (01 through 03). The currently selected Registration Bank is indicated at the top right of the dis- play.

2 Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons: [1] through [8].

The Freeze function If you press the [FREEZE] button so that its lamp lights, selecting a different registra- tion setup will not change the settings specied in the Registration Freeze Group Set- ting function display (page 163).

Bank View If you press the REGIST BANK [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously, you can view the Reg- istration Bank list on the LCD display.

REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons

1 1

2 2

3 3

BAN

REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE REGIST BANK 1~64

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

6 6

7 7

8 8

BANK VIEW

REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE REGIST BANK 1~64

Indicates the Regis- tration Bank/Number.

Registration Name entered via the Registration Name function display described on page 163.

Current selected Registration Bank

If any change is made to a setting memorized by the Registration Memory feature, a pencil icon appears, indicating that one or more settings have been edited.

1 1

2 2

3 3

BAN

REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE REGIST BANK 1~64

1 1

2 2

3 3

BAN

REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE REGIST BANK 1~64

26

Registration Memory

29

Registering the Panel Settings You can also create your own Registration Memory setups.

1 Set up the panel controls as required.

2 Select a Registration Bank (04 through 64). Avoid selecting one of the Registration Banks 01 through 03 (even though they can be selected), since you may inadvertently delete some important data. (See the note below.)

3 Press the [MEMORY] button. The LCD display will prompt you to select the desired Registration number. Press the [MEMORY] button again to exit from this display.

4 Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons: [1] through [8].

In this example, the panel settings are memorized to button number 3.

1 1

2 2

3 3

BAN

REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE REGIST BANK 1~64

MEMORY

REGISTRATION

ONE TOUCH SETTING

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

6 6

7 7

8 8

BANK VIEW

REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE REGIST BANK 1~64

Since all Registration Memory data is stored to Flash ROM, any data in the Registration Memory location you selected in step #2 above will be erased and replaced by your new settings. This includes the factory programmed preset Reg- istration Memory settings (banks 01 - 03). If you've deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6).

For details about Flash ROM, refer to Memory Structure on page 54.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BANK 01 04~64 These banks do not contain preset setups.

Registration Memory banks 64 banks in Flash ROM All banks can be edited.

01~03 These banks contain preset setups (factory settings).

27

Disk Song Playback

30

Reference on page 78

The following disks are compatible for playback on the 9000Pro. Refer to page 6 for more details on the logos.

Playback of Song Disks

1 Insert the disk that contains song data into the disk drive.

2 Turn the SONG PLAYER on.

3 Press the SONG FILE DIRECTORY [I] button.

4 Select a song le.

Make sure to read the section Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks on page 5.

Song related buttons

Floppy disk drive

[START/STOP] button

Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices dened in the GM standard.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the GM standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices dened in Yamahas DOC format.

GM song les not having the extension .MID in the name cannot be handled by the 9000Pro.

SONG PLAYER

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

28

Disk Song Playback

31

5 Start playback.

6 Turn individual tracks ON or OFF (muted) as required. 1) Press the [PART ON/OFF] button. 2) Press the LCD button corresponding to the part you wish to turn on or off.

The SOLO mode lets you select a specic part for playback, muting (turn- ing off) all other parts.

If you wish to practice the melody part of the XG song on the 9000Pro key- board, set TR1 to MUTE.

7 Adjust the volume as required. 1) Press the [MAIN MIXER] button. 2) Press the LCD button corresponding to the part of which the volume you

wish to adjust.

8 Stop playback.

START/STOP

With song data software (Stan- dard MIDI format 0) that includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics in the display during playback. See page 79 for details. For appropriate song data, the 9000Pro can display the lyrics in one of ve different lan- guages: English, German, French, Spanish and Italian.

PART ON/OFF

PART

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PART ON/OFF

PART

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

M A I N MIXER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

START/STOP

The [FADE IN/OUT] button (page 72) can be used to pro- duce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs when starting and stopping the song, as well as the accompaniment.

29

Vocal Harmony

32

This extraordinarily powerful feature uses advanced voice-processing technology to automatically pro- duce vocal harmony based on a single lead vocal. In addition to straightforward harmony, the 9000Pro also lets you change the apparent gender of the harmony and/or lead vocal sound. For example, if you are a male singer, you can have the 9000Pro automatically generate a two-part female backup. A com- prehensive set of parameters gives you exceptionally precise and exible control over the vocal harmony sound.

Setting Up

1 Set the INPUT VOLUME control to MIN.

2 Set the MIC/LINE panel switch to MIC 1 or MIC 2. This is a gain control for the microphone input signal. The MIC 1 set- ting boosts the signal, while the MIC 2 setting reduces it.

3 Connect a microphone to the MIC/LINE IN jack of the 9000Pro. The MIC/LINE jack accepts either 1/4 phone plugs or XLR connectors.

4 Adjust the INPUT VOLUME control while singing into the microphone.

Use the SIGNAL and OVER indicators to determine the appropriate setting. With the INPUT VOLUME control at the minimum, sing or talk into the microphone at the highest expected volume. Gradually bring the control up toward MAX so that the SIGNAL indi- cator is lit and the OVER indicator ashes occasionally. Then reduce the INPUT VOLUME just enough to keep the OVER indi- cator from ashing. This should be the optimum level setting. To hear the microphone input, make sure to set the MIC fader in the MAIN VOLUME display to an appropriate level.

Vocal Harmony with Accompaniment Playback

1 Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on and start the accompani- ment (page 20).

2 Press the VOCAL HARMONY [V.H.(9)] button to turn the Vocal Harmony effect on.

MIC/LINE IN buttons

VOCAL HARMONY buttons

CAUTION Pickup of extraneous sounds from the microphone can cause distorted Vocal Harmony sound.

Separate the microphone from the speakers as much as possible.

21

43

Refer to the important notes and caution message on page 80.

Turn the INPUT VOLUME control all the way down when disconnecting a micro- phone.

Since the MIC/LINE IN jack is highly sensitive, it may pick up and produce noise when nothing is connected. To avoid this, always set the INPUT VOL- UME to minimum when nothing is con- nected to the MIC/LINE IN jack.

Reference on page 80

30

Vocal Harmony

33

3 Press the VOCAL HARMONY [SELECT] button.

4 Select a Vocal Harmony type.

5 Play the keyboard while singing into the microphone. The Vocal Harmony effect can be controlled by the chords you play in the Auto Accompaniment section (the keys to the left of the split point).

Vocal Harmony with Song Playback The 9000Pro can properly play back disk songs that contain Vocal Harmony data.

1-4 Use the same operation as in Playback of Song Disks on page 30.

5 Turn the Vocal Harmony effect on and select a Vocal Harmony type (see above).

6 Press the [MIC SETUP] button and set the Vocal Harmony track. Press the [E] or [J] button to select the bottom row of controls, then set the VOCODER track to the appropriate setting. For details on the appropriate track number (or MIDI channel) used for the Vocal Harmony effect, refer to the documentation included with the disk software.

7 Start the song.

8 Sing into the microphone during song playback.

9 Stop the song.

A

B

C

D

E For this example, JazzSisters is selected.

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

START/STOP

31

The Multi Pads

34

The 9000Pro Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances.

Playing the Multi Pads

1 Use the M.PAD BANK [-]/[+] buttons to select a Multi Pad Bank.

2 Press any of the Multi Pads. The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 4) starts playing back in its entirety as soon as the pad is pressed. The Multi Pad function provides two different ways to stop in the middle of the phrase : To stop all pads, press and release the [STOP] button. To stop specic pads, simultaneously hold down the

[STOP] button and press the pad or pads you wish to stop.

Chord Match

1 Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on (page 20).

2 Play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads.

In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back. Try playing other chords and pressing the pads. Keep in mind that you can also change chords while a pad is playing back.

Multi Pads

STOP

1 2

3 4

M.PAD BANK 1~60

BANK VIEW

Multi Pad Bank number

Simply tap any of the Multi Pads at any time to play back the corresponding phrase at the currently set tempo.

You can even play two, three, or four Multi Pads at the same time.

Pressing the pad during its playback will stop playing and begin playing from the top again.

STOP

1 2

3 4

M.PAD BANK 1~60

BANK VIEW

There are two types of Multi Pad data. Some types will play back once and stop when they reach to the end. Others will play back repeatedly until you press the [STOP] button.

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

STOP

1 2

3 4

M.PAD BANK 1~60

BANK VIEW

The Chord Match on/off status depends on the selected Multi Pad Bank.

Reference on page 77

32

Bank # Contents Bank 01~58 Phrases Bank 59 MIDI messages Bank 60 Scale tuning settings

(page 158)

Voice Effects

35

The 9000Pro features a sophisticated multi-processor effect system which can add extraordinary depth and expression to your sound.

Applying the Voice Effects

Try out the Harmony/Echo effect. This effect adds a variety of harmony notes to your playing in the right-hand section, as well as adding tremolo or other effects.

1 Turn Harmony/Echo on.

2 Turn Auto Accompaniment on (page 20) and turn RIGHT 1 on.

3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right-hand range of the keyboard.

The 9000Pro has various Harmony/Echo types. The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected RIGHT 1 voice. Try out some of the voices below.

Try out Harmony/Echo with some of the voices below...

Voice Effect Comments TOUCH This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When

OFF, the same volume is produced no matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard.

SUSTAIN When this Sustain feature is ON, all notes played on the keyboard other than the Left part have a longer sustain.

DSP(4~7) This button turns independent effects on or off for the RIGHT 1 (DSP4), RIGHT 2 (DSP5), RIGHT 3 (DSP6) and LEFT (DSP7) parts.

SLOW/FAST The [SLOW/FAST] button can be used to switch between variations of the DSP effect. For example, this lets you change the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the rotary speaker effect.

HARMONY/ECHO See below. POLY/MONO This determines whether the Parts Voice is played monophonically (only

one note at a time) or polyphonically (up to 126 notes at a time).

VOICE EFFECT buttons

TOUCH SUSTAIN

HARMONY/ECHO

DSP(4~7)

VOICE EFFECT

SLOW/ FAST

POLY/ MONO

These buttons turn the corresponding effects on or off for the part currently selected via the PART SELECT buttons.

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

Category Voice Harmony/Echo Type PIANO Grand Piano Standard Trio ACCORDION Tutti Accrd Country Trio STRINGS Live! Strs Block

ChamberStrs 4-way Open GUITAR Lead Guitar Rock Duet w/touch Sen

Category Voice Harmony/Echo Type GUITAR PedalSteel Country Duet BRASS MoonLight Full Chord PERCUSSION Vibraphone Trill GUITAR Mandolin Tremolo STRINGS Harp Strum

Reference on page 60

33

Song Creator

36

Reference on page 110

The powerful and easy-to-use Song Creator feature lets you record your own keyboard performances to disk. With multiple tracks for recording, comprehensive editing features, plus the use of the auto accom- paniment and the Multi Pads, you can record complex, fully orchestrated pieces of music in any music style or arrangement from solo piano and church organ to rock band, big band, Latin ensemble, and even a full symphony orchestra quickly, easily and all by yourself!

Quick Recording

1 Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button to engage the Record mode.

2 Select SONG CREATOR.

3 Select NEW SONG.

4 Select QUICK RECORD.

5 Set the track modes. When MANUAL is set to REC, your keyboard performance and Multi

Pad playback can be recorded to the corresponding tracks as listed below. When ACMP is set to REC, Auto Accompaniment is automatically set to

on and accompaniment playback can be recorded to the corresponding tracks as listed below.

DIGITAL RECORDING button

A

B

C

D

E

A

B

C

D

E

A

B

C

D

E

3 42

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MANUAL ACCOMPANIMENT VOICE TRACK

RIGHT 1 voice 1 RIGHT 2 voice 2 RIGHT 3 voice 3 LEFT voice 4 MULTI PAD 1 5 MULTI PAD 2 6 MULTI PAD 3 7 MULTI PAD 4 8

PART TRACK RHYTHM 1 (sub) 9 RHYTHM 2 (main) 10 BASS 11 CHORD 1 12 CHORD 2 13 PAD 14 PHRASE 1 15 PHRASE 2 16

The voices, Multi Pad notes, and accompaniment parts are recorded to the various tracks as listed below.

34

Song Creator

37

6 Press the [NEXT] button.

7 Set up for recording. Select the required voice(s), select a style, if required. Set up all parameters

as desired for recording. Turn the metronome on or off as required.

8 Start recording. Recording starts as soon as you play a key on the keyboard.

9 Stop recording. When you nish playing, press the [START/STOP] button. If you have set ACMP track to REC in step #5 above, you can stop recording by pressing the [ENDING] button. If you press the [ENDING] button, record- ing will stop automatically after the ending section has nished.

10 Press the [START/STOP] button to hear your newly recorded performance.

11 Save the recorded data to the disk. Insert a blank recordable disk into the disk drive, and follow the instructions in the illustrations below.

12 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Record mode.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

F

G

H

I

J

Turn the metronome on or off as required.

If ACMP is set to "REC" in step #5, you can start recording your keyboard performance rst and then start recording the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm. To do this, 1) Press the [RUBATO] LCD

button. 2) Play a key on the right side

of the split point to start recording your keyboard performance.

3) Play a chord on the left side of the split point to start recording the Auto Accom- paniment with your key- board performance.

Using Registration Memory (page 28), One Touch Setting (page 24), and Music Data- base (page 26) can make your recording sessions much more efcient, since various settings (such as voices, etc.) can be recalled by a single button press.

CAUTION

While the le is being saved, never eject the oppy disk or turn the power off.

CAUTION

Please note that the recorded data will be lost if exiting from the Record mode without saving the data to disk.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Input a file name.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

The LCD display will prompt you to save the recorded data. At the prompt, select YES to save the recorded data.

35

Song Creator

38

Multi Track Recording

1 Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button to engage the Record mode.

2 Select SONG CREATOR.

3 Select NEW SONG.

4 Select MULTI TRACK RECORD.

5 Set the track modes. When set to REC, your keyboard performance and Multi Pad playback

can be recorded to the corresponding tracks. When one of the TR11~16 is set to REC, Auto Accompaniment is auto-

matically set to on and accompaniment playback can be recorded to the cor- responding tracks as listed in the caption below.

DIGITAL RECORDING button

A

B

C

D

E

A

B

C

D

E

A

B

C

D

E

2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A

B

C

D

E

Use this button to alter- nately switch between the Part selecting and the Record selecting.

Use this button to alter- nately switch between the TR1~8 and the TR9~16 settings.

Set the desired track to REC.

Select the part for the corresponding track. The available parts for all tracks are:

RIGHT1 RIGHT2 RIGHT3 LEFT MULTI PAD1~4 RHYTHM1 RHYTHM2 BASS CHORD1 CHORD2 PAD PHRASE1 PHRASE2 VHRM MIDI

36

Song Creator

39

6 Press the [NEXT] button.

7 Set up for recording. Select the required voice(s), select a style, if required. Set up all parameters

as desired for recording. Turn the metronome on or off as required.

8 Start recording. You can start recording with one of the following ways: Press the [START/STOP] button to start the rhythm parts of the accompa-

niment and recording at the same time. Press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized standby, then play

a key on the left side of the split point to start the accompaniment and recording at the same time.

Press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized standby. 1) Play a key on the right side of the split point to start recording. 2) Play a key on the left side of the split point to start the accompaniment.

9 Stop recording. When you nish playing, press the [START/STOP] button. If you have set the accompaniment tracks to REC in step #5 above, you can stop recording by pressing the [ENDING] button. If you press the [ENDING] button, recording will stop automatically after the ending section has nished.

10 Press the [START/STOP] button to hear your newly recorded performance. Repeat step #5 - #9 as needed.

11 Save the recorded data to the disk. Insert a blank recordable disk into the disk drive, and follow the instructions in the illustration below.

12 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Record mode.

Pressing the [REHEARSAL] LCD button before recording lets you practice the part to be recorded. This is particularly convenient for mastering parts for punch-in recording before you actually record them.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

F

G

H

I

J

Turn the metronome on or off as required.

If one of the TR11~16 is set to "REC" in step #5, you can start recording your keyboard per- formance rst and then start recording the Auto Accompani- ment or rhythm. To do this, 1) Press the [RUBATO] LCD

button. 2) Play a key on the right side

of the split point to start recording your keyboard performance.

3) Play a chord on the left side of the split point to start recording the Auto Accom- paniment with your key- board performance.

Using Registration Memory (page 28), One Touch Setting (page 24), and Music Data- base (page 26) can make your recording sessions much more efcient, since various settings (such as voices, etc.) can be recalled by a single button press.

CAUTION

While the le is being saved, never eject the oppy disk or turn the power off.

CAUTION

Please note that the recorded data will be lost if exiting from the Record mode without saving the data to disk.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Press this button to execute the save oper- ation.

37

Sampling

40

Reference on page 84

This function lets you record your own sounds via a microphone. Once it is recorded, the resulting sample can be played at various pitches from a keyboard.

Recording a Sample

1-4 Use the same operation as in Setting up (page 32).

5 Press the [SOUND CREATOR] button.

6 Select SAMPLING.

7 Select RECORDING.

8 Press the [NEXT] button.

9 Set the key range to which the new sample will be assigned.

10 Press the [NEXT] button twice to call up the sample recording display.

DIGITAL RECORDING button

The notes and cautions con- tained on page 80 also apply to Sampling.

A

B

C

D

E

A

B

C

D

E

Since this is the rst sample you are recording, it is auto- matically assigned and xed to the lowest available key. As a result, the START KEY cannot be set.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Press the [NEXT] button twice.

38

Sampling

41

11 Press the LCD [START] button and speak into the micro- phone to start the sampling. Sampling starts when the input level reaches the Auto Trigger level (page 84).

12 Press the LCD [STOP] button to stop the sampling. Sampling will stop automatically when the available wave memory is full, so be sure to press LCD [STOP] button as soon as the sound you want to sample is recorded, otherwise youll end up sampling unwanted silence (which can be edited out later).

13 Store voice parameters for the recorded sample as a Cus- tom voice. 1) Follow the instructions in the chart below.

2) Press the [NEXT] button to store the voice parameters for the recorded sample as Custom voice.

14 Press the [EXIT] button several times to exit from the Sam- pling mode.

15 Select the Custom voice number above and play the voice from the keyboard.

16 Save the recorded sample (wave data) to disk. 1) Press the [DISK/SCSI] button to call up the Save display. 2) Select SAVE TO DISK. 3) Call up the Custom Voice display and select the number stored in step #13. 4) Save the selected Custom Voice with the sample (wave data) to disk.

Indicates the amount of remaining sampling memory/time.

A

B

C

D

E NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Select STORE. Input a voice name.Select a Custom voice number (destination).

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

39

Using the Optional Plug-in Board

42

Installing an optional Plug-in Board to the 9000Pro lets you greatly expand the sonic palette of the instru- ment. Once you've installed an optional Plug-in Board to the 9000Pro, you have instant access to a whole new set of amazing, dynamic voices, in addition to the built-in voices of the 9000Pro.

Playing a Plug-in Voice

1 Install the Optional Plug-in Board to the 9000Pro. See page 180 for installation instructions.

In this example, a PLG150-VL Virtual Acoustic Plug-in Board has been installed to SLOT 1. The PLG150-VL lets you expand the sonic palette of your 9000Pro by adding 256 dynamic VL voices (including 137 VL-XG voices), created with the unique Virtual Acoustic Synthe- sis system.

2 After you've installed the Plug-in Boards, turn the power ON. When turning the power ON for the rst time after installing the board, a mes- sage appears indicating that the board settings are being initialized, followed after a while by the main display. Note that it takes a short amount of time before the main display appears, espe- cially if two boards have been installed. If an error message appears, check that the board or boards have been properly installed to the 9000Pro.

3 After the main display appears, insert the "Plug-in Custom Voice" disk supplied with the 9000Pro and load the le "150VL CsVce.xvc" to the 9000Pro via the Plug-in Manager function. See page 66 for details.

4 Press the [R1] LCD button to turn the RIGHT1 part on.

Plug-in Voice related buttons

Up to two boards can be installed to the bottom panel.

Reference on page 64

PLG150-VL

F

G

H

I

J

RIGHT3RIGHT2

UPPER

LEFTLEFT HOLD

LOWER

RIGHT1

PART ON/OFF

PART SELECT

40

Using the Optional Plug-in Board

43

5 Press the [SLOT 1] button and select a voice group.

6 Select a voice.

7 Play the keyboard. Up to a maximum of two Plug-in Boards can be installed to the 9000Pro (using both SLOT 1 and SLOT 2), giving you access to an extraordinarily wide range of sounds.

Plug-in Voices and Board Voices

For this example, [II] is selected.

A single Plug-in Board can only sound one part (one Plug-in voice) at a time. This means that the playing methods described on page 17 (turning parts R1 - R3 on simulta- neously) and page 18 (turning parts R and L on simulta- neously) cannot be used, even if you select the same slots Plug-in Board voices for the R1 - R3 and L parts.

A

B

C

D

E

Press the corresponding buttons to select the various pages.

Please note that even though a Multi-Part Plug-in Board (e.g., PLG100-XG) can be used with the 9000Pro, the voice list of the slot corresponding to the Multi-Part board cannot be dis- played in the LCD. See page 65 for details about the Multi-Part Plug-in Board.

The included floppy disk features specially programmed data (such as effect settings, etc.) for using the Plug-in Board Voices with the 9000Pro.

Before loading the disk data, the Board Voices (without any special processing or programming) are divided into groups of ten and are selectable from the PLUG-IN VOICE buttons [I] - [XI].

Once the data on the disk is loaded, you have a new set of voices, programmed specifically for optimum use with the 9000Pro. For a list of the available Plug-in Voices created with the data on the included floppy disk, see page 204.

See pages 64 and 100 for details.

Use these buttons to call up the Plug-in Voices. The Plug-in Voices area has 220 available spaces for voices. Voices can be loaded from the included disk (using the Plug-in Manager) or can be created via the Plug-in Custom Voice creator function (page 100).

Use this button to call up the Board Voices. This allows you to select any of the original voices on the Plug-in Board.

See page 66 for details.

Load

Save

Plug-in Manager

41

Display-based Controls

44 Basic Operation

B a

si c

O p

e ra

ti o

n As youve seen in Quick Guide above, the 9000Pro features an exceptionally large and easy-to- understand display. It provides comprehensive at-a-glance information on all current settings, and gives you convenient, intuitive control over the 9000Pros functions.

LCD buttons The LCD (A~J) buttons are used to select the corresponding menu. In the example display shown above, for example, the LCD [F] button can be used to turn the R1 voice on. The LCD (1~8) buttons are divided into eight sets of up/down buttons, and are used to make selections or adjust settings (up or down correspondingly) for functions shown directly above them. In the example display shown above, for example, the LCD [6] buttons can be used to adjust the volume of the R2 voice.

Data dial This is usually used to change the tempo of accompaniment/song playback (when the TEMPO lamp is lit). However, when certain functions (for example, Music Database selection, Naming and Mixing Console adjusting) are shown on the LCD display, this dial is used to change the corresponding data values (when the DATA ENTRY lamp is lit). Depending on the selected display, the lamps switch between each other automatically. (This cannot be changed manually.) Rotating the data dial to the right (clockwise) increases the value, while rotating it to the left (counter-clockwise) decreases it.

PAGE CONTROL buttons If youve selected several different functions displays in succession, you can retrace your steps and revisit each display by using the [BACK] and [NEXT] buttons. Pressing [NEXT] button go to the next available page and pressing the [BACK] button return to the previous available page.

The [LCD CONTRAST] Control The 9000Pro display panel is a liquid-crystal type which features an [LCD CONTRAST] con- trol. Use the [LCD CONTRAST] control to set the display for optimum legibility.

[EXIT] button No matter where you are in the 9000Pro display hierarchy, the [EXIT] button will return you to the next highest level, or to the normal play mode display. Since the 9000Pro has so many different displays, you may occasionally nd yourself con- fused as to which operations display is currently shown. If this happens, you can return to home base by pressing the [EXIT] button several times. This returns the 9000Pro to the default display the same display that appears when the power is turned on.

[MAIN MIXER] button and [PART ON/OFF] button Refer to pages 24, 25 and 31.

M A I N MIXER

PART ON/OFF

PART

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

DIRECT ACCESS EXIT TEMPO

D A T A ENTRY1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

B E A T

LCD CONTRAST

LCD buttons LCD buttons

LCD buttons

Data dial

42

Display-based Controlsi l l

Basic Operation 45

BEAT indicators These indicators ash at the current tempo and indicate the current beat during accompaniment and song playback.

[DIRECT ACCESS] button See page 48.

Display Messages The large 9000Pro display panel facilitates operation by making it possible to display comprehensive message and prompts that will guide you through certain operations. These messages can be displayed in one of ve different languages. When such mes- sages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding LCD button.

Selecting the desired language of the display message You can select the desired language of the display messages from the following:

English German French Spanish Italian

Follow the instructions in the chart below.

Note that the example LCD screens shown in this manual are in English.

1st beat

2nd beat

3rd beat

4th beat

4/4 time 3/4 time

F

G

H

I

J

For this example, press the [YES] LCD button to execute the Store operation.

DISK/ SCSI MIDIFUNCTION

MENU

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Select UTILITY.

F

G

H

I

J

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Select the desired language.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

43

Display-based Controlsi l l

46 Basic Operation

Name Entry A number of 9000Pro functions allow you to enter a name for, for example, a le you will be saving to disk, a custom voice or style, etc. The name entry procedure is essen- tially the same in all cases (only the maximum number of characters which can be entered will vary). An example display which includes NAME entry parameters is shown below:

Computer Keyboard Functions You can connect a computer keyboard (PC-compatible only) to the 9000Pro for the fol- lowing functions.

Name Entry (see above) Selecting voices, styles, songs and Registration Memory settings (see below) Step Recording (see below)

For details on using a computer keyboard with the 9000Pro, see page 167. Please note that Macintosh computer keyboards and USB computer keyboards cannot be used with the 9000Pro.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

Selecting a character Use these buttons to move up or down in the character list. To move laterally through the character list, use the data dial.

Clears all characters.

Deletes the character at the cursor position.

Moves the cursor position in the NAME box.

Enters the character selected by the LCD [D] and [E] buttons.

Aborts character entry.

Press one of these after youve nished entering the name to actually assign the name to the data.

When this icon appears in the display, you can directly call up the Name Entry page by press- ing the corresponding button.

You can also enter the name directly from a computer key- board (PC-compatible only). See below for details.

44

Display-based Controlsi l l

Basic Operation 47

Selecting voices, styles, songs and Registration Memory settings First, from the main display, press any key on the computer keyboard. Then select the desired category (voice, style, song, Registration Memory) by repeatedly pressing any key on the computer keyboard, with the exception of the DELETE key and the number keys. (The selected category is indicated in the display.) Then enter the desired number from the computer keyboard, according to the rules below.

Voice ............................For the internal Preset Voices: 2 digits for the voice category, followed by 2 digits for the specic voice (or 3 digits for XG voices), then the ENTER key.

For Plug-in Voices: 2 digits (21 - 32 for Slot 1, 41 - 52 for Slot 2) for the voice cate- gory, followed by 2 digits (or 4 digits for Board voices), then the ENTER key.

Style .............................2 digits for the style category, followed by 2 digits for the specic style, then the ENTER key.

Song ...........................2 digit for the song le directory, followed by 3 digits for the spe- cic song, then the ENTER key.

Registration Memory....2 digits for the bank number, followed by 1 digit for the specic Registration Memory, then the ENTER key.

Step Recording Using a computer keyboard is a very convenient way to edit events in the Event List in the Song/Style/Multi Pad step recording (pages 116, 122, 140, and 143). If youre familiar with operating a computer, youll nd many of the editing conventions that youre used to (such as moving the cursor and copying/pasting) apply to editing the 9000Pro data as well. For a list of the parameters you can control/operate from a computer keyboard, see below.

Computer Keyboard Functions in Step Recording

Keys Function Number keys (0 ~9 ) For typing in the desired timing (measure, beat, clock) or event data (value).

ENTER Enters the event data (value) and moves to the next timing position. Enters the event data (value) and moves the cursor up. Enters the event data (value) and moves the cursor down. Moves the cursor left Moves the cursor right BS Deletes a character

ESC Cancels the value entry Insert Inserts the new event Delete Deletes the event of the current location SPACE Same as the [START/STOP] button on the panel. Ctrl+X Deletes all the selected events and copies them to the clipboard. Ctrl+C Copies all the selected events to the clipboard. Ctrl+V Pastes all the event data that is currently contained in the clipboard. Ctrl+Z Cancels the value entry ALT+A Same as the LCD [A] button ALT+B Same as the LCD [B] button ALT+C Same as the LCD [C] button ALT+D Same as the LCD [D] button ALT+E Same as the LCD [E] button ALT+F Same as the LCD [F] button ALT+G Same as the LCD [G] button ALT+H Same as the LCD [H] button ALT+I Same as the LCD [I] button ALT+J Same as the LCD [J] button

45

Display-based Controlsi l l

48 Basic Operation

Direct Access By using the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, you can instantly call up the desired display. When you press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, an LCD message prompts you to press the appropriate button. Press the button corresponding to the settings you want to display. For this example, the display for setting the Split Point (page 159) is called up.

See next page for the Direct Access Chart.

DIRECT ACCESS

46

Display-based Controlsi l l

Basic Operation 49

Direct Access Chart

Number Function of the accessed LCD display Operation: + button listed below See pages

1 Mixing Console Volume/EQ settings (Main) MAIN VARIATION [A] 144 2 Volume/EQ settings (Accompaniment) MAIN VARIATION [B] 144 3 Volume/EQ settings (Song tracks 1 - 8) MAIN VARIATION [C] 144 4 Volume/EQ settings (Song tracks 9 - 16) MAIN VARIATION [D] 144 5 Filter settings (Main) FILL IN & BREAK [ ] 144 6 Filter settings (Accompaniment) FILL IN & BREAK [ ] 144 7 Filter settings (Song tracks 1 - 8) FILL IN & BREAK [ ] 144 8 Filter settings (Song tracks 9 - 16) FILL IN & BREAK [ ] 144 9 Effect Depth settings (Main) VOCAL HARMONY [MIC SETUP] 144 10 Effect Depth settings (Main) ENDING [I] 144 11 Effect Depth settings (Accompaniment) ENDING [II] 144 12 Effect Depth settings (Song tracks 1 - 8) ENDING [III] 144 13 Effect Depth settings (Song tracks 9 - 16) FADE IN/OUT 144 14 Effect Type settings VOICE EFFECT [DSP(4-7)] 145 15 Effect Type settings (Microphone Sound) VOCAL HARMONY [DSP(8)] 145 16 Effect Parameter settings VOICE EFFECT [SLOW/FAST] 145 17 Tune Settings (Portamento Time) VOICE EFFECT [POLY/MONO] 144 18 Tune Settings (Pitch Bend Range) PITCH BEND wheel 144 19 Tune Settings (Octave) UPPER OCTAVE [+], [-] 144 20 Tune Settings (Tuning) PART ON/OFF [R1] 144 21 Tune Settings (Tuning) PART ON/OFF [R2] 144 22 Tune Settings (Tuning) PART ON/OFF [R3] 144 23 Tune Settings (Tuning) PART ON/OFF [L] 144 24 Tune Settings (Transpose) TRANSPOSE [+] 144 25 Master EQ settings [MIXING CONSOLE] 147 26 Master EQ settings [MAIN MIXER] 147 27 Master EQ settings INTRO [I] 147 28 Voice selection [PART ON/OFF] 144 29 Voice selection VOICE [PIANO] - [PERCUSSION] 144 30 Voice selection INTRO [II] 144 31 Line Out settings INTRO [III] 148 32 Function Master Tuning [SOUND CREATOR] 158 33 Scale Tuning MULTI PAD [STOP] 158 34 Split Point/Fingering mode settings [AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT] 159 35 Split Point/Fingering mode settings [LEFT HOLD] 159 36 Foot Controller Volume settings FOOT VOLUME 159 37 Footswitch 1 function assignment FOOTSWITCH 1 160 38 Footswitch 2 function assignment FOOTSWITCH 2 160 39 Modulation wheel settings MODULATION wheel 161 40 Initial Touch setting VOICE EFFECT [TOUCH] 162 41 After Touch setting VOICE EFFECT [SUSTAIN] 162 42 Transpose Assign TRANSPOSE [-] 162 43 Registration settings REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8] 163 44 Registration settings REGIST BANK [+], [-] 163 45 Registration Memory FreezeGroupSetting [FREEZE] 163 46 Voice Set settings (R1) PART SELECT [R1] 163 47 Voice Set settings (R2) PART SELECT [R2] 163 48 Voice Set settings (R3) PART SELECT [R3] 163 49 Voice Set settings (L) PART SELECT [LEFT] 163 50 Harmony/Echo settings [HARMONY/ECHO] 164 51 Video monitor settings [DEMO] 165 52 Talk Setting VOCAL HARMONY [TALK] 165 53 AutoLoad settings [FUNCTION] 166 54 Display MIDI Bank & Program Change # VOICE [XG] - [CUSTOM VOICE] 166 55 Metronome Volume for Recording setting [DIGITAL RECORDING] 166 56 Parameter Lock settings [MEMORY] 166 57 Tap Count setting TAP TEMPO 166 58 Auto Exit Time setting PAGE CONTROL [BACK] 167 59 Language settings PAGE CONTROL [NEXT] 167 60 Style Manager Menu selection PRESET STYLE [8 BEAT] - [BALLROOM] 74 61 Loading Style into Flash ROM FLASH STYLE [I] - [VIII] 74 62 Style Selection Directory selection [DISK DIRECT] 151 63 Song Selection Directory selection SONG DIRECTORY [I] - [V] 78 64 Directory selection [SONG SETUP] 78 65 Directory selection [SONG PLAYER] 78 66 Multi Pad Repeat settings MULTI PAD [1], [2], [3], [4] 77 67 Chord Match settings MULTI PAD BANK [+], [-] 77 68 DISK/SCSI Loading Data from a Disk to Flash ROM [DISK/SCSI] 152 69 MIDI Clock setting [MIDI] 175 70 VocalHarmony Parameter settings VOCAL HARMONY [V.H.(9)] 81 71 Parameter settings VOCAL HARMONY [SELECT] 81 72 Music Database Searching the Music Database [MUSIC DATABASE] 27 73 Restoring the default tempo setting of the selected style Data dial - 74 Restoring the default tempo setting of the selected style ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] - [4] - 75 Returning to the default display (that appears when the power is turned on) [EXIT] - 76 Exiting from the Direct Access mode [DIRECT ACCESS] -

DIRECT ACCESS

47

Function Tree

50 Basic Operation

Button/Controller LCD title Function See pages

1 POWER ON/OFF Turning the POWER on or off 14

2 MASTER VOLUME Adjusting the overall volume 14

3 PITCH BEND Bending notes played on the keyboard up or down 59

4 MODULATION Applying a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard 59

5 SONG [SONG PLAYER] Turning Song Player on or off 30 [I] ... [V] Selecting a song 30, 78 [SONG SETUP] Setting the way in which the 9000Pro reads the song data 79

6 STYLE & STYLE MANAGER [AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT] Turning Auto Accompaniment on or off 20 [8BEAT] ... [BALLROOM] Selecting a preset style 20

STYLE MANAGER LOAD STYLE INTO FLASH ROM Loading style data from disk to the internal Flash ROM 74 SAVE STYLE IN FLASH ROM Saving style data in the internal Flash ROM to disk 75 COPY STYLE IN FLASH ROM Copying style data in the internal Flash ROM 75 DELETE STYLE IN FLASH ROM Deleting style data in the internal Flash ROM 75 SWAP STYLE IN FLASH ROM Swapping style data in the internal Flash ROM 75 RENAME STYLE IN FLASH ROM Renaming a style file in the internal Flash ROM 75 DEFRAGMENT FLASH ROM Defragmenting the internal Flash ROM 75

[I] ... [VIII] Selecting a style in the internal Flash ROM 55 [DISK DIRECT] Selecting and playng a style in a disk 25

7 ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL [INTRO] Playing the Intro sections of the accompaniment 22 [TAP TEMPO] Tapping out the tempo of the accompaniment 23, 72 [ENDING] Playing the Ending sections of the accompaniment 22 [FADE IN/OUT] Producing smooth fade-ins and fade-outs when starting and stopping

the accompaniment/song 23, 72

[MAIN VARIATION] Playing the Main sections of the accompaniment 22 [FILL IN & BREAK] Playing the Fill in or Break sections 22 [SYNC STOP] Turning Sync Stop on or off 23, 73 [SYNC START] Turning Sync Start on or off 20 [START/STOP] Starting/stopping the accompaniment 21

8 MENU [DISK/SCSI] LOAD FROM DISK

GROUP Loading specific type of data from a disk 152 INDIVIDUAL Loading an individual data from a disk 152

SAVE TO DISK Saving data to a disk 153

COPY FILE/FD COPY FILE Copying the specified file on a disk onto another disk. 154 COPY FD Copying the entire data on a floppy disk onto another disk. 154

BACKUP/RESTORE RESTORE Restoring the data in Flash ROM 154 BACKUP Backing up the data in Flash ROM 154

CONVERTER PSR-8000 Converting PSR-8000 format files to 9000Pro format files 155

SMF SONG Converting the sequence/track name of the Meta Event in the SMF to the file name

155

EDIT FILE RENAME Naming a file in a disk 155 DELETE Deleting a file in a disk 155

EDIT DIRECTORY RENAME DIRECTORY Naming a directory in a disk 156 DELETE DIRECTORY Deleting a directory in a disk 156 CREATE DIRECTORY Creating a directory in a disk 156

FORMAT Formatting a disk 156 CHECK DISK Checking a disk 157

Numbers at the left end correspond to ones in Top panel & connections on page 10.

48

Function Treei

Basic Operation 51

Button/Controller LCD title Function See pages

8 MENU [FUNCTION] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE

MASTER TUNE Setting the overall pitch of the 9000Pro 158 SCALE TUNE Tuning each individual note of the octave 158

SPLIT POINT/FINGERING SPLIT POINT Setting the point on the keyboard that separates the left-hand and

right-hand section 159

FINGERING Selecting the way in which chords are played with your left hand 159

CONTROLLER FOOT CONTROLLER Selecting the foot controller (page 13) function 159 PANEL CONTROLLER Selecting the panel controller (e.g. Pitch Bend Wheel ) function 161

REGISTRATION/FREEZE/VOICE SET REGISTRATION Naming each Registration setup/bank 163 FREEZE Specifying which settings are affected by the Freeze function (page

28) 163

VOICE SET Determining whether the preset settings will or will not be recalled when a new voice is selected

163

HARMONY/ECHO Harmony/Echo settings 164 VIDEO OUT Setting the display characteristics that are output to a television or

video monitor connected to the [VIDEO OUT] jack 165

TALK SETTING Setting various parameters which affect the microphone sound when the [TALK] button is on

165

UTILITY CONFIGURATION Setting various parameters 166 TIME Setting parameters related to time 167 LANGUAGE Selecting the language of the display messages 45

[MIDI] Selecting a MIDI template 174

MFC10 EASY SETUP Selecting a template of the MFC10 settings 178 FULL SETUP Creating and storing a template of the MFC10 settings 179

SETUP SYSTEM MIDI system-related parameter settings 175 TRANSMIT MIDI transmit channel settings 175 RECEIVE MIDI receive channel settings 176 ROOT MIDI chord root settings 177 CHORD DETECT MIDI chord detect settings 177 STORE Storing MIDI settings as a template 177

9 TRANSPOSE Transposing up or down the pitch 61

10 DIGITAL STUDIO [SOUND CREATOR] SAMPLING Sampling sounds via a microphone or line source 40, 84

RECORDING Recording a new sample 40, 86 TRIGGER LEVEL Setting the Trigger level for starting sampling 84 PRE EFFECT Setting up a maximum of three DSP effects to be applied to the

source sound 87

STORE Storing the sampled data as Custom voice 41 FILE IMPORT Importing Wave files from disk 87 STORE Storing the sampled data as Custom voice 41 EDIT Editing a recorded/imported sample 88 WAVE CLEAR Clearing Wave data 87

CUSTOM VOICE EASY EDIT EDIT Editing various parameters related to tone generation (e.g., Filter, EG) 93 STORE/CLEAR Naming/Storing/Clearing Custom voice data 92 FULL EDIT VOICE Editing various parameters (e.g., Initial Touch Curve, Scale Curve) 94 E1:WAVEFORM Editing various parameters related to Waveform 95 E2:EG Editing various parameters related to EG (Envelope Generator) 96 E3:FILTER Editing various parameters related to Filter 97 E4:LFO Editing various parameters related to LFO 98 VOICE SET Editing various parameters related to Voice Set 99 STORE/CLEAR Naming/Storing/Clearing Custom voice data 92

49

Function Treei

52 Basic Operation

Button/Controller LCD title Function See pages

10 DIGITAL STUDIO [SOUND CREATOR] PLUG-IN VOICE

VOICE EDIT BOARD VOICE Selecting a Board Voice on which the Plug-in Custom Voice editing is based 102 E1: EG/VIB Editing various parameters related to tone generation (e.g., Filter, EG) 103 E2: CTRL Editing various parameters related to tone generation (e.g., Initial

Touch Sensitivity, etc) 103

E3: NATIVE PRM. Editing various parameters which are native to the installed Plug-in Board. 104 VOICE SET Editing various part parameters related to Voice Set 104 STORE Storing Plug-in Custom voice data 101 NATIVE SYSTEM PARAMETER EDIT Editing various system parameters which are native to the installed

Plug-in Board. 105

VOICE EDIT ON COMPUTER Editing various parameters on a computer connected to the 9000Pro. Voice editing is done with special Plug-in software from the XGworks (or XGworks lite) program.

106

BOARD CUSTOM VOICE BACKUP Backing up the edited Board Custom Voice data from the installed Board to Flash ROM.

108

[DIGITAL RECORDING] SONG CREATOR QUICK RECORD Recording a song quickly without having to make detailed settings 36 CHORD STEP Recording accompaniment data with the Step Recording method

(similar to writing out the chords in a chord chart) 122

MULTI TRACK RECORD Recording sixteen song tracks independently 38 TRACK Setting the Record method 38 RECORD Starting/stopping recording 39 EDIT Editing a recorded song (e.g., Quantize, Note Shift) 114 SETUP Editing Setup data (e.g., Mixing Console parameters) 115 SAVE/DELETE Saving the recorded song to a disk/Deleting a song in a disk 39 STEP REC Recording a song with the Step Recording method (similar to writing

out the notes in music notation) 116

STYLE CREATOR EASY EDIT Re-creating a style 129 STYLE ASSEMBLY Re-creating a specific track of an already-created style. 129 REVOICE Changing various parameters 130 GROOVE & DYNAMICS Altering the timing for each section, velocity of notes for each track 131 FULL EDIT Creating a style by recording notes 132 BASIC Selecting the section and track to be recorded, setting the tempo

and the beat, and so on 132

SET UP Editing Setup data (voice, etc.) 134 EDIT Editing various parameters (Quantize, etc.) 134 STORE/CLEAR Storing the created style data to Flash ROM or clearing the created style data 128 PARA.EDIT Editing various parameters related to the Style File Format 135 STEP REC Recording a style with the Step Recording method (similar to writing

out the notes in music notation) 140

NEW STYLE ASSEMBLY Creating a new style 129

MULTI PAD CREATOR RECORDING Multi Pad Recording 142 STEP REC Multi Pad Step Recording 143 CLEAR Clearing the recorded Multi Pad data 142 COPY Copying the recorded Multi Pad data 142 REPEAT Turning Repeat on or off 142 CHORD MATCH Turning Chord Match on or off 142

[MIXING CONSOLE] VOL/EQ Adjusting the Volume, Pan and EQ high/low for each part 145 FILT Adjusting the Harmonic content and Brightness for each part 145 EFF DEPTH Adjusting the Effect (Reverb, Chorus and DSP) depth for each part 145 EFF TYPE Setting the Effect type/parameter for each block 146 TUNE Adjusting the pitch related parameters (e.g., Pitch Bend range, Por-

tamento time) for each part 145

M.EQ Adjusting the overall tone of the 9000Pro, in five frequency bands 147 VOICE Changing the voice for each part 145 LINE OUT Changing the Line out setting to send the output of each part to the

LINE OUT jacks. 148

11 MULTI PAD [M.PAD BANK 1~60] Selecting a Multi Pad Bank 34, 77 [BANK VIEW] REPEAT Turning Repeat on or off 77

CHORD MATCH Turning Chord Match on or off 77 [STOP] Stopping the Multi Pad playback 34 [1] ... [4] Playing the Multi Pads 34

12 Data dial Changing the tempo of accompaniment/song playback 44, 72

50

Function Treei

Basic Operation 53

Button/Controller LCD title Function See pages

13 DEMO [DEMO] 9000Pro DEMO Demo song selection/playback 56

14 VOICE EFFECT [TOUCH] Turning Touch response on or off 35, 60 [SUSTAIN] Turning Sustain on or off 35, 60 [DSP(4~7)] Turning DSP effects on or off 35, 60 [SLOW/FAST] Setting the DSP effect variations of the selected voice part to the

SLOW or FAST 35, 60

[HARMONY/ECHO] Turning Harmony/Echo on or off 35, 60 [POLY/MONO] Setting the selected voice part to Poly or Mono 35, 60

15 MUSIC DATABASE [MUSIC DATABASE] MUSIC DATABASE Selecting/searching/creating a Music Database 26, 76

16 ONE TOUCH SETTING [1], [2], [3], [4] Recalling various panel settings that match the selected style 24, 73

17 REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] ... [8] Recalling various panel settings 28 [FREEZE] Turning the Freeze function on or off 28 [REGIST BANK 1~64] Selecting a Registration Bank 28

18 MEMORY [MEMORY] Memorizing various panel settings to Registration Memory/One

Touch Setting 28, 73

19 VOICE [PIANO] ... [SYNTHESIZER] Selecting the 9000Pro original preset voices 16 [PERCUSSION] Selecting the 9000Pro original preset percussive voices and Drum Kits 58 [XG] Selecting the preset XG voices 58 [ORGAN FLUTES] Selecting/Editing the Organ Flutes 62 [CUSTOM VOICE] Selecting the Custom voices 92

20 PLUG-IN VOICE [SLOT 1] Selecting the Plug-in Board installed to Slot1 43 [SLOT 2] Selecting the Plug-in Board installed to Slot2 43 [I] ~ [XI] Selecting the Plug-in Voices 43

PLUG-IN MANAGER LOAD PLUG-IN CUSTOM VOICE Loading Plug-in voice data from disk to the internal Flash ROM 66 SAVE PLUG-IN CUSTOM VOICE Saving Plug-in voice data in the internal Flash ROM to disk 68 DELETE PLUG-IN CUSTOM VOICE Deleting Plug-in voice data in the internal Flash ROM 68 PLUG-IN SETTING Setting various parameters related to the Plug-in Board 69

[BOARD VOICE] Selecting the Board Preset/Custom Voices 43, 100

21 PART SELECT [LEFT], [RIGHT 1], [RIGHT 2], [RIGHT 3]

Selecting a part for voice assignments 57

22 PART ON/OFF [LEFT HOLD] Turning Left Hold function on or off 61 [LEFT] Turning LEFT part on or off 57 [RIGHT 1] Turning RIGHT 1 part on or off 57 [RIGHT 2] Turning RIGHT 2 part on or off 57 [RIGHT 3] Turning RIGHT 3 part on or off 57

23 UPPER OCTAVE [-], [+] Transposing Upper parts (RIGHT1~3) up or down by one octave 18

24 VOCAL HARMONY [TALK] Calling up the Talk Settings related to the microphone sound 80 [DSP(8)] Turning the DSP(8) effect for the microphone sound on or off 80 [V.H.(9)] Turning Vocal Harmony on or off 80 [SELECT] VOCAL HARMONY SELECT Selecting/producing the Vocal Harmony effect 81 [MIC SETUP] 3 BAND EQ Adjusting the gain of each band for the microphone sound 82

NOISE GATE Gating the input when the input signal from the microphone falls be- low a specified level

82

COMPRESSOR Holding down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level

82

VOCAL HARMONY Determining how the Vocal Harmony is controlled 82 MIC Determining how the microphone sound is controlled 83

51

Memory Structure

54 Basic Operation

The 9000Pro features three different memory provisions for storing your original data: Flash ROM, RAM, and Disk.

Flash ROM The 9000Pro includes special Flash ROM memory. Unlike conventional ROM, Flash ROM can be overwritten allowing you to store your own original data. The contents of Flash ROM are maintained even when the power is turned off.

RAM This is the conventional internal user memory of the 9000Pro. For sampling purposes, memory can be expanded to a max- imum of 65 MB, by installing SIMM modules. Any edited data in RAM memory is lost when the power is turned off. Always store any important data in RAM to Flash ROM or save the data to disk.

Disk The 9000Pro also allows you to store your data to oppy disk, an optional hard disk drive, or an external (optional) SCSI device (such as a hard disk drive, or removable storage).

One Touch Setting

Registration Memory

Music Database

Multi Pad

Flash Style

Setup

Organ Flutes

Effect data

Plug-in Custom Voice

Custom Voice

One Touch Setting

Registration Memory

Music Database

Multi Pad

Flash Style

Setup

Organ Flutes

Effect data

Plug-in Custom Voice

Custom Voice

Wave

Song

Multi Pad Creator (page 141)

Panel settings (page 214)

Style Creator (page 126)

Setup (MIDI settings, etc.) (page 214)

Organ Flutes (page 62)

Mixing Console (page 144)

Plug-in Custom Voice (page 100)

Custom Voice (page 92)

Sampling (page 84)

Floppy disk Hard disk (optional installed)

SCSI device (optional connected)

Can be expanded by installing optional SIMM memory modules (page 185).

RAM Flash ROM Disk System Backup See next page.

Save

Save

Load

Back up

Restore

Save/Back up

Load/Restore

Back up

Restore

Save/Back up

Load/Restore

Save/Back up

Load/Restore

Save/Back up

Load/Restore

Save

Load

Save

Load

Save

Load

Save

Load

Song Creator (page 110)

Store

Storing your original data to Flash ROM erases the corresponding factory data programmed to the Flash ROM (at the corre- sponding number locations). The following data types are affected:

One Touch Setting Multi Pad Registration Memory Flash Style Music Database Setup

If you've deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6).

52

Memory Structure

Basic Operation 55

About System Backup Important information about the 9000Pros current settings, such as the selected style number, the Split Point setting, the ngering mode, and MIDI-related set- tings, can be retained in the Flash ROM. To do this, press the quarter note icon button ( ) from the main display and follow the on-screen instructions. For a complete list of System Backup parameters, refer to page 214. To return the System Backup parameters to the original factory settings, simulta- neously hold down the [DEMO] button and turn on the power.

About the Style Data This diagram illustrates the relationship among the style data stored to different types of memory. In addition to normal memory provisions, the 9000Pro features special Flash ROM memory. Unlike conventional ROM, Flash ROM can be overwritten allowing you to store your own original data. A number of pre-programmed styles have been loaded to the Flash ROM; these are referred to below as Flash styles.

Preset styles are stored to conventional ROM. These are permanent and cannot be overwritten. However, you can use these as a basis for creating your own original styles with the Style Creator (page 126). Use the Style Manager functions (page 74) to backup and organize your original style data.

Playing the disk styles can be done in two ways: 1) loading the style data to Flash ROM and playing it back as a Flash style, or 2) playing it back directly from disk, with the Disk Direct function (page 25).

About the Plug-in Voice Data See page 64.

Keep in mind the following points when using the memory devices.

Song les can be played back without loading the data to Flash ROM or inter- nal memory (RAM).

Style les can be played back from Flash ROM, after loading the data from disk to Flash ROM. They can also be played directly from disk by using the Disk Direct function (page 25).

For saving/loading any data other than style data between disk and Flash ROM, use the Disk/SCSI function (page 150). Saving/loading style data is done with the Style Manager functions (page 74).

One Touch Setting data can be saved/ loaded with the Flash style; however, it cannot be saved/loaded separately by itself.

Music Database data can be loaded with the Disk Style data. Actually, the One Touch Setting data programmed with the Disk Style data is loaded as the Music Database. The Music Database data cannot be saved/loaded separately by itself.

[System Backup] LCD button

Storing your original style data to Flash ROM erases the fac- tory programmed Flash style data (at the corresponding number locations). If you've deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore func- tion (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6).

Accompaniment playback

Style Creator

Style Manager

Disk Direct

Preset Style Flash Style Disk Style Save

Store

Load

See page 74.

See page 126.

See page 20. See page 25.

Flash Style data can be loaded/saved with or without its One Touch Setting setups.

53

Demonstration

56 Reference

R e

fe re

n c

e The 9000Pro has been programmed with a variety of demonstration songs that showcase the sophisticated capabilities of the instrument. The songs can be played individually or all together, in their normal sequence or random order.

Press either the [DEMO] button or the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the normal play mode display when youve nished playing the demo songs.

DEMO

Select a song cate- gory.

Turn Repeat on or off.

When set to ON, the selected song or sequence of songs will be repeated until the STOP LCD button is pressed.

Select a song.

Select a play mode. ALL All demo songs are played back in sequence. RANDOM All demo songs are played back in random order. SINGLE Only the selected song is played.

Use this button to start/stop playback.

Select a song category.

54

Voices

Reference 57

The 9000Pro has a huge selection of various musical instrument voices which you can play. Try out the different voices referring to the voice list at the end of this manual (page 192). For basic information on selecting voices, refer to page 16 in the Quick Guide.

Parts: Right1, Right2, Right3 and Left The 9000Pro allows you to individually select and play up to four parts at the same time in a number of ways. A range of voices can be assigned to each part.

Keyboard Functions As explained above, the keyboard of the 9000Pro can sound three different voices. Heres a short summary of the various ways of playing voices.

Playing a Single Voice

Playing Two Voices in a layer

Playing Three Voices in a layer

Playing Separate Voices with the Right and Left Hands

Playing a Chord with the Left hand See page 20.

Each key has a note name; for example, the lowest (farthest left) key on the keyboard corresponds to E0 and the highest (farthest right) key to G6.

Part Selection The desired voice can be selected for the current selected part described above. To select the desired part, press the corresponding [PART SELECT] button. If you want to turn only a specied part on, press the corresponding LCD button from the main display.

Quick Guide on page 16

Voice R1

RIGHT3RIGHT2

UPPER

LEFT

LOWER

RIGHT1

PART ON/OFF

RIGHT3RIGHT2

UPPER

LEFT

LOWER

RIGHT1

PART ON/OFF Voice R1 + R2

RIGHT3RIGHT2

UPPER

LEFT

LOWER

RIGHT1

PART ON/OFF Voice R1 + R2+ R3

RIGHT3RIGHT2

UPPER

LEFT

LOWER

RIGHT1

PART ON/OFF Voice R1, R2, R3

(Upper) Voice L (Lower)

Split Point

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section (Lower)

Voice R1, R2, R3 (Upper)

C1

C1-B1

D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1

C#1 Eb1 F#1 Ab1 Bb1

E0-B0 C2-B2 C3-B3 C4-B4 C5-B5 C6-G6

F

G

H

I

J

RIGHT3RIGHT2

UPPER

LEFTLEFT HOLD

LOWER

RIGHT1

PART ON/OFF

PART SELECT

55

PART SELECT

Voicesi

58 Reference

Voices The 9000Pro actually includes several voice categories: the 9000Pro original preset voices, percussion kits, the XG voices, the Organ Flutes voices, and Custom voices. In addition, you can expand the amount of voices by installing the Plug-in Boards to the 9000Pro.

Preset Voices The Preset Voices are specially recorded and programmed voices exclusive to the 9000Pro.

Keyboard Percussion .....When one of the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices in the [PERCUS- SION] group is selected, you can play 28 different drums and percussion instruments or SFX (sound effects) sounds on the keyboard. The drum and percussion instruments played by the various keys are marked by symbols below the keys. Some of the instruments in the different drum kit voices sound different even though they have the same name, while others are essentially the same. See page 200 for a complete listing of the Drum Kit and SFX Kit assignments.

XG Voices ......................Yamahas XG format is a major new enhancement to the GM (General MIDI) System Level 1 format. It provides a larger number of voices as well as greater expressive control and a wide range of effects. XG also ensures continued compatibility with future instruments and soft-ware. Simultaneously hold down the desired VOICE button and press the [XG] button to call up the XG voice display of the corre- sponding category.

Organ Flutes Voices.......See page 62. Custom Voices ...............See page 92.

Plug-in Voices This group of special voices is available when an optional Plug-in Board is installed. See page 64 for details.

Using the optional Plug-in Board(s).

The Transpose, Tune, Sustain, Left Hold, and Modulation functions do not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices.

56

Voicesi

Reference 59

Maximum Polyphony The 9000Pro features maximum polyphony of 126 notes. Since Auto Accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, the full 126 notes will not be available on the key- board when Auto Accompaniment is used. The same applies to the Voice R2, Voice R3, Voice L, Multi Pad, and Song functions. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded, notes are played using last-note priority. If a Plug-in Board has been installed, the polyphony of the installed board accordingly increases the available polyphony for the entire 9000Pro.

PITCH BEND Wheel & MODULATION Wheel Use the 9000Pro PITCH BEND wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The PITCH BEND wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released.

The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. Moving the MODULATION wheel all the way towards yourself minimizes the depth of the effect, while rotating it away from yourself increases it. With many of the Plug-in Voices, you can control various other parameters (e.g., lter, etc.) by moving the MODULATION WHEEL (page 103).

9000 Pro

126-note maximum polyphony

Plug-in Board

(e.g., PLG150-PF) 64-note maximum

polyphony

Plug-in Board

(e.g., PLG100-XG) 32-note maximum

polyphony

The maximum pitch bend range can be changed (page 145).

In order to avoid accidentally applying modulation set the depth to its minimum setting.

57

Voicesi

60 Reference

Voice Effects The [VOICE EFFECT] buttons turn the corresponding effects on (indicator lit) or off (indicator out).

Touch The keyboard of the 9000Pro is equipped with a touch response feature that lets you dynam- ically and expressively control the level of the voices with your playing strength just as on an acoustic instrument.

Two types of keyboard touch affect this function: Initial Touch and After Touch.

Initial Touch ..... With this function, the 9000Pro senses how strongly or softly you play the keys, and uses that playing strength to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.

After Touch...... With this function, the 9000Pro senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that pressure to affect the sound in var- ious ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.

Sustain When this Sustain feature is ON, all notes played on the keyboard other than the Left part have a longer sustain. The Sustain level can be adjusted via the Custom Voice Creator function (page 99).

DSP (4~7) and Slow/Fast With the digital effects built into the 9000Pro you can add ambiance and depth to your music in a variety of wayssuch as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall.

The DSP (4~7) buttons turn independent effects on or off for the Right 1 (DSP4), Right 2 (DSP5), Right 3 (DSP6) and Left (DSP7) parts.

The [SLOW/FAST] button can switch between variations of the DSP effect. For exam- ple, this lets you change the rotating speed (slow/fast) of the rotary speaker effect.

Harmony/Echo See pages 35 and 164.

Poly/Mono This determines whether the parts voice is played monophonically (only one note at a time) or polyphonically (up to 126 notes at a time). When this is set to MONO, the Portamento effect can be used (depending on the selected voice) by playing legato. The degree of the Portamento effect applied differs depending on the voice. The Portamento Time can be adjusted from the Mixing Console (page 145).

Quick Guide on page 35

TOUCH SUSTAIN

HARMONY/ECHO

DSP(4~7)

VOICE EFFECT

SLOW/ FAST

POLY/ MONO

For details about how to select a DSP effect type or set related parameters, refer to page 146.

For details about how the effect blocks are connected, refer to the Effect Signal Flow Chart on page 147.

58

Voicesi

Reference 61

Other Keyboard-related Functions Left Hold

This function causes the Left part voice to be held even when the keys are released. Non- decaying voices such as strings are held continuously, while decay-type voices such as piano decay more slowly (as if the sustain pedal has been pressed). This function is especially effective when used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if you play and release a chord in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard (with the Left part on and the Left voice set to Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural rich- ness to the overall accompaniment sound.

Transpose

With this function, you can transpose the pitch of the 9000Pro up or down over a range of 2 octaves in semitone steps. Three transposing methods (Keyboard, Song, and Master) are available; select the desired method in the Function display (page 162), then use the [TRANSPOSE] buttons to change the value.

Keyboard The [TRANSPOSE] buttons affect the pitch of the keyboard sound, the accompaniment pitch, and the pitch of the Multi Pads for which Chord Match has been set to on. Note that the transposition is applied from the next note (or accompaniment chord) played, after one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons has been pressed. Song The [TRANSPOSE] buttons affect only the song playback. Master The [TRANSPOSE] buttons affect the overall pitch of the 9000Pro.

Normal pitch (transpose value of 0) can be recalled at any time by pressing both the [<] and [>] buttons simultaneously. The transposition can be adjusted from the Mixing Console display (page 145).

Octave Change Refer to the Quick Guide on page 18.

LEFT HOLD

RESET

UPPER OCTAVE

RESET

59

Organ Flutes

62 Reference

Quick Guide on page 19

In addition to the many organ voices in the [ORGAN] voice category, the 9000Pro has an ORGAN FLUTES voice which can be assigned to the currenty selected part and edited by pressing the VOICE [ORGAN FLUTES] button.

Parameters

Basic Procedure

Organ Type This parameter specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or Vin- tage.

Rotary SP Speed The Rotary SP Speed LCD button alternately switches between the slow and fast ro- tary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (see DSP Type below), and the VOICE EFFECT [DSP(4-7)] button is turned on (the Rotary SP Speed LCD button has the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT [DSP SLOW/FAST] button).

Vibrato On/Off This LCD button alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes voice ON or OFF.

The Organ Flutes settings are applied to the currently selected part. Custom settings can be stored as a User Organ Flutes voice, but the current part cannot itself be stored. For example, you can edit the Organ Flutes settings from the R1 part and store them, then reselect those settings from the R3 part.

Press the [ORGAN FLUTES] button.

Adjust the parameters.

Select this to call up the Preset Organ Flutes display.

Select the number to be stored and store your settings.

Call up the Store display.

You can select the number to call up your original settings.

Select this to call up the display of the Volume/ Attack settings.

Adjust the Footage.

Select this to call up the display of various settings.

Use button [1] to adjust the 16 or 8 footage. You can select the desired footage (16 or 8) with the [E] LCD button.

The echo, tremolo, and trill effects set via the Harmony/ Echo function (page 164) may not affect the Organ Flutes sound as expected.

60

Organ Flutesl

Reference 63

Vibrato Depth Can be set to any of three levels via the Vibrato Depth LCD button. The button sequen- tially selects a depth of 1, 2, or 3.

Footage The footage settings determine the basic sound of the organ flutes. The term footage is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs, in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet). The longer the pipe, the lower the pitch of the sound. Hence, the 16 setting determines the lowest pitched component of the voice, while the 1 setting determines the highest pitched component. The higher the value of the setting, the greater the volume of the corresponding foot- age. Mixing various volumes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds.

Volume Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the volume.

Mode The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST mode, attack is applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously; while the first notes are held, any subsequently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all notes.

Attack The ATTACK controls adjust the attack sound of the ORGAN FLUTE voice. The 4, 2 2/3 and 2 controls increase or reduce the amount of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the graphic bar the greater the attack sound.

Length The LENGTH control affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar the longer the decay.

Response The Response control affects both the attack and sustain portion of the sound, increas- ing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value the slower the swell and release.

Reverb Depth Chorus Depth DSP on/off DSP Depth

For details about the digital effects, see page 145.

Vibrato Speed Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On/Off and Vibrato Depth above.

DSP Type Determines the DSP effect type to be applied to the Organ Flutes voice. Normally this will be one of the six available Rotary Speaker effects. If any other type of effect is se- lected the Rotary SP Speed LCD button in the main ORGAN VOICE editing display will not control rotary speaker speed. Instead, it will have the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT [SLOW/FAST] button.

Slow/Fast Slow/Fast Determines whether the DSP variation (Slow/Fast) will be set to Slow or Fast when the Organ Flutes voice is selected (when the Voice Set function is ON page 163).

Value Sets the DSP variation (Slow/Fast) parameter value (e.g., LFO Freq for a Rotary Speaker effect) when the DSP variation (Fast) is turned on.

EQ Low EQ High

The EQ parameters determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands.

61

Plug-in Voices

64 Reference

Quick Guide on page 42

By installing an optional Plug-in Board to the 9000Pro, you can gain instant access to a whole new assort- ment of amazing voices.

Instructions on selecting and playing the Plug-in Voices are given in the Quick Guide on page 42. In the following section, you'll learn more about how the Plug-in Voices are used and managed, and how they t into the 9000Pro's system.

Memory Structure of the Plug-in Voices You learned about the Plug-in Voices and Board Voices in the Quick Guide on page 43. In the illustration below, we'll go into greater detail about how they are used. This shows various aspects of the Plug-in Manager function, which is used to manage (save/load) Plug-in Voice data on disk.

The relationship between the devices (Disk, Flash ROM, and Plug-in Board) may seem a little complex; however, the basic prin- ciples are easy to grasp. One important thing you should remember is that you can work with and manage the voice data from the 9000Pro itself or from a connected computer. From the 9000Pro, you can edit and manage the voice data in Flash ROM cre- ated via the Plug-in Custom Voice Creator (page 100). From a computer, you can create and edit voice data directly on the Board. Also keep in mind that any data in RAM memory is not saved until you specically save it to disk.

Guidelines

Bulk Send

9000Pro

Flash ROM

All of the parameter settings for one board can be saved to a single file, which can then be loaded to the 9000Pro.

PC connected to the 9000Pro, running XGworks (or XGworks lite) and the appropriate Plug-in software for voice editing.

Plug-in Custom Voice

Board Custom Voice

Native System Parameter

Functions in the Plug-in Manager

Plug-in Board

Board Preset Voice (ROM)

Board Custom Voice (RAM)

Native System Parameter

(RAM)

Plug-in Custom Voice Creator (page 100)

* Calling up the Board voices directly from the Plug-in Board.

** Selecting a Plug-in Voice calls up the corresponding parameters (such as effect settings, etc.) from 9000Pro Flash ROM and the corresponding Board Voice from the Plug-in Board.

*** Auto Loaded when turning the power ON. Auto Load can be set via Plug-in setting (page 69)

**** Board Custom Voice Backup in the Plug-in Custom Voice Creator function (page 108)

Board Custom Voice Load (page 66)

Save (page 68)

System Parameter Load (page 66)

Disk

Plug-in Custom Voice Load (page 66)

Plug-in Custom Voice Creator (page 100)

**

**

**

*

*

***

****

***

Store

62

Plug-in Voicesl i i

Reference 65

Board Custom Voices As mentioned above, the Board voices are the internal voices of the Plug-in Board, and provide the basic material for the Plug-in voices as played from the 9000Pro. Among the Board voices are a special set of voices Board Custom voices which can be edited from a computer connected to the 9000Pro. Each Plug-in Board comes with its own special editing soft- ware (to be used as a plug-in with XGworks), and the Board Custom voices are edited with this software. However, if you want to keep any edits that you make to the voices, you must save the data to the 9000Pro with the Board Custom Voice Backup function, since any data in the RAM memory on the board is lost as soon as the power is turned off.

Board Preset Voices These Board Voices are pre-programmed to the Plug-in Board and cannot be edited from a computer connected to the 9000Pro.

Plug-in Custom Voices Before the Board voices can be selected and played from the 9000Pro, they are converted to Plug-in voices. By using the Custom Voice Creator function, you can edit the various parameters of the Plug-in voices and create your own original voices.

About the Plug-in Boards Plug-in Boards give you an enormous amount of additional sonic exibility and power. When installed, they work seamlessly and transparently within the system of the 9000Pro meaning that you can use their sounds and functions just as if they were built right into the 9000Pro at the factory!

The boards that are available for and can be installed to the 9000Pro are described below. These boards are not simply a source of more voices, they are full-featured tone generators in their own right, and they let you not only upgrade the 9000Pro system by adding more polyphony for example, but they also let enhance and edit the sounds with a variety of parameters. Three types of boards are available: Single Part, Multi Part, and Effect. The Single Part and Multi Part boards can be used with the 9000Pro. Please note, however, that Effect Plug-in Boards (e.g., PLG-100VH) cannot be used with the 9000Pro.

Single Part Plug-in Boards Single Part Plug-in Boards let you add a completely different synthesizer or tone generator and play its voices by using a sin- gle part of the 9000Pro. Keep in mind that the Single Part boards can only be used for one part (R1 - R3, L, Song Creator) at a time (see pages 42 and 125).

Analog Physical Modeling Plug-in Board (PLG150-AN) Using Analog Physical Modeling (AN) synthesis, the very latest digital technology is used to accurately reproduce the sound of analog synthesizers.

Piano Plug-in Board (PLG150-PF) A massive 16MB of waveform memory is dedicated to the reproduction of piano sounds. This board offers 136 stereo sounds, including a number of acoustic and electric pianos, and up to 64-note polyphony.

Advanced DX/TX Plug-in Board (PLG100-DX, PLG150-DX) The sounds of the DX7 are available on this Plug-in Board. Unlike PCM-based tone generators, this board uses the powerful FM Synthesis system the same as found on DX-series synthesizers for extraordinarily versatile and dynamic sound shap- ing potential. Sounds are compatible with those of the DX7, and the board can even receive DX7 data via MIDI bulk dump.

Virtual Acoustic Plug-in Board (PLG100-VL, PLG150-VL) With Virtual Acoustic (VA) synthesis, the sounds of real instruments are modeled (simulated) in real time, giving a degree of realism that cannot be achieved using conventional PCM-based synthesis techniques. When playing these sounds using an optional MIDI Wind Controller (WX5), you can even capture some of the physical feel of woodwind instruments.

Multi-Part Plug-in Board Multi-Part Plug-in Boards let you expand the voice polyphony of the 9000Pro by giving you a full 16 independent instrumental parts. This type of board allows you to use the maximum polyphony of the 9000Pro for your keyboard performance. For example, this is especially useful when playing the Organ Flutes voices, which require many notes of polyphony. (See HINT on page 69.) Please note that the voices of the Multi Part boards cannot be played from the 9000Pro's keyboard.

XG Plug-in Board (PLG100-XG) This Plug-in Board is a 16-part XG sound generator. You can play back XG/GM song les using the rich variety of sounds and effects on this board.

Additional Plug-in Boards will be available in the future.

The Board Custom Voices (RAM) described on page 64 are not available in some Plug- in Boards (e.g., PLG150-PF, PLG100-VL, PLG100-DX) .

Included with each Plug-in Board is a oppy disk featuring special demo songs. You can play these demo songs on the 9000Pro (XG Plug-in System format only) using the Song Player function. Refer to the Owners Manual of your partic- ular Plug-in Board for details on the demo songs.

63

Plug-in Voicesl i i

66 Reference

Plug-in Manager This function lets you manage the Plug-in Voice related parameters as disk les. The following three types of parameters (described in the illustration on page 64) are available:

The operations for each function corresponding to step #4 are covered in the following explanations.

Load Plug-in Custom Voice.......................................................................................... The explanations here apply to step #4 above.

All The three types of parameters explained in the chart above can all be loaded together. Use the instructions here for loading in step #3 of the Quick Guide on page 42.

Plug-in Custom Voices These can be edited via the Plug-in Custom Voice Creator func- tion (page 102).

Native System Parameters These can be edited via the Native System Parameter Edit func- tion (page 105). Available parameters vary according to the in- stalled board.

Board Custom Voices These can be edited via your computer. See pages 100 and 106 for details.

Basic Procedure

3Select the desired function.

1Select a Plug-in Voice category.

4Execute the selected function.

2Select this to call up the Plug-in Manager display.

Quick Guide Step#3 on page 42

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Select the le to be loaded. See page 151 for details on directory/le selection.

Select this to display the property of the selected le.

If an optional SCSI device is connected or the optional internal hard disk is installed, select the appropriate device. See page 150 for details.

64

Plug-in Voicesl i i

Reference 67

Individual This method lets you individually load the three types of parameters explained in the chart on page 66.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Follow the on-screen instructions.

Select the destination memory.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Select the le to be loaded. See page 151 for details on directory/le selection.

Select this to display the property of the selected le.

If an optional SCSI device is connected or the optional internal hard disk is installed, select the appropriate device. See page 150 for details.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Follow the on-screen instructions.

See below about this function.

Choose one of the three methods for selecting les. See page 151 for instructions on selecting les.

You can select the desired Plug-in Voice and load it to the desired loca- tion in Flash ROM. See "CAUTION" on page 151.

Disk Flash ROM

65

Plug-in Voicesl i i

68 Reference

Save This allows you to copy Plug-in Voice data from Flash ROM to disk. The explanations here apply to step #4 on page 66.

Delete This allows you to delete Plug-in Voice data in Flash ROM. The explanations here apply to step #4 on page 66.

The Plug-in Voice related data in Flash ROM (page 64) is maintained even if the Plug-in Board has been removed. Make sure to execute the save operation if you have important data in Flash ROM that you wish to keep.

Quick Save Saves all the Plug-in Custom Voice, Native System parameters, and the Board Custom Voice data in Flash ROM to a disk.

Complete Save

Used for backing up the Board Custom Voice data from the Plug-in board to Flash ROM and saves all the Plug- in Custom Voice, Native System parameters, and the Board Custom Voice data in Flash ROM to a disk.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Select QUICK or COMPLETE. See below about these two types of sav- ing methods.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

Select the appropriate Slot number cor- responding to the board which applies to the voice parameters you wish to save to disk.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Choose one of the three methods for selecting les. See page 151 for instruc- tions on selecting les.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

Select the voice to be deleted.

CAUTION You can clear all the Plug-in Voice parameters in

Flash ROM by using this button. After executing this operation, the voice of the selected slot cannot be used. Turn the power OFF and then turn the power ON to use this board with default settings

66

Plug-in Voicesl i i

Reference 69

Plug-in Setting This lets you set other useful settings for the Plug-in Board. The explanations here apply to step #4 on page 66.

Slot 1

Slot 2

16 parts Port 0

XG song playback

Slot 1

Slot 2

Set Auto Load to ON or OFF. See the illustration on page 64.

You can store the settings in this display to Flash ROM by using this button.

This parameter is available when the same (or same type) of Plug-in Boards (e.g., the PLG100-DX and the PLG150-DX) are installed in the two slots. When the appropriate boards are installed and this is set to on, the two boards effectively func- tion as one, and are assigned to a single part (R1, R2, R3, or L), effec- tively doubling the total polyphony. When this is set to ON, you can select the Plug-in voice only via the [SLOT1] button. Please note that the [SLOT2] button cannot be used.

This function is for Multi Part Plug-in Boards (e.g., PLG150-XG), and lets you select the tone genera- tor for XG disk song playback. When "SLOT 1" or "SLOT 2" is selected, the installed Plug-in Board is used as the tone gener- ator for the XG disk song playback. When "INTERNAL" is selected, the 9000Pro inter- nal tone generator is used. See the HINT below for information on how to use this function effectively.

Using the SONG TG (Tone Generator) Function

For example, when set to INTERNAL:

If you are playing back XG song data with the 9000Pro, you can use an XG Plug-in Board installed to Slot 1 as a dedicated tone generator freeing up the polyphony of the internal tone gen- erator to be used exclusively for your keyboard performance. This is espe- cially convenient when playing an Organ Flutes voice, which requires many notes of polyphony.

In this setup, you can play back up to 48 different parts from sequencing software on a computer, using the three tone genera- tors of the 9000Pro: the internal tone generator, and two installed XG Plug-in Boards. To play back the song with the settings above, make the appropriate Thru Port settings (page 173) to 1-8 or OFF, so that the 9000Pro will properly recognize the MIDI Port data.

If you have installed a PLG150 Board to SLOT 1 and a PLG100 Board to SLOT 2 (or, in other words, installed a higher level board of the same type to SLOT 1), and have set POLY EXPAN- SION to ON, you may expe- rience certain problems when playing the voices. See page 109.

Port 1

Port 2

16 parts

16 parts

For example, when set to SLOT 1:

67

Auto Accompaniment

70 Reference

The auto accompaniment feature puts a full backing band at your ngertips. To use it, all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the selected accompaniment style matching your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords you play. With auto accompaniment, even a solo performer can enjoy playing with the backing of an entire band or orchestra.

This section explains some important functions of the auto accompaniment that are not covered in the Quick Guide. For basic information on playing the auto accompaniment, refer to page 20 in the Quick Guide.

Chord Fingerings The way in which chords are played or indicated with your left hand (on the left side of the keyboard from the Split Point) is referred to as ngering. There are 7 types of ngerings as described below.

Refer to page 159 for instructions on setting the split point and ngering mode.

Single Finger Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord ngerings described below are used:

Multi Finger The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord ngerings, so you can use either type of ngering without having to switch ngering modes.

Fingered This mode lets you nger your own chords on the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, while the 9000Pro supplies appropriately orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment in the selected style. The Fingered mode recognizes the various chord types listed on the next page.

Fingered Pro This mode is basically the same as Fingered, with the exception that more than three notes must be played to indi- cate the chords. Playing the root note and its octave produces accompaniment based only on the root.

On Bass This mode accepts the same ngerings as the Fingered mode, but the lowest note played in the Auto Accompani- ment section of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing you to play on bass chords (in the Fingered mode the root of the chord is always used as the bass note).

On Bass Pro This mode is basically the same as On Bass, with the exception that more than three notes must be played to indi- cate the chords. Playing the root note and its octave produces accompaniment based only on the root.

Full Keyboard When this advanced auto-accompaniment mode is engaged the 9000Pro will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You dont have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. Although the Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature. Try playing a few simple songs in the Full Keyboard mode to get a feel for its capabilities.

The 9000Pro recognizes chords you play in the Auto Accompaniment section of keyboard and produces appropriate chords, even if auto accompaniment is off (as long as the Left part is set to on). Chords are recognized according to the Fingered mode, even if the mode is actually set to another mode. This setting is especially effective when used with the Vocal Harmony or the Harmony/Echo.

Quick Guide Step#5 on page 21

Cm

C

Cm7

C7 For a major chord, press the

root key only. For a seventh chord, simultaneously press

the root key and a white key to its left.

For a minor chord, simulta- neously press the root key and a black key to its left.

For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left.

Quick Guide on page 20

68

Auto Accompanimenti

Reference 71

Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode

Chord Name [Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Display for root C Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C(9) Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6(9) Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7(9) Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 CM7#11

Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5 C(b5) Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7b5 Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm(9) Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7 Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 Cm7(9) Minor seventh eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7_11 Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7_9 Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 Cm7b5 Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7b5 Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Cdim Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7 Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - b7 C7

Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(b9) Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 C7b13 Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(9) Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 C7#11

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 C7(13) Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7(#9) Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C7b5 Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 - b7 C7sus4 One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1 - 2 - 5 C1+2+5

C

Cm

7C

(

)

CM

(

)

7C (9) C

(

)

(9)6

Caug Cm6 Cm7

(

)

Cm b57 CmM b57

Cm

(

)

(9)7Cm(9)

CmM7

(

)

CmM (9)7

(

)

Cdim Cdim7

C (9)7

(

)

C (13)7

(

)

C (b9)7

(

)

C (b13)7

Csus4

C1+2+5C b57

C6

(

)

(

)

CM7(9) 7CM (#11)

(

)

7CM b5C(b5)

(

)

C (#11)7 C (#9)7

(

)

C aug7

Cm7(11)

(

)

(

)

CM aug7 (

)

C sus47

Example for C chords

Notes in parentheses can be omitted.

If you play any three adjacent keys (including black keys), the chord sound will be canceled and only the rhythm instru- ments will continue playing (Chord Cancel function).

Playing a single key or two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompani- ment based only on the root.

A perfect fth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fth which can be used with both major and minor chords.

The chord ngerings listed are all in root position, but other inversions can be used with the following exceptions:

m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), m7_11, 1+2+5.

Inversion of the 7sus4 chord is not recognized if the 5th is omitted.

The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh).

Two-note ngerings will pro- duce a chord based on the pre- viously played chord.

69

Auto Accompanimenti

72 Reference

Fade-ins and Fade-outs The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs when starting and stopping the accompaniment. To produce a fade-in/out :

1 Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button so that its indicator lights.

2 Start the accompaniment The sound will gradually fade in. The [FADE IN/OUT] indicator will ash during the fade-in, and then go out when full volume has been reached.

3 Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button so that its indicator lights. The indicator will ash during the fade out, then the accompaniment will stop when the fade-out is complete.

Tempo Control Each style of the 9000Pro has been programmed with a default or standard tempo; however, this can be changed to any value between 32 and 280 beats per minute by using the data dial (see page 44) when the TEMPO lamp is engaged. This can be done either before the accompaniment is started or while it is playing.

When you select a different style while the accompaniment is not playing, the default tempo for that style is also selected. If the accompaniment is playing, the same tempo is maintained even if you select a different style.

Tap Tempo This useful function lets you press the [TAP TEMPO] button to tap out the tempo and automatically start the accompaniment at that tapped speed. Simply tap (press/release) the button (four times for a 4/4 time signature), and the accompaniment starts automat- ically at the tempo you tapped. The tempo can also be changed during playback by tap- ping the button twice at the desired tempo.

FADEIN/OUT

TEMPO

D A T A ENTRY

Rotating the data dial to the right (clockwise) increases the value, while rotating it to the left (counterclock- wise) decreases it.

*When a 3-beat style is selected, tap 3 times.

When a 4-beat style is selected

Tap 4 times

TAP TEMPO

TAP TAP TEMPO

TAP TAP TEMPO

TAP TAP TEMPO

TAP

70

Auto Accompanimenti

Reference 73

Synchro Stop When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop com- pletely when all keys in the auto-accompaniment section of the keyboard are released. Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as a chord is played. The BEAT indi- cators will ash while the accompaniment is stopped. For basic information on playing the auto accompaniment, refer to page 20 in the Quick Guide.

1 Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT on.

2 Turn SYNC STOP on. SYNC START is automatically set to on when SYNC STOP is turned on.

3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts.

4 The auto accompaniment stops when you release your left hand from the keys.

5 Playing a chord with your left hand automatically restarts the auto accompaniment.

6 Stop the auto accompaniment.

One Touch Setting For basic information on using the One Touch Setting feature, refer to page 24 in the Quick Guide. This section covers how to create your own One Touch Setting setups (4 setups per style). For a list of One Touch Setting setup parameters, refer to page 214.

1 Select a style.

2 Set up the panel controls as required.

3 Press the [MEMORY] button and press one of the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] buttons: [1] through [4].

Synchro Stop cannot be set to on when the ngering mode is set to Full Keyboard or the auto accompaniment on the panel is set to off.

SYNC STOP SYNC START

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment section

1 2

3 4 PROGRAMMABLE

ONE TOUCH SETTING

MEMORY

REGISTRATION

ONE TOUCH SETTING

71

Auto Accompanimenti

74 Reference

Style Manager The 9000Pro styles are divided into two groups : Preset styles and Flash styles. Flash styles pre-recorded to Flash styles I through VIII can be replaced by the desired data with the Style Manager function.

The operations for each function corresponding to step #4 are covered in the following expla- nations.

Load Style into Flash ROM This allows you to load style data from disk to Flash ROM.

Basic Procedure

Style Manager

Flash Styles in

Flash ROM

Disk Styles Save

Load

Since all Flash style data is stored to Flash ROM, any data in the selected Flash style location will be erased and replaced by your new settings. This includes the factory programmed Flash style data (Flash styles I through VIII). If you've deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6). For details about Flash ROM, refer to "Memory Structure" on page 54.

3Select the desired function. 1Select a style category.

4Execute the selected function.

2Select this to call up the Style Manager display.

If an optional SCSI device is connected or the optional internal hard disk is installed, select the appropriate device. See page 150 for details.

You can select the desired location in Flash ROM as the destination. See "CAUTION" on page 151.

Choose one of the three methods for selecting les (see page 151).

Select this to listen to the selected style le.

When set to with OTS, you can load the selected style le with its One Touch Setting setups.

Select this to display the property of the selected le.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

See page 151 for details on directory/le selection.

72

Auto Accompanimenti

Reference 75

Save Style from Flash ROM This allows you to save style data from Flash ROM to disk.

Copy Style in Flash ROM This allows you to copy style data to a different category/number in Flash ROM. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Delete Style in Flash ROM This allows you to delete style data in Flash ROM. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Swap Style in Flash ROM This allows you to exchange the data between les in different categories/numbers. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Rename Style in Flash ROM This allows you to rename the style le name. Follow the on-screen instructions. Name entry is described on page 46.

Defragment Flash ROM If youve used the Style Manager for a while, and/or have loaded and manipulated a number of styles, the Flash ROM may have become fragmented (meaning that nor- mally contiguous les have been broken up into several fragments). Defragmenting the Flash ROM increases the contiguous empty space on the disk, allowing you to more effectively use the remaining memory capacity. To defragment the Flash ROM, follow the on-screen instructions.

See page 151.

When set to with OTS, you can save the selected style le with its One Touch Set- ting setups.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

See page 151 for details on directory/le selection.

If an optional SCSI device is connected or the optional internal hard disk is installed, select the appropriate device. See page 150 for details.

The 9000Pro can load les containing Registration Memory data created on the PSR-8000, without having to convert them. However, please note that the ve Flash styles listed in the left column below should not be deleted or replaced with differ- ent styles, since they are used to substitute for the corresponding PSR-8000 styles listed in the right column.

9000Pro Flash Style PSR-8000 Category Number Name Category Name

II 4 Analog Ballad 16 beat Analog Pop III 1 6/8 Trance Disco Synth Boogie IV 1 Bebop Swing & Jazz Bebop X 5 Lovely Shufe R&B Pop Shufe 1, 2

XIII 6 Musette March & Waltz Musette

73

Music Database

76 Reference

Quick Guide on page 26

For basic information on using the Music Database feature, refer to page 26 in the Quick Guide. This section covers how to create your own Music Database setups. For a list of Music Database setup parameters, refer to page 214.

Creating the Music Database

Since all Music Database data is stored to Flash ROM, any data in the selected Music Database location will be erased and replaced by your new settings. This includes all of the factory programmed preset setups. If you've deleted the fac- tory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6).

For details about Flash ROM, refer to Memory Structure on page 54.

MUSIC DATABASE

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

Create the Music Database by following the on-screen instructions.

MUSIC DATABASE

Music Database setups in Flash ROM All preset setups can be edited.

74

The Multi Pads

Reference 77

Quick Guide on page 34

This section explains two important functions of the Multi Pads that are not covered in the Quick Guide. For basic information on using the Multi Pads, refer to page 34 in the Quick Guide.

Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off

Repeat Unless the Repeat function is on for the selected pad, playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the phrase is reached. A phrase can be stopped while it is playing by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP] button.

Chord Match If a Multi Pad is played while Auto Accompaniment is playing and the Chord Match function for that pad is ON, the phrase will be automatically re-harmonized to match the accompaniment chords.

Since all Multi Pad data is stored to Flash ROM, all of the factory programmed Multi Pad banks will be replaced by your new settings. If you've deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6).

For details about Flash ROM, refer to Memory Structure on page 54.

CAUTION

The Repeat and Chord Match settings for the Multi Pads are stored together in a group of 58 banks. For this rea- son, you should be careful when making edits and storing your edits, since all 58 banks will be overwritten with the new data.

STOP

1 2

3 4

M.PAD BANK 1~60

BANK VIEW

Turn Repeat of each pad On or Off. Use the same operation to turn Chord Match On/Off.

Press the [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously.

Select REPEAT or CHORD MATCH.

Select a Bank.

Select this to store the settings. (Refer to the CAUTION note below.)

Bank #59 (factory preset) of the Multi Pads can be used to send various MIDI messages. This convenient feature lets you control the following MIDI functions of an external device by simply pressing the appro- priate Multi Pad.

Pad 1 All Note Off Pad 2 Reset All Controllers Pad 3 Start(FA) Pad 4 Stop(FC)

These MIDI messages are out- put via the MIDI OUT B termi- nal and are unaffected by the MIDI Transmit settings (page 175).

Bank #60 (factory preset) of the Multi Pads can be used to call up various settings of the Scale Tuning feature (page 158). This lets you change the tuning of the individual notes by simply pressing the appro- priate Multi Pad.

BANK 01

1 2

3 4

Multi Pad banks 60 banks in Flash ROM All banks can be replaced by the new created pad data.

75

Disk Song Playback

78 Reference

Quick Guide on page 30

The 9000Pro Song mode allows song data to be played back from a oppy disk, an optional hard disk or an optional SCSI device. This section explains some important functions of song playback that are not covered in the Quick Guide. For basic information on playing songs, refer to page 30 in the Quick Guide.

Selecting a Song The 9000Pro allows you to play back songs from disk, as described in the operation steps below. Keep in mind that steps #2 and #3 are identical to the other disk le selec- tion operations for the instrument.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

These steps are identi- cal to all other 9000Pro disk le selection opera- tions (for example, see page 151).

If an optional hard disk has been installed or an optional SCSI device has been connected, the appropriate device must be selected here.

01arabe2.mid 02sheher.mid 03puck.mid 04edud15.mid 05sylphe.mid 06praul6.mid 07saraba.mid 08dancin.mid 09vals12.mid 10paspie.mid

Classic01

Classic01a

Classic01b 01lente.mid 02g_walk.mid

Classic02

Classic02a

Classic02b

Classic03

Classic03a

Classic03b

3

1 Insert the oppy disk (containing the les shown below) into the oppy disk drive, and press the [SONG I] button.

2This selects the pop up page shown below.

4

5Select the desired song.

You can return to the next highest level by pressing the [IN] LCD button while the cursor is located at .

76

In the le selection display, a maximum 250 le or directory names can be displayed. If the number of les or directories exceeds 250, the 251st and beyond (according to alphabet- ical order) are not shown.

Disk Song Playbacki l

Reference 79

Other Functions: Viewing the Lyrics and Fast Forward/Reverse

Song Setup This function determines certain playback settings for song data other than note on/off (for example, lyrics).

About Vocal Harmony/Microphone Settings for a Song The Vocal Harmony and Microphone settings can be stored as Song Setup data. When using the Vocal Harmony function with a song, this convenient feature lets you store all relevant Vocal Harmony and Microphone settings with the song, so that they are auto- matically called up the next time you select the song. The actual settings that can be stored are listed below.

Vocal Harmony type and parameter settings............................................................ Page 81 Vocal Harmony Vocoder track settings (keyboard and song) ................................... Page 82 Effect type and parameter settings (for the microphone sound)............................ Page 146 Volume, Pan, Reverb depth, Chorus depth and

DSP (8) depth (for the microphone sound)............................................................. Page 145

Select this during play- back to move rapidly back- ward through the song.

Select this during play- back to move rapidly for- ward through the song. This button lets you

pause playback and then start again from the same point in the song.

Select this to call up the Lyrics display.

Press this button to save the microphone and Vocal Harmony settings to the selected song. See below for details.

When set to SEARCH ON, the 9000Pro reads the lyric data when the song is selected, allowing the lyrics to be dis- played immediately after you press the [START/STOP] button.

When set to SEARCH OFF, the 9000Pro reads the lyric data after playback is started. This may result in a slight delay before the lyrics are displayed.

When set to NEVER DISPLAY, the lyrics will not be shown in the LCD display dur- ing playback.

When the Ultra Quick Start function here is set to ON, the 9000Pro reads all initial non-note data of the song at the highest possible speed, then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the rst note of the song. This allows you to start actual song playback as quickly as possi- ble, with a minimum pause for reading of data.

You can use the metronome function during playback. See page 166 for details.

77

Vocal Harmony

80 Reference

Quick Guide on page 32

This unique feature incorporates advanced voice-processing technology to automatically produce vocal harmony based on a single lead vocal. An extensive selection of preset Vocal Harmony types are pro- vided, each functioning in one of three main modes which determine how the harmony notes are applied. In addition to straightforward harmony, the 9000Pro Vocal Harmony feature can change the pitch and timbre of the harmony and/or lead vocal sound to effectively change the apparent gender of the voice. So, for example, if you are a male singer you can have a two-part female vocal backup (the Vocal Harmony feature can add up to two harmony notes to the main lead voice). A full range of parameters is provided to allow detailed editing to produce precisely the type of vocal harmony sound you need.

Setting up the microphone ................................................................................................

Using the LINE setting Normally, since you will be using a microphone, you may never need to use the LINE setting. However, this may come in handy if you want to use a pre-recorded source (on CD or cassette tape) with the vocal harmony feature. (For best results, the source should be a single vocal only; any other singers and instruments in the mix could produce unexpected or undesired results.)

Applying the Vocal Harmony Effect

Setting Up

Please note the following points : A standard dynamic microphone with an impedance of about 250 ohms is recommended. (The 9000Pro does not sup-

port phantom-powered condenser microphones.)

The Yamaha MZ106s microphone is recommended for use with the 9000Pro.

The level of the microphone sound may vary considerably according to the type of microphone used.

Placing a microphone which is connected to the 9000Pro too close to those of an external sound system connected to the 9000Pro can cause feedback. Adjust the microphone position and the INPUT VOLUME level or MASTER VOLUME control level if necessary, so that feedback does not occur.

Quick Guide on page 32

CAUTION Never use the MIC setting

with a line level signal (CD player, cassette deck, etc.). Doing this could damage the 9000Pro and its input func- tions.

2 Set the MIC/LINE panel switch to LINE.

1 Set the INPUT VOLUME control to MIN.

3 Connect the source to the MIC/LINE IN jack.

4 Adjust the INPUT VOLUME control. Play the source at the highest expected volume, and adjust the INPUT VOLUME control to get the optimum input level (as in the Setting Up instructions above).

Since the MIC/LINE IN jack is highly sensitive, it may pick up and pro- duce noise when noth- ing is connected. To avoid this, always set the INPUT VOLUME to minimum when noth- ing is connected to the MIC/LINE IN jack.

This turns Talk settings on or off. The Talk settings are effective when using the microphone for speech or rapping (as opposed to singing). Refer to page 165.

The 9000Pro has a DSP effect (DSP 8) especially for the micro- phone sound, and this button turns the DSP 8 effect on/off. The DSP 8 type can be set from the Mixing Console display (page 146).

This turns the Vocal Harmony effect on or off.

If you experience distorted or out-of-tune sound from the Vocal Harmony feature, your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds (other than your voice) the Auto Accompaniment sound from the 9000Pro, for example. In particular, bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony feature. The solution to this problem is to ensure that as little extraneous sound as possible is picked up by your vocal microphone:

Sing as closely to the microphone as pos- sible.

Use a uni-directional microphone. Turn down the MASTER VOLUME, ACMP

volume or SONG volume control.

78

Vocal Harmonyl

Reference 81

Selecting/Producing the Vocal Harmony effect

Vocal Harmony Parameters

Basic Procedure

Chordal Type/Vocoder Type Determines how the harmony notes are applied. Harmony Gender Type Can be set to Off or Auto. When Auto, the gender of the harmony sound is changed automati-

cally. Lead Gender Type Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal sound (i.e., the direct microphone

sound) will be changed. When Off no gender change occurs. When Unison, Male or Female is selected the corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal. (In this case the number of harmony notes which can be produced in addition to the lead vocal is reduced to one.)

Lead Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change produced when one of the Lead Gender Types (above) is selected.

Lead Pitch Correction When Correct is selected the pitch of the lead vocal is shifted in precise semitone steps. This parameter is only effective when one of the Lead Gender Types is selected.

Auto Upper Gender Threshold Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of semitones above the lead vocal pitch.

Auto Lower Gender Threshold Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of semitones below the lead vocal pitch.

Upper Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes higher than the Auto Upper Gender Threshold.

Lower Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes lower than the Auto Lower Gender Threshold.

Vibrato Depth Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound. Also affects the lead vocal sound if a Lead Gender Type is selected.

Vibrato Rate Sets the speed of the vibrato effect. Vibrato Delay Specifies the length of the delay before the vibrato effect begins when a note is produced. Harmony1 Volume Sets the volume of the first harmony note. Harmony2 Volume Sets the volume of the second harmony note. Harmony3 Volume Sets the volume of the third harmony note. Harmony1 Pan Specifies the stereo (pan) position of the first harmony note. When Random is selected the ste-

reo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played. Harmony2 Pan Specifies the stereo (pan) position of the second harmony note. When Random is selected the

stereo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played. Harmony3 Pan Specifies the stereo (pan) position of the third harmony note. When Random is selected the ste-

reo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played. Harmony1 Detune Detunes the first harmony note by the specified number of cents. Harmony2 Detune Detunes the second harmony note by the specified number of cents. Harmony3 Detune Detunes the third harmony note by the specified number of cents. Pitch to Note When ON the lead vocal sound plays the 9000Pro tone generator system. (However, dynamic

changes in the vocal sound do not affect the volume of the tone generator.) Pitch to Note Part Determines which of the 9000Pro parts will be controlled by the lead vocal when the Pitch to Note

parameter is ON.

1 Press the VOCAL HAR- MONY [SELECT] button.

2Select a Vocal Harmony type.

3 Edit the desired Vocal Harmony parameters.

4Store your settings.

79

Vocal Harmonyl

82 Reference

Changing the Vocal Harmony/Microphone Settings

3-Band Equalizer Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the level for each band. The 9000Pro features a high grade three-band digital equalizer function for the microphone sound.

Hz.........................Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band. dB ........................Boosts (+ values) or cuts (- values) the corresponding band by up to 12 dB.

Noise Gate This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specied level. This effec- tively cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass.

SW .......................SW is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Noise Gate on or off. TH ........................TH is the abbreviation of Threshold. This adjusts the input level at which the gate

begins to open.

Compressor This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specied level. This is useful when recording a signal with widely varying dynamics. It effectively compresses the signal, making soft parts louder and loud parts softer.

SW .......................SW is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Compressor on or off. TH ........................TH is the abbreviation of Threshold. This adjusts the input level at which compression

begins to be applied. RAT ......................RAT is the abbreviation of Ratio. This adjusts the compression ratio. OUT .....................Adjusts the output level from the speaker.

Vocal Harmony The following parameters determines how the harmony is controlled.

VOCODER Track ...The Vocal Harmony effect is controlled by the notes. This parameter lets you deter- mine which notes (from the keyboard and/or song data) will control the harmony.

Data dial icon When set to MUTE, the track selected below is muted (turned off) during keyboard performance or song playback.

Keyboard OFF Keyboard control over harmony is turned off. UPPER Notes played to the right of the split point control the harmony. LOWER Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony.

Song (from disk or external MIDI sequencer) OFF Song data control over harmony is turned off. TR1-TR16 When playing back a song from disk or external MIDI sequencer, the

note data recorded to the assigned song track controls the harmony.

Basic Procedure

Select the desired parameter.

Select the desired parameter.

2Edit the Vocal Harmony/micro- phone parameters.

1Press the VOCAL HARMONY [MIC SETUP] button.

80

Vocal Harmonyl

Reference 83

Balance................This lets you set the balance between the lead and Vocal Harmony. Raising this value increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal. If it is set to the maximum value of 127, you will hear only the Vocal Harmony from the exter- nal speakers; if it is set to 0, only the lead vocal will be heard.

Mode....................All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes which pro- duce harmony in different ways. The harmony effect is dependent on the selected Vocal Harmony Mode and Track, and this parameter determines how the harmony is applied to your voice. The three modes are described below.

VOCODER The harmony notes are determined by the notes you play on the keyboard (VOICE R1, R2, R3, L) and/or song data which includes Vocal Harmony tracks.

CHORDAL During accompaniment playback, chords played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard control the harmony. During song playback, chords contained in song data control the harmony. (Not available if the song does not contain any chord data.)

AUTO The harmony notes are produced in either Vocoder or Chordal mode according to the current performance method.

Chord ...................The following parameters specify the song data which will be used for chord detection.

OFF Chords are not detected. XF Chords of XF format are detected. TR1-TR16 Chords are detected from note data in the specied

song track.

Microphone The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled.

Mute.....................When set to OFF, the microphone sound is turned off.

Volume .................Adjusts the volume of the microphone sound.

81

Sampling

84 Reference

Quick Guide on page 40

This function lets you record your own sounds via a microphone or line source to be played from the key- board. During use, sampled sounds are kept in the internal wave RAM memory. The 9000Pro comes with a 1- megabyte wave memory which can be expanded up to a maximum of 65 megabytes by installing optional SIMM memory modules see page 185 for details. Sampled wave data can be saved to oppy or hard disk. Wave les in standard WAV or AIFF format produced using other equipment can also be used by the 9000Pro.

Use the same operation as in Vocal Harmony on pages 32 and 80. The notes and cautions contained on page 80 in Vocal Harmony also apply to Sam- pling.

What is sampling ? Technically, sampling is making a digital recording of a sound. The sound could be your voice or an acoustic instrument (taken from a microphone), or a recorded sound (from a CD or cassette player). Once it is recorded, the resulting sample can be played at various pitches from a keyboard.

Auto Trigger Level Actually, the 9000Pro does not start sampling immediately when the [START] LCD button is pressed (in step #11 on page 41). Once the [START] LCD button is pressed, the 9000Pro waits for a signal of a suitable level (set by the trigger level). When it hears such a signal, it starts sampling. The Trigger Level can be set in step #10 on page 40. The higher the trigger level, the louder the signal must be to start (trigger) sampling.

Setting up

Guidelines for Sampling

Sampling Disk

Play

Internal Memory (RAM) Wave data

Save

WAV AIFF

SCSI device connected to the 9000Pro

Can be expanded by installing optional SIMM memory modules (page 185).

Import

Store as a Custom Voice to Flash ROM (page 92)

Wave Edit Waveform Edit

See next page.

The 9000Pro records at a sam- ple rate of 44.1 kHz.

Although the wave memory of the 9000Pro can be expanded to 65 megabytes (page 185), the maximum size of a single sample recording is 32 mega- bytes.

Save the Custom Voice with the sample (wave data) via the Disk Save function (page 153).

82

Samplingli

Reference 85

To better understand how trigger level works, lets look at a specic example sampling of the phrase a one and a two. In this phrase, one and two are louder than the other words. Since the rst a is lower than the trigger level, the 9000Pro doesnt actually start sampling until the word one. If you want the phrase to be sampled from the rst word, the trigger level should be set lower. With this new trigger level setting, the entire phrase will be sampled. Be careful, however, not to set the trigger level too low, or else sampling may start from some accidental or extraneous sound (such as breathing noises, touching the microphone, etc.).

Waves & Waveforms The terms wave and waveform have distinct meanings in 9000Pro sampling termi- nology, as follows:

Wave A wave is the raw audio data created whenever you sample a new sound or import a WAV or AIFF format wave le. The 9000Pro WAVE EDIT mode includes functions which allow you to edit this basic data: e.g. resampling to change the sampling frequency, trimming and loop- ing, normalization for maximum level and minimum noise, etc.

Waveform All 9000Pro waves are contained in a waveform, which is basically a set of parameters which dene the keyboard range over which the wave or waves it contains will play. A wave- form can contain one or more waves, and waves can be shared by more than one waveform. Waves in a waveform can be assigned to different ranges of the keyboard, but they cannot be layered (i.e. they will not sound simultaneously when a single key is played). The 9000Pro WAVEFORM EDIT mode lets you add or delete waves from a waveform, and assign the waves to different keyboard ranges.

Volume (level)

Time

Sampling start point

a one and a two

a one and a two

Trigger level

New trigger level

Sampling start point

Time

Volume (level)

WAVE EDIT

Sampling Sound WAV AIFF

WAVE WAVE WAVE

WAVEFORM

WAVE1 WAVE2 WAVE3

83

Samplingli

86 Reference

Refer to Quick Guide on page 40 for details. The operations for each function corresponding to step #4 are covered in the following explanations.

Recording a Sample Refer to page 40 for instructions on recording a sample. The following display will be shown in step #9 on page 40.

When FIXED PITCH above is set to OFF, the new recorded sample will be assigned to C3. Notice that the pitch and speed of the sample follows the keyboard: Playing keys lower than the original results in a lower pitch and slower speed; playing higher keys results in higher pitch and faster speed.

Basic Procedure

1 Press the [SOUND CREATOR] button.

2 Select SAMPLING. 3 Select the desired menu.

4 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Quick Guide on page 40

You can set the START/END KEY by pressing the desired key while holding either of the LCD buttons.

Set the key range to which the new sample will be assigned.

Set this parameter to ON if you want the sample to play back at the same pitch over the entire key range of the 9000Pro.

C3

START KEY Original key

Pitch/speed of sample goes down.

Pitch/speed of sample goes up.

END KEY

84

Samplingli

Reference 87

Pre Effect You can set up a maximum of three DSP effects to be applied to the source sound as it is sampled. The DSP blocks are connected in series as shown below. The following dis- play will be shown in step #10 on page 40.

Importing Wave Files from Disk To import previously saved waveform les via the PSR-8000 or standard WAV or AIFF format les from disk, insert the appropriate disk into the 9000Pro oppy disk drive, then press the [FILE IMPORT] LCD button in step #3 in "Basic Procedure" on page 86.

Clearing Wave Data The explanations here apply to step #4 of the Basic Procedure on page 86.

Change the balance between the direct (dry) and effect (wet) sound.

Select the desired DSP block.

Select the desired type of the selected DSP block.

Select the parameter and adjust the value of the selected parameter. Note that the contents of the parameter may be different depending on the selected DSP type.

Select this to call up the storing display.

Press this button to switch between the cur- rently selected wave and the currently selected panel voice.

Select this and press the [NEXT] button to call up the display that imports the wave data sampled via the PSR-8000.

Select this and press the [NEXT] button to call up the display that imports the WAV or AIFF format le.

Select this to execute the Clear operation.

Press this button to switch between the currently selected wave and the cur- rently selected panel voice.

85

Samplingli

88 Reference

Editing Wave data The illustration below applies to step #4 of the Basic Procedure on page 86.

Wave Edit Resampling The 9000Pro originally records waves at 44.1 kHz. WAV and AIFF les are also imported as 44.1 kHz waves. The RESAMPLING function lets you reduce the sampling frequency of waves, thus reducing the amount of memory they occupy. Please note, however, that reduc- ing the sampling frequency also reduces the sound quality.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

3 Select the desired Waveform/Wave and edit the desired parameters.

1 Select a Custom Voice which con- tains the wave(s) you wish to edit.

2 Select the desired menu.

This function exports the current wave as a WAV le which can be loaded and used by other instruments or computers which can handle the WAV format.

4 Store your settings as a Custom Voice to Flash ROM.

Resampling can cause the loop points (see Loop Point, below) to shift, resulting in unwanted noise. If this hap- pens use the Loop Point func- tion to readjust the loop points.Press this to hear how

the resampled wave will sound before actually resampling the wave.

Select the desired resampling frequency. Only resampling frequencies which are lower than the original sampling fre- quency will be available.

Press this to actually resample the selected wave.

86

Samplingli

Reference 89

Loop Point This display determines how your sampled waves play back. Your sampled waves can be played back in three different ways as follows:

START

WAVE

END

START

WAVE

LOOP START

LOOP END

START

WAVE

END

A B C D E

A B C D E B C D

Press this to actually edit the selected wave.

The LEVEL indicators the right of each address show the signal level at the current address the longer the bar, the higher the signal level. This makes it easier to locate zero-level points for noise-free trimming and looping.

When the ONE SHOT or REVERSE is selected, select either the Start or End address of the wave. When the LOOP is selected, select the Start, Loop Start or Loop End address of the wave.

When this is turned ON, the LOOP ADDRESS LCD buttons will automatically only select points in the wave corresponding to, or adja- cent to, zero level points.

See above.

Press this to automatically remove all data prior to the specied Start point and after the End or Loop End point of your sample. See the illustration below.

Example

Start point Loop Start point

Loop End point

Start point Loop Start point

Loop End point

Sample

Start point Loop Start point

Loop End point

Sample

B, C, D, C, D, C, D ....

Extract

87

Samplingli

90 Reference

Normalize This function increases the overall level of the selected wave to ensure that it uses the full range of digital values. Press the EXECUTE LCD button to normalize the selected wave. No change will occur if the selected wave already uses the full range of digital values.

Volume/Tune

This display can be used to tune the wave to t a specied playback tempo. In other words, the wave is stretched (tuned down) or compressed (tuned up) so that it plays back over the specied number of measures at the specied time signature and tempo. This capability is particularly useful when the sample is a phrase rather than a simple sound. The wave will only play back at the specied tempo, however, when played at its original pitch (usually the pitch played by the C3 key). To ensure smooth looping, adjust the Loop Start/Stop point before using this function.

When this is turned OFF, the pitch of wave playback will be correspond to keyboard pitch. When ON, the playback pitch will remain the same (corresponding to the pitch of the C3 key) regardless of which key is pressed.

This can be used to tune the selected wave: COARSE tunes in semitone increments over a 63 +63 range, and FINE tunes in 1-cent increments over a 50 +50 range.

Set the volume of the selected wave.

Press this to actually set the wave tempo and return to the parameter display.

Press this to cancel the operation and return to the parameter display.

Specify the tempo at which the wave should play.

Specify the number of measures the wave should play over.

Specify the number of beats per measure.

When a LOOP is selected the entire loop is tuned, but the portion of the loop between the Loop Start and Loop End points is adjusted to t the specied number of measures.

88

Samplingli

Reference 91

Waveform Edit Add Wave This function can be used to add a wave from a different waveform to the currently selected waveform. When a waveform contains two or more waves, the individual waves must be assigned to different areas of the keyboard (the waves cannot be layered).

Wave Start Note/Volume/Delete Wave

The same wave cannot be added for use in multiple key- board ranges.

The Start Note at right in the display can also be speci- ed by pressing the appro- priate key on the keyboard while holding this button.

Select the source wave to be added.

Specify the note from which the added wave will begin playing. For example, if you select C3 as the Start Note, the original wave will play up to B2, and the added wave- form will play from C3 up.

Press this to actually add the selected wave.

The Start Note can also be changed by pressing the appropriate key on the key- board while holding this button.

Select a wave to be edited. Adjusts the volume of the selected wave in relation to other waves in the waveform.

Move the start note of the selected wave (see Add Wave, above). The Start Note of the lowest wave in the wave- form (i.e. the wave starting at C-2) cannot be changed. When the Start Note of a wave is changed, the range of the next lowest wave in the waveform will expand or contract accordingly.

Deletes the selected wave from the waveform. When a wave is deleted, the range of the next lowest wave will expand to include the range originally covered by the deleted wave. If the deleted wave is the lowest in the wave- form (i.e. its START NOTE is C-2) the range of the next highest wave will expand downward to include the range of the deleted wave. The last wave in the waveform cannot be deleted.

89

Custom Voice Creating

92 Reference

Quick Guide on page 40

The 9000Pro has a Custom Voice Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices. Once youve created a voice, you can store it to a Custom voice location for future recall.

The operations for each function corresponding to step #5 are covered in the following explanations.

Basic Procedure

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

1 Press the [SOUND CREATOR] button.

2 Select CUSTOM VOICE.

3 Select a Preset voice. The Custom Voice Creating mode makes it possible to cre- ate new voices by editing some parameters of the preset voices. After selecting a voice, press the [EXIT] button to return back to this display.

4 Press this button.

5 Edit the voice parameters.

6 Store the edited voice to Flash ROM by following the on-screen instructions.

Select the desired menu by pressing the [NEXT]/[BACK] button.

7 Press the [CUSTOM VOICE] button to select the edited voice and play the keyboard.

The following voices cannot be edited via the Custom Voice Creator.

Organ Flutes Live! StdKit Live! FunkKt Arabic Kit SFX Kit1 SFX Kit2 Plug-in Voice

Drum or Percussion voices cannot be edited via Easy Edit.

Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters may not make much change in the actual sound, depending on the original settings of the voice.

90

Custom Voice Creatingi i

Reference 93

Easy Editing Parameters

FILTER (FREQ. and RESONANCE) These settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain fre- quency range. In addition to making the sound either brighter or more mellow, Filter can be used to produce electronic, synthesizer-like effects.

FREQ. ............ Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the lter. (See diagram below.) Higher values result in a brighter sound.

RESONANCE . Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency, set in Cutoff above. (See diagram below.) Higher values result in a more pronounced effect.

EG The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone.

ATTACK........... Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played. The higher the value, the quicker the attack.

DECAY............ Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The higher the value, the quicker the decay.

RELEASE ....... Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. The higher the value, the shorter the release.

VIBRATO DEPTH............ Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram).

Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato. SPEED............ Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). DELAY ............ Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing

of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset.

FILTER Determines the timbre of the voice. See below for details. EG The EG (Envelope Generator) parameters affect the volume envelope of

the voice. See below for details.

VIBRATO Sets up the vibrato effect. See below for details. VOLUME Determines the volume of the voice.

Cutoff frequencyVolume

Frequency (pitch)

These frequencies are passed by the filter.

Cutoff frequencyVolume

Frequency (pitch)

Volume

Frequency (pitch)

Resonance

Time KEY ON KEY OFF

Level

ATTACK RELEASE

DECAY

DEPTH

SPEED

DELAY

Time

91

Custom Voice Creatingi i

94 Reference

Full Editing Element selection Each 9000Pro voice can have up to eight separate elements. These elements are the basic sonic building blocks of the sound with each element having its own waveform, envelope generator settings, and other parameters.

Parameters

VOICE

When editing in the E1:WAVEFORM, E2:EG, E3:FILTER, or E4:LFO pages you can select the element to be edited, set the maximum number of elements to be used by the voice, and mute individual elements via the ELEMENT page accessed by this button.

Sets the element to be edited when you return to the editing pages.

Sets the maximum number of elements to be used by the voice.

These parameters individually turn the corre- sponding elements ON or OFF. The circular indicators next to the element numbers in the upper section of the display indicate the mute status for each element.

You can select the desired element by pressing these buttons.

Select the desired menu.

Can be used during edit- ing to compare the sound of the original voice with the edited voice.

Sets the overall volume of the current edited voice.

The CURVE LCD button provides a choice of four keyboard initial touch sen- sitivity curves, and the SENS LCD but- tons adjust initial touch sensitivity.

Selects the desired scale (pitch) curve to be used by the current edited voice for the 9000Pro keyboard.

Sets the amount of Filter, Amplitude and LFO modulation types (PMOD, FMOD, AMOD) applied via the MODULATION wheel and via key- board After Touch response. See page 98 for details about LFO.

92

Custom Voice Creatingi i

Reference 95

E1: WAVEFORM See page 85 for details about Waveform.

No sound is produced.

No sound is produced.

LOW HIGH

No sound is produced.

No sound is produced.

HIGH

LOW

127

0

Use the CATEGORY, VOICE, and WAVE- FORM LCD buttons to select the waveform for the custom voice. (This is the raw sound on which the voice is based.) Wave- forms created by the SAMPLING feature (page 84) are also available for selection in the SAMPLING CATEGORY.

When a Drum Kit is selected, the WAVE- FORM parameter is replaced by the INSTRUMENT parameter, and individual instruments can be selected rather than waveforms.

NOTE LIMIT species the note range over which the voice will sound, and VELOCITY LIMIT sets the maximum velocity range for the voice.

These parameters adjust the pitch of the voice. COARSE tunes in semitone steps and FINE tunes in 1- cent steps (a cent is 1/100th of a semitone).

Sets the waveform volume.

Sets the amount of delay before the sound is heard in other words, the time between when the key is pressed and when the envelope begins. The higher the value the longer the delay.

Sets the position of the voice in the stereo eld.

Example for NOTE LIMIT

Example for VELOCITY LIMIT

When the voice OCTAVE is set to a value other than 0, the range specied by the NOTE LIMIT parameters is shifted by the corresponding amount and some notes may not sound. If this happens check the R1 OCTAVE setting in the MIXING CONSOLE TUNE display.

NOTE LIMIT and VELOCITY LIMIT are not available for the Drum Kits.

93

Custom Voice Creatingi i

96 Reference

E2: EG An acronym for Envelope Generator, a block that modies the level of the tone genera- tor from the moment that a note is played until the sound decays to silence. The Ampli- tude EG controls the volume level, the Pitch EG controls the pitch, and the Filter EG controls the lter cutoff frequency.

AMP. RATE and AMP. LEVEL (Amplitude EG settings) The AMP. RATE parameters are time-related; they determine how long it takes for the sound volume to change from level to level (as set in AMP. LEVEL). The AMP. LEVEL parameters are volume-related; they determine how loud or soft the volume changes are over time (as set in AMP. RATE).

PITCH RATE and PITCH LEVEL (Pitch EG settings) The PITCH RATE parameters are time-related; they determine how long it takes for the sounds pitch to change from level to level (as set in PITCH LEVEL). The PITCH LEVEL parameters are pitch-related; they determine how much the sound devi- ates from normal pitch over time (as set in PITCH RATE).

AMP.RATE ATTACK Sets the rate of variation from key-on to the maximum attack level. DECAY1 DECAY2 DECAY3

Set the rate of variation between the maximum attack level and the levels set by the AMP LEVEL DECAY1 and DECAY2 parameters and the final level, respectively.

RELEASE Sets the rate of variation from the level at key-release to level 0 when SUSTAIN is off. SUSTAIN Sets the rate of variation from the level at key-release to level 0 when SUSTAIN is on.

AMP.LEVEL INITIAL Sets the initial level of the envelope. DECAY1 DECAY2

Set the levels following the elapsed time of DECAY 1 and DECAY 2, respectively.

PITCH RATE DECAY1 DECAY2 DECAY3

Set the rate of variation between the initial pitch envelope level and the levels set by the PITCH LEVEL DECAY1, DECAY2, and DECAY3 parameters, respectively.

RELEASE Sets the rate of variation from the level at key-release to the level set by the PITCH LEVEL RELEASE parameter.

PITCH LEVEL INITIAL Sets the initial pitch of the envelope. DECAY1 DECAY2 DECAY3

Set the amounts of pitch change following the elapsed time of DECAY 1 and DECAY 2, respectively.

RELEASE Sets the final pitch of the envelope; the pitch goes to this point (at the RELEASE rate) after the key is released.

Indicates the EG settings as a diagram.

Resets the currently selected EG parameters to their most basic settings.

* Higher rate values produce faster variation.

ATTACK RATE DECAY1 RATE

D E

C A

Y 1 LE

V E

L

LEVEL

D E

C A

Y 2

LE V

E L

R E

LE A

S E

LE V

E L

S U

S T

A IN

LE V

E L

KEY ON KEY OFF

DECAY2 RATE DECAY3 RATE RELEASE RATE

SUSTAIN RATE

TIME

INITIAL LEVEL

Amplitude (volume), pitch or lter cutoff frequency

94

Custom Voice Creatingi i

Reference 97

FILTER RATE and FILTER LEVEL (Filter EG settings) The FILTER RATE parameters are time-related; they determine how long it takes for the sounds timbre to change from level to level (as set in FILTER LEVEL).

The FILTER LEVEL parameters are lter-related; they determine how much the sound changes in timbre over time (as set in FILTER RATE). A setting of 0 is the default value.

E3: FILTER The 9000Pro features two independent lters. (For basic information about the lters, see page 93.)

FILTER RATE INITIAL Sets the length of time the initial filter envelope level will be maintained. Higher values correspond to shorter time.

DECAY1 DECAY2 DECAY3

Set the rate of variation between the initial filter envelope level and the levels set by the FILTER LEVEL DECAY1, DECAY2, and DECAY3 parameters, respectively.

RELEASE Sets the rate of variation from the offset at key-release to the offset set by the FILTER LEVEL RELEASE parameter when SUSTAIN is off.

SUSTAIN Sets the rate of variation from the offset at key-release to the offset set by the FILTER LEVEL SUSTAIN parameter when SUSTAIN is on.

FILTER LEVEL INITIAL Sets the initial timbre of the envelope. DECAY1 DECAY2 DECAY3

Set the amounts of timbre change following the elapsed time of DECAY 1, DECAY 2, and DECAY 3, respectively.

SUSTAIN When SUSTAIN is on, this sets the final timbre of the envelope; the filter setting chang- es to this point (at the RELEASE rate) after the key is released.

These frequencies are passed by the filter.

Level

Frequency Cutoff frequency

Range passedCutoff range

Cutoff frequency

Level

Frequency

Range passedCutoff range Cutoff range

Center frequency

Level

Frequency Center frequency

Level

Frequency

Cutoff rangeRange passed Range passed

Sets the amount of peak resonance applied to FILTER 1. Higher values produce more resonant emphasis.

The TYPE parameters species the touch-sensitivity curve to be applied to the dynamic lters, and the SENS parameters sets the sensitivity of the lters to touch control. Higher values produce higher sensitivity.

Resets the currently selected EG parameters to their most basic settings.

Sets the cutoff frequency of Filter2.

Selects the type of Filter2.

Sets the cutoff frequency of Filter1.

Selects the type of Filter1.

Filter types

LPF (Low Pass Filter) HPF (High Pass Filter)

BPF (Band Pass Filter) BEF (Band Elimination Filter)

95

Custom Voice Creatingi i

98 Reference

E4: LFO An acronym for Low Frequency Oscillator, a block that produces a low frequency sig- nal. The LFO can be used to modulate pitch, lter cutoff frequency, or amplitude to create a wide range of modulation effects.

TYPE (LFO wave type)

DELAY TIME

DELAY RATE

Vibrato effect based on LFO modulation, with a variable delay between the time a key is played and the beginning of the vibrato effect.

See the diagram below.

Selects the LFO wave. Various kinds of modulated sounds can be created depending on the selected wave.

See the diagram below.

Sets the speed of LFO variation.

Abbreviation for "Amplitude Modulation." This determines how greatly the LFO will affect the output level. Larger val- ues widen the range of the volume change.

Abbreviation for "Filter Modulation." This determines how greatly the LFO will affect the lter cutoff frequency. Larger values widen the range of change in the cutoff frequency.

Abbreviation for "Pitch Modulation." This determines how greatly the LFO will affect the pitch. Larger values widen the range of the change in pitch.

Saw Triangle

Short Delay

Key on

Long Delay

Key on

Key on

Delay

Time

Rate

96

Custom Voice Creatingi i

Reference 99

VOICE SET See page 163 for details about the Voice Set function. You can specify the Voice Set data to the Custom Voice.

97

Creating Plug-in Custom Voices

100 Reference

Just as with the preset voices, you can use the voices of the Plug-in Board as basic material for crafting your own original Plug-in voices. Once youve created a voice, you can store it to a Plug-in Custom voice location for future recall.

Memory Structure of the Plug-in Voices The illustration below is basically same as the one on page 64. The illustration on page 64 describes the relationship between each menu of the Plug-in Manager function and the voice data on the Flash ROM/board. The illustration below, however, shows the relationship betweeen each menu of the Plug-in Custom Voice Creator function (explained in this chapter) and the voice data on the Flash ROM/board.

Guidelines

Bulk Send

Load

Store Store

Save

9000Pro

Flash ROM

PC connected to the 9000Pro, running XGworks (or XGworks lite) and the appropriate Plug-in software for voice editing.

Plug-in Custom Voice

Board Custom Voice

Native System Parameter

Functions in the Plug-in Custom Voice Creator

Plug-in Board

Board Preset Voice (ROM)

Board Custom Voice (RAM)

Native System Parameter

(RAM)

Voice Edit on Computer (page 106)

* Calling up the Board voices directly from the Plug-in Board.

** Selecting a Plug-in Voice calls up the corresponding parameters (such as effect settings, etc.) from 9000Pro Flash ROM and the corresponding Board Voice from the Plug-in Board.

*** Auto Loaded when turning the power ON. Auto Load can be set via Plug-in setting (page 69)

**** Board Custom Voice Backup (page 108)

***** Automatically loaded from Flash ROM to the Board RAM when turning the power ON. After editing the Board Custom Voice and Native System Parameter, you should execute the Bulk Send operation (see above) and the store operation (page 101.

Disk

Voice Edit (page 102)

Native System Parameter Edit

(page 105)

Plug-in Manager (page 66)

**

**

**

***

**** *****

*****

*

*

98

Creating Plug-in Custom Voicesi l i i

Reference 101

Editing operations (corresponding to step #4 or #7) are covered in the following expla- nations.

Basic Procedure

1 Press the [SOUND CREATOR] button.

6 Select a menu for editing the voice parameters via the panel operations.

7 Edit the voice parameters via the panel operations.

Select an original voice. The Custom Voice Creating mode makes it possible to create new voices by editing some parameters of the Plug-in Custom Voices. After selecting a voice, press the [EXIT] button to return back to this display.

8 Store the edited voice to Flash ROM.

3 Select a menu for edit- ing the Board Custom Voices on a computer, if necessary.

Steps #3 - #5 (described in detail on page 106) are optional. Use these operations if you wish to edit the Board Custom Voices and the Native System Parameters on which the Plug- in Custom Voices are based.

2 Select "PLUG-IN VOICE."

4 Edit the voice parame- ters on a computer. After completing edit- ing, use the Bulk Send operation to transfer the edited data from the computer to the board.

5 Execute the Board Cus- tom Voice Backup oper- ation.

See page 172 for details about connecting a com- puter. Please note that the MIDI A terminal (or the TO HOST terminal) should be used when editing the Board Custom Voices on a computer.

When editing the Board Custom Voices using a computer, XGworks or XGworks lite and its Plug- in Editor Software are needed.

When editing the Board Custom Voices, place check marks next to all the event types of MIDI Thru Filter in XGworks or XGworks lite. (Refer to the owners manual of XGworks or XGworks lite for details.)

99

Creating Plug-in Custom Voicesi l i i

102 Reference

Voice Editing Board Voice selection The explanations here apply to step #7 on page 101.

Before entering the Plug-in Custom Voice Creator function, you have already called up a specic voice for editing. Selecting a Board voice here lets you determine the basic sound source, letting you select a variation sound for the voice.

Select the Board Voice.

Can be used to com- pare the sound of the originally selected voice with the changed voice.

Select the desired menu and edit the voice parameters.

Select this to store the edited voice parameters to Flash ROM (step #8 on page 101).

Keep in mind that some of your editing may have little to no effect on the actual sound, depending on the particular board and the particular parameter being edited.

100

Creating Plug-in Custom Voicesi l i i

Reference 103

Parameters The explanations here apply to step #7 on page 101.

E1: EG/VIB The explanations of each parameter are same as Easy Editing in the Custom Voice Creating section on page 93.

E2: CTRL (Control)

Select this to go to the Store display (step #8 on page 101).

Select the desired menu.

Select this to go to the Store dis- play (step #8 on page 101).

Select the desired menu. These determine how the various

controllers (MODULATION Wheel, keyboard After Touch, Assignable Controller) affect the sound. You can set the amount of Filter and Amplitude change, as well as the depth of LFO modulation of pitch (PMOD), lter (FMOD) and volume (AMOD). For more information on LFO, see page 98.

Sets the depth and the offset of the Initial Touch Sensitivity.

This determines which Control Change number will be used for Assignable Controller 1. This function is available only for Plug-in Boards that support the Assignable Controller (AC1).

In this example, the PLG150-AN is installed to the 9000Pro and the MODULATION Wheel is used to change the sound of the Plug-in voice. Make the follow- ing settings on the 9000Pro:

1) Set the AC1 CTRL No. to Mod. 2) Select the desired AC1 Control Parameter (e.g.,

P:34) in the Native Part Parameter display. 3) Adjust the AC1 Control Depth in the Native Part

Parameter display.

When you play the keyboard and move the MODULA- TION Wheel, the sound of the Plug-in voice changes according to the AC1 Control parameter you selected in step #2.

10 1

Creating Plug-in Custom Voicesi l i i

104 Reference

E3: NATIVE PRM. (Native Part Parameter) The word native here describes the parameters that are exclusive to each of the Plug-in Boards. Because of this, the editing screens displayed on the 9000Pro will differ depending on the particular Plug-in Board being used. For example, when editing Plug-in voices of the PLG150-DX, parameter names such as Carrier and Modulator which are unique to the FM Synthesis system are displayed, as shown below on the left. Likewise, when editing Plug-in voices of the PLG150-VL, the 9000Pro displays parameters unique to the VL tone generation system such as Brth Mode (Breath Mode) and Emb CC No. (Embouchure Control Change Number), as shown below on the right.

For details about Native Part Parameters, refer to the Owners Manual of your Plug-in Board.

VOICE SET See page 163 for details about the Voice Set function. You can specify the Voice Set data to the Plug-in Custom Voice.

Select the desired parameter.

When editing a DX plug-in voice:

Specify the value.

When editing a VL plug-in voice:

102

Creating Plug-in Custom Voicesi l i i

Reference 105

Native System Parameter Editing The word native here describes the parameters that are exclusive to each of the Plug- in Boards. Because of this, the editing screens displayed on the 9000Pro will differ depending on the particular Plug-in Board being used. For example, when editing Plug-in voices of the PLG150-VL, parameter names such as WX Lip and Brth Curv (Breath Curve) which are unique to the VL tone generation system are dis- played, as shown below on the right.

The illustration below applies to step #7 of the Basic Procedure on page 101.

Select the desired Board.

When the same (or same type) of Plug-in Boards (e.g., the PLG100-DX and the PLG150- DX) have been installed in the two slots, only SLOT 1 is avail- able.

This lets you change the volume out- put from the Plug-in Board and adjust the relative balance among the 9000Pro preset voices and the Plug- in voices. Please note the following points. The volume balance of the song

using the Plug-in voices is changed by adjusting this value.

When the same (or same type) of Plug-in Boards have been installed in the two slots, only the value set for SLOT 1 is available.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

You can store the settings in this display to Flash ROM by using this button.

10 3

Creating Plug-in Custom Voicesi l i i

106 Reference

Voice Editing on a Computer You can edit Board Custom Voices and Native System Parameters from your computer, using special plug-in software for the XGworks (or XGworks lite) program.

1 Connect your personal computer to the 9000Pro. See page 172 for details about connecting a computer. Please note that the MIDI A terminal (or the TO HOST terminal) should be used when editing the Board Custom Voices on a computer.

2 Install the software to the computer.

The following software is required. XGworks or XGworks lite Please see the readme.txt le that can be found in the XGworks lite folder.

CBX driver for Windows or USB driver Please see the readme.txt le that can be found in the CBX driver folder or in the USB driver folder.

Plug-in Editor Software for XGworks (lite) For installation instructions, refer to the Owners Manual of your particular Plug-in Board.

Place check marks next to all the event types of MIDI Thru Filter in XGworks or XGworks lite, when editing the Board Custom Voices.

3 If necessary, save any important voice data (Board Custom Voice and Native System Parameter data in Flash ROM) by using the Plug-in Manager function (page 68).

Plug-in Editor Software PLG100-VL, PLG150-VL VL Visual Editor PLG100-DX, PLG150-DX DX Easy Editor, DX Simulator PLG150-AN AN Easy Editor, AN Expert Editor PLG150-PF PF Easy Editor

104

Creating Plug-in Custom Voicesi l i i

Reference 107

4 Load the appropriate les to both the 9000Pro and your com- puter.

When editing voices on an installed Plug-in Board for the rst time: Make sure to load the appropriate les (on the oppy disk included with the 9000Pro) to the 9000Pro as follows. For the PLG150-AN board only, you'll need to also load the appropriate le (below) to your computer.

When editing voices on an installed Plug-in Board in subsequent editing sessions:

Before starting to make additional edits to a previously edited voice, also make sure to load the same edited data (the data that you saved in steps #7 and #8) to both the Flash ROM (on the 9000Pro) and the computer.

5 Use the same operation as in Steps #1 - #5 of the "Basic Pro- cedure" on page 101, paying attention to the following points. In step #4 of "Basic Procedure, the following display appears on the

9000Pro's LCD.

As described in step #4 of "Basic Procedure, use the Bulk Send operation (XGworks or XGworks lite) to transfer the edited data from the computer to the board.

As described in step #5 of "Basic Procedure, execute the Board Custom Voice Backup operation.

6 Execute the Store operation in the Native System Parameter display (page 105).

7 Save the edited voice to a disk via the Plug-in Manager func- tion (page 68).

8 Save the edited voice to the PC.

File name to be loaded to the 9000Pro to the PC

PLG150-AN 150AN CsVce.xvc 150AN CsVce.ANS PLG150-PF 150PF CsVce.xvc PLG150-DX 150DX CsVce.xvc PLG150-VL 150VL CsVce.xvc

10 5

Creating Plug-in Custom Voicesi l i i

108 Reference

Board Custom Voice Backup Any editing you do to the Board Custom Voices (via computer connected to the 9000Pro) is lost when you turn off the power of the 9000Pro. If you want to keep your original voice data, you can use the Board Custom Voice Backup function to back up the edited Board Custom Voices to Flash ROM. The illustration below applies to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 101.

Select the desired board.

Press this to execute the Backup operation.

Some Plug-in Boards (e.g., the PLG100-DX and the PLG100- VL) do not support this func- tion, even though the Board Custom Voices are available.

Troubleshooting when using the Plug-in Boards General information on how to use the Plug-in Voices is given on pages 42, 43, 64 - 69, and 100 - 108. This section explains some important details concerning the Plug-in Boards that are not covered in these pages.

Using the VL Plug-in voices with Harmony function (page 164) If you are using one of the VL Plug-in Boards (or a monophonic Plug-in voice), the Harmony effect cannot be used as normal. It is because this type of voice cannot be played polyphoni- cally. For example, when the Plug-in voice using the PLG150-VL board is selected as the Right 1 voice and Harmony Assign is set to R1, the following problem happens.

An alternate solution for this is to assign a different voice to the Harmony part, as shown in the example settings below.

Right 1 ................... Plug-in voice using the PLG150-VL board (e.g., Tenor Sax) Right 2 ................... 9000Pro preset voice (e.g., Miller Night) Part R1 and R2...... ON ASSIGN................. R2

This workaround lets you play the monophonic Plug-in voice for the melody, and use a different, yet complementary sound for the Harmony part.

This note does not sound.Main note (you play)

Only this note (or one of these notes) sounds with the Right 1 voice.

Harmony note(s)

The Right 1 voice sounds. Main note (you play)

The Right 2 voice sounds. Harmony note(s)

106

Creating Plug-in Custom Voicesi l i i

Reference 109

Using the Plug-in voices in Song Creator See page 125.

Differences between the PLG150 and PLG100 series (Single Part Plug-in Boards) If you intend to use Single Part Plug-in Boards, Yamaha recommends that you use the PLG150 series boards exclusively. For this reason, the included oppy disk features voice data for PLG150 series Plug-in Boards. However, you can use the PLG100 series if you keep in mind the following points and anomalies.

Poly Expansion (page 69) If you have installed a PLG150 Board to SLOT 1 and a PLG100 Board to SLOT 2 (or, in other words, installed a higher level board of the same type to SLOT 1), and have set POLY EXPAN- SION to ON, you may experience certain problems when playing the voices.

When you have installed a PLG150-DX to SLOT 1 and a PLG100-DX to SLOT 2: No problem should result when using the installed voices in both boards; however, if you try to play voices that do not exist on the PLG100-DX (SLOT2), the sound may drop out period- ically. Make sure to use only those voices that are common to the two boards.

When you have installed a PLG150-VL to SLOT 1 and a PLG100-VL to SLOT 2: If the Breath Mode of the PLG150-VL Native Part parameters (a parameter that does not exist on the PLG100-VL) is set to a value other than "System, the volume and timbre of the played voice changes every other note. Make sure to set the Breath Mode to "System" in this case.

Data compatibility The Board Custom Voices are not available in PLG100 series boards. As a result, data related problems will occur when loading the voice data from disk to Flash ROM with the Plug-in Man- ager function.

When you install the PLG100 series voice data with a PLG150 Board installed: The Plug-in Voice using the Board Custom Voice may not sound appropriately, if the Board Custom Voice has been edited and Board Custom Backup has been executed. This is because the PLG100 series voice data does not contain the Board Custom Voice data.

When you install the PLG150 series voice data with a PLG100 Board installed: The Board Custom Voice data loaded from disk is not used. Therefore, voices using this

data may sound different than expected or than originally programmed.

If a PLG100-DX board is installed and you select a voice based on a voice that does not exist on the PLG100-DX board, no sound results.

The Breath Mode setting of the PLG150-VL Native Part parameters is ignored, and the Breath Mode setting of the PLG100-VL Native System parameters is available.

Setting the Unison Switch of the PLG150-AN board to on Plug-in Voices of the PLG150-AN for which Unison Switch (of the Native System parameters) has been set to on, cannot be played polyphonically even if the 9000Pros POLY/MONO but- ton is set to POLY. Note that many of the Plug-in Custom Voices in the included disk are delib- erately set to Unison On, to effectively recreate popular monophonic synthesizer sounds.

10 7

Song Creator

110 Reference

Quick Guide on page 40

With the powerful and easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard perfor- mances to a oppy disk as a User song, and create your own complete, fully orchestrated compositions. Each User song lets you record up to sixteen independent tracks. These include not only the voices for the keyboard performance (R1, R2, R3, L), but also the auto accompaniment parts and Vocal Harmony effect.

Song Tracks The tracks which can be recorded to the songs are organized as shown in the chart below.

Multi Track Recording/Quick Recording Multi Track Recording In Multi Track Recording, you determine the track assignments (as shown above) before record- ing. Several tracks can be recorded simultaneously. In addition to being able to record to empty tracks, you can also re-record tracks that already contain recorded data.

Quick Recording In Quick Recording, you can quickly record without having to worry about the track assignments above. Quick Recording automatically makes track assignments according to the simple rules below. When MANUAL tracks are set to REC, your keyboard performances (VOICE R1, R2, R3, L) and Multi Pads playback are recorded to tracks 1~8 as listed below. When ACMP tracks are set to REC, the auto accompaniment parts are recorded to tracks 9 ~ 16 as listed below.

Realtime Recording/Step Recording Realtime Recording This method records performance data in real time, overwriting any data already present in the destination track. The new data replaces the previous data. Basic information on recording a new song, refer to the "Quick Guide" on pages 36 and 38.

Step Recording This method lets you compose your performance by writing it down one event at a time. This is a non-realtime, step recording method - similar to writing music notation onto paper. The Song Creator offers two different step recording types: Chord Step (available for Quick Recording) and Step Recording (available for Multi Track Recording).

Guidelines for Song Creating

Track Default Part Parts that can be set 1 Right1 2 Right1 3 Right1 4 Right1 5 Right1 6 Right1 7 Right1 8 Right1 VOICE R1, R2, R3, L, Accompaniment Style track, Multi Pad 1~4, Vocal Harmony, MIDI 9 Accompaniment Style RHYTHM1 (Sub)

10 Accompaniment Style RHYTHM2 (Main) 11 Accompaniment Style BASS 12 Accompaniment Style CHORD1 13 Accompaniment Style CHORD2 14 Accompaniment Style PAD 15 Accompaniment Style PHRASE1 16 Accompaniment Style PHRASE2

Track Part 1 Right1 2 Right2 3 Right3 4 Left 5 Multi Pad 1 6 Multi Pad 2 7 Multi Pad 3 8 Multi Pad 4

Track Part 9 Accompaniment Style RHYTHM1

10 Accompaniment Style RHYTHM2 11 Accompaniment Style BASS 12 Accompaniment Style CHORD1 13 Accompaniment Style CHORD2 14 Accompaniment Style PAD 15 Accompaniment Style PHRASE1 16 Accompaniment Style PHRASE2

108

Song Creator

Reference 111

Basic Procedure

If an optional hard disk has been installed or an optional SCSI device has been con- nected, you can also save the recorded song data to these in step #7.

2 Select SONG CREATOR.

3 Select the desired menu.

4 Select the Record method.

5 Set up for the recording. See page 112

Set the desired track to REC.

When selecting "MULTI TRACK RECORD."

When selecting "QUICK RECORD."

Multi Track Recording

Quick Recording

6 Record your performance or edit the selected song.

Select the desired menu by pressing the [NEXT] or [BACK] button.

Select the part for the corresponding track.

1 Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button.

7 Save the song to disk.

Select this to call up the Chord Step display.

Select this to call up the Step Recording display.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

This screen appears only when select- ing CURRENT SONG in step #3.

10 9

Song Creator

112 Reference

Track Setting for Recording (Multi Track Recording) The explanations here apply to step #5 on page 111.

Record Mode Replace........... Follow the normal recording procedure described in the previous sec-

tion. The only difference is that recording will begin from the measure specied at the MEASURE SET, and all data from that point to the end of the song will be replaced by the newly-recorded material.

Punch In.......... This function allows you to selectively re-record a portion of a song track (the measures between the specied punch-in and punch-out points).

In the eight-measure example below, measures 3 through 5 are re-recorded.

Measure Set When the RECORD MODE is set to REPLACE, this parameter species the mea-

sure you want to start recording from. When the RECORD MODE is set to PUNCH IN, this parameter species the rst

playback measure. Be sure to give yourself a few measures lead-in prior to the actual punch-in point.

Available when PUNCH IN TRIG- GER is set to AUTO SET.

See Part Selecting/ Record Selecting on page 113.

Select REC MODE which appears when selecting CURRENT SONG in step #3.

Select the part for the corresponding track.

Select the desired menu.

See Delete on page 113.

Set the desired track to REC.

Select this to return to the TRACK main display.

Set the related parameter. For details, see below

Record track

Play track

Muted track

No data

See page 125.

Punch In recording has another exceptionally conve- nient advantage it automati- cally records any panel settings youve made, allowing you to have various settings (such as voice, volume, pan, etc.) change instantly and automatically right before the Punch In point!

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Recording start (Punch In)

Recording stop (Punch Out)

Previously played data

Newly played data Previously played data

110

Song Creator

Reference 113

Punch In Trigger First Key On ...... When FIRST KEY ON is selected, recording will begin when the rst

key is played on the keyboard. Footswitch 1/2 ... When FOOT SW 1 or FOOT SW 2 is selected, recording will begin

when a footswitch connected to the corresponding rear-panel FOOT SWITCH jack is pressed.

Auto Set ............ When AUTO SET is selected, the punch-in and punch-out measures are specied by the IN and OUT buttons (i.e., recording begins auto- matically at the IN measure and ends at the OUT measure).

Part Selecting/Record Selecting The default part for each track is displayed above the REC setting. The parts can be changed as required by pressing the [PART SEL.] LCD button (the part names for each track will be highlighted), selecting the desired parts via the corresponding but- tons. When the parts have been changed, press the [REC SEL.] LCD button (the PART SEL. LCD button will have changed to the [REC SEL.] LCD button) again to return to the normal track setup display.

Delete When the [DEL.] LCD button is pressed DELETE will appear for tracks which contain data. Select DELETE via the corresponding LCD buttons while holding the [DEL.] button to delete all data in the corresponding tracks. The data is actually deleted when the [DEL.] LCD button is released.

Song Save/Delete Save................ This function saves the edited song to the disk. Delete ............. This function deletes the specied song le from the disk.

Track Setting for Recording (Quick Recording) The explanations here apply to step #5 on page 111.

Delete When the [DEL.] LCD button is pressed DELETE will appear for tracks which contain data. Select DELETE via the corresponding LCD buttons while holding the [DEL.] button to delete all data in the corresponding tracks. The data is actually deleted when the [DEL.] LCD button is released.

Set the desired track to REC.

Change the measure at which recording starts.

Play track Muted trackNo data

Record track

See page 125.

11 1

Song Creator

114 Reference

Song Edit Functions (Multi Track Recording) The explanations here apply to step #6 on page 111.

Quantize Quantize lets you clean up or tighten the timing of a previously recorded track. For example, the following musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth- note values.

Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat (or both!). Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a track so that the timing is absolutely accurate to the specied note value.

About Quantize size Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the track you are working with. For example, if the data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 for the quantize value. If the quantize function is applied in this case with the value set to 1/4, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes.

Press this to quantize the data.

This determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the specied quantization beats only by the specied amount.

Select the Quantize size (resolution). See below for details.

Select the track to be quantized.

One measure of 8th notes before quantization

After quantization

1/8 note 1/16 note 1/32 note

1/16 note + 1/8 note triplet

1/4 note

1/4 note triplet 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note triplet

1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet

1/16 note + 1/16 note triplet

The quantize sizes are :

* *

*

The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time, without compromis- ing the quantization of either one. For example, if you have both straight 1/8 notes ( ) and 1/8 note triplets ( ) recorded to the same track, and you quan- tize to straight 1/8 notes ( ), all notes in the track are quan- tized to straight 1/8 notes which completely eliminates any triplet feel in the rhythm! However, if you use the 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet setting ( ), both the straight and trip- let notes will be quantized cor- rectly.

3

112

Song Creator

Reference 115

Track Mixing This function allows data from two tracks can be mixed and the results placed in a dif- ferent track , or data to be copied from one track to another.

Note Shift This allows tracks which contain data to be individually transposed up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments.

Song Setup (Multi Track Recording) This function lets you assign the DSP effect block (4~7) to any of the current songs tracks. Other parameters can be modied up as required via the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 144).

Press this to execute the Track Mix operation. After execution the this button changes to an UNDO button which can be used to undo the copy/mix operation if the results are not satisfactory (the UNDO button will only remain active until the next operation is performed).

Specify the tracks to be mixed. Select the track into which the results will be placed.

To simply copy from the SOURCE1 track to the DESTINA- TION track select COPY via the SOURCE2 LCD buttons.

All data other than the mixed note data is derived from the SOURCE1 track.

The Part Assign parameters of the Plug-in Voice are not cop- ied to the destination part even if the Track Mix operation is executed. Therefore, set the Part Assign parameter (in the System Exclusive - XG param- eters) to the corresponding Part number in the Event List display (page 120) after exe- cuting the Track Mix operation. For details about the Part Assign parameters, refer to the Owner's Manual of your Plug- in Board.

Set the desired amount of transposition for each track (note-shift controls will only appear for tracks which contain data).

Press this to execute the Note Shift operation. After execution this button changes to an UNDO button which can be used to undo the Note Shift operation if the results are not satisfactory (the UNDO button will only remain active until the next operation is per- formed).

Adjust any track while holding this button to set the note shift for all tracks simultaneously.

The TR1~8/TR9~16 LCD button can be used to switch between tracks 1 through 8 and tracks 9 through 16.

The tempo of the song can be set as required via the Data dial, and all other available parameters can be modied as required via the MIXING CON- SOLE displays.

Press this to record the settings to the current song.

Assign the DSP effect block (4~7) to any of the current songs tracks.

Only one of the Setup parame- ters can be recorded to each track, and any parameter changes made in the middle of the song will be cancelled. However, in the case of Volume and Tempo data, any Volume and Tempo changes in the mid- dle of the song are applied as an offset to the initial Setup Data setting.

11 3

Song Creator

116 Reference

Step Recording (Multi Track Recording) The Step Recording feature makes it possible to record notes with absolutely precise timing. The explanations here apply to step #5 on page 111.

Entering the Note Event This section explains how to step-record notes, using three specic examples.

Example 1

START/STOP

1 Call up the Step Recording display by pressing the [STEP REC] button.

Make sure this is selected.

2 Play the keys C, D, E, F, G, A, B and C in order.

3 Press the [START/STOP] button to hear your newly recorded notes.

114

Song Creator

Reference 117

Example 2

q Select this resolution.

e Press this while holding F.

q Select this resolution.

w

w

e

r

1

3

2

w Select this resolution.

Press this button, repeatedly if necessary, to enable the dot- ted note selectors at the bot- tom of the display. (Pressing the button alternately switches the note selectors among three basic note values: nor- mal, dotted and triplet.)

e

4

w Select this resolution.

q

Press this button, repeatedly if necessary, to re-enable the normal note selectors.

q

e

5

START/STOP

Press the [ ] button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song and press the [START/STOP] button to hear your newly recorded notes.

11 5

Song Creator

118 Reference

Example 3

START/STOP

q Select this resolution. e Press this again while holding C3.

w

1

Press and hold C3.

w Press this while holding C3 and E3.

2 q

Press and hold C3 and E3.

w Press this while holding C3, E3 and G3.

3 q

Press and hold C3, E3 and G3.

w Press this while holding C3, E3, G3 and C4.

4 q

Press and hold C3, E3, G3 and C4.

5

e Press this while holding C3, E3, G3 and C4, and release the four keys.

Press the [ ] button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song and press the [START/STOP] button to hear your newly recorded notes.

116

Song Creator

Reference 119

The functions of each menu item in the display are explained below.

About Measure/Beat/Clock

Velocity settings The following parameters are available.

Kbd. Vel ........... When this is selected, the strength at which you play the keyboard deter- mines the recorded velocity values.

fff ..................... The velocity of the entered note is set to 127. ff ...................... The velocity of the entered note is set to 111. f ....................... The velocity of the entered note is set to 95. mf .................... The velocity of the entered note is set to 79. mp................... The velocity of the entered note is set to 63. p ...................... The velocity of the entered note is set to 47. pp.................... The velocity of the entered note is set to 33. ppp.................. The velocity of the entered note is set to 15.

Gate time settings The following parameters are available.

Normal ............ 80%

Tenuto ............. 100%

Staccato.......... 40%

Staccatissimo.. 20%

Manual ............. When this is selected, you can specify the Gate time as a percentage manually.

When this is set to on (highlighted), you can play only the currently displayed track.

Select the track to be recorded.

Instantly returns to the rst beginning of the current recorded song (i.e. the rst beat of the rst measure).

Moves the cursor up/down.

The "size" of the current recording step time for the next note to be entered. This determines to what posi- tion the pointer will advance after a note has been entered.

Press this to actually delete the event at the current cursor position.

Pressing the button alternately switches the note selectors (at the bottom of the display) among three basic note values: normal, dotted and triplet..

This sets the note length (time that the note is actu- ally sounded), as a percentage of the step time. See "Gate time settings" below.

This species the velocity for the next note to be entered. See "Velocity settings" below.

This shows the current position at which you enter the note.

Clock: 384 clocks per 1/4-note. Beat: 1 - 4 (for 4/4 time) Measure number

Measue

Beat

Clock

1

1

000- 383

2

000- 383

3

000- 383

4

000- 383

2

1

000- 383

2

000- 383

3

000- 383

4

000- 383

11 7

Song Creator

120 Reference

Entering other events (Event List) In addition to Note on/off, the following events can be recorded in the Event List display.

Conductor Track: Tempo Time Signature End Mark System Exclusive (XG parameters) System Exclusive (others) * Meta Event * * These are displayed only and cannot be edited.

Tracks 1 through 16: Note on/off ........................ Messages which are generated when the keyboard is

played. Each message includes a specic note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a veloc- ity value based on how hard the key is played.

Control Change................. Controller settings such as volume, pan (edited via the Mix- ing Console), etc.

Program Change............... Voice selecting Pitch Bend ........................ Bends the pitch of notes up or down. Channel Aftertouch ........... Applies aftertouch to all notes. Polyphonic Aftertouch....... Applies aftertouch to a single note.

When this is set to on (highlighted), you can play only the current recorded track.

Select the track to be edited.

Instantly returns to the rst beginning of the current recorded song (i.e. the rst beat of the rst measure).

Moves the cursor upward/downward. Keep in mind that moving the cursor away from the just-edited value automatically enters that value.

Press this to add a new event to the Event List.

Press this to actually delete the event at the current cursor position.

Adjust the event value nely.

Adjust the event value coarsely.

Moves the cursor leftward/rightward. Keep in mind that moving the cursor away from the just-edited value automatically enters that value.

If the value at the cursor has been changed, pressing this restores the original value.

Determines the method of event selec- tion: single or multiple. Press this to cut all the selected events and copy them to the clipboard. Press this to copy all the selected events to the clipboard. Press this to paste all the event data that is currently contained in the clip- board.

To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the [START/STOP] button to start playback.

This shows the current position at which you edit the event.

Clock: 384 clocks per 1/4-note. Beat: 1 - 4 (for 4/4 time) Measure number

118

Song Creator

Reference 121

About Multiple Event Selection This convenient feature lets you select several events together, making it possible to change the values of many different events at once, or easily and quickly copy many events to another location.

Changing the values of multiple events In the example explanation below, well increase the velocity of the selected note data by 20.

q Using the [ ] button, move the cursor to the rst event at the top of Event List, and select the velocity value.

w Press the [SEL] button to enable multiple event selection. e Use the [ ] button to determine the range to be selected. Each successive event

that you scroll through in this way is selected. r Use the data dial to change the value. All values for the selected events are changed

simultaneously. t To actually enter the changes, press the [SEL] button again to return to single event

selection.

Copying and pasting multiple events In the example explanation below, well copy the events of the second measure in song data and paste them to the third measure.

q Use the [ ] or [ ] buttons to move the cursor to the beginning of the second measure. w Press the [SEL] button to enable multiple event selection. e Use the [ ] button to determine the range to be selected. For this example, scroll to the last

event in the measure so that all events in measure 2 are selected. r Press the [COPY] button. t Press the [SEL] button to change to single event selection. y Set the destination (the top of measure 3, in this case) by using the [MEAS], [BEAT] and [CLK]

buttons. u Press the [PASTE] button.

Event data Clipboard Event data at the new location Copy Copy

The diagram below illustrates how the 9000Pro handles the copy/paste operation.

11 9

Song Creator

122 Reference

The clipboard is a temporary holding place for the copied data (as done in Steps #3 and #4 above). Once the data is in the clipboard, and as long as no other data has been copied there, the data can be pasted to other locations as many times as desired. Keep in mind that copying data automatically erases whatever data was originally in the clipboard. (The data at the original location in the song remains intact.)

Event Filter This function lets you select the event types that appear on the editing displays. To select an event for display, place a checkmark in the box next to the event name. To l- ter out an event type (so that it does not appear on the list), remove the checkmark so that the box is empty. See below for details.

Chord Step (Quick Recording) The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record Auto Accompaniment chord (page 70) changes one at a time with precise timing. Since the changes dont have to be entered in real time, it is easy to create even complex chord changes and accompaniment before recording the melody. The explanations here apply to step #6 on page 111.

Entering the Chord/Section (Chord Step) For example, the following chord progression can be entered by the procedure described below.

Enters checkmarks into all boxes.

Selects only note data; checkmarks for all other boxes are removed.

Reverses the check- mark settings for all boxes. In other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously un-checked, and vice versa.

Enters/removes the check- mark in the selected box.

Select the desired event. Removes all check- marks at once.

CM7 Dm7 Em7 Dm7 G7 C

MAIN D FILL IN C MAIN C

ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL

MAIN VARIATION

A B C D

Select this resolution and play chords as shown at right.

1 Press the [MAIN D] button to specify the sec- tion and enter the chords as shown at right.

Play CM7.

Play Dm7.

Play Em7.

001:1:000

001:3:000

002:1:000

120

Song Creator

Reference 123

FILL IN & BREAK

2 Press the [FILL] button to specify the section "FILL IN C" and enter the chords as shown at right.

Select this resolution and play chords as shown at right.

CM7 Dm7 Em7

MAIN D

CM7 Dm7 Em7 Dm7 G7

MAIN D FILL IN C

Play Dm7.

Play G7.

3 The [MAIN C] section is automatically selected.

Play C.

ACCOMPANIMENT CONTROL

MAIN VARIATION

A B C D

CM7 Dm7 Em7 Dm7 G7 C

MAIN D FILL IN C MAIN C

START/STOP

4

Press the [ ] button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song and press the [START/STOP] button to hear the Auto Accompaniment performance of your newly recorded data.

002:4:000

003:1:000

002:3:000

12 1

Song Creator

124 Reference

END MARK is shown in the display, indicating the end of the song data. The End Mark position for Chord Step is automatically determined according to the section that is input at the end of the song.

Intro................. The End Mark is automatically recorded to a point following the Intro data (however many measures it is from the position of the last input to the end of the Intro data).

Main ................ The End Mark is automatically recorded two measures following the position of the last input.

Fill ................... The End Mark is automatically recorded one measure following the posi- tion of the last input.

Ending............. The End Mark is automatically recorded to a point following the Ending data (however many measures it is from the position of the last input to the end of the Ending data).

The End Mark can be freely set to any position desired, if the automatically assigned position doesnt suit you.

The functions of each menu item in the display are explained below.

Entering other events (Event List) In addition to the Chord/Section, the following events can be recorded in the Event List display. All menu items in the display are the same as in Step Recording (page 120).

Tempo Accompaniment Volume Accompaniment Part Volume Accompaniment Part on/off Style number Section Chord

Instantly returns to the beginning of the current recorded song (i.e. the rst beat of the rst measure).

Moves the cursor upward/downward.

Press this to actually delete the event at the current cursor position.

The "size" of the current recording step. This determines to what position the pointer will advance after a chord has been entered.

This shows the current position at which you enter the chord.

Clock:384 clocks per 1/4-note (selectable 000 or 192)

Beat: 1 - 4 (for 4/4 time) Measure number

122

Song Creator

Reference 125

Event Filter This function lets you select the event types that appear on the editing displays. To select an event for display, place a checkmark in the box next to the event name. To l- ter out an event type (so that it does not appear on the list), remove the checkmark so that the box is empty.

Selects only chord data; checkmarks for all other boxes are removed.

Style Number, Section Name, Chord Name, and Tempo are on (checked) by default.

Using the Plug-in voices in Song Creator Keep in mind that a single Plug-in Board can only sound one part (one Plug-in voice) at a time. For this reason, you may run into the following problems when using certain Song Creator functions with the Plug-in voices:

When you stop recording (step #9 on pages 37 and 39), with a Plug-in voice: For example, when recording the R1 voice (when that is assigned to a Plug-in voice), the R1 part button automatically turns off when the [STOP] button is pressed. This happens in order that the you can hear the recorded song properly with the Plug-in Voice (step #10 on pages 37 and 39).

When you use the Song Player to play back a song recorded with the Plug-in voices: If any one of the parts of the Plug-in voice (R1, R2, R3, or L) is set to ON, the part in the song cor- responding to the Plug-in voice will automatically be muted. Therefore, if you want to properly play back a song using Plug-in voices, make sure that the corresponding parts (R1, R2, R3, or L) are set to OFF before selecting the song.

RIGHT3RIGHT2

UPPER

LEFTLEFT HOLD

LOWER

RIGHT1

PART ON/OFF

When you stop recording, the connection with the Plug-in Board automatically switches to the Song Creator.

The connection with the Plug-in Board can be switched to the keyboard part by press- ing the PART ON/OFF button.

The connection with the Plug-in Board can be switched to the Song part by pressing the [Plug-in] LCD button.

Plug-in Board

Song Creator Keyboard

Plug-in Board

Song Creator Keyboard

The explanations above apply only to the Song Creator and Song Player functions. They do not apply to the Style Creator and Multi Pad Creator, since the Plug-in voices cannot be used with those functions.

12 3

Style Creator

126 Reference

The 9000Pro lets you create original styles which can be used for auto accompaniment in the same way as the preset styles.

When creating a song (page 110), you record your keyboard performance to the 9000Pro as MIDI data. Creating of styles, however, is done in a different way. The Style Creator provides two basic ways: assembling and recording.

Assembling styles ....... Page 129 The Style Creator provides two basic ways to assemble styles:

Easy Edit This method lets you assemble styles based on the preset/ash style that is most similar to the style you wish to create.

New Style Assembly The 9000Pro allows you to create composite styles by combining various patterns from the internal Preset and Flash styles. For example, in creating your own 8-beat style, you could take the rhythm pattern from the 8 Beat 1 style, use the bass pattern from the 8 Beat 2 style, and take the chord pattern from the Pop Rock style combining the various elements to create one style.

Recording styles (Full Edit ....... page 132) When recording a song, you record your keyboard performance to the 9000Pro as MIDI data. Recording styles, however, is done in a different way. Here are some of the aspects in which style recording differs from song recording:

Using Preset Styles As shown in the chart at right, when you select the preset/ash style that is the closest to the type of style you wish to create, the preset style data will be copied to a special memory location for recording. You create (record) your new, original style by adding or deleting data from the memory location. All parts (with the exception of the rhythm track) of preset styles must be cleared before recording (page 133).

Loop Recording Auto accompaniment repeats the accompaniment patterns of several mea- sures in a loop, and style recording is also done using loops. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure main section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop), letting you record while hearing previously recorded mate- rial.

Overdub Recording This method records new material to a track already containing recorded data, without deleting the original data. In style recording, the recorded data is not deleted, except when using functions such as Clear and Drum Cancel (page 132). For example, if you start recording with a two-measure main section, the two measures are repeated many times. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition, letting you overdub new material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material.

Guidelines for Style Creating

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Preset Style 8Beat 1

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Create your own 8-beat style

Store as Custom Style to Flash ROM

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

8Beat 1

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

8Beat 2

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Pop Rock

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Store as Custom Style to Flash ROM

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Preset Style 8Beat 1

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Replacing

Replacing

Replacing

124

Style Creatorl

Reference 127

The following functions are also available:

Revoice ........................Determines the basic volume, tempo, and Part on/off settings for your original style. Groove & Dynamics .....This gives you a comprehensive variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of

your original style. Specically, it allows you to alter the timing for each section and velocity of notes for each track.

Setup ...........................This can be used to change the voices assigned to any of the current selected sec- tion/part.

Edit...............................The six editing features that contain "Quantize" allow you to edit already recorded style data.

Parameter Edit .............Determines various parameters of the Style File Format. See below for details about Style File Format.

Style File Format The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamahas auto accompaniment know-how into a single uni- ed format. By using the Parameter Edit function, you can take advantage of the power of the SFF for- mat and freely create your own styles. The chart below indicates the process by which the accompaniment is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm track.) The source pattern in the chart is the original style data. As explained on page 132, in style recording this source pattern is recorded. As shown in the chart below, the actual output of the accompaniment is determined by various parameter settings and chord changes (playing chords in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard) entered to this source pattern.

Source Pattern

ZSource chord root setting

XSource chord type setting

NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

CNote Transposition rule setting

NTT (Note Transposition Table)

VNote Transposition table setting

Other Settings

BHighest Key setting

NNote range (Low Limit, High Limit) settings

MRetrigger Rule (RTR) setting

Chord change

Accompaniment

Recorded in Style Recording. Refer to page 135.

Created by playing chords in the auto accompani- ment section of the keyboard.

Refer to page 70.

Edited in Parameter Edit. These parameters determine how the pitch of the source pattern is converted when you play chords in the auto accompaniment section of the key- board.

Refer to page 136.

Output

Since newly created style data is stored to Flash ROM, any pre-programmed data in the selected style location will be erased and replaced by your new settings. This includes the factory programmed Flash style data (Flash styles I through VIII). If you've deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6).

For details about Flash ROM, refer to Memory Structure on page 54.

Style Creator

Preset Style Flash StyleStore

Can be replaced by the newly created data.

12 5

Style Creatorl

128 Reference

Basic Procedure

3 Select these to create a style by using the preset style data as a starting point.

5 Create/Edit a style by following the on-screen instructions.

1 Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button.

2 Select STYLE CREATOR.

Select a preset/ash style. The Easy Edit mode makes it possible to create new styles by editing the Preset/Flash styles.

3 Select this to create a new style from scratch.

6Store as a Flash style to Flash ROM. (See NOTE on page 55.)

7Exit from the Digital Recording mode.

4 Select the desired menu.

Select this to call up the Step Recording display.

126

Style Creatorl

Reference 129

Style Assembly Creating a Style This operation lets you create the patterns (rhythm, bass and chords) that will make up your original style. The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128.

Set up for creating a style.

The length in measures for all sections (excepting Fill In and Break) can be set from this dis- play. The Fill In and Break sec- tions are limited to one measure.

You can return to this display by pressing the [BACK] button and redo the settings .

Set the Pattern Length of the selected section.

[NEXT]

BASS

Select a style, section and part to be assembled.

Indicates the selected track.

RHYTHM 2

[BACK]

[NEXT]

[BACK]

[NEXT]

[BACK]

Assign the pattern for each track.

Select a section to be created.

Select a play type.

SOLO Mutes (turns off) all other tracks. PLAY Turns the selected track on. MUTE Mutes (turns off) the selected track.

Keep in mind that any track data for which the Play Type is set to MUTE is not stored to Flash ROM.

Phrase2

Store as a Flash style to Flash ROM by following the on-screen instruc- tions.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

[NEXT][BACK]

12 7

Style Creatorl

130 Reference

Revoice (Easy Edit) The Revoice parameters let you determine the basic volume, tempo, and Part on/off settings for your original style. The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128.

Select the Style and the Section to be revoiced.

Edit the Revoice parameters. The 9000Pro Revoice function lets you change the following parameters for each track.

Total Volume, Tempo Voice number Part Volume Part on/off

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

[NEXT][BACK]

[NEXT]

[BACK]

[NEXT]

[BACK]

Store as a Flash style to Flash ROM by following the on-screen instructions.

Keep in mind that any track data which is set to off is not stored to Flash ROM.

[NEXT][BACK]

128

Style Creatorl

Reference 131

Groove & Dynamics (Easy Edit) The Groove and Dynamics parameters give you a comprehensive variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your original style. The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128.

Select the Style and the Section.

Edit the Groove parameters.

Edit the Dynamics parameters.

Store as a Flash style to Flash ROM by following the on-screen instructions.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Groove parameters

Dynamics parameters

Beat Specifies the beats to which groove timing is to be applied (i.e., if 8 is selected, groove timing is applied to 8th notes in the selected section; or if 12 is selected groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets).

Beat Converter Actually changes the timing of the beats specified by the Beat to the specified value. The available Beat Converter settings change according to the selected Beat. With a Beat setting of 8 and a Beat Converter setting of 12, for example, all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The 16A and 16B Beat Converter settings which appear when Beat is set to 12 are variations of the 16 setting.

Swing Produces a swing feel by shifting the timing of back beats, as specified by the Beat parameter. For example, if the specified Beat value is 8th notes, then the swing parameter will delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The A through E settings produce different degrees of swing feel, with A being the most subtle and E being the stron- gest.

Fine Selects a range of groove templates to be applied to the current section. PUSH settings cause certain beats to be played early, while HEAVY settings delay the timing of certain beats. The number 2, 3, 4, or 5 determines which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat, but not including the first beat, will be played early or delayed: e.g., the 2nd and 3rd beats if 3 is selected. In all cases A types produce minimum ef- fect, B types produce medium effect, and C types produce the maximum effect.

Accent Type Selects the type of accent template to be applied to the select- ed section/part.

Strength Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type will be applied. Higher values produce a stronger effect.

Expand/ Compression

Expands or compresses the range of velocity values in the se- lected section, based on a central velocity value of 64. Val- ues higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, and values lower than 100% compress the dynamic range.

Boost/Cut Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/part. Values above 100% boost the overall velocity and values be- low 100% reduce the overall velocity.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

12 9

Style Creatorl

132 Reference

Style Recording (Full Edit) This section explains how to record all parts by playing the keyboard. The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128.

Basic Setting for Recording

Section...................Select the section you want to program. Pattern Length .......Select the desired number of measures (1-32) for the selected section (except for FILL IN

sections, which are xed at 1 measure). Beat .......................Select a different time signature: 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, or 5/4. Please note that the time signature

can only be changed if all sections of the current style have been cleared. If any data remains in any section, the alert message will appear. A new time signature can be selected after clearing all sections of the current selected style.

Tempo ....................Set the default tempo for the new style. Part Copy ............... Instead of starting with all the sections and/or parts from the selected original style, you

can copy specic parts from other sections/parts of the same style, or from other styles as required. Also, in some cases it may not be possible to copy from other parts. In such a case the EXECUTE LCD button will appear in gray and will not be available.

Style Recording Rhythm Tracks

Select the desired menu.

START/STOP

You can also delete certain percussion sounds while recording. While holding this button, press the key on the keyboard corresponding to the instru- ment you want to cancel.

When this button is pressed, DELETE will appear for parts which contain data. Set the desired part to "DELETE" while holding this button to delete all data in the corresponding parts. The data is actually deleted when this button is released.

1 Set one of Rhythm parts to "REC."

2 Press the [START/STOP] button to start recording.

Only DRUM KIT/SFX KIT and DRUM KIT custom voices can be selected for the RHY2 part.

All voices except the ORGAN FLUTE voice can be selected for the RHY1 part.

You can also start recording by pressing [SYNC START] button and playing a key on the key- board.

3 Press the [START/ STOP] button again to stop recording. The selected section of the current style will begin playing (only the metro-

nome will sound if the rhythm parts have been cleared). The style will loop (play) continuously to allow convenient recording and overdubbing. Since the rhythm pattern plays back repeatedly, you can record by overdub- bing listening to the pattern and playing the desired keys. Look at the icons printed under the keys indicating the percussion sounds that are assigned to each key.

130

Style Creatorl

Reference 133

Style Recording Bass/Chord Tracks/Pad/Phrase Recording of the bass, phrase, pad and chord tracks is unlike recording of the rhythm (drum) parts in that you have to clear the track data of the original style before record- ing.

3 Set the desired parts to "REC."

1 When this button is pressed, DELETE will appear for parts which contain data.

2 Set the desired part to "DELETE" while holding this button to delete all data in the corresponding parts. The data is actually deleted when this button is released.

4 Start recording.

You can start recording with one of the following ways: Press the [START/STOP] button. Press the [SYNC START] button to enable synchronized

standby (page 20), then play a key on the keyboard. The recording repeats indenitely (until stopped) in a loop. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition, letting you record while hearing previously recorded material.

5 Stop recording.

The ORGAN FLUTES voices and DRUM KIT voices cannot be selected for these parts.

Observe the following rules when recording the MAIN and FILL sections:

Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE tracks (i.e. C, D, E, G, A, and B).

Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD tracks (i.e. C, E, G, and B).

Any appropriate chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and ENDING sec- tions. The basic chord for the accompaniment is called the source chord. The default source chord is set as CM7, but you can change it to whatever chord is easy for you to play. For details, see Style File (Auto Accompaniment) Format (page 127) and Parameter Edit (page 135).

C S C C S C

C = chord tone C, S = scale tones

13 1

Style Creatorl

134 Reference

Style Editing (Full Edit) This section explains various parameters, other than the basic ones. The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 128.

Setup

Voice This function can be used to change the voices assigned to any of the current styles parts. While the SETUP display is selected, all other available parameters can be modied as required via the MIXING CONSOLE displays.

Setup Copy Instead of starting with all the sections and/or parts from the selected original style, you can copy specic parts from other sections/parts of the same style, or from other styles as required.

Edit

Quantize ........................... Refer to page 114. Velocity Change ................ Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specied part by the specied per-

centage. Measure Copy................... This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures

to another location within the same part. Use the TOP and LAST LCD buttons to specify the rst and last measures in the region to be copied. Use the DEST LCD button to specify the top of the measure to which the data is to be copied. If the copy destination falls outside the number of measures actually in the part, the corresponding source measures will not be copied.

Measure Clear .................. This function clears all data from the specied range of measures within the specied part. Use the TOP and LAST LCD buttons to specify the rst and last measures in the range to be cleared.

Remove Control Event ...... This function can be used to remove all occurrences of a specied type of con- trol event from a specied part. Use the EVENT LCD buttons to select the type of event to be removed.

Remove Duplicate Notes .. Removes all duplicate notes from a specied part.

Select the desired menu.

Select the desired menu.

132

Style Creatorl

Reference 135

Parameter Edit

Source Root/Source Chord These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e. the key used when recording the pattern). The default, CM7 (the source root is C and the source chord type is M7), is automatically selected whenever the preset data is deleted prior to recording a new style, regardless of the source root and chord included in the preset data.

When you change the chord of the source pattern from the default CM7 to others, the chord notes and scale notes will change depending on the currently selected chord type. See page 133 for information on chord notes and scale notes.

Select the desired menu. See below.

Select a part to be edited.

When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED and NTT (also above) is set to BYPASS, the SOURCE ROOT and SOURCE CHORD parameter names change to PLAY ROOT and PLAY CHORD. In this case it is possi- ble to change chords and hear how the results sound for all parts.

C S C C S C S C C SC C S C C CS C S C C CS

C

C C C C S

C C C C CS C C C C SC C S C

S C S

C S CS

C

C S C CS

C

C CS

C C

C S

S SC C C

C C S C

C

C C S C

C C

C S CC

C C

C S C CS

C

C C S C C

C

C S

C C S

C S S SC

C C S

C C C

C

C CC

C

C S C

C C

C C C C

C

C S C C S

C C

C S C C C

C

C C C

C C

C C CS

S C C

C C C

SC C

C S C CSS

C

C S C

S C C

C C C C S CC C C S C S

CM

Cm

7C

CM7

7C (9) C (9)6 Caug Cm6

Cm7 7 7Cm b57 Cm (9) Cm (11)

CmM7 7CmM (9) Cdim Cdim7

C (9)7 C (13)7

C (b9)7

Csus4 C1+2+5C1+8 C1+5

C b57

CM6

Cm (9)

7CM (#11)

C (#11)7

C (#9)7 C aug7CM aug7

C sus47

CM add9

C (b13)7

[Maj]

[M7(9)] [6(9)] [aug] [min] [min6]

[min7] [m7b5] [m(9)] [m7(9)]

[mM7]

[7sus4]

[7(b9)]

[1+8] [1+5] [1+2+5][sus4]

[7b13] [7(#9)] [M7aug] [7aug]

[7b5] [7(9)] [7#11] [7(13)]

[dim] [dim7] [7th][mM7_9]

[m7_11]

[Maj6] [Maj7] [(9)][M7#11]

[ex.] Source Chord Root of C

13 3

Style Creatorl

136 Reference

NTR (Note Transposition Rule) Two settings are available:

ROOT TRANS................... When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3, E3, and G3 in the key of C will become F3, A3, and C4 when transposed to F. Use this setting for parts that contain melodic lines.

ROOT FIXED .................... The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For exam- ple, the notes C3, E3, and G3 in the key of C will become C3, F3, and A3 when transposed to F. Use this setting for chordal parts.

NTT(Note Transposition Table) This sets the note transposition table to be used for source pattern transposition. Six table types are available:

BYPASS............................ No transposition. MELODY ........................... Suitable for melody line transposition. Use for melody parts such as

PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2. CHORD............................. Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the CHORD 1 and CHORD 2 parts

when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts. BASS ................................ Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the

MELODY table, but recognizes on-bass chords allowed in the FINGERED 2 ngering mode. Use primarily for bass lines.

MELODIC MINOR............. This table lowers the third scale degree by a semitone when changing from a major to a minor chord, or raises the minor third scale degree a semitone when changing from a minor to a major chord. Other notes are not changed.

HARMONIC MINOR ......... This table lowers the third and sixth scale degrees by a semitone when changing from a major to a minor chord, or raises the minor third and atted sixth scale degrees a semitone when changing from a minor to a major chord. Other notes are not changed.

Highest Key This sets the highest key (upper limit of the octaves) of the note transposing for the Source Chord Root setting. The notes designated higher than the highest key will actually be played back in the octave just below the highest key. This setting is effective only when the NTR parameter (above) is set to ROOT TRANS.

CM

C3-E3-G3

FM

F3-A3-C4

F#M

F#2-A#2-C#3

C#M

C#3-F3-G#3

Root change Notes played

Example) When highest key is F.

134

Style Creatorl

Reference 137

Note Limit This sets the note range (low and high limits) for the voices recorded on user style tracks. By setting the note range, you can prevent unrealistic notes (such as high notes from a bass or low notes from a piccolo) from being produced and have them shifted to an octave within the note range.

RTR This sets how notes held through chord changes will be handled. Six settings are available:

Stop .................................. The note is stopped, and resumes sounding from the next note data. Pitch Shift.......................... The pitch of the note will bend without attack to match the type of the new

chord. Pitch Shift To Root............. The pitch of the note will bend without attack to match the root of the new

chord. Retrigger ........................... The note is retriggered with attack at a new pitch matching the new chord

type. Retrigger To Root.............. The note is retriggered with attack at a new pitch matching the new chord

root.

CM

E3-G3-C4

FM

High Limit

Low Limit

F3-A3-C4

C#M

F3-G#3-C#4

Root change Notes played

Example: When low limit is C3 and high limit is D4.

13 5

Style Creatorl

138 Reference

Custom Style Recording via an External Sequence Recorder You can create custom styles for the 9000Pro using an external sequencer (or personal computer with sequencing software), instead of using the 9000Pros STYLE CRE- ATOR function.

136

Connections Connect the 9000Pro MIDI OUT to the sequencer MIDI

IN, and the sequencer MIDI OUT to the 9000Pro MIDI IN. Make sure that the sequencer ECHO function is ON,

and the 9000Pro LOCAL ON/OFF (page 175) is turned OFF.

Creating the Data Record all sections and parts using a CM7 (C major sev-

enth) chord. Record the parts on the MIDI channels listed below, using

the 9000Pros internal tone generator. Optimum compati- bility with other instruments which are both XG and SFF (Style File Format) compatible can be achieved by using only the XG voices.

Record the sections in the order listed below, with a Marker Meta-event at the top of each section. Enter the Marker Meta-events exactly as shown (including upper/ lower case characters and spaces).

Also include an SFF1 Marker Meta-event, SInt Marker Meta-event and style name Meta-event at 1|1|000 (the top of the sequence track), and the GM on Sys/Ex message (F0, 7E, 7F, 09, 01, F7). (Timing in the chart is based on 480 clocks per quarter note. 1|1|000 is clock 0 of the rst beat of the rst measure).

The data from 1|1|000 through 1|4|479 is the Initial Setup, and 2|1|000 through the end of Ending B is the Source Pattern.

The timing of the Fill In AA and subsequent Marker Meta- events will depend on the length of each section.

Part MIDI Ch. Rhythm1 9 Rhythm2 10 Bass 11 Chord1 12 Chord2 13 Pad 14 Phrase1 15 Phrase2 16

Timing Marker Meta- Event

Contents Comments

1|1|000 1|1|000

1|1|000 1|1|000 1|2|000 : 1|4|479

SFF1

Slnt

Style Name (Sequence/Track Name Meta-Event)

GM on Sys/Ex

Initial Setup Events

2|1|000 : 3|4|479

Main A 2 bars Main Pattern

(up to 255 bars)

Corresponds to MAIN A

4|1|000 : 4|4|479

Fill In AA 1 bar Fill In Pattern

Corresponds to FILL IN A

5|1|000 : 6|4|479

Intro A 2 bars Intro Pattern

(up to 255 bars)

Corresponds to INTRO I

7|1|000 : 8|4|479

Ending A 2 bars Intro Pattern

(up to 255 bars)

Corresponds to ENDING I

9|1|000 : 10|4|479

Main B 2 bars Intro Pattern

(up to 255 bars)

Corresponds to MAIN B

11|1|000 : 11|4|479

Fill In BA 1 bar Fill In Pattern

Corresponds to BREAK

12|1|000 : 12|4|479

Fill In BB 1 bar Fill In Pattern

Corresponds to FILL IN B

13|1|000 : 14|4|479

Intro B 2 bars Intro Pattern

(up to 255 bars)

Corresponds to INTRO II

15|1|000 : 16|4|479

Ending B 2 bars Intro Pattern

(up to 255 bars)

Corresponds to ENDING II

17|1|000 : 18|4|479

Main C 2 bars Main Pattern

(up to 255 bars)

Corresponds to MAIN C

19|1|000 : 19|4|479

Fill In CC 1 bar Fill In Pattern

Corresponds to FILL IN C

20|1|000 : 21|4|479

Intro C 2 bars Intro Pattern

(up to 255 bars)

Corresponds to INTRO III

22|1|000 : 23|4|479

Ending C 2 bars Intro Pattern

(up to 255 bars)

Corresponds to ENDING III

24|1|000 : 25|4|479

Main D 2 bars Main Pattern

(up to 255 bars)

Corresponds to MAIN D

26|1|000 : 26|4|479

Fill In DD 1 bar Fill In Pattern

Corresponds to FILL IN D

In iti

al S

et up

S ou

rc e

P at

te rn

Style Creatorl

Reference 139

A template which is handy for creating style data is included on the supplied oppy disk (TEM- PLATE.MID).

The Initial Setup area from 1|2|000 through 1|4|479 is used for voice and effect settings. Do not include note event data.

The Main A data begins at 2|1|000. Any number of mea- sures from 1 to 255 can be used. All measures must have one of the following time signatures: 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, or 5/4.

Fill In AA begins from the top of the measure following the last measure of the Main A pattern. In the chart this is 4|1|00, but this is only an example and the actual timing will depend on the length of Main A. Please note that all Fill Ins can be only 1 measure in length (refer to the Sec- tion/Length chart below).

The following charts indicate the valid MIDI events for both the Initial Setup data and the Pattern data. Make sure to NOT enter any events marked with a dash (), nor any events not listed here.

Channel Message

RPN & NRPN

System Exclusive

Section Length Intro 255 measures max. Main 255 measures max. Fill In 1 measure Ending 255 measures max.

Event Initial Setup

Source Pattern

Note Off OK Note On OK Program Change OK OK Pitch Bend OK OK Control#0 (Bank Select MSB) OK OK Control#1 (Modulation) OK OK Control#6 (Data Entry MSB) OK Control#7 (Master Volume) OK OK Control#10 (Pan) OK OK Control#11 (Expression) OK OK Control#32 (Bank Select LSB) OK OK Control#38 (Data Entry LSB) OK Control#71 (Harmonic Content) OK OK Control#72 (Release Time) OK Control#73 (Attack Time) OK Control#74 (Brightness) OK OK Control#84 (Portamento Control) OK Control#91 (Reverb Send Level) OK OK Control#93 (Chorus Send Level) OK OK Control#94 (Variation Send Level) OK OK Control#98 (NRPN LSB) OK Control#99 (NRPN MSB) OK Control#100 (RPN LSB) OK Control#101 (RPN MSB) OK

Event Initial Setup

Source Pattern

RPN (Pitch Bend Sensitivity) OK RPN (Fine Tuning) OK RPN (Null) OK NRPN (Vibrato Rate) OK NRPN (Vibrato Delay) OK NRPN (EG Decay Time) OK NRPN (Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency) OK NRPN (Drum Filter Resonance) OK NRPN (Drum EG Attack Time) OK NRPN (Drum EG Decay Time) OK NRPN (Drum Instrument Pitch Coarse) OK NRPN (Drum Instrument Pitch Fine) OK NRPN (Drum Instrument Level) OK NRPN (Drum Instrument Pan) OK NRPN (Drum Instrument Reverb Send Level) OK NRPN (Drum Instrument Chorus Send Level) OK NRPN (Drum Instrument Variation Send Level) OK

Event Initial Setup

Source Pattern

Sys/Ex GM on OK Sys/Ex XG on OK Sys Ex XG Parameter Change (Effect1) OK Sys Ex XG Parameter Change (Multi Part)

DRY LEVEL OK OK Sys Ex XG Parameter Change (Drum Setup)

PITCH COARSE OK PITCH FINE OK LEVEL OK PAN OK REVERB SEND OK CHORUS SEND OK VARIATION SEND OK FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY OK FILTER RESONANCE OK EG ATTACK OK EG DECAY1 OK EG DECAY2 OK

13 7

Style Creatorl

140 Reference

Step Recording (Full Edit) The Step Recording features lets you record notes with absolutely precise timing. The procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording, with the exception of the points listed below:

Recording resolution for the Style Creator is 96 ppq (parts per quarter-note); for Song Recording it is 384 ppq.

In Song Recording, the End Mark position can be changed freely; in the Style Creator, it cannot be changed. This is because the length of the style is automatically xed, depending on the selected section. For example, if you create a style based on a sec- tion of four measures length, the End Mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display.

Tracks can be changed in Song Recording; however, they cannot be changed in the Style Creator.

Select this to call up the Step Recording display.

138

Multi Pad Creator

Reference 141

The 9000Pro has 58 recordable banks that you can use to store your own Multi Pad phrases. These orig- inal Multi Pads can be played and used in the same way as the presets. Multi Pad data can also be saved to and loaded from disk.

The operations for each function corresponding to step #4 are covered in the following explanations.

Basic Procedure

Select a Multi Pad number.

1 Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button.

2 Select MULTI PAD CREATOR.

3 Select a menu.

Select this to engage the Record standby mode (synchronized standby).

4 Record/Edit Multi Pad data.

Select a Multi Pad Bank.

5 Store the created pad to Flash ROM. (See NOTE below)

6 Exit from the Digital Recording mode.

Use the [NEXT] or [BACK] button.

Select this to name the Multi Pad Bank.

Select this to store the recorded pad data to Flash ROM. See the CAU- TION notes below.

Select this to call up the Step Recording display.

Since newly created Multi Pad data is stored to Flash ROM, any pre-programmed data in the selected Multi Pad loca- tion will be erased and replaced by your new settings. This includes all of the factory programmed Multi Pad banks. If you've deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6).

For details about Flash ROM, refer to Memory Structure on page 54.

BANK 01

1 2

3 4

Multi Pad banks 60 banks in Flash ROM 58 banks can be replaced by the new created pad data.

CAUTION The recorded data of the

Multi Pads is stored together in a group of 58 banks in the Flash ROM. For this reason, you should be careful when making edits and storing your edits, since all 58 banks will be overwritten with the new data.

Multi Pad banks #59 and #60 contain specially programmed presets for sending MIDI con- trol messages (page 77) and changing the Scale Tuning set- tings (page 158), respectively. You cannot store your custom Multi Pad data to these banks.

13 9

Multi Pad Creatorl i

142 Reference

Multi Pad Recording The explanations here apply to step #4 of the Basic Procedure on page 141.

Start recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard. If Chord Match is set to on for the Multi Pad to be recorded, you should record using the notes of the C major seventh scale (C, D, E, G, A and B).

Stop recording. Press the [STOP] LCD button or the panel MULTI PAD [STOP] button to stop record- ing when youve nished playing the phrase.

Clear

Copy

Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off Use the same operation as on page 77.

Other notes besides those of the C major seventh scale can be recorded; however, this may result in the recorded phrase not matching the chord when being played back.

The rhythm part of the cur- rently selected style is used as a rhythmic guide (in place of a metronome), playing back dur- ing recording. However, it is not recorded to the Multi Pad.

C S C C S C

C = chord note C, S = scale note Others: non scale note

Clears only the cur- rently selected pad.

Clears all four pads in the currently selected bank.

Select the source pad.

Execute the Copy operation.

Select the destination pad. Banks #59 and #60 cannot be selected.

140

Multi Pad Creatorl i

Reference 143

Step Recording The Step Recording features lets you record notes with absolutely precise timing. The procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording, with the exception of the points listed below:

Recording resolution for the Multi Pad Creator is 96 ppq (parts per quarter-note); for Song Recording it is 384 ppq.

Just as with Song Recording, the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Multi Pad Creator. This allows you to nely adjust the phrase length for the Pad. This would be convenient, for example, in synchronizing repeat playback of a Pad (set to Repeat On) with the keyboard and auto accompaniment playback.

Since the Multi Pads have only one track, the track cannot be changed.

14 1

Mixing Console

144 Reference

A full-screen mixing console which provides access to a wide range of controls for each main and accom- paniment part can be selected by pressing the [MIXING CONSOLE] button. A simpler mixing console is available via the [MAIN MIXER] and the [PART ON/OFF] buttons described in Quick Guide on pages 24 and 31.

The operations for each parameter corresponding to step #2 are covered in the follow- ing explanations.

Part Settings In addition to the keyboard-played voices, the 9000Pro features many different instru- mental parts, including those contained in the auto accompaniment, song playback, and vocal harmony. See the next page for details.

Basic Procedure

M A I N MIXER

PART ON/OFF

PART

See below. Refer to the Quick Guide on pages 24 and 31.

You can also select the desired menu by pressing the [NEXT] or [BACK] button.

You can change the value of all parts simultaneously. To do this, press any of the LCD [1]~[8] buttons or rotate the data dial while holding the cor- responding LCD button ([A]~[J]).

Adjust the parame- ter for each part.

1 Press the [MIXING CONSOLE] button several times until the desired parts are displayed.

2 Adjust the desired parameter.

Volume/EQ (see Part Settings, page 145.)

Filter (see Part Settings, page 145.)

Effect Depth (see Part Settings, page 145.)

Effect Type (see Effect Type Settings, page 146.)

Tune (see Part Settings, page 145.) Master EQ (see Master Equalizer Settings, page 147.)

Select the desired menu.

Select the desired parameter.

Voice (see Part Settings, page 145.)

Line Out (see Line Out Settings, page 148.)

Select the desired parameter.

Select the desired menu.

Pressing the [MIXING CONSOLE] button alter- nates among the displays as listed below.

All parts (see below)

Accompaniment parts

Song tracks 1~8

Song tracks 9~16

You can use the data dial to adjust the parameter. First, select the desired part by pressing the any of the [1]~[8] buttons and then rotate the data dial to adjust the parameter.

142

Mixing Consolei i l

Reference 145

O : available * Same as the [TRANSPOSE] button (pages 61 and 162) ** Same as the [UPPER OCTAVE] button (page 18) *** Cannot be applied to the part using the Plug-in voice from the PLG150-PF. If you wish

to adjust them from the PLG150-PF, use the Native Part Parameter settings display (Frequency/Gain) in the Plug-in Custom Voice Creator function.

Volume/EQ Volume ...................This lets you change the volume of each part and adjust the rela-

tive balance among all the parts. Panpot....................Positions the sound of the specied voice or track from left to right

in the stereo sound eld. Equalizer ................The EQ High and EQ Low controls function in the same way as the

treble and bass controls on a sound system, boosting or cutting the high or low frequency ranges by the specied amount.

Filter Brightness..............This increases or decreases the brightness of the sound. Harmonic Content..This increases or decreases the harmonic content, giving the

sound more or less punch.

Effect Depth This parameter sets the effect depth for the corresponding part. See the next page for details about Effects.

Tune Transpose...............Allows the pitch to be transposed up or down in semitone incre-

ments (pages 61 and 162). Tuning.....................Sets the pitch for the corresponding part. Octave....................Shifts the pitch of the specied part up or down by one or two

octaves. The value of this parameter is added to the value set via the [UPPER OCTAVE] button (page 18).

Pitch Bend Range..Sets the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for the corresponding part. The range is from 0 to 12 with each step corresponding to one semitone.

Portamento Time....Sets the portamento time for the corresponding part only when the part is set to MONO (page 60). The higher the value the longer the portamento time. The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) is produced when the notes are played legato: i.e., a note is held while the next note is played.

Voice This lets you change the voice for each part.

Volume/EQ Filter Effect Depth Tune Voice VOLUME PAN-

POT EQ

LOW ***

EQ HIGH ***

BRIGHT- NESS

HARMONIC CONTENT

REVERB (1)

CHORUS (2)

DSP (3)

DSP (4)

DSP (5)

DSP (6)

DSP (7)

DSP (8)

TRANS- POSE *

TUNING OCTAVE

**

PITCH BEND

RANGE

PORTAMENTO TIME

VOICE

Master Overall O

Keyboard All Voices O

VOICE R1 O O O O O O O O O O O O O

VOICE R2 O O O O O O O O O O O O O

VOICE R3 O O O O O O O O O O O O O

VOICE L O O O O O O O O O O O O O Auto

Accompaniment (Style)

All Tracks O O O O O O O

RHYTHM 1 O O O O O O O O O O

RHYTHM 2 O O O O O O O O O O

BASS O O O O O O O O O O

CHORD 1 O O O O O O O O O O

CHORD 2 O O O O O O O O O O

PAD O O O O O O O O O O

PHRASE 1 O O O O O O O O O O

PHRASE 2 O O O O O O O O O O

Multi Pad Multi Pad 1~4

O O O O O O

Song All Tracks O O O O O O O O

TRACK 1 O O O O O O O O O O

TRACK 2 O O O O O O O O O O

TRACK 16 O O O O O O O O O O

Microphone Sound

MIC O O O O O

Make the desired Right 1 voice, Effect Type and Depth, and EQ settings from the Mixing Con- sole, then call up the Custom Voice display to store the set- tings. The Mixing Console parameters can be stored together with the Custom Voice parameters.

Certain voices may produce excessive noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings of the Mixing Console Filter.

As indicated in the chart above, in addition to the Master Trans- pose setting, there are two other transpose controls: Keyboard Transpose and Song Trans- pose. These can be used to match both the song and your keyboard performance to a cer- tain key. For example, lets say you wish to both play and sing along with a certain recorded song. The song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable sing- ing in D, and you are accus- tomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To match up the keys, set the Master Transpose to 0, the Keyboard Transpose to 2, and the Song Transpose to -3. This brings the keyboard part up and the song data down to your comfortable singing key.

14 3

Mixing Consolei i l

146 Reference

Effect Type Settings With the digital effects built into the 9000Pro you can add ambiance and depth to your music in a variety of wayssuch as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a concert hall for a full, rich sound.

Effect Block The 9000Pro has 9 independent digital signal processing (DSP) blocks for effects, plus the Vocal Harmony processor. Each DSP block applies to a specic part or portion of the 9000Pro sound, as listed below. The DSP block numbers appear in several locations on the 9000Pro panel and in some of the display screen for easy reference: e.g., REVERB (1), CHORUS (2), DSP (3), DSP (4), etc.

About the Effect Connections System and Insertion All the effect blocks are connected or routed in one of two ways: System or Insertion. System applies the selected effect to all parts, while Insertion applies the selected effect to one specic part. Reverb (1) and Chorus (2) are System effects, and DSP (4) - Vocal Harmony (9) are Insertion effects. The DSP (3) effect, on the other hand, can be cong- ured for either System or Insertion routing. (This is done from the parameters of the individual effect type; see above.)

Parts to be applied Description Reverb (1) Overall Creates a reverb effect that makes you sound like you

are playing in places like a concert hall, or live in a club. Chorus (2) Overall Adds a chorus effect that makes your playing sound as

though multiple parts were being played together at the same time.

DSP (3) Auto Accompaniment/ Song

In addition to the Reverb and Chorus types, the 9000Pro has special DSP effects, that include additional effects usually used for a specific part, such as distortion and tremolo.

DSP (4) VOICE RIGHT1 This block (which can be turned on or off by a panel but- ton) is applied to the RIGHT1 voice.

DSP (5) VOICE RIGHT2 This block (which can be turned on or off by a panel but- ton) is applied to the RIGHT2 voice.

DSP (6) VOICE RIGHT3 This block (which can be turned on or off by a panel but- ton) is applied to the RIGHT3 voice.

DSP (7) VOICE LEFT This block (which can be turned on or off by a panel but- ton) is applied to the LEFT voice.

DSP (8) Microphone Sound This block (which can be turned on or off by a panel but- ton) is applied to the microphone sound.

Vocal Harmony (9) Vocal Harmony This block (which can be turned on or off by a panel but- ton) is used for the Vocal Harmony effect. See page 81.

Select this to call up the dis- play for parameter settings. Note that the contents of the Parameter display may be different according to the selected Effect Type.

Select the desired block.

Assigns a specic effect to the currently selected Effect Block. Note that the con- tents of the Type List may be different according to the selected Effect Block.

Select this to store your settings by fol- lowing the on-screen instructions.

Use these two LCD buttons to select the desired parameter group. The lower parameter group is available when the [SLOW/FAST] button is turned on.

You may nd that, when chang- ing a drum sound of an auto accompaniment style and then restoring the original drum sound, the actual sound (espe- cially the effect processing Reverb, Chorus, and DSP 3) sounds different than the origi- nal. To restore the original drum sound and its effect pro- cessing, select a different style, then select the original style once again.

Some effect types (e.g., Tem- poDelay, VDstH+TDly, etc.) are synchronized with the current tempo. When any of these effect types is selected, noise may result when simulta- neously playing the keyboard and pressing the [SLOW/ FAST] button or changing the tempo. To avoid this, rst stop playing the keyboard, then press [SLOW/FAST] or change the tempo.

Editing some of the effect parameters may produce a small amount of noise.

144

Mixing Consolei i l

Reference 147

Master Equalizer Settings Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the level for each band. The equalizer allows you to adjust the tone or timbre of the sound to match the performance space, or to compensate for certain acoustic characteristics in your room. For example, you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too boomy, or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively dead and free of echoes. The 9000Pro possesses a high grade ve-band digital equalizer function. With this function, a nal effecttone con- trolcan be added to the output of your instrument.

OUT (MAIN)

OUT (SUB)

Rev SendDSP (4)

R3

R1

R2

LEFT

MIC

STYLE

Dry

Cho Send

Rev Send

Dry

Cho Send

Rev Send

Dry

Cho Send

Rev Send

Dry

Cho Send

Rev Send

Dry

Cho Send

Rev Send

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

DSP (5)

DSP (6)

DSP (8) Vocal Harmony

Noise Gate

3 Band EQ Compressor

DSP (3)

Connection is set to Insertion DSP (3)

Connection is set to System

Chorus (2) Master EQ

Reverb (1)

DRY LINE

DSP (1)

DSP (2)

DSP (9)

DSP (7)

Gain

Q

FREQ

An edited PRESET or USER curve can be stored to USER 1.

An edited PRESET or USER curve can be stored to USER 2.

Adjusts the overall gain of all EQ bands simultaneously.

The PRESET and USER curves can be edited as required via the corresponding LCD buttons EQ1 through EQ5. Each of the 5 bands can be boosted (+ values) or cut ( values) by up to 12 dB.

Whenever an EQ band is edited the corresponding EQ value is high- lighted and the number of the edited band appears above the Q and FREQ controls. The Q and FREQ controls can then be used to adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the selected band. The higher the Q, the narrower the bandwidth. The available FREQ range is different for each band.

Effect Signal Flow Chart

14 5

Mixing Consolei i l

148 Reference

Line Out Settings This convenient feature allows you to send the output of a selected Part or Parts to the LINE OUT jacks. For Drum Parts, you can even select specic drum sounds to be output through these jacks.

In general, the extensive built-in effects and other Part controls of the 9000Pro provide all you need for processing and mixing complex multi-Part songs. However, there may be times when you want to sweeten or process a certain Voice or sound with a favor- ite outboard effect unit, or record a Part to a separate track of a tape recorder. The Line Out settings are designed just for these kinds of applications.

When set to MAIN, the part is output (with effects) through the MAIN LINE OUT jacks. The sound is also output through the PHONES jack, as well as the MAIN jacks.

When set to one of the "SUB" settings, the Part is output through the SUB LINE OUT jacks. In this case, only Insertion effects (DSP4 - 8 and DSP3 when this is set to Inser- tion from the effect parameter display) can be applied; System effects (DSP1, 2 and DSP3 when this is set to System from the effect parameter display) and MASTER EQ cannot be applied to the SUB LINE OUT jacks.

When set to one of the SUB settings, the sound of the Part will not be output through the PHONES jack.

When set to SUB1&2, the Part is output in stereo (1: left, 2: right). When set to SUB3&4, the Part is output in stereo (3: left, 4: right). Settings of SUB1, SUB2, SUB3, and SUB4 output the Part in mono to the corre-

sponding jack. Parts output through the SUB LINE OUT jacks cannot be heard through the PHONES

jack.

Sets the output conguration for the selected drum sound. An individual percussion setting overrides the Part settings made from the display at left. When assigned to one of the "SUB" settings, DSP effects cannot be applied to the percussion sound.

Select the desired part.

Sets the output con- guration for the selected part. See below for details.

Select the desired drum instrument.

When using one of the SUB Line Out settings, make sure that youve connected cables to the appropriate SUB LINE OUT jacks on the rear panel. If cables are only connected to the MAIN jacks, the sound of the Part will be output through the MAIN jacks, even if one of the SUB Line Out settings is selected.

146

Mixing Consolei i l

Reference 149

All instruments (Drum)

(stereo)

(stereo)

Right1, 2, 3, Left Song

Auto Accompaniment Multi Pad 1, 2, 3, 4

Microphone sound

Metronome

(mono)(mono)

(stereo)

(stereo)

All instruments (Drum)

Right1, 2, 3, Left Metronome Song

Multi Pad 1, 2, 3, 4 Microphone sound

Auto Accompaniment

(stereo)

Right1, 2, 3, Left Metronome Song

(stereo)

Auto Accompaniment Multi Pad 1, 2, 3, 4 Microphone sound

Other instruments (Drum)

(stereo) Bass Drum

Snare Drum

(mono)(mono)

Example 1 Live Performance In this example, you can send the metronome click to the drummer in your band, and keep everything in sync.

Line Out Settings

Part Settings

Right1, 2, 3, Left MAIN Mic SUB1 Multi Pad 1, 2, 3, 4 MAIN Auto Accompaiment (Rhythm1, Rhythm2, Bass, Chord1, Chord2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase2)

MAIN

Metronome SUB2 Song (Song Tr1 - 16)

MAIN

Drum Settings

All instruments SUB3&4

Example 2 Surround Sound System In this example, send each output to a different speaker for a rich, surround effect.

Line Out Settings

Part Settings

Right1, 2, 3, Left MAIN Mic MAIN Multi Pad 1, 2, 3, 4 MAIN Auto Accompaiment (Rhythm1, Rhythm2, Bass, Chord1, Chord2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase2)

SUB1&2

Metronome MAIN Song (Song Tr1 - 16)

MAIN

Drum Settings

All instruments SUB3&4

Example 3 Recording In this system, connect a multi-track recorder and record each part separately, just as is done in profes- sional recording studios.

Line Out Settings

Part Settings

Right1, 2, 3, Left MAIN Mic MAIN Multi Pad 1, 2, 3, 4 MAIN Auto Accompaiment (Rhythm1, Rhythm2, Bass, Chord1, Chord2, Pad, Phrase1, Phrase2)

MAIN

Metronome MAIN Song (Song Tr1 - 16)

MAIN

Drum Settings

Bass Drum SUB1 Snare Drum SUB2 Other instruments SUB3&4

14 7

Disk/SCSI Operations

150 Reference

The 9000Pro [DISK/SCSI] button accesses a range of functions that are used for storage and retrieval of oppy disk data. The 9000Pro can also be tted with an optional internal hard disk or an optional con- nected SCSI device for massive on-line storage capacity.

The operations for each function corresponding to step #3 are covered in the following explanations.

The Disk mode has the following display pages: LOAD FROM DISK Loading data from a disk to Flash ROM.................................152 SAVE TO DISK Saving data from Flash ROM to a disk...................................153 COPY FILE/FD Copying les & copying oppy disks.......................................154 BACK UP/RESTORE Backing up/restoring the data in Flash ROM..........................154 CONVERTER Converting PSR-8000 format les to 9000Pro format les.....155 EDIT FILE Renaming/deleting disk les...................................................155 EDIT DIRECTORY Renaming/deleting/creating directories ..................................156 FORMAT Formatting a disk ....................................................................156 CHECK DISK Checking a disk ......................................................................157

Before going on to the explanations of the above functions, make sure to read through the instructions on Basic Operation and Selecting Directories/Files below. The follow- ing explanations apply to the Plug-in Manager function (page 66), Style Manager func- tion (page 74), Disk Song le selection (page 78) and other disk-related functions, as well as the Disk/SCSI functions described in this chapter.

Storage Devices Compatible with the 9000Pro

Basic Procedure

Floppy disk SCSI device (optional connected)

Internal hard disk drive (optional installed)

Devices in this category include external hard disk drives, removable cartridges, etc. See page 13 for details on SCSI device connection.

See page 184 for details on hard disk installation. Make sure to read the sec-

tion Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks on page 5.

If an optional SCSI device is con- nected or the optional internal hard disk is installed, the corresponding device names appear in the LCD of the disk related function.

Select this to display the property of the selected le.

DISK/ SCSI MIDIFUNCTION

MENU

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

1 Press the [DISK/SCSI] button.

2 Select the desired menu.

3 Execute the desired function.

12 5 148

Disk/SCSI Operationsi I i

Reference 151

Selecting les The 9000Pro provides three ways to select les: SINGLE, MULTI, and ALL.

When set to SINGLE, you can select only one le. When set to ALL, you can select all les. When set to MULTI, you can select les listed consecutively.

For more information about MULTI, see the example (Style Manager) below.

To cancel Multi le selection, select SINGLE by pressing the [C] button twice.

Selecting Directories/Files Directories are like le folders that are used to organize the le data. The instruc- tions here show you how to navigate through directories and select the desired directo- ries/les.

Basic Operation Directory/File Selection In the le selection display, a

maximum 250 le or directory names can be displayed. If the number of les or directories exceeds 250, the 251st and beyond (according to alphabet- ical order) are not shown.

2 Select a le. (For MULTI, this will be the rst le in the group of les to be selected.)

3 Select MULTI.

4 Select the last le in the group. (All les between this and the le selected in step #2 will be selected.)

1 Select SINGLE. (Before using MULTI, youll have to specify the rst le using SINGLE.)

CAUTION When loading multiple les from disk to Flash ROM, only the selected les will be loaded to the destination location in the Flash ROM

(see pages 78 and 87). Keep in mind that the les are loaded to consecutive locations starting from the specied destination. Make sure that the consecutive locations contain no important data, otherwise you may inadvertently overwrite les you wish to keep.

If you select this location as the destination in Flash ROM with selecting three les in disk, for example, the three locations in Flash ROM are replaced starting from this location.

The following explanation applies to the Load operation of the Plug-in Manager and the Style Manager function.

You can return to the next highest level by pressing the [IN] LCD button while the cursor is located at .

You can go to the next lowest level by press- ing the [IN] LCD button while the cursor is located at the folder icon .

14 9

Disk/SCSI Operationsi I i

152 Reference

Loading Data from a Disk to Flash ROM This operation lets you load the specied le from a oppy disk, an optional hard disk, or an optional SCSI device to Flash ROM. The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.

Select a source le in the disk.

Select a Load method.

If an optional hard disk has been installed or an optional SCSI device has been connected, the appropriate device must be selected here.

Select this to display the property of the selected le.

For details on directory le selection, see page 151.

Select the destination.

CAUTION When data is loaded from a

oppy disk to the 9000Pro, the data already in the mem- ory of the instrument will be replaced by the data on the disk. Save important data to a disk le before doing the Load operation.

Loading style data can be exe- cuted via the Style Manager function (page 74).

Set the data type to ON or OFF. Data types set to ON will be loaded. Flash ROM data for which the data type has been set to OFF will be retained.

Execute the Load operation by following the on-screen instructions.

Select the source data in the disk.

Select the destination.

SETUP All setup data see list on page 214.

EFFECT DATA

All User effect data page 146.

REGIS- TRATION

All Registration Memory data page 214.

MULTI PAD

All Multi Pad data page 141.

CUSTOM VOICE

All Custom Voice data including wave data saved using the Wave save op- tion page 92.

ORGAN FLUTES

All Organ Flutes settings page 62.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

150

Disk/SCSI Operationsi I i

Reference 153

Saving Data from Flash ROM to a Disk The data types described below can be saved to a oppy disk, an optional hard disk, or an optional SCSI device. The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.

Execute the Save operation by following the on-screen instructions.

Select the destination le in the disk.

For details on directory le selection, see page 151.

If an optional hard disk has been installed or an optional SCSI device has been connected, the appropriate device must be selected here.

CAUTION When overwriting an exist-

ing le, all data is saved. This means that previous data corresponding to unchecked (OFF) items will be over-writ- ten with empty data.

Saving style data can be exe- cuted via the Style Manager function (page 74).

Select the data type to be saved.

Select the desired group of data to be saved. The data types listed at right can be set to ON or OFF as desired.

Set the data type to ON or OFF. Data types set to ON are saved.

SETUP All setup data see list on page 214.

EFFECT DATA

All User effect data page 146.

REGISTRA- TION BANK

All Registration Memory data page 214. You can set the individual banks to ON or OFF.

MULTI PAD All Multi Pad data page 141. You can set the individual banks to ON or OFF.

CUSTOM VOICE

All Custom Voice data page 92. You can set the individual numbers to ON or OFF. If necessary, use the Wave save option.

ORGAN FLUTES

All Organ Flutes voice set- tings page 62. You can set the individual numbers to ON or OFF.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

15 1

Disk/SCSI Operationsi I i

154 Reference

Copying Files & Copying Floppy Disks The Copy File function allows you to copy les to a different directory on the same disk, or to another disk. The Copy Floppy Disk (COPY FD) function allows you to make complete copies of oppy disks a perfect way to make backup copies of your important data. The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.

Backing Up/Restoring the Data in Flash ROM Any data that was pre-recorded in Flash ROM will be erased and replaced by the new settings. This means that preset setups (factory settings) will also be erased. It is there- fore a good idea to save them to disk via the Backup function before recording or creat- ing your own original data so that you can keep them indenitely. The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.

The COPY FD function cannot be used to copy hard disk data.

Copies can only be made to the same type of oppy disk as the source disk (i.e. 2HD to 2HD or 2DD to 2DD).

Some types of pre-recorded music software disks are copy protected.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Select the desired menu.

Execute the COPY FD operation by following the on-screen instructions.

Select the source les.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Execute the Copy operation by following the on-screen instructions.

Select the destination device and directory.

Use these buttons. For details about selecting les, see page 151.

Use these buttons. Another FD is indicated at the bottom of the Device column. Select Another FD if you wish to copy to another oppy disk.

Press this button to change the type of les (as indicated by their extension) dis- played in the FILE column.

See page 151.

Select the desired menu.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Select the data type to be backed up.

Set the data type to ON or OFF. Data types set to ON are backed up.

Execute the Backup opera- tion by following the on-screen instructions.

Select a le to be restored to Flash ROM and execute the Restore operation by following the on-screen instructions.

152

Disk/SCSI Operationsi I i

Reference 155

Converting les

Renaming/deleting Disk Files These functions allow you to assign a name to the le, and to delete any unnecessary les. The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.

This function is useful for when you want to use PSR-8000 data contained on a oppy disk with the 9000Pro, or for when you wish to install a hard disk previously installed to a PSR-8000, to the 9000Pro. The following data created via the PSR-8000 is available: Custom Style Song Chord Step Waveform

This function changes the sequence/track name of the Meta Event of the Standard MIDI le to the song name of the 9000Pro. Save the SMF les before using this function as required.

CAUTION Please note that the HD/FD

cannot be used again in the PSR-8000 after using PSR- 8000 HD/FD function.

Select the desired menu.

Select the le to be deleted. Select the le to be named.

Execute the Delete operation by following the on-screen instructions.

Enter a name for the selected le. Refer to the Basic Operation on page 46.

Select this to display the properties of the selected le.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROLSee page 151.

Press this but- ton to change the type of les (as indicated by their extension) displayed in the FILE column.

15 3

Disk/SCSI Operationsi I i

156 Reference

Renaming/deleting/creating Directories The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.

Formatting a Disk Setting up commercially available blank oppy disks for use with 9000Pro is called formatting. This function is also useful for quickly deleting unnecessary les from an already formatted disk. Be careful when using this operation, since it automatically deletes all data on the disk. The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.

Select the desired menu.

Execute each operation by following the on-screen instructions.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

CAUTION Formatting a disk completely

erases all data on the disk, so be sure that the disk youre formatting does not contain important data!

Select the device to be formatted.

Execute the Format operation by following the on-screen instructions.

Select this to display the properties of the selected disk.

This allows you to assign a password for future formatting operations on the 9000Pro. Once a password is assigned, no device can be formatted without rst specifying the password. This ensures that no one else, intentionally or inad- vertently, will be able to format the device. Pressing this button calls up the Name Entry display (page 46), from which you can enter the password. A maximum of 8 characters can be entered for the name, and both capital and lowercase letters can be used.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Make sure to write down your password and keep in a separate, secure location, in case you forget it.

154

Hard disk drives of a maximum 8 GB capacity can be format- ted; however, the maximum partition size is 2 GB. For example, an 8 GB hard disk drive would have to be format- ted into four separate 2 GB partitions.

Hard disk drives of a capacity greater than 8 GB can be installed; however, the 9000Pro is capable of format- ting only up to a maximum 8 GB on the drive.

Disk/SCSI Operationsi I i

Reference 157

Checking a Disk This function can be used to check an entire disk for damaged les and recover the les so that they can be properly read. Keep in mind that, depending on the extent of the damage, some les may not be recoverable. The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 150.

Select the device to be checked.

Execute the Check operation by following the on-screen instructions.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

15 5

The 9000Pro Functions

158 Reference

The 9000Pro Function mode includes 8 groups of functions that access a number of parameters related to overall 9000Pro operation.

The operations for each function corresponding to step #3 are covered in the following explanations.

The Function mode has the following display pages: MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE Master Tuning/Scale Tuning ..................................158 SPLIT POINT/FINGERING Split Point/Fingering settings.................................159 CONTROLLER Controller assignment (Foot controller/Keyboard/

Modulation Wheel function)...................................159 REGISTRATION/FREEZE/VOICE SET Registration/Freeze Group/Voice Set settings ......163 HARMONY/ECHO Harmony/Echo settings.........................................164 VIDEO OUT Video monitor settings...........................................165 TALK SETTING Talk setting (Vocal Harmony and the microphone

sound settings)......................................................165 UTILITY Utility settings ........................................................166

Master Tuning/Scale Tuning The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure above.

Basic Procedure

DISK/ SCSI MIDIFUNCTION

MENU

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

3 Set the parameters of the selected function.

1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Select the desired function.

Master Tuning

Tune the overall pitch of the 9000Pro from 414.6 - 466.8 Hz (referenced to A3). A3 = 440 Hz is standard concert pitch.

Scale Tuning The current tuning of each note is shown in the corresponding key.

This allows you to store four different Scale Tuning settings to Multi Pad bank #60. This convenient fea- ture lets you change Scale Tuning settings while you are playing, simply by pressing the appropriate Multi Pad. Preset (factory set) data is listed in the chart below.

Select either the normal equal temperament scale or an arabic scale in which each note can be tuned over a 127-cent range.

When the ARABIC scale is selected, you can select the note and tune it . The tuning range is from -64 through 0 to +63. Each increment equals one cent (one cent is one hundredth of a semitone).

Fine-tune the selected note in 1-cent steps.

Coarse-tune the selected key in 10-cent steps.

[NEXT]

[BACK]

C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B Pad1 RASD Up 0 0 0 0 -50 0 0 0 0 0 0 -50 Pad2 RASD Down 0 0 0 0 -50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Pad3 BAYATI 0 0 0 0 -62 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Pad4 Equal Tem-

perament 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

156

The 9000Pro Functionsi

Reference 159

Split Point/Chord Fingering The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.

Controller Assignment The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.

Foot Controller Various functions can be assigned to the foot volume/switch connected to the FOOT PEDAL jacks.

Foot Volume Controller Determines whether an optional YAMAHA FC7 Foot Controller plugged into the rear-panel FOOT PEDAL VOLUME jack will control master volume, or only the volume of specied parts and voices.

The way in which chords are played or indicated with your left hand (in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard) is referred to as ngering. For details, refer to page 70.

You can set the Split Point by pressing the desired key while hold- ing this button.

The point on the keyboard that separates the auto accompaniment sec- tion/the left-hand section (voice L) and the right-hand section (voice R1/ R2/R3) of the keyboard is called the split point. For details, refer to page 57.

Auto Accompaniment section or Voice L

Split Point

When INDIVIDUAL is selected, you can set the individual part/voice to on or off.

Select MASTER for master volume control or INDIVIDUAL for individual part/voice volume control.

15 7

The 9000Pro Functionsi

160 Reference

Footswitch1 Footswitch2 This determines the functions of footswitches plugged into the rear-panel FOOT PEDAL SWITCH 1 and FOOT PEDAL SWITCH 2 jacks, and to which of the 9000Pro voices the foot- switches will apply.

Functions controlled by the footswitch SUSTAIN Standard sustain footswitch operation. When the footswitch is pressed notes played have a long sustain.

Releasing the footswitch immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes.

SOSTENUTO If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the footswitch while the note(s) are held, those notes will be sustained as long as the footswitch is held (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subse- quently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.

SOFT * Pressing the footswitch subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. The SOFT effect only applies to certain voices PIANO, for example.

GLIDE ** When the pedal is pressed the pitch drops a semitone, and then glides smoothly back to normal pitch when the pedal is released.

PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Porta- mento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 145).

DSP SLOW/FAST Same as the DSP [SLOW/FAST] button.

HARMONY/ECHO Harmony occurs only while pedal is pressed.

VOCAL HARMONY Same as the [V.H.(9)] button.

REGIST. + Recall next highest (increment) registration. 1-1 is selected after 64-8.

REGIST. Recall next lowest (decrement) registration. 64-8 is selected after 1-1.

START/STOP Same as the [START/STOP] button.

TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.

SYNCHRO STOP Same as the [SYNC STOP] button.

INTRO 1 Same as the [INTRO I] button.

INTRO 2 Same as the [INTRO II] button.

INTRO 3 Same as the [INTRO III] button.

MAIN A Same as the [MAIN VARIATION A] button.

MAIN B Same as the [MAIN VARIATION B] button.

MAIN C Same as the [MAIN VARIATION C] button.

MAIN D Same as the [MAIN VARIATION D] button.

FILL DOWN Same as the [FILL IN & BREAK ] button.

FILL SELF Same as the [FILL IN & BREAK ] button.

FILL BREAK Same as the [FILL IN & BREAK ] button.

FILL UP Same as the [FILL IN & BREAK ] button.

ENDING 1 Same as the [ENDING/rit. I] button.

ENDING 2 Same as the [ENDING/rit. II] button.

ENDING 3 Same as the [ENDING/rit. III] button.

FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button.

FING/ON BASS The footswitch alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 70).

BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Auto Accompaniment bass note will be held even if the chord is changed. This function does not work in the Full Keyboard mode.

PERCUSSION Footswitch plays a percussion instrument selected by the ASSIGN LCD buttons (the latter appears when the Percussion type is selected).

Select one of the footswitch functions. See below for details each function.

When the Sustain, Soste- nuto, Soft, Glide, Porta- mento, or DSP slow/fast type is selected, you can set the corresponding parts on or off as required.

158

The 9000Pro Functionsi

Reference 161

* SOFT does not affect the voice using the PLG150/100-DX board. ** GLIDE does not affect the voice using the Plug-in Board.

Sustain Mode In the DEFAULT setting, when you press the footswitch for sustain, the notes you play and release sustain and fade out normally. In the HOLD setting, when you hold down the footswitch for sustain, the notes you play are held (just as if you were actually holding them down with your hands) even if you release the keys.

Panel Controller MODULATION WHEEL Determines to which of the 9000Pro voices the MODULATION wheel will apply.

SYNCHRO START Same as the [SYNCHRO START] button.

R1 ON/OFF Same as the [R1] button.

R2 ON/OFF Same as the [R2] button.

R3 ON/OFF Same as the [R3] button.

LEFT ON/OFF Same as the [L] button.

OTS + Recalls next higher One Touch Setting.

OTS - Recalls next lower One Touch Setting.

Turn Modulation wheel control for the corresponding parts ON or OFF as required.

15 9

The 9000Pro Functionsi

162 Reference

INITIAL TOUCH With this function, the 9000Pro senses how strongly or softly you play the keys, and uses that playing strength to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.

AFTER TOUCH With this function, the 9000Pro senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while play- ing, and uses that pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.

TRANSPOSE ASSIGN This determines the function of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons (page 61).

Set the level at which touch response is turned off.

Select the desired sensitivity curve (listed at right).

Turn initial touch response control for the corresponding parts ON or OFF as required.

HARD 2 Requires the keys to be played very hard to produce maximum loudness.

HARD 1 Requires the keys to be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness.

NORMAL Produces a fairly standard key- board response.

SOFT 1 Although this is not as sensitive as the SOFT 2 setting, this al- lows you to produce loud volume with relatively light playing strength.

SOFT 2 Allows maximum loudness to be produced with very light playing strength.

Indicates current sensitivity setting.

Select the desired sensitivity curve listed at the right side.

Turn aftertouch for the corresponding parts ON or OFF as required.

HARD Relatively strong after touch pres- sure is needed to produce chang- es.

NORMAL Produces a fairly standard after touch response.

SOFT Allows you to produce relatively large changes with very light after touch pressure.

Indicates current sensitivity setting.

RESET

When set to KEYBOARD (default), the buttons transpose only the keyboard sound. When set to SONG, the buttons transpose only the song playback. When set to MASTER, the buttons transpose the overall pitch of the 9000Pro.

160

The 9000Pro Functionsi

Reference 163

Registration/Freeze Group/Voice Set Settings The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.

Registration You can enter descriptive names for each registration bank/number via the Name func- tion.

Freeze Group You can specify which settings are affected by the Freeze function (page 28) via this function.

Voice Set This function determines whether or not the preset Voice, Effect, EQ, and Harmony type settings assigned to each preset voice are recalled when a new voice is selected.

Press one of these buttons to change the name of the Bank or Registration.

For information about how to enter the name, refer to the Basic Operation (page 46).

Select a registration bank/ number you wish to name.

Quick Guide on page 28

Selects a setting you want to freeze or un-freeze. Set (mark) or remove (un-mark) the selected setting.

The parameters included in each group are listed on page 214.

Quick Guide on page 28

Select a part.

These four sets can be individu- ally turned ON or OFF for each part (RIGHT1, 2, 3, LEFT).

The VOICE, DSP, EQ, and HARMONY TYPE parameters are listed on page 214.

16 1

The 9000Pro Functionsi

164 Reference

Harmony/Echo Settings The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.

About the Harmony types When a Harmony type (STANDARD DUET through STRUM) is selected

When MULTI ASSIGN is selected Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (voices). The number of parts which can be assigned depends on the number of parts turned ON via the [PART ON/OFF] buttons. If three parts are turned on, then up to three voices can be assigned. if two parts are turned on, then only two voices can be assigned. For example, if the R1, R2, and R3 parts are turned on and you play and hold three successive notes, the rst note will be played with the R1 voice, the sec- ond note with the R2 voice, and the third note with the R3 voice.

When ECHO is selected An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard at the currently set tempo.

When TREMOLO is selected A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard at the currently set tempo.

When TRILL is selected Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately at the currently set tempo.

About ASSIGN R1 .................. Harmony is only applied to the R1 part. If R1 is OFF there will be no Har-

mony effect. R2 .................. Harmony is only applied to the R2 part. If R2 is OFF there will be no Har-

mony effect. R3 ................... Harmony is only applied to the R3 part. If R3 is OFF there will be no Har-

mony effect. AUTO ............. Harmony notes are automatically assigned to the R1, R2, and R3 parts,

in that order or priority. MULTI ............. Multi Assign automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd added harmony

notes to separate parts (voices). For example, if the R1, and R2 parts are turned on and the STANDARD DUET type is selected, then the note you play on the keyboard will be played by the R1 voice, and the added harmony note will be played by the R2 voice.

Quick Guide on page 35

Assign the Harmony effect to the various parts as listed below.

Determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. The higher the value, the harder the keyboard must be played to apply the Harmony effect.

Select a Harmony type. See below for details.

Set the volume of the Harmony effect.

Adjust the speed of the echo/tremolo/trill effect. This parameter is active when any of the echo-based effects are selected (15 through 17).

When set to ON, the Harmony effect is applied only to the note that belongs to a chord played on the left side of the keyboard from the split point. This setting is not available when the Multi Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill type is selected.

Split Point

This type automatically adds one or more harmony notes to a single-note melody played on the right side of the keyboard from the split point.

A chord played on the left side of the keyboard from the split point controls the harmony.

For all voices except Organ Flutes and Plug-in voices, if you change the chord in your left hand while holding down a note with your right hand, the pitch of the harmony note(s) will bend (without attack) to match the newly played chord. When using Organ Flutes or Plug-in voices with your right hand, the harmony note(s) is retriggered with a fresh attack at a new pitch matching the newly played chord.

The echo, tremolo, and trill effects set via the Harmony/ Echo function may not affect the Organ Flutes sound and the Plug-in voice as expected.

162

The 9000Pro Functionsi

Reference 165

Video Monitor Settings The functions on this page let you set the display characteristics for the lyrics and chords (page 79) that are output to a television or video monitor connected to the [VIDEO OUT] jack (page 13). You can set the size and color of the displayed characters, as well as the color of the display background. The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.

Talk Setting This function page includes a number of parameters which affect the microphone sound when the [TALK] button is on. The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.

Occasionally some ashing parallel lines may appear in the television or video monitor. This does not indicate that the television or video monitor is malfunctioning; you may be able to remedy the situation by adjusting the Character Color or Background Color parame- ters. For optimum results, also try adjusting the color settings on the TV monitor itself.

Avoid looking at the television or video monitor for prolonged periods of time since doing so could damage your eyesight. Take frequent breaks and/or focus your eyes on distant objects to avoid eyestrain.

Television

You can set the back- ground to one of four colors.

The characters displayed on the video screen can be set to any of a variety of colors.

Set this to SMALL if the contents of the LCD do not t in the monitor screen.

Set this to correspond to the standard (NTSC or PAL) used by your video equipment. The default setting is PAL. If the standard used by your television or video monitor is not PAL (for example, NTSC is generally used in North America), change the setting to NTSC. This setting is retained in memory as part of the System Backup parameters. (See pages 55 and 214)

Keep in mind that even after adjusting all settings as recom- mended here, the TV monitor you are using may not display the LCD contents as expected (e.g., the LCD contents may not t on the screen, the char- acters may not be completely clear, or the colors may be wrong).

This determines the amount of attenuation to be applied to the overall sound (not including the microphone input).

These set the reverb and chorus depth of the microphone sound.

This sets the stereo pan position of the microphone sound.

This determines the volume or level of your voice from the microphone.

This turns Vocal Harmony ON or OFF.

This selects the type of DSP effect to be applied to the microphone sound.

This sets the depth of the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound.

This turns the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound ON or OFF.

This is the same parameter as the Vocal Harmony type described on page 81. When the [TALK] button is turned on, the current type setting is recalled.

16 3

The 9000Pro Functionsi

166 Reference

Utility Settings The explanations here apply to step #3 of the Basic Procedure on page 158.

Conguration 1, 2

3

4, 5

Select this to display the system information of the 9000Pro.

This determines whether all wave data that was in the wave RAM memory when the power was previ- ously turned off will be automatically reloaded from disk when the 9000Pro power is turned on.

This determines whether the MIDI bank select and program change numbers for each voice will be shown along with the voice number and name on the voice list display.

This indicates the maximum number of notes currently being played. This can be useful in checking whether the maximum polyphony has been exceeded in songs or styles. The maximum value is 126 (the 9000Pros maximum polyphony). Please note that the polyphony of the Plug-in Voices is not counted.

Press this to reset the Poly Counter to 0.

Setting this to ON enables the 9000Pro to read data much faster from the oppy disk. This is done by use of built-in cache memory. When a oppy disk is inserted and this is set to ON, the 9000Pro automatically loads data to the cache memory (even when you play the keyboard, accompaniment, Multi Pads, etc.). All data is then read directly from the cache memory rather than the disk, vastly speeding up the reading of oppy disk data.

This sets the volume of the 9000Pro metro- nome sound for recording.

This sets the metronome on or off during song playback.

This sets the metronome on or off during song recording.

This allows you to set the drum voice and the velocity which will sound when the Tap function (page 72) is used.

This function can be used to lock the specied parameters so that they can only be changed via the direct panel controls (i.e., not via the Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Database, MIDI, sequence data, etc.).

Lock (mark) or unlock (un-mark) the selected parameter.

Select a parameter you want to lock or unlock.

164

The 9000Pro Functionsi

Reference 167

Time

Language

Computer Keyboard Types (for use with the 9000Pro)

The displays from which voices and styles are selected automatically change back to the previously selected display after a short time. (when this is not set to NEVER). The Auto Exit Time parameter determines the time that the Voice List or Style List displays remain before returning to the previous dis- play. When this is set to NEVER, the Voice List or Style List displays remain indenitely. (You can manu- ally return to the previous display by pressing the [EXIT] button.)

When this is set to NEVER, the selected menu displays remain indenitely until changed manually. When set to a value other than NEVER, the displays change according the interval selected. Screen Saver Time determines how much time elapses before the Screen Saver func- tion is turned on. The Screen Saver can- cels the current display and scrolls through the 9000Pros specications. To return to the original display, press the [CLOSE] LCD button (which appears in the Screen Saver) or any other panel button.

Select the appropriate type for the computer key- board that is to be connected to the 9000Pro. See below for details.

See page 45 for details.

Keep in mind that some keys of the computer keyboard are not used for the 9000Pro and have no effect or function.

Press this button to enter the owners (your) name.

ESC F1

Q W E R T Y U I O P

ACaps Lock

Ctrl

Tab

CtrlAlt Alt Gr

S D F G H J K

| \

! 1

" 2

3 4

% 5

^ 6

& 7 8

( 9

) 0

-

+ =

{ [

} ]

Z X C V B N M

L

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Print

Screen SysRq

Scroll Lock

Num Lock

Insert Home Page Up

Page DownDeleteEnter End

Enter

+

/

Pause Break

@ '

~ #

? /

> .

< ,

: ;

7 Home

8 9 PgUp

4 5 6

1 End

2 3 PgDn

0 Ins

.

Del

Num Lock

Caps Lock Scroll Lock

Q

~

` ! 1

@ 2

# 3

$ 4

% 5

^ 6

& 7 7

8

8 ( 9 9

: + ;

) 0

-

"

? / /

> . .

< ,

+ =

} ]

{ [W E R T Y U 4 I 5 O 6 P -

A S D F G H J 1 K 2 L 3

Z X C V B N M 0

DeleteInsert Pause Break

Scroll Lock

Caps Lock

Scroll Lock

Num Lock

PrtSc SysRq

Num LockF10F9F8F7F6F5F4F3F1

F11 ESC

Home Backspace

End

PgUpCaps Lock Enter

PgDn

CtrlCtrlFn AltAlt

Shift

F2 F12

Shift

Tab

\

ESC F1

Q @ W E R T Z U I O P

A

Strg StrgAlt Alt Gr

S D F G H J K

> <

! 1^

" 2 2

3 3 4

% 5

& 6

/ 7 {

( 8 [

) 9 ]

= 0 }

`

+~

? \

Y X C V B N M

L

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Rollen Num Lock

Einfg Pos 1

Entf Ende

Enter

Pause Untbr

Druck S-Abf

' #

-

: .

; ,

7 Pos 1

8 9 Bild

4 5 6

1 Ende

2 3 Bild

0 Einfg

,

Entf

Num

Caps Lock

Scroll Lock

Bild

Bild

Echap F1

Z E R T Y U I O P

Q

A

Ctrl CtrlAlt Alt Gr

S D F G H J K

> <

1 &2

2 ~

3 " #

5 ( [

6

7 `

8 \

9 ^

0 @

+ = }

$

) ]

W X C V B N ? ,

L M

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Arrt dfil

Num

Inser

Suppr Fin

Entr

+

/

Pause

Attn

Impr cran Syst

%

.. ^

!

/ :

. ;

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 Fin

2 3

0 Inser

.

Suppr

Verr Num

Dfil

Entre

4 ' {

ESC F1

Q W E R T Y U I O P

ACaps Lock S D F G H J K

! 1

1/2

" 2 @

# 3 4 $

% 5

& 6

/ 7 {

( 8 [

) 9 ]

= 0 }

-

^ .. ~

Z X C V B N M

L

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Print Scrn

SysRq

Scroll Lock Num

Lock

Insert Home Page Up

Page DownDeleteEnter End

Enter

Pause

Break

* '

: .

; ,

7 Home

8 9 Pg Up

4 5 6

1 End

2 3 Pg Dn

0 Ins

Del

Num Lock

Caps Lock

Scroll Lock

`

? + \

> <

Ctrl CtrlAlt Alt Gr

ESC F1

Q W E R T Y U I O P

A S D F G H J K

! 1

Z X C V B N M

L

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12

Insert Home Page Up

Page DownDelete End

Enter

+

/

7 Home

8 9 Pg Up

4 5 6

1 End

2 3 Pg Dn

0 Ins

,

Del

Num Lock

Caps Lock

Scroll Lock

Num Lock

Print Scrn SysRq

Scroll Lock

Pause

Break

-

^ .. ~

' : .

; ,

` \

? +

" 2 @

# 3 4 $

% 5

& 6

/ 7 {

( 8 [

) 9 ]

= 0 }

Caps Lock

> <

Ctrl CtrlAlt Alt Gr

Type 1 Type 2

Type 3 Type 4

Type 5 Type 6

16 5

MIDI Functions

168 Reference

Built into the rear panel of the 9000Pro are two standard sets to MIDI terminals (MIDI IN A/B, MIDI OUT A/B), a TO HOST terminal, and a HOST SELECT switch. The MIDI Functions give you a comprehensive, powerful set of tools for expanding your music recording and performance possibilities. This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how you can use MIDI on your 9000Pro.

No doubt you have heard the terms acoustic instrument and digital instrument. In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Lets consider an acoustic piano and a clas- sical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on informa- tion received from the keyboard. So then what is the information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production? For example, lets say you play a C quarter note using the grand piano sound on the 9000Pro key- board. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as with what voice, with which key, about how strong, when was it pressed and when was it released. Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampling note.

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages.

The 9000Pro can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of con- troller data. The 9000Pro can be controlled by the incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices specied for the various parts.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the 9000Pro can receive/transmit.

Whats MIDI?

Acoustic guitar note production Digital instrument note production

Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound.

Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampling note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers.

Sampling Note Sampling NoteTone Generator (Electric circuit)

Playing the keyboard RL

Example of Keyboard Information Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released)

Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)

Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)

166

MIDI FunctionsI I i

Reference 169

Channel Messages The 9000Pro is an electronic instrument that can handle 32 channels. This is usually expressed as it can play 32 instruments at the same time. Channel messages transmit infor- mation such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 32 channels.

System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like System Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device.

The messages transmitted/received by the 9000Pro are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart on pages 228 and 244.

MIDI and TO HOST Terminals In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple devices, each device must be con- nected by a cable. There are two ways to connect: from the MIDI terminals of the 9000Pro to the MIDI terminals of an external device using a MIDI cable, or from the TO HOST port of the 9000Pro to the serial port of a personal computer using a special cable. If you connect from the 9000Pro TO HOST terminal to a personal computer, the 9000Pro will be used as a MIDI interface, meaning that a dedicated MIDI interface is not necessary.

In the rear panel of the 9000Pro, there are two kinds of terminals, the MIDI terminals and the TO HOST terminal.

The MIDI A terminals and the TO HOST terminal are mutually exclusive; they cannot be used at the same time. Use the HOST SELECT switch to change between the MIDI A terminals and the TO HOST terminal. When the HOST SELECT switch is set to MIDI, the MIDI A terminals receive/trans- mit MIDI data. When the HOST SELECT switch is set to Mac, PC-1, or PC-2, the MIDI A terminals will not receive/transmit data.

The MIDI B IN/OUT terminals function regardless of the setting of the HOST SELECT switch.

Message Name 9000Pro Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each mes- sage includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played.

Program Change Voice selecting (control change bank select MSB/LSB setting)

Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc.

Message Name 9000Pro Operation/Panel Setting

System Exclusive Message

Effect type settings (Mixing Console), etc.

Realtime Messages Clock setting, Start/stop operation

MIDI IN Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device.

MIDI OUT Transmits the 9000Pros keyboard information as MIDI data to another MIDI device.

TO HOST Transmits and receives MIDI data to and from a personal computer.

The performance data of all songs, styles and Multi Pads is MIDI data.

When using the TO HOST ter- minal to connect to a personal computer using Windows 95/ 98, a Yamaha MIDI driver must be installed in the personal computer. The included disk contains the Yamaha MIDI driver.

Special MIDI cables (sold sep- arately) must be used for con- necting to MIDI devices. They can be bought at music stores, etc.

Never use MIDI cables longer than about 15 meters. Cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors.

The MIDI B port ignores Sys- tem Exclusive messages.

16 7

MIDI FunctionsI I i

170 Reference

On the 9000Pro, 16 channels of MIDI data can be transmitted/received over a single MIDI cable, or over a serial cable (using the TO HOST terminal). Since the 9000Pro features two independent MIDI ports (A and B), a total of 32 MIDI channels can be used simultaneously. For example, several tracks can be transmitted simultaneously, including the auto accompaniment data (as shown below).

As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting MIDI data (page 175).

Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the 9000Pro Auto Accompaniment fea- tures on a external sequencer (such as a personal computer). After recording, you can then edit the data with the sequencer, then play it again on the 9000Pro (playback).

Set: MIDI transmit settings (page 175) Set: Receive mode for all channels to XG/GM

MIDI receive settings (page 176)

Control the 9000Pro from an optional Yamaha MFC10 MIDI Foot Controller

Set: MFC10 settings (page 178).

What You Can Do With MIDI

Voice R1 Channel 1 Track 1

Voice R2 Channel 2 Track 2

Voice R3 Channel 3 Track 3

Voice L Channel 4 Track 4

Multi Pad 1 Channel 5 Track 5

Multi Pad 2 Channel 6 Track 6

Multi Pad 3 Channel 7 Track 7

Multi Pad 4 Channel 8 Track 8

Auto Accompaniment Rhythm 1 (sub) Channel 9 Track 9

Auto Accompaniment Rhythm 2 (main) Channel 10 Track 10

Auto Accompaniment Bass Channel 11 Track 11

Auto Accompaniment Chord 1 Channel 12 Track 12

Auto Accompaniment Chord 2 Channel 13 Track 13

Auto Accompaniment Pad Channel 14 Track 14

Auto Accompaniment Phrase 1 Channel 15 Track 15

Auto Accompaniment Phrase 2 Channel 16 Track 16

MIDI cable or serial cable

External sequencer9000Pro part

When recording performance data using the Auto Accompaniment on an external sequencer

MIDI receive (playback)

MIDI transmit

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

MIDI INMIDI OUT

9000Pro

QY700

MIDI receive (playback)

MIDI transmit

Personal computer Sequencer software

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

MIDI INMIDI OUT

9000Pro

MIDI receive (control)

MIDI transmit

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

MIDI INMIDI OUT

MFC10

9000Pro

Although the 9000Pro can receive MIDI data over 32 channels simultaneously, as a multi-timbral sound source/ tone generator it actually responds to only 28 channels simultaneously. This is because the MIDI Receive Mode for the MIDI B port (page 176) cannot be set to XG/GM.

168

MIDI FunctionsI I i

Reference 171

This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by 9000Pro, and whether or not the 9000Pro can playback com- mercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below.

Sequence format Sequence format refers to the way in which MIDI data (for playback, such as songs and styles) is stored to disk. A number of popular sequence formats described below are compatible with the 9000Pro. Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device.

SMF (Standard MIDI File) This is the most common sequence format. Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0.

The 9000Pro is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1. Song data recorded on the 9000Pro is automatically recorded as SMF Format 0.

ESEQ This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamahas MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is a common format used with various Yamaha software.

The 9000Pro is compatible with ESEQ.

XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) strandard with greater functional- ity and open-ended expandability for the future.

The 9000 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF le containing lyric data is played.

Style File The Style File Format SFF is Yamahas original style le format which uses a unique conver- sion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

The 9000Pro uses the SFF internally, reads optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Style recording feature.

Voice allocation format With MIDI, voices are assigned to specic numbers, called program numbers. The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the voice allocation format. Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback.

GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level 1, as is most commercially available software.

The 9000Pro is compatible with GM System Level 1.

XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and has been developed by Yamaha specically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expres- sive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future.

The 9000Pro is compatible with XG.

DOC This voice allocation format is compaible with many of Yamahas MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments. This is also a common format used with various Yamaha software.

The 9000Pro is compatible with DOC.

MIDI Data Compatibility

Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, keep in mind that the sounds may differ slightly, depending on the particular MIDI device used for playback (this includes the 9000Pro).

16 9

MIDI FunctionsI I i

172 Reference

Connecting the 9000Pro to a computer (via the TO HOST terminal or the MIDI termi- nals) lets you take advantage of the enormous processing power and editing exibility of computer-generated music. Connection can be done in one of two ways:

Using the 9000Pro MIDI terminals Using the TO HOST terminal

Using the 9000Pro MIDI terminals Using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the personal computer and the 9000Pro. For the connection cable, use a special MIDI cable.

When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the per- sonal computer to the MIDI IN terminal of the 9000Pro. Set the HOST SELECT switch to MIDI.

When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the 9000Pro, as shown in the diagram below. Set the HOST SELECT switch on the 9000Pro to MIDI.

When the HOST SELECT switch is set in the MIDI position, input and output to the TO HOST terminal is ignored.

When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details, carefully read the owners manual for the software you are using.

When the computer has a USB interface, use the Yamaha UX256.

Connecting to a Personal Computer

In the explanation examples here, the MIDI A terminals are used.

When using the 9000Pro as a 16-channel multi-timbral sound source, make sure to connect the other MIDI device to the MIDI A IN terminal (not MIDI B).

You can connect a MIDI device to the MIDI B IN terminal; how- ever, in this case, the 9000Pro cannot be used as a multi-tim- bral sound source, since the MIDI Receive Mode for the MIDI B port (page 176) cannot be set to XG/GM.

Computer (sequencer software)

MIDI INMIDI OUT

MIDI OUTMIDI IN 9000Pro

Computer (sequencer software)

MIDI IN RS-422

MIDI OUT

MIDI interface

9000Pro

Computer (sequencer software)

MIDI IN USB cable

MIDI OUT

UX256

9000Pro

170

MIDI FunctionsI I i

Reference 173

Using the TO HOST terminal Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS-232C terminal or RS-422 terminal) to the TO HOST terminal of the 9000Pro. For the connection cable, use the appropriate cable below (sold separately) that matches the per- sonal computer type.

IBM-PC/AT Series Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the 9000Pro using a serial cable (D-SUB 9P -> MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the 9000Pro HOST SELECT switch to the PC-2 position.

Macintosh Series Connect the RS-422 terminal (modem or printer terminal) on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the 9000Pro using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set the 9000Pro HOST SELECT switch to the Mac position. Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer software you are using to 1 MHz. For details, carefully read the owners manual for the soft- ware you are using. For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant owners manuals.

About the Thru Port Function This function can be used when a computer is connected to the TO HOST terminal of the 9000Pro. It gives you exceptionally exible and comprehensive control over the routing of incoming MIDI data.

For example, you could use this to selectively play back parts of song data from a computer having the 9000Pro respond to certain parts of the song, while playing back other parts on a separate connected tone generator (as shown in the illustration).

Select the desired THRU PORT settings from the MIDI SYSTEM display (page 174) on the 9000Pro as described below, and make the appropriate port settings on your computer/sequencer software.

THRU PORT Comments NO THRU All incoming MIDI data from the computer is recognized by the 9000Pro, but is not transmitted through

the MIDI B OUT terminal. THRU All incoming MIDI data from the computer is recognized by the 9000Pro and is also transmitted unproc-

essed through the MIDI B OUT terminal. In this case, the MIDI B OUT terminal functions as MIDI THRU. OFF Only MIDI data assigned to Port 1 from the computer is recognized by the 9000Pro. The data is not

transmitted through the MIDI B OUT terminal. Any MIDI data that is assigned to ports other than Port 1 is not recognized or transmitted.

1-8 Only MIDI data assigned to Port 1 from the computer is recognized by the 9000Pro. The data that is assigned to the port number set here is transmitted through the MIDI B OUT terminal. Any MIDI data that is assigned to ports other than the one selected here and Port 1 is not recognized or transmitted.

mini DIN 8-pin D-SUB 9-pin

9000Pro

mini DIN 8-pin mini DIN 8-pin

9000Pro

mini DIN 8-pin

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT B

Tone Generator

9000Pro

Computer and software with multiple-port capability.

MIDI data and its port assignment(s) is trans- mitted to the 9000Pro.

Set the THRU PORT set- ting in the MIDI SYSTEM display (page 175)

17 1

MIDI FunctionsI I i

174 Reference

The 9000Pro offers a range of MIDI functions that allow it to be used effectively in even the most sophis- ticated MIDI systems.

The operations for each function corresponding to step #5 or #6 are covered in the fol- lowing explanations.

Basic Procedure

DISK/ SCSI MIDIFUNCTION

MENU

Refer to page 178. Refer to pages 175, 176, 177.

Refer to page 177.

1 Press the [MIDI] button.

2 Select the desired template.

3 Select this to call up the MFC10 display.

3 Select this to call up the SETUP display.

6 Use this menu to store your settings.

5 Set the parameter of the selected menu. 5 Set the parameter of the selected menu.

Preset MIDI templates (Factory Set) All Parts Transmits all parts including R1, R2,

R3 and Left. KBD & ACMP Transmits Upper and Lower key-

board performance data, rather than that of the individual parts (R1, R2, R3, and Left).

Master KBD1 The 9000Pro functions as a master keyboard for controlling external tone generators or other devices.

Master KBD2 The 9000Pro functions as a master keyboard which does not transmit af- tertouch data.

Clock Ext.A MIDI IN A port receives MIDI clock data, allowing you to synchronize the 9000Pro with an external MIDI de- vice.

MIDI Accord1 An ideal setup for controlling the key- board and accompaniment by a MIDI accordion.

MIDI Accord2 The chord and bass buttons on a MIDI accordion are used to control the accompaniment, as well as play the chord and bass parts.

MIDI Pedal1 A MIDI pedal keyboard connected to the MIDI IN B port controls the bass note of the accompaniment.

MIDI Pedal2 A MIDI pedal keyboard connected to the MIDI IN B port plays the bass part.

MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received.

4 Select the desired menu to be set by using the [NEXT] or [BACK] button. 4 Select the desired menu.

Since all MIDI settings data is stored to Flash ROM, any data in the MIDI settings location will be erased and replaced by your new settings. This includes the factory pro- grammed preset MIDI set- tings. If youve deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6).

172

MIDI FunctionsI I i

Reference 175

System Settings The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.

Local Control Local Control refers to the fact that, normally, the 9000Pro keyboard controls the internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. This condition is referred to as Local Con- trol on since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control can be turned off, however, so that the keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator can respond to MIDI information received on channels set to the XG/GM mode via the MIDI IN connector. This means that while an external MIDI sequencer, for example, plays the 9000Pro internal voices, an external tone generator can be played from the 9000Pro keyboard.

Clock, Receive Transpose and Thru Port Clock Determines whether the 9000Pro is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device. INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the 9000Pro is being used alone. If you are using the 9000Pro with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the 9000Pro to be synchronized to the external device, set this function to EXTERNAL. In the latter case, the external device must be connected to the 9000Pro MIDI IN connector, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal.

Transmit Clock Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off. When set to OFF, no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is transmitted.

Receive Transpose When the RECEIVE TRANSPOSE parameter is set to OFF, note data received by the 9000Pro is not transposed, and when set to ON, the received note data is transposed according to the current 9000Pro song transpose setting.

Thru See page 173.

Message Switch The SYS/EX. TRANSMIT parameter turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system exclusive message data on or off. The SYS/EX. RECEIVE parameter turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equip- ment on or off. The CHORD SYS/EX. TRANSMIT parameter turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect root and type) on or off. The CHORD SYS/EX. RECEIVE parameter turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment on or off.

Transmit Settings This display page allows you to specify which 9000Pro voices and parts will be transmitted via which MIDI channels (there are 32 MIDI channels), and to specify which types of data will be transmitted for each channel. The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.

The Tx MONITOR (transmit monitor) indicates when data is being transmitted on any of the 32 MIDI channels: The dots cor- responding to each channel (1- 32) ash briey whenever any data is transmitted on the chan- nel(s).

Turn transmission of the specied data type on or off. See the next page for details on the data types.

Select a Part for the selected channel.

Select a Channel.

17 3

Channels 1 - 16 are handled with the MIDI A terminals or the TO HOST terminal; chan- nels 1 - 16 of a second MIDI port or device are handled as channels 17 - 32 with the MIDI B terminals.

MIDI FunctionsI I i

176 Reference

Receive Settings This display page allows you to specify the MIDI receive mode for each 9000Pro MIDI channels, and to specify which types of data will be received via each channel. The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.

MIDI Receive Mode

OFF No MIDI data is received. XG/GM This is the Multi-Timbre mode in which the corresponding channel of the internal XG/GM tone

generator is directly controlled by the received MIDI data. XG/GM can only be used with chan- nels 1 - 16. It cannot be used with channels 17 - 32.

RIGHT 1 The RIGHT 1 part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. RIGHT 2 The RIGHT 2 part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. RIGHT 3 The RIGHT 3 part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. LEFT The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. KEYBOARD MIDI note data received by the 9000Pro plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if

they are played on the keyboard. ACMP RHYTHM1~2

The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 notes.

ACMP BASS The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS notes. ACMP CHORD1~2

The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2 notes.

ACMP PAD The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD notes. ACMP PHRASE1~2

The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2 notes.

Select a Channel.

The Rx MONITOR indicates when data is being received on any of the 32 MIDI channels: The dots corresponding to each channel (1 - 32) ash briey whenever any data is received on the channel(s).

Turn reception of the specied data type on or off. See below for details on the data types.

Select a Mode for the selected channel. See below for details about the receive modes.

Channels 1 - 16 are handled with the MIDI A terminals or the TO HOST terminal; chan- nels 1 - 16 of a second MIDI port or device are handled as channels 17 - 32 with the MIDI B terminals.

Data types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE display

Note.........................Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specic note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played.

Cntcng.....................The abbreviation of Control Change. Control change data includes modulation wheel, foot controller, and any other controller data (except the pitch bend wheel, which has its own switch, below).

Prgcng.....................The abbreviation of Program Change. Program change data corresponds to voice or patch numbers.

Pitch Bend...............Refer to page 59

After Tch..................Refer to page 60

174

MIDI FunctionsI I i

Reference 177

Root Settings The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to ON are recognized as the root notes in the accompaniment section. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment on/off and split point settings on the 9000Pro panel. The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.

Chord Detect Settings The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to ON are recognized as the ngerings in the accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the n- gering mode on the 9000Pro. The chords will be detected regardless of the accompani- ment on/off and split point settings on the 9000Pro panel. The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.

Storing the MIDI Settings This allows you to store your custom MIDI settings to Flash ROM. The explanations here apply to step #6 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.

Set the desired track to ON or OFF.

Press this to set all channels to OFF.

Select channel groups 1 through 8, 9 through 16, 17 through 24, and 25 through 32, respec- tively.

Channels 1 - 16 are handled with the MIDI A terminals or the TO HOST terminal; chan- nels 1 - 16 of a second MIDI port or device are handled as channels 17 - 32 with the MIDI B terminals.

Set the desired track to ON or OFF.

Press this to set all channels to OFF.

Select channel groups 1 through 8, 9 through 16, 17 through 24, and 25 through 32, respec- tively.

Channels 1 - 16 are handled with the MIDI A terminals or the TO HOST terminal; chan- nels 1 - 16 of a second MIDI port or device are handled as channels 17 - 32 with the MIDI B terminals.

This allows you to assign a name to your group of MIDI settings. (For details on entering a name, refer to Basic Operation on page 46.)

Press this to execute the Store operation.

Select the destination.

Since all MIDI settings data is stored to Flash ROM, any data in the MIDI settings location will be erased and replaced by your new settings. This includes the factory pro- grammed preset MIDI set- tings. If youve deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6).

17 5

When several channels are simultaneously set to ON, the root note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels.

When several channels are simultaneously set to ON, the chord is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels.

MIDI FunctionsI I i

178 Reference

MFC10 Settings Various functions can be assigned to an optional Yamaha MFC10 MIDI Foot Controller connected to the 9000Pro. Connect the MFC10 to the MIDI B terminals and set the MIDI channel for the MFC10 messages by following the on-screen instructions. The 9000Pro provides two ways to set: Easy Setup and Full Setup.

The explanations here apply to step #5 of the Basic Procedure on page 174.

Easy Setup Follow the on-screen instructions to call up the template display as shown below.

MIDI cable

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

MIDI INMIDI OUT

MFC10 9000Pro

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Select a template.

Press the [NEXT] button to enable the selected Easy Setup template. Disconnect the MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT B terminal and connect it to the MFC10 Foot Controller.

When setting up the MFC10 from the 9000Pro, a MIDI cable must be connected from the MIDI OUT of the 9000Pro to the MIDI IN of the MFC10. However, you should discon- nect this cable when using the MFC10, since extraneous MIDI messages may be transmitted from the 9000Pro.

To exit from the MFC10 play mode, select the MIDI Tem- plate display (page 174) and press the [CANCEL] LCD but- ton.

The MFC10 play mode on/off status is retained in Flash ROM and is maintained even when the power is turned off.

When the MIDI B terminals are connected to the MFC10, the functions of the MIDI B port are limited. For details, refer to the MIDI Data Format (page 228).

176

MIDI FunctionsI I i

Reference 179

Full Setup You can create your original settings and store them as a template. Follow the on-screen instructions to call up the template display as shown below.

Since all MFC10 settings data is stored to Flash ROM, any data in the MFC10 settings location will be erased and replaced by your new settings. This includes the factory pro- grammed preset MFC10 settings. If youve deleted the factory-set data, you can use the Restore function (page 154) to load a copy of it from the included disks (page 6).

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Assign various functions to the ve Foot Controllers.

Select the desired Foot Controller.

Select the desired function to be assigned to the selected Foot Con- troller.

Select the desired Footswitch number.

Select the desired function to be assigned to the selected Footswitch.

Assign various functions to the ve Footswitches.

Select the destination template.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Store the MFC10 settings by following the on-screen instructions.

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

NEXTBACK

PAGE CONTROL

Press the [NEXT] button to enable the selected Easy Setup template. Disconnect the MIDI cable from the MIDI OUT B ter- minal and connect it to the MFC10 Foot Controller.

When setting up the MFC10 from the 9000Pro, a MIDI cable must be connected from the MIDI OUT of the 9000Pro to the MIDI IN of the MFC10. However, you should disconnect this cable when using the MFC10, since extraneous MIDI messages may be transmitted from the 9000Pro.

To exit from the MFC10 play mode, select the MIDI Template display (page 174) and press the [CANCEL] LCD button.

The MFC10 play mode on/off status is retained in Flash ROM and is maintained even when the power is turned off.

17 7

Installing Optional Hardware

180 Reference

The following optional units can be installed to the 9000Pro.

Before installing the optional hardware, make sure you have a Philips screwdriver.

Installation Precautions

Plug-in Boards Hard disk unit SIMM

SIMM cover

Plug-in board/Hard disk cover

WARNING Before beginning installation, switch off the power to the 9000Pro and connected peripherals, and unplug them from the

power outlet. Then remove all cables connecting the 9000Pro to other devices. (Leaving the power cord connected while working can result in electric shock. Leaving other cables connected can interfere with work.)

Be careful not to drop any screws inside the instrument during installation (this can be prevented by keeping the Plug-in Board, hard disk unit and cover away from the instrument while attaching). If this does happen, be sure to remove the screw(s) from inside the unit before turning the power on. Loose screws inside the instrument can cause improper opera- tion or serious damage. If you are unable to retrieve a dropped screw, consult your Yamaha dealer for advice.

Install the Plug-in boards, the hard disk unit, and the SIMM modules carefully as described in the procedure below. Improper installation can cause shorts which may result in irreparable damage and pose a re haz-ard.

Do not disassemble, modify, or apply excessive force to board areas and connectors on Plug-in boards/hard disk/SIMMs. Bending or tampering with boards and connectors may lead to electric shock, re, or equipment failures.

CAUTION Before handling the Plug-in boards/hard disk unit /SIMMs, you should briey touch the metal surface to which the Plug-in

board/hard disk or SIMM cover is attached (or other such metallic area be careful of any sharp edges) with your bare hand so as to drain off any static charge from your body. Note that even a slight amount of electrostatic discharge may cause damage to these components.

It is recommended that you wear gloves to protect your hands from metallic projections on the Plug-in boards, Hard disk unit, SIMMs, and other components. Touching leads or connectors with bare hands may cause nger cuts, and may also result in poor electrical contact or electrostatic damage.

Handle the Plug-in boards/Hard disk unit/SIMM with care. Dropping or subjecting them to any kind of shock may cause damage or result in a malfunction.

Be careful of static electricity. There are times when static electricity affects the IC chips on the Plug-in board. Before you lift the optional Plug-in board, to reduce the possibility of static electricity, touch the metal parts other than the painted area or a ground wire on the devices that are grounded.

Do not touch the exposed metal parts in the circuit board. Touching these parts may result in a faulty contact. When moving a cable, be careful not to let it catch on the circuit Plug-in board. Forcing the cable in anyway may cut the

cable, cause damage, or result in a malfunction. Be careful not to misplace any of the screws since all of them are used. Do not use any screws other than what are installed on the instrument.

178

Installing Optional HardwareI lli i l

Reference 181

Optional Plug-in Board Installation A variety of optional Plug-in boards sold separately let you expand the voice library of your instrument. The following types of Plug-in boards can be used with your instrument.

PLG150-AN PLG150-PF PLG100-VL PLG150-VL PLG100-DX PLG150-DX PLG100-XG

1 Turn the 9000Pro power off, and disconnect the AC power cord. Also, if the keyboard is connected with other external device(s), disconnect the device(s).

2 Turn the 9000Pro face down on a blanket or some soft sur- face, giving you direct access to the bottom of the instru- ment.

3 Move to a position facing the front panel of the keyboard, and remove the eight screws from the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover with a Phillips screwdriver. Do not remove the other screws.

4 Remove the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover.

CAUTION When inserting Plug-in boards and connecting cables, make sure that you check that they are inserted and

connected properly. Improperly inserted Plug-in boards and cables may cause faulty contacts and an electri- cal short circuit which may cause damage or result in a malfunction.

After mounting the Plug-in board, be sure to tighten the screws as directed so it is completely stable and does not move in any way.

Plug-in board/Hard disk cover

Black screws

Plug-in board/Hard disk cover

Keep the removed (8) screws in a safe place. They will be used when attaching the Plug- in board/Hard disk cover to the keyboard again.

WARNING In order not to drop any screws inside the 9000Pro, keep the Plug-in Board and cover away from the 9000Pro

in the following steps #5 - #7.

17 9

Installing Optional HardwareI lli i l

182 Reference

5 Turn over the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover.

6 Attach the Plug-in Board to the Plug-in board stand. ...........................

6-[1] Remove the four screws from the Plug-in stand with a Phillips screwdriver. Do not remove the other screws.

6-[2] Attach the Plug-in board to the the Plug-in board stand using the four screws removed in the previous step (6-[1]).

If you are installing a second board, go on to step #7 below. If you are installing only one board, go on to step #8.

7 As required, attach another Plug-in board to the Plug-in board stand. ....

7-[1] Remove the four screws from the Plug-in stand and remove the Plug-in stand from the cover. Do not remove the other screws.

7-[2] Attach another Plug-in board by turning over the Plug-in board stand and using the same operations in steps 6-[1] and 6-[2]. When turning over the board, let it rest on a soft surface.

7-[3] Attach the Plug-in board stand to the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover with the four screws removed in step 7-[1].

This is the location for the Hard disk unit. See page 184.

Plug-in board stand Plug-in board/Hard disk cover

First board

Gold color screws

Plug-in board

Gold color screws

Plug-in board connector

Second board

Gold color screws

Gold color screws

Plug-in board stand

Gold color screws

Plug-in Board (rst board)

Plug-in Board (second board) Plug-in board/Hard disk cover

180

Installing Optional HardwareI lli i l

Reference 183

8 Unfasten the cable inside the 9000Pro as shown in the following illus- tration. There are three cables available for installation. The two smaller cables are used for the Plug-in Boards; the larger cable is for the hard disk.

9 Carefully plug the cable connector into the Plug-in board connector until the two notches on the cable connector lock into the sockets on the board as shown in the illustration. The two cables can be used interchangeably. The cable that is used determines the slot number used by the 9000Pro. The cable with the single orange cord corresponds to Slot 1. The cable with the yellow cord corresponds to Slot 2. Keep in mind that the slot number is determined by the cable, not the actual installation position of the board.

10 Attach the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover to the 9000Pro.

11 Check that the installed Plug-in board is functioning properly. Turn on the power. A message appears indicating that the installed Plug-in Board is being initialized. The main display

then appears, indicating that the board has been successfully installed. If an error message appears, the 9000Pro freezes after a while, indicating that the installation was

not successful. If this happens, turn off the power and carefully go through the installation proce- dure again.

If you cannot select a Plug-in Voice even though no error message appears, the board has proba- bly not been connected. If this happens, turn off the power and make sure that the Plug-in Board is securely connected.

Cable clip

First board

Orange or yellow

Second board

Yellow or orange Colored side of cable faces inward.

Black screws

Bring the cover back around as shown, so that the board ts in properly.

18 1

Installing Optional HardwareI lli i l

184 Reference

Optional Hard Disk Installation The hard disk used must be a 2.5-inch IDE-compatible; however, not all such drives may be installable.

For information on the hard disk recommendations, ask your nearest Yamaha representative or an authorized distributor listed at the end of this owners manual. Install a hard disk at your own risk. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage or injury resulting from improper installation or the use of a hard disk other than one of the types recommended by Yamaha.

1-4 Use the same operation as in "Optional Plug-in Board Installation" (page 181).

5 Remove the four screws from the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover.

6 Turn over the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover.

If a Plug-in Board (or boards) is installed, make sure to disconnect the Plug-in Board con- nector(s) before continuing.

7 Hold the hard disk unit in place with your hand as shown below. Make sure that the socket end of the unit faces toward you as shown.

CAUTION When inserting hard disk unit and connecting cables, make sure that you check that they are inserted and

connected properly. Improperly inserted hard disk unit and cables may cause faulty contacts and an electri- cal short circuit which may cause damage or result in a malfunction.

After mounting the hard disk unit, be sure to tighten the screws as directed so it is completely stable and does not move in any way.

Hard disk drives of a maximum 8 GB capacity can be formatted; however, the maximum partition size is 2 GB. For example, an 8 GB hard disk drive would have to be formatted into four separate 2 GB partitions.

Hard disk drives of a capacity greater than 8 GB can be installed; however, the 9000Pro is capable of formatting only up to a maximum 8 GB on the drive.

Hard disk drives wider than 12.7 mm cannot be installed to the 9000Pro.

WARNING In order not to drop any screws inside the 9000Pro, keep the Plug-in Board and cover away from the 9000Pro

in the following steps #5 - #8. If the Plug-in Board has been installed, pull out the cable connector from the Plug-in Board connector.

Silver screws

Plug-in board stand

This is the location for the Hard disk unit.

Plug-in board/Hard disk cover

Hard disk unit: top side face up

Turn over Align the holes in the cover with the holes on the hard disk. The actual placement of the holes may differ depending on the particular hard disk.

182

Installing Optional HardwareI lli i l

Reference 185

8 Attach the hard disk unit to the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover using the four screws removed in step 5.

9 Turn the cover over again, and attach the cable connector as shown. Undo the cable clip (to the large cable), and plug it into the hard disk socket.

Re-attach the Plug-in Board cable(s) if necessary.

10 Attach the Plug-in board/Hard disk cover to the 9000Pro (page 183).

11 Check that the installed hard disk is functioning properly. Turn on the power, go to the DISK display, and execute the Format Hard Disk func- tion (page 156). If the format is completed with no trouble, the hard disk is OK.

Optional SIMM Installation The SIMMs used must meet the following minimum specications, but this does not guarantee that they will work properly with the 9000Pro. Make sure to install the SIMMs in pairs only; also make sure that both modules of the pair are of the same type and memory capacity, and are from the same manufacturer. Consult with your nearest Yamaha representative or an authorized distributor listed at the end of this manual before purchasing SIMMs for the 9000Pro.

16-bit bus compatibility or compliance with JEDEC standards (SIMMs which are only compatible with 32- bit buses can not be used)

70 nanoseconds or faster access time (note: 60 nanosecond SIMMs are faster than 70 nanosecond SIMMs).

No more than 18 memory chips on each SIMM module. SIMM modules must be no more than 25.4 mm in height and the thickness of the SIMM should not

exceed 8mm on either side when measured from the center of the SIMM. See below. SIMMs with parity and EDO DRAM modules can also be used. Use only SIMMs of 4-, 8-, 16-, or 32-megabyte capacity. Install SIMM memory at your own risk. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage or injury

resulting from improper installation.

Silver screws

You should tighten these two screws rst.

Depending on the type of hard disk drive you plan to install, select holes (A) or holes (B) to attach the hard disk drive.

* Holes (A) are used in this illus- tration.

Make sure that the pins do not bend.

In the middle of the hard disk con- nector is a missing pin. Make sure to align the cable connector (which has a corresponding missing hole) to the hard disk as shown. The rightmost 4 pins are unused.

25 .4

m m

8mm

8mm

18 3

Installing Optional HardwareI lli i l

186 Reference

1-2 Use the same operation as in "Optional Plug-in Board Installation" (page 181).

3 Move to a position facing the rear panel of the keyboard, and remove the six screws from the SIMM cover with a Phillips screwdriver. Do not remove the other screws.

4 Remove the SIMM cover.

5 Insert the SIMMs in the SIMM slots as described below. ....................................................................................................................

5-[1] Make sure the orientation is correct. Make sure that the cutout on the SIMM module is aligned with the protruding key on the con- nector slot.

5-[2] Install the rst SIMM in the rear slot (the slot closest to the 9000Pro rear panel), inserting it at an angle as shown in the illus- tration. Make sure that the parts at locations A, B, and C are properly aligned.

Black screws

SIMM cover

First SIMM

SIMM cutout

Slot key

CAUTION Do not install the SIMM back-

wards.

A

B

C

Clamp

SIMM hole

Slot protrusion

SIMM notch

SIMM hole

Clamp

CAUTION Make sure that the entire length of

the SIMM is evenly inserted.

184

Installing Optional HardwareI lli i l

Reference 187

5-[3] Holding both edges of the SIMM module, raise it to the vertical position until it rmly locks in place with the left and right clamps.

....................................................................................................................

5-[4] After conrming the orientation, insert the second SIMM into the front slot (the slot closest to the 9000Pro keyboard), and raise it to the vertical position in the same way as the rst SIMM.

6 Replace the SIMM cover and attach it to the 9000Pro with the six screws.

7 Check that the installed SIMMs are functioning properly. Set the 9000Pro right-side up, and connect the power cord to the rear-panel AC INLET jack and an AC outlet. Turn on the power, go to the SAMPLING display (page 41), and check that the REMAIN TIME value matches the amount of installed memory, as fol- lows:

4MB x 2 106.9s 8MB x 2 202.1s 16MB x 2 392.3s 32MB x 2 772.7s No SIMMS 11.8s (These values apply when there is no data in the wave memory.)

Clamp

Clamp

CAUTION Make sure that the entire

length of the SIMM is evenly inserted.

Second SIMM

Black screwsSIMM cover

Although the wave memory of the 9000Pro can be expanded to 65 megabytes, the maxi- mum size of a single sample recording is 32 mega bytes (380 sec.).

Removing SIMMs SIMM modules can be removed after opening the clamps at both ends of the connector slot.

18 5

Troubleshooting

188 Reference

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE/SOLUTION

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the 9000Pro may produce in- terference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the 9000Pro.

No sound results. The R1/R2/R3/L voice volume (Main Mixer) settings could be set too low. Make sure the voice volumes are set at appropriate levels (page 25).

The Local Control function could be turned off. Make sure Local Control is turned on (page 175).

The [MASTER VOLUME] controls or foot volume are turned all the way down. Set the [MASTER VOLUME] controls and foot volume to a reasonable listening level.

Are the desired parts turned on? ([PART ON/OFF] button page 57) A pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack. Unplug the

headphones. A plug is inserted in the LOOP SEND jacks. Unplug the LOOP SEND

jacks. Is the Footswitch connected to the FOOT VOLUME connector? The [FADE IN/OUT] button is on and has reached the end of its duration,

muting the sound. Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button so that its indicator goes out.

Check whether the external speaker is connected properly.

Not all simultaneously-played notes sound. Auto Accompaniment seems to skip when the keyboard is

played.

You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony of the 9000Pro. The 9000Pro can play up to 126 notes at the same time including voice R2, voice R3, voice L, auto accompaniment, song, and multi pad notes. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound. This is referred to as last- note priority.

The accompaniment or song does not play back even when pressing the [START/STOP] button.

The Multi Pads do not play back, even when one of the MULTI PAD buttons is pressed.

The MIDI Clock may be set to EXTERNAL. Make sure it is set to INTER- NAL (page 175).

The auto accompaniment does not start, even when Synchro Start is in standby condition and a key is pressed.

You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right- hand range of the keyboard. To start the accompaniment with Synchro Start, make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment) range of the keyboard.

Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. Make sure that the scale tuning value for those notes is set to 0 (page 158).

Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regardless of the split point or where chords are played on the keyboard.

Check whether the fingering mode is set to Full Keyboard or not. If the Full Keyboard fingering mode is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting.

The Harmony function does not operate. Harmony cannot be turned on when the Full Keyboard fingering mode is selected. Select an appropriate fingering mode.

186

Troubleshootingl i

Reference 189

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE/SOLUTION

MIDI data is not transmitted or received via the MIDI A termi- nals, even when MIDI cables are connected properly.

The MIDI terminals can only be used when the HOST SELECT switch is set to MIDI. All other settings (Mac, PC-1 and PC-2) are for direct transmission/ reception with a computer.

If you experience distorted or out-of-tune sound from the Vo- cal Harmony feature, your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds (other than your voice) the Auto Ac- companiment sound from the 9000Pro, for example. In par- ticular, bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony feature.

The solution to this problem is to ensure that as little extraneous sound as possible is picked up by your vocal microphone: Sing as closely to the microphone as possible. Use a directional microphone. Turn down the MASTER VOLUME, ACMP volume, or SONG volume

control. Separate the microphone from the external speakers as much as possi-

ble. Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the MIC SETUP display

(page 82).

When a voice is changed, the previously selected effect is changed.

This is normal, each voice has its own suitable preset values which are au- tomatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 163).

There is a slight difference in sound quality between notes played on the keyboard.

Some voices have a looping sound. Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches, de-

pending upon the voice.

This is normal and is a result of the 9000Pros sampling system.

Some voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers.

Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this type of pitch shift. This is normal.

The auto-accompaniment chord does not change even when a different chord is played or the chord is not recognized.

Are you sure youre playing on the left-hand section of the keyboard? You may be using single-finger type fingering in the fingered mode, or

vice versa. Use the correct type of chord fingering for the selected auto- accompaniment fingering mode.

The displayed disk free area value does not coincide with the actual value.

The displayed value is an approximate value.

Disk save operations particularly when saving wave data to floppy disk take a long time.

This is normal. It takes approximately 8 minutes to save 1 megabyte of data to a floppy disk.

Appropriate harmony notes are not produced by the Vocal Harmony feature.

Make sure you are using the appropriate method to specify the harmony notes for the current Vocal Harmony mode. See page 83.

The voice produces excessive noise. Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings of the Mixing Console Filter. This is unavoidable due to the sound generation and processing system of the 9000Pro. To avoid noise, change the above mentioned settings.

The sound is distorted or noisy. The MASTER VOLUME control may be turned up too high. This may be caused by the effects. Try cancelling all unnecessary ef-

fects, especially distortion-type effects. Some filter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display can

result in distorted sound. Is the gain of the Low band set too high in the Master Equalizer display

(Mixing Console page 147) ? If this applies to the Sampled voice , you may have recorded the sam-

ple(s) at too high a level. (See page 84.)

A strange flanging or doubling sound occurs. The sound is slightly different each time the keys are played.

Are the R1 and R2 parts set to ON and both parts set to play the same voice?

If you are routing the MIDI OUT on the 9000Pro to a sequencer and back to the MIDI IN, you may want to set Local Control (page 175) to off to avoid MIDI feedback.

When a disk is inserted into the disk drive, the [DISK IN USE] lamp automatically lights and the data starts loading auto- matically, even though no disk functions have been execut- ed.

This is normal and no cause for concern if FD CACHE (page 166) has been set to ON. If you do not need the data loaded to cache memory, you can eject the floppy disk. You can also operate other functions from the panel without disturbing the automatic cache loading process.

18 7

Index

190

A AC1 ..................................................103 Accompaniment, starting ...................20 Accompaniment, volume ...................25 After Touch ................................60, 162 All ..............................................56, 151 All Clear.............................................68 Arabic tuning ...................................158 Assignable Control ..........................103 Attack...........................................63, 93 Auto accompaniment ...................20, 70 Auto Exit time..................................167 Auto Load ....................64, 69, 100, 166 Auto Trigger Level.............................84 AUX IN/LOOP RETURN jacks ........12

B Backup .......................................55, 154 Bank ...............................28, 34, 77, 141 Bank View....................................28, 77 Basic Operation..................................44 Basic Procedure ..............62, 66, 74, 81,

82, 86, 92, 101, 111, 128, 141, 144, 150, 158, 174

Bass Chord Hold ................................21 Bass Hold .........................................160 Beat indicator .....................................45 Board Custom Voice ..................64, 100 Board Custom Voice Backup ............64,

100, 108 Board Preset Voice .....................64, 100 Board Voice..................43, 64, 100, 102 Break ..................................................22 Brightness ........................................145

C Category.................................26, 56, 74 Check Disk.......................................157 Chord Detect ....................................177 Chord Match ..............................77, 142 Chord note........................................142 Chord Step .......................................122 Chordal.........................................81, 83 Chorus ..............................................146 Clear...........................................87, 142 Clock ................................................175 Complete Save ...................................68 Compressor ................................82, 147 Computer connections .....................172 Conguration ...................................166 Convert.............................................155 Copy...................................75, 142, 154 Custom voice .....................................92 Custom voice creator .........................92

D Decay .................................................93 Defragment ........................................75 Delay ............................................81, 93 Delete ...........................68, 75, 113, 155 Demonstration playback ....................56

Detune ............................................... 81 Device ............................................. 150 Dimmer ............................................. 15 Direct Access .................................... 48 Direct Access chart ........................... 49 Directory ................................... 78, 151 Disk ........................................... 54, 150 Disk Direct ........................................ 25 Disk/SCSI operations...................... 150 Display .............................................. 44 Display messages .............................. 45 DOC ............................................ 7, 171 DSP ................................................... 35 DSP (1)............................................ 147 DSP (2)............................................ 147 DSP (3).................................... 146, 147 DSP (4).............................. 35, 146, 147 DSP (5).............................. 35, 146, 147 DSP (6).............................. 35, 146, 147 DSP (7).............................. 35, 146, 147 DSP (8).................................... 146, 147 DSP (9)............................................ 147 Duet................................................. 164 Dynamics ........................................ 131

E Easy Edit ........................... 93, 130, 131 Edit directory .................................. 156 Effect block ..................................... 146 Effect depth ..................................... 145 Effect parameter .............................. 222 Effect signal ow ............................ 147 Effect type list ................................. 220 EG ..................................................... 93 Element ............................................. 94 End Key............................................. 86 End point ........................................... 89 Ending ....................................... 22, 160 EQ ................................................... 147 Equal Temperament ........................ 158 Event Filter.............................. 122, 125 Event List ................................ 120, 125 Exit .................................................... 44 Extract ............................................... 89

F Fade in/out........................... 23, 72, 160 Fast Forward...................................... 79 FD Cache ........................................ 166 Fill In................................................. 22 Filter .......................................... 93, 145 Fingered ............................................ 70 Fingering ........................................... 70 Fixed Pitch ........................................ 86 Flash ROM........................................ 54 Flash style ......................................... 55 Floppy Disk................................. 5, 150 Foot controller........................... 13, 159 FOOT PEDAL SWITCH jacks ......... 13 FOOT PEDAL VOLUME jack ......... 13 Footswitch................................. 13, 160

Format ............................................. 156 Forward ............................................. 79 Freeze ........................................ 28, 163 Frequency.................... 82, 93, 145, 147 Full Edit..................... 94, 132, 134, 140 Full keyboard .................................... 70 Functions......................................... 158

G GM .............................................. 6, 171 Groove............................................. 131

H Hard disk installation ...................... 184 Harmonic Content ........................... 145 Harmony/echo ................... 35, 160, 164 Headphone ........................................ 10 Highest key...................................... 136 HOST SELECT switch ............. 13, 169

I Initial touch ............................... 60, 162 Intro........................................... 22, 160

K Keyboard drum assignments ........... 200 Keyboard percussion ......................... 58 Keyword ............................................ 27

L Lamp ........................................... 12, 15 Language........................................... 45 LCD CONTRAST control ................ 44 LCD display ...................................... 44 Left .............................................. 18, 57 Left hold............................................ 61 Line out ........................................... 148 Load .............................. 54, 66, 74, 152 Local control ................................... 175 Loop .......................................... 89, 126 LOOP SEND jacks............................ 12 Lyrics................................................. 79

M Main Mixer ................................. 25, 31 Main variation ........................... 22, 160 Master EQ ....................................... 147 Master tune...................................... 158 Master volume................................... 14 Measure................................... 112, 113 Message Switch............................... 175 Metronome .................... 21, 37, 39, 166 MFC10 ............................................ 178 MIC/LINE IN jack ............................ 13 Microphone ..................... 13, 32, 80, 83 MIDI................................................ 168 MIDI Data Format........................... 228 MIDI Implementation Chart ........... 244 MIDI templates ............................... 174 MIDI terminals.................................. 13 Mixing console................................ 144 Mode ................................................. 83

188

191

IndexI

Modulation.................................59, 161 MODULATION wheel ..............59, 161 Multi.................................................151 Multi Assign.....................................164 Multi Finger .......................................70 Multi Pad..............................34, 77, 141 Multi Pad Creator.............................141 Multi Pad Recording ........................142 Multi Part Plug-in Board....................65 Multi Track record .....................38, 110 Music Database............................26, 76 Music stand ........................................10

N Name entry.........................................46 Native Part Parameter ......................104 Native System Parameter .................105 Noise Gate..........................................82 Normalize...........................................90 Note Limit..................................95, 137 NTR .........................................127, 136 NTSC/PAL.......................................165 NTT..........................................127, 136

O Octave ..................................18, 61, 145 Offset Volume ..................................105 On Bass ..............................................70 One Touch Setting........................24, 73 Options.............................................180 Organ Flutes.................................19, 62 Overdub............................................126

P Packing list...........................................6 Panel logos ...........................................6 Panpot ..............................................145 Parameter chart ................................214 Parameter lock .........................166, 214 Part on/off ..................16, 17, 18, 24, 31 Parts....................................................57 Password ..........................................156 Paste .................................................121 PC keyboard.........................12, 46, 167 PHONES jack ....................................13 Pitch bend range...............................145 PITCH BEND wheel..........................59 Play mode ..........................................56 Playback...............21, 30, 32, 33, 34, 78 Plug-in Board .......................42, 64, 100 Plug-in Board installation ................181 Plug-in Custom Voice ................64, 100 Plug-in Manager...................64, 66, 100 Plug-in Setting ...................................69 Plug-in Voice........................43, 64, 100 Poly counter .....................................166 Poly Expansion ..................................69 Poly/mono....................................35, 60 Port...................................................173 Portamento ...............................145, 160 POWER switch ..................................14

Pre effect ........................................... 87 Precautions .......................................... 4 Preset style ........................................ 55 Property............................. 74, 150, 152 PSR-8000 .................................. 75, 155 Punch-in .......................................... 112

Q Quantize .................................. 114, 134 Quick record.............................. 36, 110 Quick Save ........................................ 68

R RAM ................................................. 54 Random ............................................. 56 Receive............................................ 176 Receive Transpose........................... 175 Registration bank ................ 28, 29, 163 Registration memory......................... 28 Rehearsal........................................... 39 Release .............................................. 93 Rename ............................................. 75 Repeat ................................. 56, 77, 142 Replace............................................ 112 Resampling ....................................... 88 Resonance ......................................... 93 Response ......................... 10, 35, 60, 63 Restore ...................................... 54, 154 Reverb ....................... 63, 145, 146, 165 Reverse.............................................. 79 Revoice............................................ 130 Right1.......................................... 16, 57 Right2.......................................... 17, 57 Right3.......................................... 17, 57 Root................................................. 177 RTR ......................................... 127, 137

S Sampling ..................................... 40, 84 Save ................. 54, 55, 68, 75, 113, 153 Scale Tune ....................................... 158 SCSI .................................... 13, 54, 150 Search.......................................... 27, 79 Setup ................................... 54, 79, 214 SIMM installation ........................... 185 SIMM removal ................................ 187 Single ........................................ 56, 151 Single Finger ..................................... 70 Single Part Plug-in Board ................. 65 Slot 1 ........................................... 42, 69 Slot 2 ........................................... 42, 69 Slow/Fast............................. 35, 60, 160 Soft .................................................. 160 Song Creator ............................. 36, 110 Song playback............................. 30, 78 Song recording .......................... 36, 110 Song setup......................................... 79 Sostenuto......................................... 160 Source Chord .......................... 127, 135 Source Root............................. 127, 135 Specications .................................. 246

Split point ................ 18, 20, 57, 70, 159 Start Key............................................ 86 Start point .......................................... 89 Step.................. 110, 116, 122, 140, 143 Store ......................... 19, 41, 54, 62, 74,

81, 84, 92, 101, 128, 141, 146, 147, 158

Style ...................................... 20, 25, 55 Style Assembly................................ 129 Style File ................... 6, 7, 25, 127, 171 Style list........................................... 212 Style Manager ............................. 55, 74 Sustain................................. 35, 60, 160 Sustain mode ................................... 161 Swap.................................................. 75 Synchronized start (Sync Start)......... 20 Synchronized stop (Sync Stop) ......... 73

T Talk setting ................................ 80, 165 Tap count......................................... 166 Tap tempo.................................... 23, 72 Tempo.......................................... 44, 72 Thru Port ......................................... 173 TO HOST.......................... 13, 169, 173 Touch............................. 10, 35, 60, 162 Touch limit ...................................... 164 Track .............................. 24, 36, 38, 82,

110, 112, 113, 129, 130 Transmit .......................................... 175 Transmit clock................................. 175 Transpose .......................... 61, 145, 175 Troubleshooting .............................. 188 Tuning ..................................... 145, 158

U Ultra Quick Start ............................... 79 Utility .............................................. 166

V Velocity ........................... 168, 169, 176 Vibrato............................. 62, 63, 81, 93 Video out ................................... 13, 165 Vocal harmony ........................ 6, 32, 80 Vocal harmony mode......................... 83 Vocal harmony type........................... 33 Vocoder ....................................... 81, 83 Voice effects ................................ 35, 60 Voice list.......................................... 192 Voice Set.......................................... 163 Volume ...... 14, 24, 63, 83, 93, 130, 145

W Wave........................ 41, 84, 85, 87, 152 Waveform .............................. 85, 91, 95

X XF................................................ 6, 171 XG............................................... 6, 171 XGwork lite....................... 64, 100, 106 XGworks ........................... 64, 100, 106

18 9

Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voix

192 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

A p

p e

n d

ix /A

n h

a n

g /A

n n

e x

e

Piano

1 Live! Grand 0 113 0

2 Grand Piano 0 112 0

3 BrightPiano 0 112 1

4 Harpsichord 0 112 6

5 GrandHarpsi 0 113 6

6 Honky Tonk 0 112 3

7 Rock Piano 0 114 2

8 Midi Grand 0 112 2

9 Oct Piano 1 0 113 3

10 Oct Piano 2 0 114 3

11 CP 80 0 113 2

E.Piano

1 Galaxy EP 0 114 4

2 Stage EP 0 117 4

3 Polaris EP 0 115 4

4 Jazz Chorus 0 118 5

5 Hyper Tines 0 113 5

6 Cool! EP 0 119 4

7 Phase EP 0 120 4

8 New Tines 0 116 5

9 Funk EP 0 112 4

10 DX Modern 0 112 5

11 Vintage EP 0 116 4

12 Modern EP 0 115 5

13 Tremolo EP 0 113 4

14 Super DX 0 117 5

15 Clavi 0 112 7

16 Suitcase EP 0 118 4

17 Venus EP 0 114 5

18 Wah Clavi 0 113 7

Organ

1 Cool! Organ 0 118 18

2 Rotor Organ 0 117 18

3 Rock Organ1 0 112 18

4 Dance Organ 0 113 17

5 Gospel Org 0 119 16

6 Cool! Jazz 0 117 16

7 Purple Org 0 114 18

8 Jazz Organ1 0 112 16

9 Rock Organ2 0 113 18

10 RotaryDrive 0 116 18

11 Full Rocker 0 115 18

12 Elec.Organ 0 118 17

13 DrawbarOrg 0 115 16

14 Click Organ 0 112 17

15 Stadium Org 0 118 16

16 Mellow Draw 0 115 17

17 Jazz Organ2 0 113 16

18 Bright Draw 0 116 16

19 60's Organ 0 116 17

20 Jazz Organ3 0 120 16

21 ChapelOrgn1 0 113 19

22 ChapelOrgn2 0 114 19

23 ChapelOrgn3 0 115 19

24 TheatreOrg1 0 114 16

25 TheatreOrg2 0 114 17

26 Pipe Organ 0 112 19

27 Reed Organ 0 112 20

Accordion

1 Musette 0 112 21

2 Tutti Accrd 0 113 21

3 Small Accrd 0 115 21

4 Accordion 0 116 21

5 Tango Accrd 0 112 23

6 Steirisch 0 117 21

7 Bandoneon 0 113 23

8 Soft Accrd 0 114 21

9 Modern Harp 0 113 22

10 Blues Harp 0 114 22

11 Harmonica 0 112 22

Guitar

1 Live! Nylon 0 116 24

2 Cool! J.Gtr 0 115 26

3 Cool! E.Gtr 0 114 28

4 12StrGuitar 0 113 25

5 SolidGuitar 0 118 27

6 Vintage Amp 0 115 29

7 Aloha Gtr 0 118 26

8 Crunch Gtr 0 113 30

9 Carlos Gtr 0 119 26

10 60's Clean 0 117 27

11 Live! Class 0 115 24

12 Cool! JSolo 0 116 26

13 VintageOpen 0 123 27

14 Folk Guitar 0 112 25

15 Solid Chord 0 121 27

16 VintageMute 0 115 28

17 PedalSteel 0 115 27

18 Lead Guitar 0 114 29

19 SlideGuitar 0 125 27

20 Chorus Gtr 0 124 27

21 VintageTrem 0 120 27

22 Spanish Gtr 0 113 24

23 Octave Gtr 0 113 26

24 Deep Chorus 0 114 27

25 CampfireGtr 0 115 25

26 SmoothNylon 0 114 24

27 Tremolo Gtr 0 113 27

28 HawaiianGtr 0 114 26

29 Heavy Stack 0 114 30

30 BrightClean 0 116 27

31 Wah Guitar 0 122 27

32 Classic Gtr 0 112 24

33 DX JazzGtr 0 117 26

34 Distortion 0 112 30

35 Elec.12Str 0 119 27

36 FeedbackGtr 0 113 29

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

566 Appendix Voice List

Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voixi i i li i i

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 193

37 Mandolin 0 114 25

38 CleanGuitar 0 112 27

39 MutedGuitar 0 112 28

40 Funk Guitar 0 113 28

41 Jazz Guitar 0 112 26

42 Overdrive 0 112 29

43 Finger Bass 0 112 33

44 UprightBass 0 113 32

45 Pick Bass 0 112 34

46 Jaco Bass 0 113 35

47 Slap Bass 0 112 36

48 Analog Bass 0 112 39

49 DX FunkBass 0 113 37

50 DrySynBass 0 116 39

51 Touch Bass 0 115 39

52 Hi Q Bass 0 113 38

53 Funk Bass 0 112 37

54 Aco.Bass 0 112 32

55 Fretless 0 112 35

56 Bass&Cymbal 0 114 32

57 Fusion Bass 0 113 36

58 Rave Bass 0 114 38

59 Dance Bass 0 113 39

60 Synth Bass 0 112 38

61 Snap Bass 0 114 39

62 Click Bass 0 115 38

Strings

1 Live! Strs 0 117 49

2 Live! Arco 0 122 49

3 Live! Orch 0 116 49

4 Symphon.Str 0 114 48

5 OberStrings 0 113 51

6 Solo Violin 0 112 40

7 Orch. Brass 0 118 49

8 Orch. Flute 0 119 49

9 Orch. Fl.Br 0 120 49

10 Orch. Oboe 0 121 49

11 Strings 0 112 48

12 OrchStrings 0 113 48

13 Str.Quartet 0 114 49

14 ConcertoStr 0 115 48

15 Analog Strs 0 112 51

16 ChamberStrs 0 112 49

17 Bow Strings 0 116 48

18 SlowStrings 0 113 49

19 TremoloStrs 0 112 44

20 MarcatoStrs 0 115 49

21 Syn Strings 0 112 50

22 PizzStrings 0 112 45

23 Viola 0 112 41

24 Cello 0 112 42

25 Contrabass 0 112 43

26 Harp 0 112 46

27 Hackbrett 0 113 46

28 Fiddle 0 112 110

29 Banjo 0 112 105

30 Sitar 0 112 104

31 Koto 0 112 107

32 Shamisen 0 112 106

33 Soft Violin 0 113 40

34 Orch.Hit 0 112 55

Trumpet

1 Sweet Trump 0 115 56

2 Sweet Tromb 0 117 57

3 SoftTrumpet 0 114 56

4 JazzTrumpet 0 116 56

5 SweetMuteTp 0 114 59

6 SoloTrumpet 0 112 56

7 Air Trumpet 0 117 56

8 SweetFlugel 0 118 56

9 Trombone 0 116 57

10 BaritonHorn 0 113 58

11 Solo Tromb 0 112 57

12 Soft Tromb 0 115 57

13 MellowTromb 0 114 57

14 French Horn 0 112 60

15 Muted Trump 0 112 59

16 Bariton Hit 0 114 58

17 Alp Bass 0 113 33

18 Flugel Horn 0 113 56

19 Tuba 0 112 58

Brass

1 Live! Horns 0 118 62

2 Live! Brass 0 117 62

3 Live! OctBr 0 116 62

4 MellowBrass 0 116 61

5 Sforzando 0 125 61

6 MoonLight 0 115 71

7 MillerNight 0 119 66

8 Saxy Mood 0 120 66

9 Jump Brass 0 113 62

10 Big Brass 0 121 61

11 BrasSection 0 112 61

12 BrightBrass 0 120 61

13 Soft Brass 0 123 61

14 Full Horns 0 114 61

15 Brass Combo 0 115 66

16 SmoothTromb 0 118 57

17 High Brass 0 115 61

18 Ober Brass 0 113 63

19 Trumpet Ens 0 122 61

20 MellowHorns 0 119 61

21 BigBandBrs 0 113 61

22 Pop Brass 0 118 61

23 Brass Hit 0 126 61

24 Step Brass 0 124 61

25 Analog Brs 0 112 63

26 BallroomBrs 0 113 59

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

56 7

Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voixi i i li i i

194 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

27 Trb.Section 0 113 57

28 Small Brass 0 117 61

29 Soft Analog 0 114 63

30 FunkyAnalog 0 115 62

31 TechnoBrass 0 114 62

32 Synth Brass 0 112 62

Saxophone

1 Sweet Tenor 0 117 66

2 Sweet Alto 0 114 65

3 Sweet Sprno 0 113 64

4 Sweet Clari 0 114 71

5 Growl Sax 0 118 66

6 BreathTenor 0 114 66

7 BreathyAlto 0 113 65

8 Soprano Sax 0 112 64

9 MelClarinet 0 113 71

10 Sax Section 0 116 66

11 WoodwindEns 0 113 66

12 Alto Sax 0 112 65

13 Tenor Sax 0 112 66

14 BaritoneSax 0 112 67

15 Rock Bari 0 113 67

16 Oboe 0 112 68

17 EnglishHorn 0 112 69

18 Bassoon 0 112 70

19 Clarinet 0 112 71

Flute

1 Sweet Flute 0 114 73

2 Sweet Pan 0 113 75

3 Class.Flute 0 115 73

4 Pan Flute 0 113 73

5 Flute 0 112 73

6 Piccolo 0 112 72

7 EthnicFlute 0 112 75

8 Shakuhachi 0 112 77

9 Whistle 0 112 78

10 Recorder 0 112 74

11 Ocarina 0 112 79

12 Bagpipe 0 112 109

Choir & Pad

1 Live!Gospel 0 116 52

2 Live! Humm 0 118 52

3 Hah Choir 0 114 52

4 SweetHeaven 0 118 88

5 DreamHeaven 0 121 88

6 Live! Vocal 0 114 53

7 Bah Choir 0 121 53

8 Live! Doo 0 117 53

9 Live! Bah 0 118 53

10 Live! Dao 0 119 53

11 Live! Mmh 0 117 52

12 Gothic Vox 0 113 53

13 Huh Choir 0 119 52

14 Bell Heaven 0 119 88

15 Pan Heaven 0 120 88

16 DooBa Scats 0 115 53

17 Daa Choir 0 120 53

18 Doo Choir 0 122 53

19 Dooom Choir 0 120 52

20 Live! Dooom 0 116 53

21 Choir 0 112 52

22 Air Choir 0 112 54

23 Vocal Ensbl 0 113 52

24 Insomnia 0 113 94

25 Cyber Pad 0 113 99

26 Vox Humana 0 112 53

27 Voices 0 113 54

28 Uuh Choir 0 115 52

29 Wave 2001 0 112 95

30 Neo WarmPad 0 115 89

31 Atmosphere 0 112 99

32 Xenon Pad 0 112 91

33 Skydiver 0 112 101

34 Far East 0 112 97

35 Template 0 114 95

36 Equinox 0 112 94

37 Glass Pad 0 114 93

38 Fantasia 0 112 88

39 DX Pad 0 112 92

40 Symbiont 0 113 88

41 Stargate 0 114 88

42 Area 51 0 112 89

43 Dark Moon 0 113 89

44 Ionosphere 0 115 94

45 Golden Age 0 115 88

46 Solaris 0 114 94

47 Time Travel 0 116 88

48 Millenium 0 117 88

49 Transform 0 113 95

50 Dunes 0 114 89

51 Pro Heaven 0 122 88

52 Sunbeam 0 123 88

Synthesizer

1 Oxygen 0 122 81

2 Matrix 0 123 81

3 Wire Lead 0 120 81

4 Hip Lead 0 113 80

5 Hop Lead 0 117 80

6 Square Lead 0 112 80

7 Saw.Lead 0 112 81

8 Fire Wire 0 116 81

9 Analogon 0 115 81

10 Funky Lead 0 121 81

11 Paraglide 0 114 84

12 Robolead 0 124 81

13 Fargo 0 119 81

14 Portatone 0 112 84

15 Blaster 0 114 81

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

568

Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voixi i i li i i

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 195

16 Big Lead 0 113 81

17 Warp 0 117 81

18 Adrenaline 0 113 84

19 Synchronize 0 112 96

20 Tiny Lead 0 118 80

21 Stardust 0 112 98

22 Aero Lead 0 112 83

23 Mini Lead 0 114 80

24 Synth Flute 0 119 80

25 Sub Aqua 0 118 81

26 Impact 0 113 87

27 Sun Bell 0 113 98

28 Under Heim 0 112 87

29 Rhythmatic 0 113 96

30 Hi Bias 0 116 80

31 Vinylead 0 115 80

32 Skyline 0 115 84

33 Clockwork 0 114 96

Percussion

1 Vibraphone 0 112 11

2 Jazz Vibes 0 113 11

3 Marimba 0 112 12

4 Xylophone 0 112 13

5 Steel Drums 0 112 114

6 Celesta 0 112 8

7 Glocken 0 112 9

8 Music Box 0 112 10

9 TubularBell 0 112 14

10 Kalimba 0 112 108

11 Dulcimer 0 112 15

12 Timpani 0 112 47

13 Live!StdKit 127 0 80

14 Live!FunkKt 127 0 81

15 Live!Brush 127 0 82

16 Live!Std+P 127 0 83

17 Live!Funk+P 127 0 84

18 Live!Brsh+P 127 0 85

19 Std.Kit1 127 0 0

20 Std.Kit2 127 0 1

21 Hit Kit 127 0 4

22 Room Kit 127 0 8

23 Rock Kit 127 0 16

24 Electro Kit 127 0 24

25 Analog Kit 127 0 25

26 Dance Kit 127 0 27

27 Jazz Kit 127 0 32

28 Brush Kit 127 0 40

29 SymphonyKit 127 0 48

30 Arabic Kit 126 0 35

31 Live!Cuban 126 0 40

32 Live!PopLtn 126 0 43

33 SFX Kit1 126 0 0

34 SFX Kit2 126 0 1

35 StyleLvStd 127 0 123

36 StyleLvFunk 127 0 124

37 StyLvStd+P 127 0 125

38 StyLvFunk+P 127 0 126

XG

1 GrandPno 0 0 0

2 GrndPnoK 0 1 0

3 MelloGrP 0 18 0

4 PianoStr 0 40 0

5 Dream 0 41 0

6 BritePno 0 0 1

7 BritPnoK 0 1 1

8 E.Grand 0 0 2

9 ElGrPnoK 0 1 2

10 Det.CP80 0 32 2

11 ElGrPno1 0 40 2

12 ElGrPno2 0 41 2

13 HnkyTonk 0 0 3

14 HnkyTnkK 0 1 3

15 E.Piano1 0 0 4

16 El.Pno1K 0 1 4

17 MelloEP1 0 18 4

18 Chor.EP1 0 32 4

19 HardEl.P 0 40 4

20 VX El.P1 0 45 4

21 60sEl.P 0 64 4

22 E.Piano2 0 0 5

23 El.Pno2K 0 1 5

24 Chor.EP2 0 32 5

25 DX Hard 0 33 5

26 DXLegend 0 34 5

27 DX Phase 0 40 5

28 DX+Analg 0 41 5

29 DXKotoEP 0 42 5

30 VX El.P2 0 45 5

31 Harpsi. 0 0 6

32 Harpsi.K 0 1 6

33 Harpsi.2 0 25 6

34 Harpsi.3 0 35 6

35 Clavi. 0 0 7

36 Clavi. K 0 1 7

37 ClaviWah 0 27 7

38 PulseClv 0 64 7

39 PierceCl 0 65 7

40 Celesta 0 0 8

41 Glocken 0 0 9

42 MusicBox 0 0 10

43 Orgel 0 64 10

44 Vibes 0 0 11

45 VibesK 0 1 11

46 HardVibe 0 45 11

47 Marimba 0 0 12

48 MarimbaK 0 1 12

49 SineMrmb 0 64 12

50 Balafon2 0 97 12

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

56 9

Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voixi i i li i i

196 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

51 Log Drum 0 98 12

52 Xylophon 0 0 13

53 TubulBel 0 0 14

54 ChrchBel 0 96 14

55 Carillon 0 97 14

56 Dulcimer 0 0 15

57 Dulcimr2 0 35 15

58 Cimbalom 0 96 15

59 Santur 0 97 15

60 DrawOrgn 0 0 16

61 DetDrwOr 0 32 16

62 60sDrOr1 0 33 16

63 60sDrOr2 0 34 16

64 70sDrOr1 0 35 16

65 DrawOrg2 0 36 16

66 60sDrOr3 0 37 16

67 EvenBar 0 38 16

68 16+2'2/3 0 40 16

69 Organ Ba 0 64 16

70 70sDrOr2 0 65 16

71 CheezOrg 0 66 16

72 DrawOrg3 0 67 16

73 PercOrgn 0 0 17

74 70sPcOr1 0 24 17

75 DetPrcOr 0 32 17

76 LiteOrg 0 33 17

77 PercOrg2 0 37 17

78 RockOrgn 0 0 18

79 RotaryOr 0 64 18

80 SloRotar 0 65 18

81 FstRotar 0 66 18

82 ChrchOrg 0 0 19

83 ChurOrg3 0 32 19

84 ChurOrg2 0 35 19

85 NotreDam 0 40 19

86 OrgFlute 0 64 19

87 TrmOrgFl 0 65 19

88 ReedOrgn 0 0 20

89 Puff Org 0 40 20

90 Acordion 0 0 21

91 AccordIt 0 32 21

92 Harmnica 0 0 22

93 Harmo 2 0 32 22

94 TangoAcd 0 0 23

95 TngoAcd2 0 64 23

96 NylonGtr 0 0 24

97 NylonGt2 0 16 24

98 NylonGt3 0 25 24

99 VelGtHrm 0 43 24

100 Ukulele 0 96 24

101 SteelGtr 0 0 25

102 SteelGt2 0 16 25

103 12StrGtr 0 35 25

104 Nyln&Stl 0 40 25

105 Stl&Body 0 41 25

106 Mandolin 0 96 25

107 Jazz Gtr 0 0 26

108 MelloGtr 0 18 26

109 JazzAmp 0 32 26

110 CleanGtr 0 0 27

111 ChorusGt 0 32 27

112 Mute.Gtr 0 0 28

113 FunkGtr1 0 40 28

114 MuteStlG 0 41 28

115 FunkGtr2 0 43 28

116 Jazz Man 0 45 28

117 Ovrdrive 0 0 29

118 Gt.Pinch 0 43 29

119 Dist.Gtr 0 0 30

120 FeedbkGt 0 40 30

121 FeedbGt2 0 41 30

122 GtrHarmo 0 0 31

123 GtFeedbk 0 65 31

124 GtrHrmo2 0 66 31

125 Aco.Bass 0 0 32

126 JazzRthm 0 40 32

127 VXUprght 0 45 32

128 FngrBass 0 0 33

129 FingrDrk 0 18 33

130 FlangeBa 0 27 33

131 Ba&DstEG 0 40 33

132 FngrSlap 0 43 33

133 FngBass2 0 45 33

134 ModAlem 0 65 33

135 PickBass 0 0 34

136 MutePkBa 0 28 34

137 Fretless 0 0 35

138 Fretles2 0 32 35

139 Fretles3 0 33 35

140 Fretles4 0 34 35

141 SynFretl 0 96 35

142 Smooth 0 97 35

143 SlapBas1 0 0 36

144 ResoSlap 0 27 36

145 PunchThm 0 32 36

146 SlapBas2 0 0 37

147 VeloSlap 0 43 37

148 SynBass1 0 0 38

149 SynBa1Dk 0 18 38

150 FastResB 0 20 38

151 AcidBass 0 24 38

152 Clv Bass 0 35 38

153 TeknoBa 0 40 38

154 Oscar 0 64 38

155 SqrBass 0 65 38

156 RubberBa 0 66 38

157 Hammer 0 96 38

158 SynBass2 0 0 39

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

570

Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voixi i i li i i

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 197

159 MelloSB1 0 6 39

160 Seq Bass 0 12 39

161 ClkSynBa 0 18 39

162 SynBa2Dk 0 19 39

163 SmthBa 2 0 32 39

164 ModulrBa 0 40 39

165 DX Bass 0 41 39

166 X WireBa 0 64 39

167 Violin 0 0 40

168 SlowVln 0 8 40

169 Viola 0 0 41

170 Cello 0 0 42

171 Contrabs 0 0 43

172 Trem.Str 0 0 44

173 SlowTrStr 0 8 44

174 Susp Str 0 40 44

175 Pizz.Str 0 0 45

176 Harp 0 0 46

177 YangChin 0 40 46

178 Timpani 0 0 47

179 Strings1 0 0 48

180 S.Strngs 0 3 48

181 SlowStr 0 8 48

182 ArcoStr 0 24 48

183 60sStrng 0 35 48

184 Orchestr 0 40 48

185 Orchstr2 0 41 48

186 TremOrch 0 42 48

187 VeloStr 0 45 48

188 Strings2 0 0 49

189 S.SlwStr 0 3 49

190 LegatoSt 0 8 49

191 Warm Str 0 40 49

192 Kingdom 0 41 49

193 70s Str 0 64 49

194 Str Ens3 0 65 49

195 Syn.Str1 0 0 50

196 ResoStr 0 27 50

197 Syn Str4 0 64 50

198 SS Str 0 65 50

199 Syn.Str2 0 0 51

200 ChoirAah 0 0 52

201 S.Choir 0 3 52

202 Ch.Aahs2 0 16 52

203 MelChoir 0 32 52

204 ChoirStr 0 40 52

205 VoiceOoh 0 0 53

206 SynVoice 0 0 54

207 SynVox2 0 40 54

208 Choral 0 41 54

209 AnaVoice 0 64 54

210 Orch.Hit 0 0 55

211 OrchHit2 0 35 55

212 Impact 0 64 55

213 Trumpet 0 0 56

214 Trumpet2 0 16 56

215 BriteTrp 0 17 56

216 WarmTrp 0 32 56

217 Trombone 0 0 57

218 Trmbone2 0 18 57

219 Tuba 0 0 58

220 Tuba 2 0 16 58

221 Mute.Trp 0 0 59

222 Fr.Horn 0 0 60

223 FrHrSolo 0 6 60

224 FrHorn2 0 32 60

225 HornOrch 0 37 60

226 BrasSect 0 0 61

227 Tp&TbSec 0 35 61

228 BrssSec2 0 40 61

229 HiBrass 0 41 61

230 MelloBrs 0 42 61

231 SynBras1 0 0 62

232 QuackBr 0 12 62

233 RezSynBr 0 20 62

234 PolyBrss 0 24 62

235 SynBras3 0 27 62

236 JumpBrss 0 32 62

237 AnaVelBr 0 45 62

238 AnaBrss1 0 64 62

239 SynBras2 0 0 63

240 Soft Brs 0 18 63

241 SynBrss4 0 40 63

242 ChoirBrs 0 41 63

243 VelBrss2 0 45 63

244 AnaBrss2 0 64 63

245 SprnoSax 0 0 64

246 Alto Sax 0 0 65

247 Sax Sect 0 40 65

248 HyprAlto 0 43 65

249 TenorSax 0 0 66

250 BrthTnSx 0 40 66

251 SoftTenr 0 41 66

252 TnrSax 2 0 64 66

253 Bari.Sax 0 0 67

254 Oboe 0 0 68

255 Eng.Horn 0 0 69

256 Bassoon 0 0 70

257 Clarinet 0 0 71

258 Piccolo 0 0 72

259 Flute 0 0 73

260 Recorder 0 0 74

261 PanFlute 0 0 75

262 Bottle 0 0 76

263 Shakhchi 0 0 77

264 Whistle 0 0 78

265 Ocarina 0 0 79

266 SquareLd 0 0 80

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

57 1

Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voixi i i li i i

198 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

267 Square 2 0 6 80

268 LMSquare 0 8 80

269 Hollow 0 18 80

270 Shmoog 0 19 80

271 Mellow 0 64 80

272 SoloSine 0 65 80

273 SineLead 0 66 80

274 Saw.Lead 0 0 81

275 Saw 2 0 6 81

276 ThickSaw 0 8 81

277 DynaSaw 0 18 81

278 DigiSaw 0 19 81

279 Big Lead 0 20 81

280 HeavySyn 0 24 81

281 WaspySyn 0 25 81

282 PulseSaw 0 40 81

283 Dr. Lead 0 41 81

284 VeloLead 0 45 81

285 Seq Ana 0 96 81

286 CaliopLd 0 0 82

287 Pure Pad 0 65 82

288 Chiff Ld 0 0 83

289 Rubby 0 64 83

290 CharanLd 0 0 84

291 DistLead 0 64 84

292 WireLead 0 65 84

293 Voice Ld 0 0 85

294 SynthAah 0 24 85

295 VoxLead 0 64 85

296 Fifth Ld 0 0 86

297 Big Five 0 35 86

298 Bass &Ld 0 0 87

299 Big&Low 0 16 87

300 Fat&Prky 0 64 87

301 SoftWurl 0 65 87

302 NewAgePd 0 0 88

303 Fantasy2 0 64 88

304 Warm Pad 0 0 89

305 ThickPad 0 16 89

306 Soft Pad 0 17 89

307 SinePad 0 18 89

308 Horn Pad 0 64 89

309 RotarStr 0 65 89

310 PolySyPd 0 0 90

311 PolyPd80 0 64 90

312 ClickPad 0 65 90

313 Ana Pad 0 66 90

314 SquarPad 0 67 90

315 ChoirPad 0 0 91

316 Heaven2 0 64 91

317 Itopia 0 66 91

318 CC Pad 0 67 91

319 BowedPad 0 0 92

320 Glacier 0 64 92

321 GlassPad 0 65 92

322 MetalPad 0 0 93

323 Tine Pad 0 64 93

324 Pan Pad 0 65 93

325 Halo Pad 0 0 94

326 SweepPad 0 0 95

327 Shwimmer 0 20 95

328 Converge 0 27 95

329 PolarPad 0 64 95

330 Celstial 0 66 95

331 Rain 0 0 96

332 ClaviPad 0 45 96

333 HrmoRain 0 64 96

334 AfrcnWnd 0 65 96

335 Caribean 0 66 96

336 SoundTrk 0 0 97

337 Prologue 0 27 97

338 Ancestrl 0 64 97

339 Crystal 0 0 98

340 SynDrCmp 0 12 98

341 Popcorn 0 14 98

342 TinyBell 0 18 98

343 RndGlock 0 35 98

344 GlockChi 0 40 98

345 ClearBel 0 41 98

346 ChorBell 0 42 98

347 SynMalet 0 64 98

348 SftCryst 0 65 98

349 LoudGlok 0 66 98

350 XmasBell 0 67 98

351 VibeBell 0 68 98

352 DigiBell 0 69 98

353 AirBells 0 70 98

354 BellHarp 0 71 98

355 Gamelmba 0 72 98

356 Atmosphr 0 0 99

357 WarmAtms 0 18 99

358 HollwRls 0 19 99

359 NylonEP 0 40 99

360 NylnHarp 0 64 99

361 Harp Vox 0 65 99

362 AtmosPad 0 66 99

363 Planet 0 67 99

364 Bright 0 0 100

365 FantaBel 0 64 100

366 Smokey 0 96 100

367 Goblins 0 0 101

368 GobSyn 0 64 101

369 50sSciFi 0 65 101

370 Ring Pad 0 66 101

371 Ritual 0 67 101

372 ToHeaven 0 68 101

373 Night 0 70 101

374 Glisten 0 71 101

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

572

Voice List/Stimmenliste/Liste des voixi i i li i i

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 199

375 BelChoir 0 96 101

376 Echoes 0 0 102

377 EchoPad2 0 8 102

378 Echo Pan 0 14 102

379 EchoBell 0 64 102

380 Big Pan 0 65 102

381 SynPiano 0 66 102

382 Creation 0 67 102

383 Stardust 0 68 102

384 Reso Pan 0 69 102

385 Sci-Fi 0 0 103

386 Starz 0 64 103

387 Sitar 0 0 104

388 DetSitar 0 32 104

389 Sitar 2 0 35 104

390 Tambra 0 96 104

391 Tamboura 0 97 104

392 Banjo 0 0 105

393 MuteBnjo 0 28 105

394 Rabab 0 96 105

395 Gopichnt 0 97 105

396 Oud 0 98 105

397 Shamisen 0 0 106

398 Koto 0 0 107

399 T. Koto 0 96 107

400 Kanoon 0 97 107

401 Kalimba 0 0 108

402 Bagpipe 0 0 109

403 Fiddle 0 0 110

404 Shanai 0 0 111

405 Shanai2 0 64 111

406 Pungi 0 96 111

407 Hichriki 0 97 111

408 TnklBell 0 0 112

409 Bonang 0 96 112

410 Gender 0 97 112

411 Gamelan 0 98 112

412 S.Gamlan 0 99 112

413 Rama Cym 0 100 112

414 AsianBel 0 101 112

415 Agogo 0 0 113

416 SteelDrm 0 0 114

417 GlasPerc 0 97 114

418 ThaiBell 0 98 114

419 WoodBlok 0 0 115

420 Castanet 0 96 115

421 TaikoDrm 0 0 116

422 Gr.Cassa 0 96 116

423 MelodTom 0 0 117

424 Mel Tom2 0 64 117

425 Real Tom 0 65 117

426 Rock Tom 0 66 117

427 Syn.Drum 0 0 118

428 Ana Tom 0 64 118

429 ElecPerc 0 65 118

430 RevCymbl 0 0 119

431 FretNoiz 0 0 120

432 BrthNoiz 0 0 121

433 Seashore 0 0 122

434 Tweet 0 0 123

435 Telphone 0 0 124

436 Helicptr 0 0 125

437 Applause 0 0 126

438 Gunshot 0 0 127

439 CuttngNz 64 0 0

440 CttngNz2 64 0 1

441 Str Slap 64 0 3

442 Fl.KClik 64 0 16

443 Rain 64 0 32

444 Thunder 64 0 33

445 Wind 64 0 34

446 Stream 64 0 35

447 Bubble 64 0 36

448 Feed 64 0 37

449 Dog 64 0 48

450 Horse 64 0 49

451 Bird 2 64 0 50

452 Ghost 64 0 54

453 Maou 64 0 55

454 Tel.Dial 64 0 64

455 DoorSqek 64 0 65

456 Door Slam 64 0 66

457 Scratch 64 0 67

458 Scratch 2 64 0 68

459 WindChm 64 0 69

460 Telphon2 64 0 70

461 CarEngin 64 0 80

462 Car Stop 64 0 81

463 Car Pass 64 0 82

464 CarCrash 64 0 83

465 Siren 64 0 84

466 Train 64 0 85

467 Jetplane 64 0 86

468 Starship 64 0 87

469 Burst 64 0 88

470 Coaster 64 0 89

471 SbMarine 64 0 90

472 Laughing 64 0 96

473 Scream 64 0 97

474 Punch 64 0 98

475 Heart 64 0 99

476 FootStep 64 0 100

477 MchinGun 64 0 112

478 LaserGun 64 0 113

479 Xplosion 64 0 114

480 FireWork 64 0 115

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

57 3

Keyboard Drum Assignments/Tastatur-Drum-Belegung/

200 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

1. Key Off: Keys marked O stop sounding the instant they are released. 2. Alternate Group: Playing any instrument within a numbered group will immediately stop the

sound of any other instrument in the same group of the same number.

3. : Same as Standard Kit

4. : No Sound 5. StyleLvStd (MSB: 127, LSB: 0, PC: 124) is the same assignments as Live! Standard Kit. 6. StyleLvFunk (MSB: 127, LSB: 0, PC: 125) is the same assignments as Live! Funk Kit.

1. Key Off: Mit O bezeichnete Tasten hren sofort auf zu klingen, sobald sie losgelassen wer- den.

2. Alternate Group: Wenn ein Instrument innerhalb einer numerierten Gruppe gespielt wird, wird sofort der Klang jedes anderen Instruments mit derselben Nummer innerhalb dieser Gruppe gestoppt.

3. : Entspricht dem Standard-Kit

4. : Kein Klang 5. StyleLvStd (MSB: 127, LSB: 0, PC: 124) ist die gleiche Zuordnung wie Live! Standard Kit. 6. StyleLvFunk (MSB: 127, LSB: 0, PC: 125) ist die gleiche Zuordnung wie Live! Funk Kit.

Bank Select MSB (0-127) 127 127 127 127 127 127 Bank Select LSB (0-127) 0 0 0 0 0 0 Program Change (1-128) 1 2 5 9 17 25

MIDI Keyboard Note

Key Off

Alternate Group Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Hit Kit Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit

Note# Note 13 C# -1 (C# 0) 3 Surdo Mute 14 D -1 (D 0) 3 Surdo Open 15 D# -1 (D# 0) Hi Q 16 E -1 (E 0) Whip Slap 17 F -1 (F 0) 4 Scratch H 18 F# -1 (F# 0) 4 Scratch L 19 G -1 (G 0) Finger Snap 20 G# -1 (G# 0) Click Noise 21 A -1 (A 0) Metronome Click 22 A# -1 (A# 0) Metronome Bell 23 B -1 (B 0) Seq Click L 24 C 0 C 1 Seq Click H 25 C# 0 C# 1 Brush Tap 26 D 0 D 1 O Brush Swirl 27 D# 0 D# 1 Brush Slap 28 E 0 E 1 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal 29 F 0 F 1 O Snare Roll 30 F# 0 F# 1 Castanet Hi Q 2 31 G 0 G 1 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Electro Snare Noisy Snare Snappy Electro 32 G# 0 G# 1 Sticks 33 A 0 A 1 Kick Soft Kick Tight L Kick 3 34 A# 0 A# 1 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Short Snare Pitched 35 B 0 B 1 Kick Tight Kick Wet Kick 2 Kick Gate 36 C 1 C 2 Kick Kick Short Kick Tight H Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy 37 C# 1 C# 2 Side Stick Side Stick Light Stick Ambient 38 D 1 D 2 Snare Snare Short Snare Ambient Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 39 D# 1 D# 2 Hand Clap 40 E 1 E 2 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight 2 Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy 3 41 F 1 F 2 Floor Tom L Hybrid Tom 1 Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 42 F# 1 F# 2 1 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed 2 43 G 1 G 2 Floor Tom H Hybrid Tom 2 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 44 G# 1 G# 2 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal 2 45 A 1 A 2 Low Tom Hybrid Tom 3 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 46 A# 1 A# 2 1 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open 2 47 B 1 B 2 Mid Tom L Hybrid Tom 4 Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 48 C 2 C 3 Mid Tom H Hybrid Tom 5 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 49 C# 2 C# 3 Crash Cymbal 1 50 D 2 D 3 High Tom Hybrid Tom 6 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 51 D# 2 D# 3 Ride Cymbal 1 52 E 2 E 3 Chinese Cymbal 53 F 2 F 3 Ride Cymbal Cup 54 F# 2 F# 3 Tambourine Tambourine Light 55 G 2 G 3 Splash Cymbal 56 G# 2 G# 3 Cowbell 57 A 2 A 3 Crash Cymbal 2 58 A# 2 A# 3 Vibraslap 59 B 2 B 3 Ride Cymbal 2 60 C 3 C 4 Bongo H 61 C# 3 C# 4 Bongo L 62 D 3 D 4 Conga H Mute 63 D# 3 D# 4 Conga H Open 64 E 3 E 4 Conga L 65 F 3 F 4 Timbale H 66 F# 3 F# 4 Timbale L 67 G 3 G 4 Agogo H 68 G# 3 G# 4 Agogo L 69 A 3 A 4 Cabasa 70 A# 3 A# 4 Maracas 71 B 3 B 4 O Samba Whistle H 72 C 4 C 5 O Samba Whistle L 73 C# 4 C# 5 Guiro Short 74 D 4 D 5 O Guiro Long 75 D# 4 D# 5 Claves 76 E 4 E 5 Wood Block H 77 F 4 F 5 Wood Block L 78 F# 4 F# 5 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 79 G 4 G 5 Cuica Open Scratch L 2 80 G# 4 G# 5 2 Triangle Mute 81 A 4 A 5 2 Triangle Open 82 A# 4 A# 5 Shaker 83 B 4 B 5 Jingle Bells 84 C 5 C 6 Bell Tree 85 C# 5 (C# 6) 86 D 5 (D 6) 87 D# 5 (D# 6) 88 E 5 (E 6) 89 F 5 (F 6) 90 F# 5 (F# 6) 91 G 5 (G 6)

Keyboard Drum Assignments 574

Affectation des percussions de clavier

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 201

1. Note coupe : les notes marques " O " sont inaudibles ds l'instant o elles sont relches. 2. Groupe alternatif : jouer d'un instrument dans un groupe numrot provoque la coupure im-

mdiate du son de tout autre instrument du mme groupe de mme numro.

3. : comme kit standard

4. : aucun son 5. StyleLvStd (MSB : 127, LSB : 0, PC : 124) correspond au kit Live ! Standard. 6. StyleLvFunk (MSB : 127, LSB : 0, PC : 125) correspond au kit Live ! Funk.

Bank Select MSB (0-127) 127 127 127 127 127 127 Bank Select LSB (0-127) 0 0 0 0 0 0 Program Change (1-128) 26 28 33 41 49 81 / 124

MIDI Keyboard Note

Key Off

Alternate Group Analog Kit Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit Live! Standard Kit

Note# Note 13 C# -1 (C# 0) 3 14 D -1 (D 0) 3 15 D# -1 (D# 0) 16 E -1 (E 0) 17 F -1 (F 0) 4 18 F# -1 (F# 0) 4 19 G -1 (G 0) 20 G# -1 (G# 0) 21 A -1 (A 0) 22 A# -1 (A# 0) 23 B -1 (B 0) 24 C 0 C 1 25 C# 0 C# 1 Brush Tap Stereo 26 D 0 D 1 O Brush Swirl Stereo 27 D# 0 D# 1 Brush Slap Stereo 28 E 0 E 1 O Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Brush Tap Swirl Stereo 29 F 0 F 1 O Snare Roll Stereo 30 F# 0 F# 1 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 31 G 0 G 1 Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Snare L Stereo 32 G# 0 G# 1 33 A 0 A 1 Kick 3 Kick Techno Q Kick Soft 2 Kick Soft Stereo 34 A# 0 A# 1 Rim Gate Open Rim Shot Light Open Rim Shot Stereo 35 B 0 B 1 Kick Analog Short Kick Techno L Gran Cassa Kick Light Stereo 36 C 1 C 2 Kick Analog Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Kick Std Stereo 37 C# 1 C# 2 Side Stick Analog Side Stick Analog Side Stick Light Side Stick Light Side Stick Stereo 38 D 1 D 2 Snare Analog Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare M Stereo 39 D# 1 D# 2 40 E 1 E 2 Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Snare H Stereo 41 F 1 F 2 Tom Analog 1 Tom Analog 1 Tom Brush 1 Floor Tom L Stereo 42 F# 1 F# 2 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3 Hi-Hat Closed Stereo 43 G 1 G 2 Tom Analog 2 Tom Analog 2 Tom Brush 2 Floor Tom H Stereo 44 G# 1 G# 2 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 3 Hi-Hat Pedal Stereo 45 A 1 A 2 Tom Analog 3 Tom Analog 3 Tom Brush 3 Low Tom Stereo 46 A# 1 A# 2 1 Hi-Hat Open Analog Hi-Hat Open 3 Hi-Hat Open Stereo 47 B 1 B 2 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 4 Tom Brush 4 Mid Tom L Stereo 48 C 2 C 3 Tom Analog 5 Tom Analog 5 Tom Brush 5 Mid Tom H Stereo 49 C# 2 C# 3 Crash Analog Crash Analog Hand Cymbal Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo 50 D 2 D 3 Tom Analog 6 Tom Analog 6 Tom Brush 6 High Tom Stereo 51 D# 2 D# 3 Hand Cymbal Short Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo 52 E 2 E 3 Chinese Cymbal Stereo 53 F 2 F 3 Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo 54 F# 2 F# 3 55 G 2 G 3 Splash Cymbal Stereo 56 G# 2 G# 3 Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog 57 A 2 A 3 Hand Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo 58 A# 2 A# 3 59 B 2 B 3 Hand Cymbal 2 Short Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo 60 C 3 C 4 61 C# 3 C# 4 62 D 3 D 4 Conga Analog H Conga Analog H 63 D# 3 D# 4 Conga Analog M Conga Analog M 64 E 3 E 4 Conga Analog L Conga Analog L 65 F 3 F 4 66 F# 3 F# 4 67 G 3 G 4 68 G# 3 G# 4 69 A 3 A 4 70 A# 3 A# 4 Maracas 2 Maracas 2 71 B 3 B 4 O 72 C 4 C 5 O 73 C# 4 C# 5 74 D 4 D 5 O 75 D# 4 D# 5 Claves 2 Claves 2 76 E 4 E 5 77 F 4 F 5 78 F# 4 F# 5 Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2 79 G 4 G 5 Scratch L 2 Scratch L 2 80 G# 4 G# 5 2 81 A 4 A 5 2 82 A# 4 A# 5 83 B 4 B 5 84 C 5 C 6 85 C# 5 (C# 6) 86 D 5 (D 6) 87 D# 5 (D# 6) 88 E 5 (E 6) 89 F 5 (F 6) 90 F# 5 (F# 6) 91 G 5 (G 6)

57 5

Keyboard Drum Assignments/Klaviatur-Drum-Belegung/Affectation des percussions de clavier i Tastatur-Drum-Belegung/Af ectation des percus ions de clavier

202 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

Bank Select MSB (0-127) 127 127 127 127 127 Bank Select LSB (0-127) 0 0 0 0 0 Program Change (1-128) 1 82 / 125 83 84 / 126 85 / 127

MIDI Keyboard Note

Key Off

Alternate Group Standard Kit 1 Live! Funk Kit Live! Brush Kit Live! Standard +

Percussion Kit Live! Funk +

Percussion KitNote# Note 13 C# -1 (C# 0) 3 Surdo Mute 14 D -1 (D 0) 3 Surdo Open 15 D# -1 (D# 0) Hi Q 16 E -1 (E 0) Whip Slap 17 F -1 (F 0) 4 Scratch H 18 F# -1 (F# 0) 4 Scratch L 19 G -1 (G 0) Finger Snap 20 G# -1 (G# 0) Click Noise 21 A -1 (A 0) Metronome Click 22 A# -1 (A# 0) Metronome Bell 23 B -1 (B 0) Seq Click L 24 C 0 C 1 Seq Click H 25 C# 0 C# 1 Brush Tap Brush Tap Stereo Brush Tap Stereo Brush Tap Stereo Brush Tap Stereo 26 D 0 D 1 O Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Stereo Brush Swirl Stereo Brush Swirl Stereo Brush Swirl Stereo 27 D# 0 D# 1 Brush Slap Brush Slap Stereo Brush Slap Stereo Brush Slap Stereo Brush Slap Stereo 28 E 0 E 1 O Brush Tap Swirl Brush Tap Swirl Stereo Brush Tap Swirl Stereo Brush Tap Swirl Stereo Brush Tap Swirl Stereo 29 F 0 F 1 O Snare Roll Snare Roll Stereo Snare Roll Stereo Snare Roll Stereo Snare Roll Stereo 30 F# 0 F# 1 Castanet 31 G 0 G 1 Snare Soft Snare Funk L Stereo Brush Slap 2 Stereo Snare L Stereo Snare L Stereo 32 G# 0 G# 1 Sticks 33 A 0 A 1 Kick Soft Kick Soft Stereo Kick Soft Stereo Kick Soft Stereo Kick Soft Stereo 34 A# 0 A# 1 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot Stereo Open Rim Shot Stereo Open Rim Shot Stereo Open Rim Shot Stereo 35 B 0 B 1 Kick Tight Kick Std Stereo Kick Std Stereo Kick Light Stereo Kick Std Stereo 36 C 1 C 2 Kick Kick Funk Stereo Kick Funk Stereo Kick Std Stereo Kick Funk Stereo 37 C# 1 C# 2 Side Stick Side Stick Stereo Side Stick Stereo Side Stick Stereo Side Stick Stereo 38 D 1 D 2 Snare Snare Funk M Stereo Snare Brush M Stereo Snare M Stereo Snare Funk M Stereo 39 D# 1 D# 2 Hand Clap Hand Clap Stereo Hand Clap Stereo 40 E 1 E 2 Snare Tight Snare Funk H Stereo Snare Brush H Stereo Snare H Stereo Snare Funk H Stereo 41 F 1 F 2 Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Stereo Brush Floor Tom L Stereo Floor Tom L Stereo Floor Tom L Stereo 42 F# 1 F# 2 1 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Stereo Hi-Hat Closed Stereo Hi-Hat Closed Stereo Hi-Hat Closed Stereo 43 G 1 G 2 Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Stereo Brush Floor Tom H Stereo Floor Tom H Stereo Floor Tom H Stereo 44 G# 1 G# 2 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Stereo Hi-Hat Pedal Stereo Hi-Hat Pedal Stereo Hi-Hat Pedal Stereo 45 A 1 A 2 Low Tom Low Tom Stereo Brush Low Tom Stereo Low Tom Stereo Low Tom Stereo 46 A# 1 A# 2 1 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Stereo Hi-Hat Open Stereo Hi-Hat Open Stereo Hi-Hat Open Stereo 47 B 1 B 2 Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Stereo Brush Mid Tom L Stereo Mid Tom L Stereo Mid Tom L Stereo 48 C 2 C 3 Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Stereo Brush Mid Tom H Stereo Mid Tom H Stereo Mid Tom H Stereo 49 C# 2 C# 3 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo Brush Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo 50 D 2 D 3 High Tom High Tom Stereo Brush High Tom Stereo High Tom Stereo High Tom Stereo 51 D# 2 D# 3 Ride Cymbal 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo Brush Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo 52 E 2 E 3 Chinese Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Stereo Chinese Cymbal Stereo Chinese Cymbal Stereo Chinese Cymbal Stereo 53 F 2 F 3 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo Brush Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo 54 F# 2 F# 3 Tambourine Tambourine Stereo Tambourine Stereo 55 G 2 G 3 Splash Cymbal Splash Cymbal Stereo Splash Cymbal Stereo Splash Cymbal Stereo Splash Cymbal Stereo 56 G# 2 G# 3 Cowbell Cowbell Stereo Cowbell Stereo 57 A 2 A 3 Crash Cymbal 2 Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo Brush Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo 58 A# 2 A# 3 Vibraslap 59 B 2 B 3 Ride Cymbal 2 Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo Brush Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo 60 C 3 C 4 Bongo H Bongo H Stereo Bongo H Stereo 61 C# 3 C# 4 Bongo L Bongo L Srereo Bongo L Srereo 62 D 3 D 4 Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Stereo Conga H Mute Stereo 63 D# 3 D# 4 Conga H Open Conga H Open Stereo Conga H Open Stereo 64 E 3 E 4 Conga L Conga L Stereo Conga L Stereo 65 F 3 F 4 Timbale H Timbale H Stereo Timbale H Stereo 66 F# 3 F# 4 Timbale L Timbale L Stereo Timbale L Stereo 67 G 3 G 4 Agogo H 68 G# 3 G# 4 Agogo L 69 A 3 A 4 Cabasa Cabasa Stereo Cabasa Stereo 70 A# 3 A# 4 Maracas Maracas Stereo Maracas Stereo 71 B 3 B 4 O Samba Whistle H 72 C 4 C 5 O Samba Whistle L 73 C# 4 C# 5 Guiro Short Guiro Short Stereo Guiro Short Stereo 74 D 4 D 5 O Guiro Long Guiro Long Stereo Guiro Long Stereo 75 D# 4 D# 5 Claves 76 E 4 E 5 Wood Block H 77 F 4 F 5 Wood Block L 78 F# 4 F# 5 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Stereo Cuica Mute Stereo 79 G 4 G 5 Cuica Open Cuica Open Stereo Cuica Open Stereo 80 G# 4 G# 5 2 Triangle Mute Triangle Mute Stereo Triangle Mute Stereo 81 A 4 A 5 2 Triangle Open Triangle Open Stereo Triangle Open Stereo 82 A# 4 A# 5 Shaker Shaker Stereo Shaker Stereo 83 B 4 B 5 Jingle Bells 84 C 5 C 6 Bell Tree Wind Chime Stereo Wind Chime Stereo 85 C# 5 (C# 6) 86 D 5 (D 6) 87 D# 5 (D# 6) 88 E 5 (E 6) 89 F 5 (F 6) 90 F# 5 (F# 6) 91 G 5 (G 6)

576

Keyboard Drum Assignments/Klaviatur-Drum-Belegung/Affectation des percussions de clavierKeyboard Dru Assign ents/Tast - - l / ff i i l i

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 203

Bank Select MSB (0-127) 127 126 126 126 126 126 Bank Select LSB (0-127) 0 0 0 0 0 0 Program Change (1-128) 86 36 1 2 41 44

MIDI Keyboard Note

Key Off

Alternate Group

Live! Brush + Percussion Kit Arabic Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Live! AfroCuban Kit Live! PopLatin Kit

Note# Note 13 C# -1 (C# 0) 3 14 D -1 (D 0) 3 15 D# -1 (D# 0) 16 E -1 (E 0) 17 F -1 (F 0) 4 18 F# -1 (F# 0) 4 Hand Clap Stereo 19 G -1 (G 0) 20 G# -1 (G# 0) 21 A -1 (A 0) 22 A# -1 (A# 0) Conga H Tip Stereo Conga H Tip Stereo 23 B -1 (B 0) Conga H Heel Stereo Conga H Heel Stereo 24 C 0 C 1 Nakarazan Dom Conga H Open Stereo Conga H Open Stereo 25 C# 0 C# 1 Brush Tap Stereo Cabasa Conga H Mute Stereo Conga H Mute Stereo 26 D 0 D 1 O Brush Swirl Stereo Nakarazan Edge Conga H Slap Open Stereo Conga H Slap Open Stereo 27 D# 0 D# 1 Brush Slap Stereo Hager Dom Conga H Slap Stereo Conga H Slap Stereo 28 E 0 E 1 O Brush Tap Swirl Stereo Hager Edge Conga H Slap Mute Stereo Conga H Slap Mute Stereo 29 F 0 F 1 O Snare Roll Stereo Bongo H Conga L Tip Stereo Conga L Tip Stereo 30 F# 0 F# 1 Bongo L Conga L Heel Stereo Conga L Heel Stereo 31 G 0 G 1 Brush Slap 2 Stereo Conga H Mute Conga L Open Stereo Conga L Open Stereo 32 G# 0 G# 1 Conga H Open Conga L Mute Stereo Conga L Mute Stereo 33 A 0 A 1 Kick Soft Stereo Conga L Conga L Slap Open Stereo Conga L Slap Open Stereo 34 A# 0 A# 1 Open Rim Shot Stereo Zagrouda H Conga L Slap Stereo Conga L Slap Stereo 35 B 0 B 1 Kick Std Stereo Zagrouda L Conga L Slide Stereo Conga L Slide Stereo 36 C 1 C 2 Kick Funk Stereo Kick Soft Cutting Noise Phone Call Bongo H Open 1 Finger Stereo Bongo H Open 1 finger Stereo 37 C# 1 C# 2 Side Stick Stereo Side Stick Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Bongo H Open 3 Finger Stereo Bongo H Open 3 finger Stereo 38 D 1 D 2 Snare Brush M Stereo Snare Soft Door Slam Bongo H Rim Stereo Bongo H Rim Stereo 39 D# 1 D# 2 Hand Clap Stereo Arabic Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut Bongo H Tip Stereo Bongo H Tip Stereo 40 E 1 E 2 Snare Brush H Stereo Snare Scratch H 3 Bongo H Heel Stereo Bongo H Heel Stereo 41 F 1 F 2 Brush Floor Tom L Stereo Floor Tom L Wind Chime Bongo H Slap Stereo Bongo H Slap Stereo 42 F# 1 F# 2 1 Hi-Hat Closed Stereo Hi-Hat Closed Telephone Ring 2 Bongo L Open 1 Finger Stereo Bongo L Open 1 finger Stereo 43 G 1 G 2 Brush Floor Tom H Stereo Floor Tom H Bongo L Open 3 Finger Stereo Bongo L Open 3 finger Stereo 44 G# 1 G# 2 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Stereo Hi-Hat Pedal Bongo L Rim Stereo Bongo L Rim Stereo 45 A 1 A 2 Brush Low Tom Stereo Low Tom Bongo L Tip Stereo Bongo L Tip Stereo 46 A# 1 A# 2 1 Hi-Hat Open Stereo Hi-Hat Open Bongo L Heel Stereo Bongo L Heel Stereo 47 B 1 B 2 Brush Mid Tom L Stereo Mid Tom L Bongo L Slap Stereo Bongo L Slap Stereo 48 C 2 C 3 Brush Mid Tom H Stereo Mid Tom H Timbale L Open Stereo Timbale L Open Stereo 49 C# 2 C# 3 Brush Crash Cymbal 1 Stereo Crash Cymbal 1 50 D 2 D 3 Brush High Tom Stereo High Tom 51 D# 2 D# 3 Brush Ride Cymbal 1 Stereo Ride Cymbal 1 52 E 2 E 3 Chinese Cymbal Stereo Crash Cymbal 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition 53 F 2 F 3 Brush Ride Cymbal Cup Stereo Duhulla Dom Car Tires Squeal 54 F# 2 F# 3 Tambourine Stereo Tambourine Car Passing Timbale H Open Stereo Timbale H Open Stereo 55 G 2 G 3 Splash Cymbal Stereo Duhulla Tak Car Crash 56 G# 2 G# 3 Cowbell Stereo Cowbell Siren 57 A 2 A 3 Brush Crash Cymbal 2 Stereo Duhulla Sak Train 58 A# 2 A# 3 Claves Jet Plane 59 B 2 B 3 Brush Ride Cymbal 2 Stereo Doff Dom Starship 60 C 3 C 4 Bongo H Stereo Katem Dom Burst Cowbell Top Stereo Cowbell Top Stereo 61 C# 3 C# 4 Bongo L Srereo Katem Tak Roller Coaster 62 D 3 D 4 Conga H Mute Stereo Katem Sak Submarine 63 D# 3 D# 4 Conga H Open Stereo Katem Tak 64 E 3 E 4 Conga L Stereo Doff Tak Guiro Short Stereo Guiro Short Stereo 65 F 3 F 4 Timbale H Stereo Tabla Dom Guiro Long Stereo Guiro Long Stereo 66 F# 3 F# 4 Timbale L Stereo Tabla Tak1 67 G 3 G 4 Tabla Tik 68 G# 3 G# 4 Tabla Tak2 Shower Laugh Tambourine Stereo Tambourine Stereo 69 A 3 A 4 Cabasa Stereo Tabla Sak Thunder Scream 70 A# 3 A# 4 Maracas Stereo Tabla Roll of Edge Wind Punch 71 B 3 B 4 O Tabla Flam Stream Heart Beat 72 C 4 C 5 O Sagat 1 Bubble Foot Steps Maracas Stereo Maracas Stereo 73 C# 4 C# 5 Guiro Short Stereo Tabel Dom Feed Shaker Stereo Shaker Stereo 74 D 4 D 5 O Guiro Long Stereo Sagat 3 Cabasa Stereo Cabasa Stereo 75 D# 4 D# 5 Tabel Tak Cuica Mute Stereo 76 E 4 E 5 Sagat 2 Cuica Open Stereo 77 F 4 F 5 Rik Dom 78 F# 4 F# 5 Cuica Mute Stereo Rik Tak 2 79 G 4 G 5 Cuica Open Stereo Rik Finger 1 80 G# 4 G# 5 2 Triangle Mute Stereo Rik Tak 1 81 A 4 A 5 2 Triangle Open Stereo Rik Finger 2 Triangle Mute Stereo 82 A# 4 A# 5 Shaker Stereo Rik Brass Tremolo Triangle Open Stereo 83 B 4 B 5 Rik Sak 84 C 5 C 6 Wind Chime Stereo Rik Tik Dog Machine Gun Wind Chime Stereo 85 C# 5 (C# 6) Horse Laser Gun 86 D 5 (D 6) Bird Tweet 2 Explosion 87 D# 5 (D# 6) Firework 88 E 5 (E 6) 89 F 5 (F 6) 90 F# 5 (F# 6) Ghost 91 G 5 (G 6) Maou

57 7

Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix

204 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

l g-In-Stim enliste/Liste d s voix plug-in

I (Brass)

1 VL! Trumpet 33 1 4

2 VL!Trombone 33 1 7

3 VL! JzTrpt 33 1 20

4 MuteTrumpet 33 1 24

5 VL! Trumpy 33 0 86

6 VL! Brass 33 1 26

7 VL! Horn 33 1 27

8 Trumpet 2 33 1 16

9 FlugelHorn! 33 1 17

10 Tuba! 33 1 31

II (Saxophone 1)

1 VL!Soprano 81 112 64

2 VL!AltoSax 81 112 65

3 Motion Sax! 81 115 66

4 BrightTenor 33 1 86

5 Jazz Sax 81 114 66

6 Soprano Sax 81 113 64

7 Alto Sax 81 114 65

8 Ana Sopran 33 1 69

9 Soft Alto 81 113 65

10 Tenor Sax 81 116 66

III (Saxophone 2)

1 Old Tenor 81 119 66

2 Air Sax 33 1 9

3 Glass Alto 33 1 75

4 Voxo Saxo 81 113 67

5 Bari Sax 81 112 67

6 Mizu Horn 33 1 113

7 Funny Sax 33 0 114

8 SopranoPipe 81 114 64

9 Floboe 33 1 1

10 SylophonX 33 1 115

IV (Pipe 1)

1 Jazz Flute 33 1 48

2 Pan Pipe 33 1 55

3 BambooFlute 33 1 57

4 Shakuha! 33 0 126

5 Pico Pipe 33 0 113

6 Snake Flute 33 1 12

7 Duality 33 0 116

8 Flauto 33 1 46

9 Recorder! 33 1 105

10 Island Pipe 33 1 102

V (Pipe 2)

1 VL!Clarinet 33 1 98

2 Piccolo 33 1 43

3 Clariphone 33 0 91

4 Clariophon 33 1 100

5 Alt Kwek 33 0 117

6 Whystler 33 0 12

7 Flurmod 33 1 61

8 Lite Pipe 33 1 99

9 Ocarina 33 1 109

10 Resoflute 33 0 93

11 Bass Clari 33 0 122

12 Binaphon 33 0 109

VI (Reed)

1 VL! Oboe 33 1 89

2 VL!EnglHorn 33 1 95

3 VL!Bassoon 33 1 97

4 Triple Reed 33 1 94

5 Oboette 33 0 127

6 Baroquen 33 1 63

7 Bassoon 33 1 97

8 Ali Baba 33 0 111

9 Noboe 33 1 91

10 Persinet 33 0 112

VII (Guitar)

1 VL!Span.Gtr 33 0 71

2 VL! JGuitar 33 0 78

3 GuitarChuck 33 0 80

4 Smooth Gtr 33 0 76

5 Jazz Guitar 33 0 72

6 FunkyGuitar 33 0 77

7 Guitar Hero 33 0 3

8 ChaosGuitar 33 0 11

9 Synpick 33 0 96

10 VL! Slapper 33 0 9

VIII (Ethnnic&Str)

1 Stone Henge 33 0 4

2 Sitar! 33 0 58

3 Rock Harp 33 1 121

4 Akko Harp 33 1 59

Plug-in Voice List

PLG150-VL Plug in Voice List

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

The voices in the list below are created by loading the data from the included "Plug-in Custom Voice Disk" to the 9000Pro via the Plug-in Manager function (page 66).

Die Stimmen in der untenstehenden Liste werden erzeugt, indem die Daten von der beiliegenden Diskette Plug-In-Benutzerstimme mit Hilfe der Plug-In-Managerfunk- tion in das 9000Pro geladen werden (siehe Seite 66).

Les voix gurant dans la liste suivante sont cres en chargeant les donnes de la dis- quette Plug-in Custom Voice Disk (Disquette des voix plug-in personnalises) sur le 9000Pro via la fonction Plug-in Manager (Gestionnaire plug-in) (page 66).

578

Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-inl i i i l I i li i i l i

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 205

5 Plucked 33 0 74

6 VL! Shaku 33 1 54

7 ElectrumX 33 0 120

8 Violon 33 1 37

9 Yam Gam 33 0 60

10 Edgeophon 33 0 121

11 Akkophon 33 1 59

12 Squeeze 33 1 117

13 Parlophon 33 0 88

14 Softblow 33 0 118

15 NuViolin 33 1 32

IX (Synthesizer)

1 Chamlion 33 0 51

2 Choronic 33 0 90

3 Fat Mini 33 0 87

4 Wynth 33 0 14

5 SynTouch 33 0 89

6 Talk Box 33 0 84

7 Brassyn 33 0 105

8 Maysbe 33 1 112

9 Resogrowl 33 0 94

10 Obosyn 33 0 106

11 SilverSyn 33 0 102

12 AnaPercSyn 33 0 23

13 Babalog 33 0 25

14 Celloid 33 0 83

15 Klaqak 33 0 57

16 MWh Morph 33 0 70

17 BuzzWheel 33 0 15

18 Jason Mod 33 0 69

19 Square Lead 33 0 19

20 Phasepipe 33 0 12

X (Bass 1)

1 Finger Bass 33 0 26

2 Damp Bass 33 0 31

3 Acid Bass 33 0 42

4 Dirty Bass 33 0 53

5 Lead Bass 33 0 18

6 Parasynbass 33 0 52

7 Square Bass 33 0 43

8 SynkBass 33 0 55

9 Tek Bass 33 0 49

10 Tranz Bass 33 0 50

XI (Bass 2)

1 VL!BamBass 33 0 54

2 Dance Bass 33 0 51

3 Fruit Bass 33 0 41

4 Box Bass 33 0 39

5 Birdland 33 0 29

6 Talk Bass 33 0 6

7 Bamboo Bass 33 0 54

8 Buzz Bass 33 0 37

9 Clav Bass 33 0 7

10 Dragon Bass 33 0 7

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

57 9

Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-inl i i i l I i li i i l i

206 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

I 1 Killer 36 2 0

2 RealMini 36 0 41

3 5th Pad 36 2 1

4 Lights 36 2 2

5 Metallic 36 2 3

6 Hyperbolic 36 1 127

7 Cactus 36 2 4

8 Mini Low 36 0 52

9 Omega 36 2 5

10 Brainmill 36 2 6

11 Power 36 2 7

12 Lotus 36 1 124

13 Filterflow 36 2 8

14 Kraftworks 36 2 9

15 Hard Noize 36 2 10

16 TechPluck 36 2 11

17 Xalimba 36 2 12

18 Dist5th 36 1 121

19 Sliver 36 0 71

20 BPF Step 36 2 13

II 1 Wonder 36 0 47

2 Elec Groove 36 2 14

3 Seq Bass 36 2 15

4 Cool man 36 2 16

5 Uni Bass 36 1 126

6 Free Cut 36 2 17

7 Kick Line 36 0 123

8 Zebedee 36 2 18

9 Touch 36 0 33

10 Chiff 36 0 92

11 Sync Eko 36 1 49

12 FreeRthm 36 1 108

13 Virtual 36 2 19

14 JarreSQ 36 2 20

15 Hardcore 36 2 21

16 Kangaroo 36 0 119

17 Acid Seq 36 2 22

18 Acid Rain 36 2 23

19 Harmsync 36 0 122

20 Fat Run 36 2 24

III 1 Bombastic 36 0 10

2 Sync Lead 36 2 25

3 Squeamer 36 0 12

4 Dre-full 36 0 13

5 SynGtr 36 0 37

6 Xenarion 36 2 26

7 Caner 36 0 75

8 J.Hammer 36 0 84

9 On One 36 2 27

10 SupaSync 36 2 28

11 Prophetic 36 2 29

12 Slum 36 2 30

13 Lipstick 36 0 16

14 MegaDron 36 0 95

15 Unstable 36 0 25

16 2001 36 0 2

17 Ruff 36 0 4

18 Grumpy 36 2 31

19 Cosmic 36 2 32

20 VA Pig 36 2 33

IV 1 Dirty Saw 36 2 34

2 OldOkt 36 2 35

3 Resonant 36 1 51

4 SepaWays 36 2 36

5 Maxx 36 0 43

6 DistOdsy 36 1 16

7 Violynx 36 1 21

8 Pro Sync 36 1 22

9 Susy 36 0 78

10 Mars 36 1 53

11 Dawn 36 1 48

12 Saphire 36 2 37

13 Ropey 36 2 38

14 Pulsate 36 2 39

15 Faaaat 36 2 40

16 BlapMoth 36 2 41

17 MaMa 36 2 42

18 Yellow 36 1 42

19 Stranger 36 2 43

20 Earth Lead 36 0 79

V 1 Rhubarb 36 2 44

2 Trabant 36 0 85

3 Billy 36 0 98

4 Nossi 36 0 71

5 CyberBag 36 2 45

6 Cream 36 2 46

7 Astro Flute 36 2 47

8 Bella 36 2 48

9 MgWhistl 36 2 49

10 Mg Cat 36 2 50

11 Chamleon 36 2 51

12 Earthling 36 1 107

13 BiggMac 36 0 6

14 Maise 36 0 9

15 Silence 36 2 52

16 KnivesLd 36 2 53

17 ANSyncHd 36 2 54

18 Caliopsyn 36 0 91

19 Oizo 36 2 55

20 Jack 36 0 27

VI 1 Fatty 36 0 105

2 Bronze 36 0 107

3 HardBrss 36 0 17

4 ToToHorn 36 2 56

5 CS80Bras 36 2 57

6 ProBrass 36 1 23

7 Smoovey 36 2 58

8 Chick 36 0 77

9 Sharpsyn 36 1 50

10 SQR 36 0 46

PLG150-AN Plug in Voice List

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

580

Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-inl i i i l I i li i i l i

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 207

11 SyncBrPd 36 1 45

12 Stevie 36 0 66

13 Willy 36 2 59

14 Pulser 36 2 60

15 Lucky 36 0 72

16 Zoik 36 2 61

17 Rock It 36 2 62

18 ANSoftBr 36 0 108

19 Fire 36 2 63

20 ObDetune 36 1 17

VII 1 AnalogBrass 36 0 109

2 Soar 36 1 46

3 Major Brass 36 2 64

4 High Sweep 36 1 55

5 Waspad 36 0 55

6 Sync Sweep 36 1 56

7 Mountain 36 1 57

8 BPF Pad 36 2 65

9 Down Under 36 1 80

10 Choclate 36 0 111

11 Water Pad 36 1 54

12 Vangelizm 36 1 52

13 P-5 Saw 36 0 80

14 Kelp 36 1 44

15 Magic 36 1 41

16 PWM Sweep 36 0 22

17 Multi Saw 36 2 66

18 So-Lina 36 0 19

19 Hi Wedge 36 1 18

20 Bonn 36 2 67

VIII 1 PWM Strings 36 0 115

2 Funky 36 2 68

3 Insomnia 36 2 69

4 Pro Attack 36 1 20

5 Popcorn 36 0 73

6 Snowball 36 2 70

7 Woob 36 1 83

8 MiniTech 36 2 71

9 Cavesyn 36 2 72

10 Cracker 36 2 73

11 MgSoloLd 36 2 74

12 Behind 36 2 75

13 Rydeen 36 2 76

14 Knives 36 2 77

15 Mg Wood 36 2 78

16 Monty 36 2 79

17 Q Lead 36 2 80

18 5th Ring 36 1 15

19 FootBase 36 2 81

20 10thTone 36 0 54

IX 1 Mr.Hook 36 2 82

2 Hypertune 36 2 83

3 Pastel 36 0 93

4 Abacab 36 0 102

5 Laos 36 0 23

6 X-Bass 36 0 49

7 ANSynBas 36 0 40

8 Dog Bass 36 2 84

9 DuckBass 36 2 85

10 RubbaBas 36 0 58

11 Stringer 36 0 112

12 Mg Fretless 36 2 86

13 BirdWorld 36 0 56

14 Woodbass 36 0 57

15 Smooth 36 0 59

16 Hardily 36 2 87

17 Loom 36 1 24

18 SeqWater 36 2 88

19 EthTeck 36 2 89

20 India 36 2 90

X 1 HiQ Reso 36 0 29

2 SynthTom 36 2 91

3 SynShake 36 2 92

4 TriblTom 36 1 85

5 AN Snare 36 2 93

6 MufflKik 36 1 91

7 Euro kik 36 1 92

8 AN HiHat 36 1 93

9 Mechanics 36 1 104

10 Seismic 36 1 116

11 X Bells 36 2 94

12 XmodBell 36 2 95

13 PitchMan 36 0 86

14 Metal Ld 36 0 96

15 EthnoTom 36 1 36

16 AN Toms 36 1 87

17 Rimshot 36 1 89

18 XstikSnr 36 1 90

19 Cyberclock 36 1 106

20 Fhomhair 36 0 89

XI 1 Lunar X41 36 1 102

2 Quarks 36 1 109

3 ULTSound 36 2 96

4 Invade 36 0 31

5 PlyChord 36 1 100

6 Poptart 36 2 97

7 Jah 36 2 98

8 FreeEdge 36 0 32

9 Fumble 36 0 30

10 WelcomBk 36 2 99

11 RadioNz 36 1 96

12 FM Waves 36 1 103

13 MgVoice 36 1 8

14 ResoBell 36 2 100

15 Microdot 36 1 73

16 Syncrome 36 1 75

17 RhthmCty 36 1 76

18 SyncSitr 36 1 78

19 Dragnfly 36 1 79

20 Indosync 36 1 81

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

58 1

Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-inl i i i l I i li i i l i

208 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

I (Piano 1)

1 GndPnoSt 80 0 0

2 Dbl Pno 80 82 0

3 Montuno 80 83 0

4 GrndDyno 80 84 0

5 David 80 85 0

6 RhodyGnd 80 86 0

7 GrandDX 80 88 0

8 GrandDX2 80 89 0

9 Bob 80 90 0

10 PianoStr 80 91 0

II (Piano 2)

1 GndPnoMn 80 64 0

2 FlngGrnd 80 80 0

3 BrghtGnd 80 65 0

4 60'sGrnd 80 66 0

5 RchGndSt 80 67 0

6 60'sJazz 80 69 0

7 PowerGnd 80 72 0

8 MildGrnd 80 73 0

9 ChorusMn 80 75 0

10 AmbiGrnd 80 79 0

III (Piano 3)

1 PnoStPad 80 92 0

2 SynStrPf 80 93 0

3 PianoPad 80 94 0

4 OctPf+Pd 80 95 0

5 Pf+Choir 80 96 0

6 ModPd Pf 80 97 0

7 SitaryPf 80 99 0

8 StGndPSt 80 100 0

9 StRichSt 80 102 0

10 StTghtSt 80 104 0

IV (Piano 4)

1 BrghtPno 80 0 1

2 Digital 80 64 1

3 ChorDigi 80 65 1

4 DigiGrnd 80 67 1

5 Grnd/wDX 80 68 1

6 ChoDigiP 80 69 1

7 GlassPno 80 70 1

8 DigiTine 80 71 1

9 SawDigi1 80 72 1

10 SawDigi2 80 73 1

V (E.Piano 1)

1 CP 80 0 2

2 CP-Symph 80 64 2

3 Trem CP 80 65 2

4 BrightCP 80 66 2

5 Digi CP1 80 67 2

6 Jino 80 68 2

7 Digi CP2 80 69 2

8 Petit CP 80 70 2

9 Hnkytnk2 80 64 3

10 Hnkytnk3 80 65 3

VI (E.Piano 2)

1 Tea 80 0 4

2 Deodar 80 64 4

3 70's EP 80 65 4

4 80's EP 80 66 4

5 Crisp EP 80 67 4

6 Sweetnes 80 68 4

7 Freeway 80 69 4

8 Trem 70 80 70 4

9 Remark 80 71 4

10 Mid 70's 80 73 4

VII (E.Piano 3)

1 Celest80 80 74 4

2 At Once 80 75 4

3 TremDyno 80 76 4

4 TremWurl 80 77 4

5 Phase 70 80 78 4

6 DlydDyno 80 79 4

7 FlngDyno 80 80 4

8 Dyno 81 80 82 4

9 Tonight 80 83 4

10 Dyno 83 80 84 4

VIII (E.Piano 4)

1 Choir EP 80 87 4

2 Paddy EP 80 88 4

3 VcePd EP 80 89 4

4 60's EP 80 91 4

5 Trump 80 92 4

6 DonnyWrl 80 93 4

7 WurliAmp 80 94 4

8 Dg Wurli 80 95 4

IX (E.Piano 5)

1 FullTine 80 0 5

2 DX EP2 80 64 5

3 DX 1990 80 66 5

4 Mllw DX 80 67 5

5 ChrsTine 80 68 5

6 Chrs EP2 80 69 5

7 Chrs1980 80 70 5

8 Chrs1990 80 71 5

9 DarkDXEP 80 72 5

10 FTBallad 80 73 5

X (E.Piano 6)

1 Sym EP2 80 74 5

2 Chrs1982 80 75 5

3 90Ballad 80 76 5

4 816 80 77 5

5 DXEP+Pad 80 78 5

6 DXSynStr 80 79 5

7 DXEP+Cho 80 80 5

8 Balmy DX 80 81 5

9 GlassyEP 80 82 5

10 Chrs FMP 80 84 5

PLG150-PF Plug in Voice List

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

582

Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-inl i i i l I i li i i l i

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 209

XI (Harpsi&Clavi)

1 Harpsi 1 80 0 6

2 Harpsi 2 80 64 6

3 RichHpsi 80 67 6

4 Clav 1 80 0 7

5 Clav 2 80 64 7

6 MuteClav 80 65 7

7 Phs Clav 80 66 7

8 PhsClav2 80 67 7

9 Wah Clav 80 68 7

10 DigiClav 80 69 7

11 Ch DgClv 80 70 7

12 PhsDgClv 80 71 7

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

58 3

Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-inl i i i l I i li i i l i

210 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

I

1 E.Pno1 35 1 1

2 DX-Road2 35 1 12

3 E.PIANO1 35 0 10

4 WurliEP1 35 1 11

5 RatioDob 35 1 8

6 CosaRosa 35 1 13

7 E.PIANO2 35 0 34

8 Knock EP 83 70 4

9 Hard EP1 83 97 4

10 Vics EP 83 68 5

11 Duke EP 83 72 5

12 DynoRoad 83 96 5

13 E.Pno 2 35 1 3

14 Bell Pno 83 69 3

15 BigWurlt 83 64 4

16 DX-Road3 83 68 4

17 EP 1970 83 71 4

18 Urban 83 66 5

19 E.Pno 4 83 69 5

20 Mark III 83 70 2

II

1 MM-Clav1 35 1 19

2 CLAV 1 35 0 19

3 Clavecn1 83 68 7

4 MM-Clav2 83 64 7

5 CLAV 2 35 0 42

6 SkltnClv 35 1 20

7 ClavStf1 35 1 21

8 MuteClav 83 99 7

9 BritClv1 83 75 7

10 Revinett 83 67 7

11 DX-Clv 1 83 70 7

12 HARPSIC1 35 0 18

13 HyperSqr 35 1 89

14 Xanu 35 1 113

15 MM-Prety 83 66 88

16 Gior Pad 83 66 93

17 LUTE 35 0 58

18 HARP 2 35 0 61

19 DX-Harp1 35 1 94

20 OrchHarp 83 65 46

III

1 PIANO 2 35 0 8

2 DXCP-70 35 1 16

3 Digi Pno 83 66 0

4 5th Pno1 83 66 1

5 TOY PIAN 35 0 39

6 Glocken1 83 0 9

7 DX-Vibe1 35 1 23

8 MARIMBA 35 0 21

9 DX-Xylo2 83 64 13

10 TUB BELL 35 0 25

11 DX-Bel 1 83 64 14

12 DX-BigBn 67 0 69

13 MelwMrmb 83 103 12

14 Vibetron 83 70 11

15 Glocken4 83 66 9

16 PIANO 4 35 0 32

17 PowerPno 35 1 15

18 IronEch2 67 0 71

19 MiniBell 35 1 27

20 Carillon 35 1 25

IV

1 Gtr Box 83 71 25

2 Folknik 83 74 25

3 Tite Gtr 35 1 40

4 DX-JzGt1 83 0 26

5 DX-AcGt4 83 66 24

6 DX-PkGt3 83 65 25

7 DX-PkGt7 83 69 25

8 DX-JzGt2 83 64 26

9 DX-ClGt6 83 68 27

10 DX-ClGt9 83 96 27

11 DX-ClGt1 35 1 42

12 DX-ClGt5 35 1 43

13 GUITAR 5 35 0 56

14 GUITAR 2 35 0 12

15 KOTO 35 0 22

16 Mrmb Gtr 83 69 24

17 DX-ClGt4 83 66 27

18 DX-DsGt5 83 68 30

19 GUITAR 1 35 0 11

20 RytmPluk 83 75 25

V

1 BASS 1 35 0 14

2 BogiBass 35 1 30

3 FustBass 83 67 33

4 DX-SyBa3 35 1 34

5 PickPluk 83 64 34

6 ChifBass 83 65 34

7 Owl Bass 83 67 34

8 FrtlsBa3 83 65 35

9 DX-SyBa5 35 1 36

10 DX-SyBa6 35 1 37

11 DX-Bass3 83 66 39

12 After 88 83 67 32

13 BASS 4 35 0 63

14 Cutmandu 35 1 35

15 BASS 3 35 0 62

16 FrtlsBa5 83 67 35

17 DX-SyBa9 83 96 38

18 MM-Fall 67 0 88

19 MM-SDr 1 35 1 119

20 DX-MtSnr 83 96 118

VI

1 DX-Str 8 35 1 75

2 SolinePf 35 1 83

3 BellStr2 83 97 100

4 WarmStr1 83 0 49

5 Soft Bow 83 74 50

6 DX-AnSt3 83 65 51

7 Aftrnoon 83 73 51

8 Str&Brs 35 1 85

9 SyBr Pd6 83 69 90

10 ORCHESTR 35 0 6

PLG150-DX Plug in Voice List

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

584

Plug-in Voice List/Plug-In-Stimmenliste/Liste des voix plug-inl i i i l I i li i i l i

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 211

11 GrngePad 83 0 94

12 WarmStr4 83 68 51

13 DX-AnSt1 83 70 50

14 DX-Str10 83 66 49

15 SyBr Pd3 83 66 90

16 SyBr Pd2 83 65 90

17 DX-Str 5 83 70 48

18 DX-Str 3 83 68 48

19 Mid Str1 83 0 48

20 DX-SySt7 35 1 86

VII

1 DX-Trpt2 83 64 56

2 DX-Trpt3 83 65 56

3 DX-Trpt4 83 66 56

4 SlvTrmpt 83 67 56

5 DX-Trb 2 83 64 57

6 BRASS 1 35 0 0

7 BRASS 2 35 0 1

8 BRASS 3 35 0 2

9 DX-BrSc2 35 1 65

10 CS80-Br1 35 1 66

11 DX-Tuba2 83 64 58

12 AlpsHorn 83 68 60

13 DX-Horn 83 0 60

14 MelwHrn1 83 64 60

15 MletHorn 83 66 60

16 BlnchHrn 83 67 60

17 BrsLead1 83 0 83

18 BrsLead2 83 65 83

19 BrsLead3 83 66 83

20 ChorsBrs 83 0 63

VIII

1 Court 83 79 62

2 DX-BrSc1 83 0 61

3 DX-SBr 2 35 1 68

4 DX-SBr 3 83 67 62

5 DX-SBr 5 83 69 62

6 DX-SBr 6 83 70 62

7 DX-SBr 7 83 65 63

8 Ensemble 83 71 63

9 Fanfare 83 72 61

10 HardBrss 83 96 61

11 Horn Ens 83 71 61

12 Juice 83 80 62

13 MM-Brss1 35 1 69

14 MM-Brss2 35 1 70

15 MM-Brss3 83 73 62

16 SinglBrs 83 67 63

17 SynHorns 35 1 74

18 TightBr1 83 66 61

19 TightBr2 83 67 61

20 WarmBrss 83 70 61

IX

1 FLUTE 1 35 0 23

2 Quena 83 65 76

3 Harvest 35 1 96

4 CaliopL3 83 66 82

5 DX-Ocrn2 83 64 79

6 VbrtClar 83 0 71

7 DX-Clar1 83 65 71

8 Oboe 1 83 0 68

9 Au Campo 83 0 84

10 Bassoon 83 0 70

11 DX-Acrd4 35 1 61

12 DX-Flt 3 83 65 73

13 DX-Botle 83 64 76

14 Whistle1 83 0 78

15 DX-Ocrn1 83 0 79

16 CaliopL2 83 64 82

17 DrwOrg11 35 1 46

18 PufOrgn2 83 65 20

19 PIPES 1 35 0 17

20 DXChrch2 35 1 58

X

1 E.ORGAN1 35 0 16

2 E.ORGAN4 35 0 46

3 JazOrg 1 83 67 16

4 DrwOrg 5 83 70 16

5 DrwOrg15 35 1 48

6 PrcOrg 4 35 1 51

7 RckOrg 4 83 66 18

8 RckOrg14 83 97 18

9 Whisper1 83 65 91

10 ArrowxMS 35 1 102

11 Janpany 35 1 118

12 Flxatone 35 1 124

13 Laser 2 35 1 125

14 DX-Ring1 67 0 64

15 DX-Echo1 83 102 102

16 DX-Aggo1 83 0 113

17 Block 83 0 115

18 Log Drum 83 96 115

19 SoftHead 83 64 116

20 CongaDrm 83 96 116

XI

1 Ana Poly 83 78 62

2 AnalogBr 83 97 62

3 SYN-LEA1 35 0 13

4 Super DX 83 66 81

5 DXSyLd 5 83 68 81

6 DXSyLd 9 83 99 81

7 LeadLine 83 0 87

8 SoftLd 1 35 1 103

9 DX-SLd 2 83 65 80

10 SnglLine 35 1 105

11 DX-SLd 7 35 1 99

12 Funkrhyt 35 1 71

13 PowerDrv 83 75 62

14 DX-SLd 3 83 67 80

15 DXSyLd 3 83 65 81

16 LeadPhon 83 64 84

17 WhaserPd 83 75 90

18 DX-Atms2 83 67 99

19 DX-MtPd1 35 1 92

20 TrcrBell 35 1 116

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

Category Order Voice Name MSB# LSB#

MIDI Program Change#

58 5

Style List/Style-Liste/Liste des styles

212 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

8 BEAT 1 Heart Beat 2 8 Beat 1 3 8 Beat 2 4 8 Beat 3 5 8 Beat 4 6 6/8 Slow Rock 7 Spicy Beat 8 8 Beat Adria 9 Off Beat

10 8 Beat Rock 1 11 Piano Ballad 12 Guitar Ballad 13 Organ Ballad 14 Love Song 15 8 Beat Ballad 1 16 Acoustic Ballad 17 Modern 6/8 18 Root Rock 1 19 Soft Rock 20 Hard Rock

16 BEAT 1 16 Beat 1 2 16 Beat 2 3 16 Beat 3 4 16 Beat 4 5 Slow & Easy 6 Smooth Jazz 7 Uptown Beat 8 Jazz Rock 9 Kool Shuffle

10 West End Shuffle DANCE

1 House Musik 2 DJ Berlin 3 Trance 1 4 Hip Hop 5 Trip Hop 6 Disco Chocolate 7 70s Disco 1 8 Saturday Night 9 Disco Fox

10 Techno-Polis 11 Euro Shop 12 Entrance 13 Clubdance 14 Flip Hop 15 Disco Samba

SWING&JAZZ 1 Big Band 1 2 Big Band 2 3 Big Band 3 4 Swing 1 5 Swing 2 6 Acoustic Jazz 7 Electric Jazz 8 Jazz Ballad 1 9 Gypsy Swing

10 Swingfox 11 Dixieland 12 Ragtime 13 Big Band Ballad 14 Shuffle 15 Piano Swing

R&B 1 Soul Shuffle 2 Soul 3 Modern R&B

4 Rock & Roll 5 Croco Twist 6 Gospel Brothers 7 Gospel Sisters 8 Gospel Shuffle 9 6/8 Blues

10 Boogie Woogie 1 11 Amazing Gospel 12 Blueberry Blues 13 60s Rock & Roll 14 Funky Fusion 15 Rock Shuffle

COUNTRY 1 Country Rock 2 Country 2/4 3 Country Swing 1 4 Country Shuffle 1 5 Country Ballad 6 Country Waltz 7 Bluegrass 1 8 Hoedown 9 Country Brothers

10 Guitar Pop LATIN

1 Samba City 2 Samba Rio 3 Bossa Nova 4 Fast Bossa 5 Mambo 1 6 Caribbean 7 Carnival 8 Gypsy Rumba 9 Pop Rumba

10 Sheriff Reggae MARCH&WALTZ

1 US March 2 German March 1 3 6/8 March 4 Polka Oberkrainer 5 Waltz Oberkrainer 6 Guitar Serenade 7 Tarantella 1 8 Polka Pop 1 9 Jazz Waltz

10 Slow Waltz BALLROOM

1 Viennese Waltz 2 English Waltz 3 Slowfox 1 4 Quickstep 5 Tango 6 Samba 7 Rumba 8 Cha Cha Cha 9 Pasodoble 1

10 Jive 11 Metronome 1/4 12 Metronome 2/4 13 Metronome 3/4 14 Metronome 4/4 15 Metronome 6/8 16 Bass Chord Hold 1 17 Bass Chord Hold 2 18 Bass Chord Hold 3 19 Bass Chord Hold 4 20 Bass Chord Hold 5

Category Order Style Name Category

Order Style Name

I (8 BEAT) 1 60s Rock 1 2 60s Rock 2 3 8 Beat 5 4 8 Beat Rock 2 5 8 Beat Rock 3 6 8 Beat Ballad 2 7 Barock 8 Root Rock 2 9 Root Rock 3

10 Slow Rock II (16 BEAT)

1 Uptown Shuffle 2 LA Groove 3 Funk 4 Analog Ballad 5 Hip Hop Pop 6 16Beat Ballad 1 7 16Beat Ballad 2 8 EP Ballad 9 Pop Ballad

10 16Beat Rock Ballad III (DANCE)

1 6/8 Trance

2 16Beat Dance Shuf- fle

3 70s Disco 2 4 Dance Funk 5 Dance Soul 6 Disco 7 Disco Fusion 8 Disco Hands 9 Eurobeat

10 Groundbeat 11 Handbag 12 Party Pop 13 Soul Dance 14 Techno1 15 Trance 2

IV (SWING&JAZZ) 1 Bebop 2 Big Band Shuffle 3 Cat Groove 4 Foxtrot 1 5 Foxtrot 2 6 Jazz Ballad 2 7 Lounge Piano 8 Midnight Swing 9 Miller Ballad

10 Organ Quickstep 11 Vocal Swing 12 Jazz Singer

V (R&B) 1 16 Beat Funk 2 60s Rock 3 3 Blues Shuffle 4 Boogie Woogie 2 5 Lovely Shuffle 6 Motown 7 Motown Soul 8 Soul Beat 9 Pop Shuffle

10 Twist VI (COUNTRY)

1 Bluegrass 2 2 Carpenter 3 Country Two Step 4 Country 8 Beat 2

5 Country 8 Beat 1 6 Country Pop 7 Country Swing 2 8 Cowboy Boogie 9 Cowboy Rock

10 Singer Song Writer VII (LATIN)

1 Espagnole 2 Rumba Flamenca 3 Salsa 4 Rumba Island 5 Piano Rumba 7 Beguine 8 Guitar Bossa 9 Bossa Band

10 Happy Reggae 11 Jumbo Reggae VIII (MARCH&WALTZ) 1 Showtune 2 Polka Pop 2 3 German March 2 4 Jig 5 Reel 6 Musette 7 Swing Waltz 8 Pop Waltz 9 Christmas 3/4

10 Christmas 4/4

Category Order Style Name Category

Order Style Name

586

Preset Style/Stil Voreinstellung/Style prslectionn Flash Style/Stil Blitz/Style Flash

Style List

Multi Pad Bank List/Multi-Pad-Bankliste/Liste des

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 213

banques multi-pads Bank Number Bank Name

1 Live! Tom

2 Live! Crash

3 Live! Kit 1

4 Live! Kit 2

5 Live! Kit 3

6 ArabicPerc 1

7 ArabicPerc 2

8 Live! Perc 1

9 Live! Perc 2

10 Dance Kit

11 Scat 1

12 Scat 2

13 Scat 3

14 Scat 4

15 Swingy

16 Live! Brass 1

17 Live! Brass 2

18 SynBrass

19 Mallet Fills

20 Piano Man

21 Heaven Arp

22 Piano Arp

23 Harpeggio 1

24 Harpeggio 2

25 Arpeggio

26 Crystal Arp

27 Twinkle Arp

28 Piano Gliss

29 Xmas 1

30 Xmas 2

31 Attention 1

32 Attention 2

33 Fanfare 1

34 Fanfare 2

35 Classical

36 Flamenco Gtr

37 Salsa Piano

38 Samba Show 1

39 Samba Show 2

40 TimbalesRoll

41 Guitar Cut 1

42 Guitar Cut 2

43 GuitarRiff 1

44 GuitarRiff 2

45 Guitar Strum

46 LiveDrumFill

47 Limbo Dancer

48 DJ Set 1

Bank Number Bank Name

49 DJ Set 2

50 OrchestraHit

51 Water SE

52 Horror SE

53 Night SE

54 Day SE

55 Car SE

56 Big Bells

57 Whistle

58 MagicBell SE

59 MIDI Control

60 Scale Tune

Multi Pad Bank List 58

7

Parameter Chart/Parameter-Tabelle/

214 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

Auto Accompaniment

Style # x o o o o x Acmp. x

Auto Acmpaniment ON/OFF ON o o o o x Acmp. x

Fingering x x o o o x Acmp. Fingering

Split Point x x o o o x Acmp. Split Point

Main Variation [MainA/B/C/D] x o o x x x Acmp. x

FADE IN/OUT x x x x x x x x

FILL In & Break Mode x x x x x x x x

Tap Tempo x x x x x x x x

Tap Count Note o o o o o x Acmp. x

Tap Count Velocity o o o o o x Acmp. x

Acmp. Main Volume x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Main EQ Low x x o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Main EQ High x x o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Main Panpot x x o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Main Reverb Depth x x o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Main Chorus Depth x x o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Main DSP Depth x x o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Track On/Off x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Track On/Off x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Bass Part Track On/Off x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 1 Part Track On/Off x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 2 Part Track On/Off x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Pad Part Track On/Off x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Track On/Off x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Track On/Off x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Volume x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Volume x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Bass Part Volume x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 1 Part Volume x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 2 Part Volume x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Pad Part Volume x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Volume x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Volume x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Panpot x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Panpot x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Bass Part Panpot x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 1 Part Panpot x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 2 Part Panpot x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Pad Part Panpot x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Panpot x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Panpot x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Reverb Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Reverb Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Bass Part Reverb Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 1 Part Reverb Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 2 Part Reverb Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Pad Part Reverb Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Reverb Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Reverb Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Chorus Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Chorus Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Bass Part Chorus Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 1 Part Chorus Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 2 Part Chorus Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Pad Part Chorus Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Chorus Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Chorus Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Variation (DSP3) Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Variation (DSP3) Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Bass Part Variation (DSP3) Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 1 Part Variation (DSP3) Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 2 Part Variation (DSP3) Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Pad Part Variation (DSP3) Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Variation (DSP3) Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Variation (DSP3) Depth x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Voice Change Voice # x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Voice Change Voice # x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Bass Part Voice Change Voice # x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 1 Part Voice Change Voice # x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 2 Part Voice Change Voice # x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Pad Part Voice Change Voice # x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Voice Change Voice # x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Voice Change Voice # x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Harmonic Content x o o x x x Acmp. x

o : Memorized x : Not memorized ON : Always ON when the corresponding function is called up.

o : Wird gespeichert x : Wird nicht gespeichert ON Ist immer eingeschaltet, wenn die zugehrige Funktion

aufgerufen wird.

o : mmoris x : non mmoris ON : toujours activ lorsque la fonction correspondante est

appele

O ne

T ou

ch

S et

tin g

M us

ic

D at

ab as

e R

eg is

tr at

io n

M em

or y

S et

up (

D is

k) S

ys te

m B

ac ku

p

V oi

ce S

et G

ro up

F re

ez e

G ro

up

P ar

am et

er L

oc k

O ne

T ou

ch

S et

tin g

M us

ic

D at

ab as

e R

eg is

tr at

io n

M em

or y

S et

up (

D is

k) S

ys te

m B

ac ku

p

V oi

ce S

et G

ro up

F re

ez e

G ro

up

P ar

am et

er L

oc k

Parameter Chart 588

Tableau des paramtres

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 215

Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Harmonic Content x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Bass Part Harmonic Content x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 1 Part Harmonic Content x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 2 Part Harmonic Content x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Pad Part Harmonic Content x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Harmonic Content x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Harmonic Content x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part Brightness x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part Brightness x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Bass Part Brightness x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 1 Part Brightness x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 2 Part Brightness x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Pad Part Brightness x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 1 Part Brightness x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 2 Part Brightness x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part EQ Low x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part EQ Low x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Bass Part EQ Low x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 1 Part EQ Low x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 2 Part EQ Low x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Pad Part EQ Low x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 1 Part EQ Low x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 2 Part EQ Low x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 1 Part EQ High x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Rhythm 2 Part EQ High x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Bass Part EQ High x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 1 Part EQ High x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Chord 2 Part EQ High x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Pad Part EQ High x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 1 Part EQ High x o o x x x Acmp. x

Acmp. Phrase 2 Part EQ High x o o x x x Acmp. x

Synchro Stop x x x x x x x x

Synchro Start ON o x x x x x x

Start/Stop x x x x x x x x

Song

Song On/Off x x o x x x Song x

Lyrics Search On/Off x x o o o x Song x

Ultra Quick Start On/Off x x o o o x Song x

Song Full Path (Including the file name for the Registration Memory) x x o x x x Song x

Song Full Path (Not including the file name for the Backup) x x x o o x Song x

Song Select (Song #) x x x x x x x x

Song Name x x x x x x x x

Song Pause/Rew/FF x x x x x x x x

Song Volume x x o x x x x x

Song EQ Low x x x x x x x x

Song EQ High x x x x x x x x

Song Panpot x x x x x x x x

Song Reverb Depth x x x x x x x x

Song Chorus Depth x x x x x x x x

Song Variation (DSP3) Depth x x x x x x x x

Song Track Solo/Mute/Play (Track1~16) x x x x x x x x

Song Track Volume (Track1~16) x x x x x x x x

Song Track Panpot (Track1 ~16) x x x x x x x x

Song Track EQ Low (Track1~16) x x x x x x x x

Song Track EQ High (Track1~16) x x x x x x x x

Song Track Reverb Depth (Track1~16) x x x x x x x x

Song Track Chorus Depth (Track1~16) x x x x x x x x

Song Track Variation (DSP3) Depth (Track1~16) x x x x x x x x

Song Track Program Change # x x x x x x x x

Song Part Harmonic Content (Track1~16) x x x x x x x x

Song Part Brightness (Track1~16) x x x x x x x x

Voice

Part Select (Left/Right1/Right2/Right3) x x x x x x x x

Upper Octave o o o x x x Voice x

Sustain SW (R1/R2/R3) ON/OFF x x o x x x Voice x

Touch SW ON/OFF x x o x x x voice x

Right 1 Part On/Off o o o x x x Voice x

Right 1 Voice # o o o x x x Voice x

Right 1 Release Time (Bn 48h) x x x x x Voice x x

Right 1 Voice Octave o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right 1 Part Volume o o o x x x Voice x

Right 1 Part Panpot o o o x x x Voice x

Right 1 Reverb Depth o o o x x Effects Voice x

Right 1 Chorus Depth o o o x x Effects Voice x

Right 1 Poly/Mono ON/OFF o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right1 Portamento (Poly/Mono) o o o x x x Voice x

Right1 Tuning o o o x x x Voice x

Right1 Pitch Bend Range o o o x x x Voice x

Right1 Portamento Time o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right1 Harmonic Content o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right1 Brightness o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right1 EQ Low o o o x x EQ Voice x

O ne

T ou

ch

S et

tin g

M us

ic

D at

ab as

e R

eg is

tr at

io n

M em

or y

S et

up (

D is

k) S

ys te

m B

ac ku

p

V oi

ce S

et G

ro up

F re

ez e

G ro

up

P ar

am et

er L

oc k

O ne

T ou

ch

S et

tin g

M us

ic

D at

ab as

e R

eg is

tr at

io n

M em

or y

S et

up (

D is

k) S

ys te

m B

ac ku

p

V oi

ce S

et G

ro up

F re

ez e

G ro

up

P ar

am et

er L

oc k

58 9

Parameter Chart/Parameter-Tabelle/Tableau des paramtresll l

216 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

Right1 EQ High o o o x x EQ Voice x

Right 2 Part On/Off o o o x x x Voice x

Right 2 Voice # o o o x x x Voice x

Right 2 Release Time (Bn 48h) x x x x x Voice x x

Right 2 Voice Octave o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right 2 Part Volume o o o x x x Voice x

Right 2 Part Panpot o o o x x x Voice x

Right 2 Reverb Depth o o o x x Effects Voice x

Right 2 Chorus Depth o o o x x Effects Voice x

Right 2 Poly/Mono ON/OFF o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right 2 Portamento (Poly/Mono) o o o x x x Voice x

Right 2 Tuning o o o x x x Voice x

Right 2 Pitch Bend Range o o o x x x Voice x

Right 2 Portamento Time o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right 2 Harmonic Content o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right 2 Brightness o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right 2 EQ Low o o o x x EQ Voice x

Right 2 EQ High o o o x x EQ Voice x

Right 3 (LEAD) Part On/Off o o o x x x Voice x

Right 3 Voice # o o o x x x Voice x

Right 3 Release Time (Bn 48h) x x x x x Voice x x

Right 3 Voice Octave o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right 3 Part Volume o o o x x x Voice x

Right 3 Part Panpot o o o x x x Voice x

Right 3 Reverb Depth o o o x x Effects Voice x

Right 3 Chorus Depth o o o x x Effects Voice x

Right 3 Poly/Mono ON/OFF o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right 3 Portamento (Poly/Mono) o o o x x x Voice x

Right 3 Tuning o o o x x x Voice x

Right 3 Pitch Bend Range o o o x x x Voice x

Right 3 Portamento Time o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right 3 Harmonic Content o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right 3 Brightness o o o x x Voice Voice x

Right 3 EQ Low o o o x x EQ Voice x

Right 3 EQ High o o o x x EQ Voice x

Left Part On/Off o o o x x x Acmp. x

Left Voice # o o o x x x Acmp. x

Left Voice Octave o o o x x Voice Acmp. x

Left Part Volume o o o x x x Acmp. x

Left Part Panpot o o o x x x Acmp. x

Left Reverb Depth o o o x x Effects Acmp. x

Left Chorus Depth o o o x x Effects Acmp. x

Left Poly/Mono ON/OFF o o o x x Voice Acmp. x

Left Portamento (Poly/Mono) o o o x x x Acmp. x

Left Tuning o o o x x x Acmp. x

Left Pitch Bend Range o o o x x x Acmp. x

Left Portamento Time o o o x x Voice Acmp. x

Left Harmonic Content o o o x x Voice Acmp. x

Left Brightness o o o x x Voice Acmp. x

Left EQ Low o o o x x EQ Acmp. x

Left EQ High o o o x x EQ Acmp. x

Left Hold o o o x x x Acmp. x

Organ Flutes

R1 OrganFlute Panel Organ No. o o o x x x Voice x

R2 OrganFlute Panel Organ No. o o o x x x Voice x

R3 OrganFlute Panel Organ No. o o o x x x Voice x

LEFT OrganFlute Panel Organ No. o o o x x x Acmp. x

Plug-in Voice

R1 OrganFlute Panel Organ No. o o o x x x Voice x

R2 OrganFlute Panel Organ No. o o o x x x Voice x

R3 OrganFlute Panel Organ No. o o o x x x Voice x

LEFT OrganFlute Panel Organ No. o o o x x x Acmp. x

Effect

Reverb Effect Type x o o x x x Acmp. Reverb Type

Reverb Effect Parameter x x x x x x x x

Reverb Return Level x x o x x x Acmp. Reverb Return Level

Chorus Effect Type x o o x x x Acmp. x

Chorus Effect Parameter x x x x x x x x

Chorus Return Level x x o x x x Acmp. Chorus Return Level

Variation (DSP3) Type x x x x x x x x

Variation (DSP3) Effect parameter x x x x x x x x

Variation (DSP3) Connection x x x x x x x x

Variation (DSP3) Part x x x x x x x x

Variation (DSP3) Return Level x x x x x x x DSP3 Return Level

Ins1. (DSP4) On/Off o o o x x Effects Voice x

Ins1. (DSP4) Insertion Type o o o x x Effects Voice x

Ins1. (DSP4). Effect parameter x x x x x x x x

Ins1. (DSP4) Fast/Slow Sw o o o x x Effects Voice x

O ne

T ou

ch

S et

tin g

M us

ic

D at

ab as

e R

eg is

tr at

io n

M em

or y

S et

up (

D is

k) S

ys te

m B

ac ku

p

V oi

ce S

et G

ro up

F re

ez e

G ro

up

P ar

am et

er L

oc k

O ne

T ou

ch

S et

tin g

M us

ic

D at

ab as

e R

eg is

tr at

io n

M em

or y

S et

up (

D is

k) S

ys te

m B

ac ku

p

V oi

ce S

et G

ro up

F re

ez e

G ro

up

P ar

am et

er L

oc k

Parameter Chart/Parameter-Tabelle/Tableau des paramtres

590

Parameter Chart/Parameter-Tabelle/Tableau des paramtresll l

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 217

Ins1. (DSP4) Dry/Wet o o o x x Effects Voice x

Ins1. (DSP4) Fast/Slow Effect Parameter Value x x x x x x x x

Ins2. (DSP5) On/Off o o o x x Effects Voice x

Ins2. (DSP5) Insertion Type o o o x x Effects Voice x

Ins2. (DSP5) Effect Parameter x x x x x x x x

Ins2. (DSP5) Fast/Slow o o o x x Effects Voice x

Ins2. (DSP5) Dry/Wet o o o x x Effects Voice x

Ins2. (DSP5) Fast/Slow Variation Effect Parameter Value x x x x x x x x

Ins3. (DSP6) On/Off o o o x x Effects Voice x

Ins3. (DSP6) Insertion Type o o o x x Effects Voice x

Ins3. (DSP6) Effect Parameter x x x x x x x x

Ins3. (DSP6) Fast/Slow o o o x x Effects Voice x

Ins3. (DSP6) Dry/Wet o o o x x Effects Voice x

Ins3. (DSP6) Fast/Slow Variation Effect Parameter Value x x x x x x x x

Ins4. (DSP7) On/Off o o o x x Effects Acmp.

Ins4. (DSP7) Insertion Type o o o x x Effects Acmp. x

Ins4. (DSP7) Effect Parameter x x x x x x x x

Ins4. (DSP7) Fast/Slow o o o x x Effects Acmp. x

Ins4. (DSP7) Dry/Wet o o o x x Effects Acmp. x

Ins4. (DSP7) Fast/Slow Variation Effect Parameter Value x x x x x x x x

Ins5. (DSP8) On/Off x x o x x x Mic Mic Setting

Ins5. (DSP8) Insertion Type x x o o o x Mic Mic Setting

Ins5. (DSP8) Effect Parameter x x x x x x x Mic Setting

Ins5. (DSP8) Dry/Wet (Mic Depth) x x o o o x Mic Mic Setting

Sampling DSP1 On/Off x x x x x x x x

Sampling DSP1 Insertion Type x x x o o x x x

Sampling DSP1 Effect Parameter x x x x x x x x

Sampling DSP1 Fast/Slow x x x x x x x x

Sampling DSP1 Dry/Wet x x x x x x x x

Sampling DSP2 On/Off x x x x x x x x

Sampling DSP2 Insertion Type x x x o o x x x

Sampling DSP2 Effect parameter x x x x x x x x

Sampling DSP2 Fast/Slow x x x x x x x x

Sampling DSP2 Dry/Wet x x x x x x x x

Sampling DSP3 On/Off x x x x x x x x

Sampling DSP3 Insertion Type x x x o o x x x

Sampling DSP3 Effect Parameter x x x x x x x x

Sampling DSP3 Fast/Slow x x x x x x x x

Sampling DSP3 Dry/Wet x x x x x x x x

Microphone

Mic Volume x x x x x x x Mic Setting

Mic Panpot x x o x x x Mic Mic Setting

Mic Reverb Depth x x o x x x Mic Mic Setting

Mic Chorus Depth x x o x x x Mic Mic Setting

Mic EQ LOW Freq x x x o o x x x

Mic EQ LOW Gain x x x o o x x x

Mic EQ MID Freq x x x o o x x x

Mic EQ MID Gain x x x o o x x x

Mic EQ HIGH Freq x x x o o x x x

Mic EQ HIGH Gain x x x o o x x x

Noise Gate SW x x x o o x x x

Noise Gate TH x x x o o x x x

Compressor SW x x x o o x x x

Compressor TH x x x o o x x x

Compressor RAT x x x o o x x x

Compressor OUT x x x o o x x x

Mic Mute x x x x x x x x

Vocal Harmony Mute (Song Track) x x o x x x Mic Mic Setting

Vocal Harmony Track x x o x x x Mic Mic Setting

Vocal Harmony BAL. x x o x x x Mic Mic Setting

Vocal Harmony Part x x o x x x Mic Mic Setting

Vocal Harmony MODE x x o x x x Mic Mic Setting

Vocal Harmony Chord Detect x x o x x x Mic Mic Setting

Vocal Harmony On/Off x x o x x x Mic Mic Setting

Talk On/Off x x x x x x x x

Vocal Harmony Type x x o o o x Mic Mic Setting

Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter (Harmony Volume1/2) x x x x x x x Mic

Setting

Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter (Harmony Panpot1/2) x x x x x x x Mic

Setting

Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter (Harmony Detune 1/2) x x x x x x x Mic

Setting

Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter (Harmony Pitch To Note) x x x x x x x Mic

Setting

Vocal Harmony Effect Parameter (Harmony Pitch To Note Part) x x x x x x x Mic

Setting

Vocal Harmony Gender Type x x x x x x x Mic Setting

O ne

T ou

ch

S et

tin g

M us

ic

D at

ab as

e R

eg is

tr at

io n

M em

or y

S et

up (

D is

k) S

ys te

m B

ac ku

p

V oi

ce S

et G

ro up

F re

ez e

G ro

up

P ar

am et

er L

oc k

O ne

T ou

ch

S et

tin g

M us

ic

D at

ab as

e R

eg is

tr at

io n

M em

or y

S et

up (

D is

k) S

ys te

m B

ac ku

p

V oi

ce S

et G

ro up

F re

ez e

G ro

up

P ar

am et

er L

oc k

59 1

Parameter Chart/Parameter-Tabelle/Tableau des paramtresll l

218 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

Vocal Harmony Pitch Correction x x x x x x x Mic Setting

Vocal Harmony Harmony Part x x x x x x x Mic Setting

F7 Talk Setting

Talk Volume x x x o o x x x

Talk Total Volume Attenutop x x x o o x x x

Talk Vocal Harmony Type x x x o o x x x

Talk Vocal Harmony On/Off x x x o o x x x

Talk Panpot x x x o o x x x

Talk Reverb Depth x x x o o x x x

Talk Chorus Depth x x x o o x x x

Talk DSP Depth x x x o o x x x

Talk DSP ON/OFF x x x o o x x x

Harmony/Echo

Harmony/Echo On/Off o o o x x x Harmony x

Harmony/Echo Type o o o x x Harmony Harmony x

Harmony/Echo Volume o o o x x Harmony Harmony x

Harmony/Echo Assign o o o x x Harmony Harmony x

Harmony/Echo Chord Note Only o o o x x Harmony Harmony x

Harmony/Echo Touch Limit o o o x x Harmony Harmony x

Harmony/Echo Speed o o o x x Harmony Harmony x

Master EQ

EQ No. x x o o o x Voice Master EQ

EQ Low (EQ1) Gain x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Low Mid (EQ2) Gain x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Mid (EQ3) Gain x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Mid High (EQ4) Gain x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ High (EQ5) Gain x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Low (EQ1) Freq. x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Low Mid (EQ2) Freq. x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Mid (EQ3) Freq. x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Mid High (EQ4) Freq. x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ High (EQ5) Freq. x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Low (EQ1) Q x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Low Mid (EQ2) Q x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Mid (EQ3) Q x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Mid High (EQ4) Q x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ High (EQ5) Q x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Edit Q (EQ1~EQ5) x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Edit Freq. (EQ1~EQ5) x x x x x x x Master EQ

EQ Edit Q Gain (EQ1~EQ5) x x x x x x x Master EQ

Scale Tune

Scale Tuning (C) x x o x x x Scale x

Scale Tuning (C#) x x o x x x Scale x

Scale Tuning (D) x x o x x x Scale x

Scale Tuning (D#) x x o x x x Scale x

Scale Tuning (E) x x o x x x Scale x

Scale Tuning (F) x x o x x x Scale x

Scale Tuning (F#) x x o x x x Scale x

Scale Tuning (G) x x o x x x Scale x

Scale Tuning (G#) x x o x x x Scale x

Scale Tuning (A) x x o x x x Scale x

Scale Tuning (A#) x x o x x x Scale x

Scale Tuning (B) x x o x x x Scale x

Scale Tuning Arabic/Equal Temp. x x o x x x Scale x

Scale Tuning User Data (Multi Pad Bank #60) x x x o o x Scale x

Transpose

Master Transpose x x o x x x Tune Trans x

Song Transpose x x o x x x Tune Trans x

Keyboard Transpose x x o x x x Tune Trans x

Transpose Assign x x x o o x Tune Trans x

Tempo

Tempo x o o x x x Tempo x

Controller

Foot Volume Master/Individual x x o x x x Controller x

Foot Volume Assign x x o x x x Controller x

Foot Sw1 Type x x o x x x Controller x

Foot Sw1 Part Assign x x o x x x Controller x

Foot Sw1 Percussion Kit # x x o x x x Controller x

Foot Sw1 Percussion Note # x x o x x x Controller x

Foot Sw1 Percussion Velocity x x o x x x Controller x

Foot Sw2 Type x x o x x x Controller x

Foot Sw2 Part Assign x x o x x x Controller x

O ne

T ou

ch

S et

tin g

M us

ic

D at

ab as

e R

eg is

tr at

io n

M em

or y

S et

up (

D is

k) S

ys te

m B

ac ku

p

V oi

ce S

et G

ro up

F re

ez e

G ro

up

P ar

am et

er L

oc k

O ne

T ou

ch

S et

tin g

M us

ic

D at

ab as

e R

eg is

tr at

io n

M em

or y

S et

up (

D is

k) S

ys te

m B

ac ku

p

V oi

ce S

et G

ro up

F re

ez e

G ro

up

P ar

am et

er L

oc k

592

Parameter Chart/Parameter-Tabelle/Tableau des paramtresll l

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 219

Foot Sw2 Percussion Kit # x x o x x x Controller x

Foot Sw2 Percussion Note # x x o x x x Controller x

Foot Sw2 Percussion Velocity x x o x x x Controller x

Modulation Wheel Assign x x o x x x Controller x

Initial Touch Sw x x o x x x Controller x

Initial Touch Sensitivity x x o x x x Controller x

Initial Touch Fixed Velocity x x o x x x Controller x

Initial Touch Assign x x o x x x Controller x

After Touch Sensitivity x x o x x x Controller x

After Touch Assign x x o x x x Controller x

Multi Pad

MultiPad Bank o o o x x x MultiPad x

MultiPad Bank Name x x x x x x x x

MultiPad Chord Match On/Off (Curent Bank Pad 1~4) x x x x x x x x

MultiPad Stop x x x x x x x x

MultiPad 1/2/3/4 x x x x x x x x

MultiPad Repeat ON/OFF (Track1~60) x x x x x x x x

MultiPad Volume o o o x x x MultiPad x

MultiPad EQ Low x o o x x x MultiPad x

MultiPad EQ High x o o x x x MultiPad x

MultiPad Panpot x o o x x x MultiPad x

MultiPad Reverb Depth x o o x x x MultiPad x

MultiPad Chorus Depth x o o x x x MultiPad x

Registration Memory

Registration Bank # x x x x x x x x

Registration Bank Name x x x x x x x x

Registration Name x x x x x x x x

Voice Set Assign Right1 x x x o o x x x

Voice Set Assign Right2 x x x o o x x x

Voice Set Assign Right3 x x x o o x x x

Voice Set Assign Left x x x o o x x x

Freeze On/Off x x x x x x x x

Freeze Group Setting x x x o o x x x

MIDI

MIDI Local Control x x x o o x x x

MIDI Clock Internal/External (A/B) x x x o o x x x

MIDI Transmit Ch. 1~32 settings x x x o o x x x

MIDI Receive Ch. 1~32 settings x x x o o x x x

MIDI Thru Port x x x o o x x x

MIDI Template No x x x o o x x x

MIDI Transmit Clock x x x o o x x x

MIDI Receive transpose x x x o o x x x

MIDI Sys Ex Transmit x x x o o x x x

MIDI Sys Ex Receive x x x o o x x x

MIDI Chord Sys Ex Transmit x x x o o x x x

MIDI Chord Sys Ex Receive x x x o o x x x

MIDI Root x x x o o x x x

MIDI Chord Detect x x x o o x x x

MIDI MFC10 User Ch x x x x x x x x

MIDI MFC10 Template No. x x x o o x x x

MIDI MFC10 Foot Control x x x o o x x x

MIDI MFC10 SW Control x x x o o x x x

MIDI Template UserData x x x o x x x x

MIDI MFC10 On/Off x x x x x x x x

MIDI MFC10 Template User Data x x x o x x x x

UTILITY

AutoLoad On/Off x x x o o x x x

Speaker On/Off x x x o o x x x

Display MIDI Bank Select & Program Change # x x x o o x x x

Metronome Volume For Rec x x x o o x x x

Poly Count x x x x x x x x

FD Cache x x x o o x x x

Parameter Lock x x x o o x x x

Auto Exit Time x x x o o x x x

Screen Saver Time x x x o o x x x

Language x x x o o x x x

PC Keyboard x x x o o x x x

VIDEO OUT

NTSC/PAL x x x o o x x x

Background Color x x x o o x x x

Foreground Color x x x o o x x x

Size Large/Small x x x o o x x x

Other Settings

Master Tune x x x o o x x x

Metronome On/Off (Play) x x x o o x x x

Metronome On/Off (Rec) x x x o o x x x

Metronome Volume x x x o o x x x

Password x x x x o x x x

Line Out Part x x o o o x x Line Out

Owner Name x x x o o x x x

O ne

T ou

ch

S et

tin g

M us

ic

D at

ab as

e R

eg is

tr at

io n

M em

or y

S et

up (

D is

k) S

ys te

m B

ac ku

p

V oi

ce S

et G

ro up

F re

ez e

G ro

up

P ar

am et

er L

oc k

O ne

T ou

ch

S et

tin g

M us

ic

D at

ab as

e R

eg is

tr at

io n

M em

or y

S et

up (

D is

k) S

ys te

m B

ac ku

p

V oi

ce S

et G

ro up

F re

ez e

G ro

up

P ar

am et

er L

oc k

59 3

Effect Type List/Effektartliste/Liste des types d'effet

220 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

Reverb Type/Typ Widerhall/Type Reverb

Chorus Type/Typ Chor/Type Chorus

DSP Type/Typ DSP/Type DSP Reverb Panel Order

Effect Name Type MSB

Type LSB

1 Hall1 01 00 2 Hall2 01 16 3 Hall3 01 17 4 Hall4 01 18 5 Hall5 01 01 6 Hall M 01 06 7 Hall L 01 07 8 Room1 02 16 9 Room2 02 17 10 Room3 02 18 11 Room4 02 19 12 Room5 02 00 13 Room6 02 01 14 Room7 02 02 15 Room S 02 05 16 Room M 02 06 17 Room L 02 07 18 Stage1 03 16 19 Stage2 03 17 20 Stage3 03 00 21 Stage4 03 01 22 Plate1 04 16 23 Plate2 04 17 24 Plate3 04 00 25 GM Plate 04 07 26 WhiteRoom 16 00 27 Tunnel 17 00 28 Canyon 18 00 29 Basement 19 00 30 No Effect 00 00

Chorus Panel Order

Effect Name Type MSB

Type LSB

1 Chorus1 66 17 2 Chorus2 66 08 3 Chorus3 66 16 4 Chorus4 66 01 5 Chorus5 65 02 6 Chorus6 65 00 7 Chorus7 65 01 8 Chorus8 65 08 9 GM Chorus1 65 03 10 GM Chorus2 65 04 11 GM Chorus3 65 05 12 GM Chorus4 65 06 13 FB Chorus 65 07 14 Celeste1 66 00 15 Celeste2 66 02 16 Flanger1 67 08 17 Flanger2 67 16 18 Flanger3 67 17 19 Flanger4 67 01 20 Flanger5 67 00 21 GM Flanger 67 07 22 Symphonic1 68 16 23 Synphonic2 68 00 24 Phaser1 72 00 25 EnsDetune

(Ensemble Detune)

87 00

26 No Effect 00 00

DSP3 Panel Order

DSP4-7 Panel Order

DSP8 Panel Order

Effect Name Type MSB

Type LSB

1 1 1 Hall1 01 00 2 2 2 Hall2 01 16 3 3 3 Room1 02 16 4 4 4 Room2 02 17 5 5 5 Stage1 03 16 6 6 6 Stage2 03 17 7 7 7 Chorus1 66 17 8 8 8 Chorus2 66 08 9 9 9 Symphonic1 68 16

10 10 10 TempoDelay 21 00 11 11 11 TempoEcho 21 08 12 12 12 TempoCross 22 00 13 13 13 DelayLCR1 05 16 14 14 14 DelayLR 06 00 15 15 15 Echo 07 00 16 16 16 CrossDelay 08 00 17 17 17 Flanger1 67 08 18 18 18 Flanger2 67 16 19 19 19 EP Phaser1 72 17 20 20 20 EP Phaser2 72 18 21 21 21 EP Phaser3 72 16 22 22 - DualRotSP1 (Dual Rotor Speaker1) 99 00 23 23 - DualRotSP2 (Dual Rotor Speaker2) 99 01 24 24 22 GtTremolo1 (Guitar Tremolo1) 70 19 25 25 23 EP Tremolo 70 18 26 26 24 EP AutoPan 71 21 27 27 - StAmp1 (Stereo Amp Simulator1) 75 20 28 28 - StAmp2 (Stereo Amp Simulator2) 75 21 29 29 - VDstH+TDly

(V Distortion Hard + Tempo Delay) 103 00

30 30 - VDstS+TDly (V Distortion Soft + Tempo Delay)

103 01

31 31 - V_DstH+Dly (V Distortion Hard + Delay)

98 01

32 32 - V_DstS+Dly (V Distortion Soft + Delay)

98 03

33 33 - Dst+TDly (Distortion + Tempo Delay)

100 00

34 34 - Dst+2RotSP (Distortion + 2way Rotary Speaker)

86 01

35 35 - OD+2RotSP (Overdrive + 2way Rotary Speaker)

86 02

36 36 - Amp+2RotSP (Amp Simulator + 2way Rotary Speaker)

86 03

37 37 25 HmEnhance1 (Harmonic Enhancer1)

81 16

38 38 - PitchChg1 (Pitch Change1) 80 16 39 39 - ClaviTcWah (Clavi Touch Wah) 82 18 40 40 - EP TcWah (EP Touch Wah) 82 19 41 41 26 AutoWah1 78 16 42 42 - TcWah+Dst1

(Touch Wah + Distortion1) 82 16

43 43 - AtWah+Dst1 (Auto Wah + Distortion1)

78 17

44 44 - WhDst+TDly (Wah + Distortion + Tempo Delay)

102 00

45 45 - WhDst+Dly1 (Wah + Distortion + Delay1)

97 16

46 46 27 Hall3 01 17 47 47 28 Hall4 01 18 48 48 29 Hall5 01 01 49 49 - Hall M 01 06 50 50 - Hall L 01 07 51 51 30 Room3 02 18 52 52 31 Room4 02 19 53 53 32 Room5 02 00 54 54 33 Room6 02 01 55 55 34 Room7 02 02 56 56 - Room S 02 05 57 57 - Room M 02 06 58 58 - Room L 02 07 59 59 35 Stage3 03 00 60 60 36 Stage4 03 01

Effect Type List 594

Effect Type List/Effektartliste/Liste des types d'effeti li i

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 221

DSP3 Panel Order

DSP4-7 Panel Order

DSP8 Panel Order

Effect Name Type MSB

Type LSB

61 61 37 Plate1 04 16 62 62 38 Plate2 04 17 63 63 39 Plate3 04 00 64 64 - GM Plate 04 07 65 65 - ER1 09 00 66 66 - ER2 09 01 67 67 - GateReverb 10 00 68 68 - ReversGate 11 00 69 69 - WhiteRoom 16 00 70 70 - Tunnel 17 00 71 71 - Canyon 18 00 72 72 - Basement 19 00 73 73 40 Karaoke1 20 00 74 74 41 Karaoke2 20 01 75 75 42 Karaoke3 20 02 76 76 43 Chorus3 66 16 77 77 44 Chorus4 66 01 78 78 45 Chorus5 65 02 79 79 46 Chorus6 65 00 80 80 47 Chorus7 65 01 81 81 48 Chorus8 65 08 82 82 - FB Chorus 65 07 83 83 - GM Chorus1 65 03 84 84 - GM Chorus2 65 04 85 85 - GM Chorus3 65 05 86 86 - GM Chorus4 65 06 87 87 49 Celeste1 66 00 88 88 50 Celeste2 66 02 89 89 51 Synphonic2 68 00 90 90 52 EnsDetune (Ensemble Detune) 87 00 91 91 53 DelayLCR2 05 00 92 92 54 Flanger3 67 17 93 93 55 Flanger4 67 01 94 94 56 Flanger5 67 00 95 95 - GM Flanger 67 07 96 96 57 Phaser1 72 00 97 97 - Phaser2 72 08 98 98 - 2wayRotSp

(2way Rotary Speaker) 86 00

99 99 58 RotarySp1 69 16 100 100 59 RotarySp2 (Rotary Speaker2) 71 17 101 101 60 RotarySp3 (Rotary Speaker3) 71 18 102 102 61 RotarySp4 70 17 103 103 62 RotarySp5 66 18 104 104 63 RotarySp6 69 00 105 105 64 Tremolo1 70 16 106 106 65 Tremolo2 71 19 107 107 66 Tremolo3 70 00 108 108 67 AutoPan1 71 16 109 109 68 AutoPan2 71 00 110 110 69 GtTremolo2 (Guitar Tremolo2) 71 20 111 111 - V_DistHard (V Distortion Hard) 98 00 112 112 - V_DistSoft (V Distortion Soft) 98 02 113 113 - StDistHard

(Stereo Distortion Hard) 75 18

114 114 - StDistSoft (Stereo Distortion Soft) 75 19 115 115 - StDist (Stereo Distortion) 73 08 116 116 - StOD (Stereo Overdrive) 74 08 117 117 - StAmp3 (Stereo Amp Simulator3) 75 08 118 118 - Comp+Dist1

(Compressor + Distortion1) 73 16

119 119 - Comp+Dist2 (Compressor + Distortion2)

73 01

120 120 70 DistHard (Distortion Hard) 75 16 121 121 71 DistSoft (Distortion Soft) 75 17 122 122 72 DistHvy (Distortion Heavy) 73 00 123 123 73 OverDrive 74 00 124 124 74 AmpSim (Amp Simulator) 75 00 125 125 - CmpDstTDly

(Compressor + Distortion + Tempo Delay)

101 00

126 126 - CmpOD+TDly (Compressor + Overdrive + Tempo Delay)

101 01

DSP3 Panel Order

DSP4-7 Panel Order

DSP8 Panel Order

Effect Name Type MSB

Type LSB

127 127 - OD+TDly (Overdrive + Tempo Delay)

100 01

128 128 - CmpDstDly1 (Compressor + Distortion + Delay1)

96 16

129 129 - CmpDstDly2 (Compressor + Distortion + Delay2)

96 00

130 130 - CmpODDly1 (Compressor + Overdrive + Delay1)

96 17

131 131 - CmpODDly2 (Compressor + Overdrive + Delay2)

96 01

132 132 - Dst+Delay1 (Distortion + Delay1) 95 16 133 133 - Dst+Delay2 (Distortion + Delay2) 95 00 134 134 - OD+Delay1 (Overdrive + Delay1) 95 17 135 135 - OD+Delay2 (Overdrive + Delay2) 95 01 136 136 - Dst+RotSP

(Distortion + Rotary Speaker) 69 01

137 137 - OD+RotSP (Overdrive + Rotary Speaker)

69 02

138 138 - Amp+RotSP (Amp Simulator + Rotary Speaker)

69 03

139 139 75 Compressor 83 00 140 140 76 NoiseGate 84 00 141 141 77 EQDisco 76 16 142 142 78 EQTel 76 17 143 143 79 3BandEQ 76 00 144 144 80 2BandEQ 77 00 145 145 81 HmEnhance2

(Harmonic Enhancer2) 81 00

146 146 - VoicCancel (Voice Cancel) 85 00 147 147 - Ambience 88 00 148 148 - Lo-Fi 94 00 149 149 - PitchChg2 (Pitch Change2) 80 00 150 150 - PitchChg3 (Pitch Change3) 80 01 151 151 82 AutoWah2 78 00 152 152 - AtWah+Dst2

(Auto Wah + Distortion2) 78 01

153 153 - AtWah+OD1 (Auto Wah + Overdrive1)

78 18

154 154 - AtWah+OD2 (Auto Wah + Overdrive2)

78 02

155 155 83 TouchWah1 82 00 156 156 84 TouchWah2 82 08 157 157 - TcWah+Dst2

(Touch Wah + Distortion2) 82 01

158 158 - TcWah+OD1 (Touch Wah + Overdrive1)

82 17

159 159 - TcWah+OD2 (Touch Wah + Overdrive2)

82 02

160 160 - WhDst+Dly2 (Wah + Distortion + Delay2)

97 00

161 161 - Wh+OD+TDly (Wah + Overdrive + Tempo Delay)

102 01

162 162 - Wh+OD+Dly1 (Wah + Overdrive + Delay1)

97 17

163 163 - Wh+OD+Dly2 (Wah + Overdrive + Delay2)

97 01

164 164 - TalkingMod (Talking Modulation) 93 00 165 - - No Effect 00 00 166 165 85 Thru 64 00

59 5

Effect Parameter List/Effektparameterliste/

222 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

XG Effect Name TypeMSB (Type LSB) HALL1,HALL2 MSB = 01 ROOM1,ROOM2,ROOM3 MSB = 02 STAGE1,STAGE2 MSB = 03 PLATE (reverb, variation, insertion block) MSB = 04

DELAY L,C,R (variation, insertion block) MSB = 05

DELAY L,R (variation, insertion block) MSB = 06

ECHO (variation, insertion block) MSB = 07

CROSS DELAY (variation, insertion block) MSB = 08

EARLY REF1,EARLY REF2(variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 09

GATE REVERB MSB = 10 REVERSE GATE (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 11

WHITE ROOM MSB = 16 TUNNEL MSB = 17 CANYON MSB = 18 BASEMENT (reverb, variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 19

KARAOKE1,2,3 (variation, insertion block) MSB = 20

TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion block) TEMPO ECHO (variation, Insertion block) MSB = 21

TEMPO CROSS (variation, Insertion block) MSB = 22

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Reverb Time 0.3~30.0s 0-69 table#4 2 Diffusion 0~10 0-10 3 Initial Delay 0.1mS~99.3mS 0-63 table#5 4 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 table#3 5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Rev Delay 0.1mS~99.3mS 0-63 table#5 12 Density 0~4 (reverb, variation, insertion 1~4 block) 0-4

0~2 (insertion 5 block) 0-2 13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R ~ E=R ~ E

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Lch Delay 0.1~1.4860s (variation block) 1-14860

0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block) 1-14860 2 Rch Delay 0.1~1.4860s (variation block) 1-14860

0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block) 1-14860 3 Cch Delay 0.1~1.4860s (variation block) 1-14860

0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block) 1-14860 4 Feedback Delay 0.1~1.4860s (variation block) 1-14860

0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block) 1-14860 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 6 Cch Level 0~127 0-127 7 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 12 13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Lch Delay 0.1~1.4860s (variation block) 1-14860

0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block) 1-14860 2 Rch Delay 0.1~1.4860s (variation block) 1-14860

0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block) 1-14860 3 Feedback Delay 1 0.1~1.4860s (variation block) 1-14860

0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block) 1-14860 4 Feedback Delay 2 0.1~1.4860s (variation block) 1-14860

0.1~1.4860s (Insertion block) 1-14860 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 6 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 12 13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Lch Delay1 0.1~743.0ms (variation block) 1-7430

0.1~743.0ms (insertion block) 1-7430 2 Lch Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 3 Rch Delay1 0.1~743.0ms (variation block) 1-7430

0.1~743.0ms (insertion block) 1-7430 4 Rch Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 5 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 6 Lch Delay2 0.1~743.0ms (variation block) 1-7430

0.1~743.0ms (insertion block) 1-7430 7 Rch Delay2 0.1~743.0ms (variation block) 1-7430

0.1~743.0ms (insertion block) 1-7430 8 Delay2 Level 0~127 0-127 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 12 13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 L->R Delay 0.1~743.0ms (variation block) 1-7430

0.1~743.0ms (insertion block) 1-7430 2 R->L Delay 0.1~743.0ms (variation block) 1-7430

0.1~743.0ms (insertion block) 1-7430 3 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 4 Input Select L,R,L&R 0-2 5 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 12 13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Type S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr 0-5 2 Room Size 0.1~7.0 0-44 table#6 3 Diffusion 0~10 0-10 4 Initial Delay 0.1mS~200.0mS 0-127 table#5 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 6 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 table#3 7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Liveness 0~10 0-10 12 Density 0~3 0-3 13 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Type TypeA,TypeB 0-1 2 Room Size 0.1~7.0 0-44 table#6 3 Diffusion 0~10 0-10 4 Initial Delay 0.1mS~200.0mS 0-127 table#5 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 6 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 table#3 7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Liveness 0~10 0-10 12 Density 0~3 0-3 13 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Reverb Time 0.3~30.0s 0-69 table#4 2 Diffusion 0~10 0-10 3 Initial Delay 0.1mS~99.3mS 0-63 table#5 4 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 table#3 5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3 6 Width 0.5~10.2m 0-37 table#11 7 Heigt 0.5~20.2m 0-73 table#11 8 Depth 0.5~30.2m 0-104 table#11 9 Wall Vary 0~30 0-30

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Rev Delay 0.1mS~99.3mS 0-63 table#5 12 Density 0~4 0-4 13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R ~ E=R ~ E

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Delay Time 0.1mS~400.0mS 0-127 table#7 2 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 3 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 table#3 4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3 5 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Delay Time 64th/3 ~ 4thx6 0-19 table#14 2 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 1-127 3 Feedback High Dump 0 ~ 1.0 0-10 4 L/R Diffusion 1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms) 1-127 5 Lag 1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms) 1-127 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 12 13 EQ Low Frequency 32~2.0kH 4-40 14 EQ Low Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 15 EQ High Frequency 500 ~ 16.0kHz 28-58 16 EQ High Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Delay Time L>R 64th/3 ~ 4thx6 0-19 table#14 2 Delay Time R>L 64th/3 ~ 4thx6 0-19 table#14 3 Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 1-127 4 Input Select L, R, L&R 0-2 5 Feedback High Dump 0 ~ 1.0 0-10 6 Lag 1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms) 1-127 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 12 13 EQ Low Frequency 32~2.0kH 4-40 14 EQ Low Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 15 EQ High Frequency 500 ~ 16.0kHz 28-58 16 EQ High Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76

Effect Parameter List 596

Liste des paramtres d'effet de voix

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 223

CHORUS1,2,3,4 MSB = 65 CELESTE1,2,3,4 (chorus, variation, insertion block) MSB = 66

FLANGER1,2,3 (chorus, variation, insertion block) MSB = 67

SYMPHONIC (chorus, variation, insertion block) MSB = 68

ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, insertion block) MSB = 69, LSB = 0, 16

DISTORTION+ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 69, LSB = 1 OVERDRIVE+ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 69, LSB = 2

AMP SIM.+ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 69, LSB = 3

TREMOLO (variation, insertion block) MSB = 70

AUTO PAN (variation, insertion block) MSB = 71

PHASER 1 (chorus, variation, insertion block) MSB = 72, LSB = 0, 16, 17,18

PHASER 2 (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 72, LSB = 8

DISTORTION MSB = 73, LSB = 0 OVERDRIVE (variation, insertion block) MSB = 74

COMP+DIST (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 73, LSB = 1, 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 3 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 4 Delay Offset 0.0mS~50mS 0-127 table#2 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz (var/ins1-4 block) 14-54 table#3 12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block) 52-76 13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 (var/ins1-4 block) 10-120 14 15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 3 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 4 Delay Offset 0.0mS~50mS 0-127 table#2 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz (var/ins1-4 block) 14-54 table#3 12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block) 52-76 13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 (var/ins1-4 block) 10-120 14 LFO Phase Difference -180~+180deg(resolution=3deg.) 4-124 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 3 Delay Offset 0.0mS~50mS 0-127 table#2 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz (var/ins1-4 block) 14-54 table#3 12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block) 52-76 13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 (var/ins1-4 block) 10-120 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 3 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block) 52-76 13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 (var/ins1-4 block) 10-120 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequenct 0.0~39.7Hz 0-127

2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 3 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32~2.0kHz 4-40 7 EQ Low Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500 ~ 16.0kHz 28-58 9 EQ High Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 12 13 14 Drive 0~127 0-127 15 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz~Thru 34-60 16 Output Level 0~127 0-127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequenct 0.0~39.7Hz 0-127

2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 3 AMP Type Off,Stack,Combo,Tube 0-3 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32~2.0kHz 4-40 7 EQ Low Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500 ~ 16.0kHz 28-58 9 EQ High Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 12 13 14 Drive 0~127 0-127 15 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz~Thru 34-60 16 Output Level 0~127 0-127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1

2 AM Depth 0~127 0-127 3 PM Depth 0~127 0-127 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz (var/ins1-4 block) 14-54 table#3 12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block) 52-76 13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 (var/ins1-4 block) 10-120 14 LFO Phase Difference -180~+180deg(resolution=3deg.) 4-124 15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1

2 L/R Depth 0~127 0-127 3 F/R Depth 0~127 0-127 4 PAN Direction L<->R,L->R,L<-R,Lturn,Rturn,L/R 0-5 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz (var/ins1-4 block) 14-54 table#3 12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block) 52-76 13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 (var/ins1-4 block) 10-120 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 3 Phase Shift Offset 0~127 0-127 4 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Stage 4,5,6 (chorus, insertion5 block) 4-6 4~12 (var/ins1-4 block) 4-12

12 Diffusion mono/stereo 0-1 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 3 Phase Shift Offset 0~127 0-127 4 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Stage 3,4,5,6 4-6 12 13 LFO Phase Difference -180deg~+180deg(resolution=3deg.) 4-124 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Drive 0~127 0-127

2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 3 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3 5 Output Level 0~127 0-127 6 7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 table#3 8 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 9 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0~127 0-127 mild~sharp 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Drive 0~127 0-127

2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 3 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3 5 Output Level 0~127 0-127 6 7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 table#3 8 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 9 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0~127 0-127 mild~sharp 12 Attack 1ms~40ms 0-19 table#8 13 Release 10ms~680ms 0-15 table#9 14 Threshold -48dB~-6dB 79-121 15 Ratio 1.0~20.0 0-7 table#10 16

59 7

Effect Parameter List/Effektparameterliste/Liste des paramtres d'effet de voixi li i i

224 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

STEREO DISTORTION (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 73, LSB = 8 STEREO OVER DRIVE (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 74, LSB = 8

AMP SIMULATOR (variation, insertion block) MSB = 75, LSB = 0, 16, 17

STEREO AMP SIMULATOR (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 75, LSB = 8, 18, 19, 20, 21

3BAND EQ(MONO) (variation, insertion block) MSB = 76

2BAND EQ(STEREO) (variation, insertion block) MSB = 77

AUTO WAH (variation, insertion block) MSB = 78, LSB = 0, 16

AUTO WAH+DIST MSB = 78, LSB = 1, 17 AUTO WHA+ODRV (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 78, LSB = 2, 18

PITCH CHANGE 1 (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 80, LSB = 0, 16

PITCH CHANGE 2 (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 80, LSB = 1

HARMONIC ENHANCER (variation, Insertion block) MSB = 81

TOUCH WAH 1 (variation, insertion block) MSB = 82, LSB = 0 TOUCH WAH+DIST (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 82, LSB = 1, 16

TOUCH WAH 2 (variation, insertion block) MSB = 82, LSB = 8 TOUCH WAH+ODRV (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 82, LSB = 2, 17, 18, 19

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Drive 0~127 0-127

2 EQ Low Frequency 32~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 3 EQ Low Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 4 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz~Thru 34-60 5 Output Level 0-127 6 7 EQ Mid Frequency 100 ~ 10.0kHz 14-54 table#3 8 EQ Mid Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 9 EQ Mid Width 1 ~ 12 10-120

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Edge 0~127 0-127 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Drive 0~127 0-127

2 AMP Type Off,Stack,Combo,Tube 0-3 3 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3 4 Output Level 0~127 0-127 5 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0~127 0-127 mild~sharp 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Drive 0~127 0-127

2 AMP Type Off,Stack,Combo,Tube 0-3 3 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz~Thru 34-60 4 Output Level 0~127 0-127 5 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Edge 0~127 0-127 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 2 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 table#3 3 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 4 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120 5 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3 7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 8 9

10

11 12 13 14 15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 2 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 3 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 4 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 5 6 7 8 9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0~127 0-127

4 Resonance 1.0~12.0 10-120 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Drive 0~127 (var/ins1-4 block) 0-127 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0~127 0-127

4 Resonance 1.0~12.0 10-120 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Drive 0~127 0-127 12 EQ Low Gain(distortion) -12~+12dB 52-76 13 EQ Mid Gain(distortion) -12~+12dB 52-76 14 LPF Cutoff 1.0kHz~thru 34-60 table#3 15 Output Level 0~127 0-127 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Pitch -24~+24 40-88 2 Initial Delay 0.1mS~400.0mS 0-127 table#7 3 Fine 1 -50~+50 14-114 4 Fine 2 -50~+50 14-114 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Pan 1 L63~R63 1-127 12 Output Level 1 0~127 0-127 13 Pan 2 L63~R63 1-127 14 Output Level 2 0~127 0-127 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Pitch -24~+24 40-88 2 Initial Delay 0.1mS~400.0mS 0-127 table#7 3 Fine 1 -50~+50cent 14-114 4 Fine 2 -50~+50cent 14-114 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Pan 1 L63~R63 1-127 12 Output Level 1 0~127 0-127 13 Pan 2 L63~R63 1-127 14 Output Level 2 0~127 0-127 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 HPF Cutoff 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 2 Drive 0~127 0-127 3 Mix Level 0~127 0-127 4 5 6 7 8 9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Sensitive 0~127 0-127 2 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0~127 0-127

3 Resonance 1.0~12.0 10-120 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Drive 0~127 (var/ins1-4 block) 0-127 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Sensitive 0~127 0-127 2 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0~127 0-127

3 Resonance 1.0~12.0 10-120 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Drive 0~127 (var/ins1-4 block) 0-127 12 EQ Low Gain(distortion) -12~+12dB (var/ins1-4 block) 52-76 13 EQ Mid Gain(distortion) -12~+12dB(var/ins1-4 block) 52-76 14 LPF Cutoff 1.0kHz~thru(var/ins1-4 block) 34-60 table#3 15 Output Level 0~127(var/ins1-4 block) 0-127 16 Release 10~680mS(var/ins1-4 block) 52-67 table#12

Effect Parameter List/Effektparameterliste/Liste des paramtres d'effet de voix

598

Effect Parameter List/Effektparameterliste/Liste des paramtres d'effet de voixi li i i

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 225

COMPRESSOR (variation, insertion block) MSB = 83

NOISE GATE (variation, insertion block) MSB = 84

VOICE CANCEL (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 85

2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 86, LSB = 0

DIST+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 86, LSB = 1 OD+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 86, LSB = 2

AMP SIM.+2WAY ROTARY SP (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 86, LSB = 3

ENSEMBLE DETUNE (chorus, variation, insertion block) MSB = 87

AMBIENCE (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 88

TALKING MODULATION (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 93

LO-FI (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 94

DIST+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) OVERDRIVE+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 95

COMP+DIST+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) COMP+OVERDRIVE+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 96

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Attack 1~40ms 0-19 table#8 2 Release 10~680ms 0-15 table#9 3 Threshold -48~-6dB 79-121 4 Ratio 1.0~20.0 0-7 table#10 5 Output Level 0~127 0-127 6 7 8 9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Attack 1~40ms 0-19 table#8 2 Release 10~680ms 0-15 table#9 3 Threshold -72~-30dB 55-97 4 Output Level 0~127 0-127 5 6 7 8 9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10

11 Low Adjust 0~26 0-26 12 High Adjust 0~26 0-26 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Rotor Speed 0.0Hz~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1

2 Drive Low 0~127 0-127 3 Drive High 0~127 0-127 4 Low/High L63>H ~ L=H ~ L

10

11 Crossover Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 table#3 12 Mic L-R Angle 0deg~180deg(resolution=3deg.) 0-60 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Rotor Speed 0.0~39.7Hz 0-127

2 Drive Low 0~127 0-127 3 Drive High 0-127 0-127 4 Low/High Balance L63>H ~ L=H ~ L

10

11 Crossover Frequency 100 ~ 10.0kHz 14-54 12 Mic L-R Angle 0 ~ 180deg 0-60 13 14 Drive 0-127 15 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz~Thru 34-60 16 Output Level 0-127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Rotor Speed 0.0~39.7Hz 0-127

2 Drive Low 0~127 0-127 3 Drive High 0~127 0-127 4 Low/High Balance L63>H ~ L=H ~ L

10

11 Crossover Frequency 100 ~ 10.0kHz 14-54 12 Mic L-R Angle 0 ~ 180deg 0-60 13 AMP Type Off,Stack,Combo,Tube(AMPSIM only) 0-3 14 Drive 0-127 15 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz~Thru 34-60 16 Output Level 0-127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Detune -50~+50cent 14-114 2 Lch Init Delay 0.0mS~50mS 0-127 table#2 3 Rch Init Delay 0.0mS~50mS 0-127 table#2 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz (variation, insertion block) 4-40 table#3 12 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB (variation, insertion block) 52-76 13 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz (variation, insertion block) 28-58 table#3 14 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB (variation, insertion block) 52-76 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Delay Time 0.0mS~50mS 0-127 table#2 2 Output Phase normal/invers 0-1 3 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Vowel a,i,u,e,o 0-4

2 Move speed 1~62 1-62 3 Drive 0~127 0-127 4 Output Level 0~127 0-127 5 6 7 8 9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Sampling Freq Control 44.1kHz-345Hz 0-127 table#13 2 Word Length 1~127 1-127 3 Output Gain -6~+12dB 0-18 4 LPF Cutoff 63Hz~Thru 10-60 table#3 5 Filter Type Thru,PowerBass,Radio,Tel,Clean,Low 0-5 6 LPF Resonance 1.0~12.0 10-120 7 Bit Assign 0~6 0-6 8 Emphasis Off/On 0-1 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 12 13 14 15 Input Mode mono/stereo 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Lch Delay Time 0.1~1.4860s 1-14860 2 Rch Delay Time 0.1~1.4860s 1-14860 3 Delay Feedback Time 0.1~1.4860s 1-14860 4 Delay Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 5 Delay Mix 0~127 0-127 6 Dist Drive 0~127 0-127 7 Dist Output Level 0~127 0-127 8 Dist EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 9 Dist EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Delay Time 0.1~1.4860s 1-14860 2 Delay Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 3 Delay Mix 0~127 0-127 4 Dist Drive 0~127 0-127 5 Dist Output Level 0~127 0-127 6 Dist EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 7 Dist EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Comp. Attack 1ms~40ms 0-19 table#8 12 Comp. Release 10ms~680ms 0-15 table#9 13 Comp. Threshold -48dB~-6dB 79-121 14 Comp. Ratio 1.0~20.0 0-7 table#10 15 16

59 9

Effect Parameter List/Effektparameterliste/Liste des paramtres d'effet de voixi li i i

226 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

WAH+DIST+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) WAH+OVERDRIVE+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 97

V DISTORTION HARD (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 98, LSB = 0 V DISTORTION SOFT (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 98, LSB = 2

V DISTORTION HARD+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 98, LSB = 1 V DISTORTION SOFT+DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 98, LSB = 3

DUAL ROTOR SPEAKER1,2 (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 99

DIST+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) OVERDRIVE+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 100

COMP+DIST+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) COMP+OD+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 101

WAH+DIST+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) WAH+OD+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 102

V DIST HARD+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) V DIST SOFT+TEMPO DELAY (variation, Insertion1-4 block) MSB = 103

NO EFFECT (reverb, chorus, variation block) MSB = 0

THRU (variation, insertion block) MSB = 64

* Parameter 10 Dry/Wet only affects insertion type effects.

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Delay Time 0.1~1.4860s 1-14860 2 Delay Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 3 Delay Mix 0~127 0-127 4 Dist Drive 0~127 0-127 5 Dist Output Level 0~127 0-127 6 Dist EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 7 Dist EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Wah Sensitive 0~127 0-127 12 Wah Cutoff Freq Offset 0~127 0-127 13 Wah Resonance 1.0~12.0 10-120 14 Wah Release 10~680ms 52-67 table#12 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Overdrive 0~100% 0-100 2 Device Transister/Vintage Tube/ 0-4

Dist1/Dist2/Fuzz 3 Speaker Flat/Stack/Combo/Twin/ 0-5

Radio/Megaphone 4 Presence 0~20 0-20 5 Output Level 0~100% 0-100 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet Balance D63>W~D=W~D

11 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Overdrive 0~100% 0-100 2 Device Transister/Vintage Tube/ 0-4

Dist1/Dist2/Fuzz 3 Speaker Flat/Stack/Combo/Twin/ 0-5

Radio/Megaphone 4 Presence 0~20 0-20 5 Output Level 0~100% 0-100 6 Delay Time L 0.1ms~1.4860s 1-14860 7 Delay Time R 0.1ms~1.4860s 1-14860 8 Delay Feedback Time 0.1ms~1.4860s 1-14860 9 Delay Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127

10 Dry/Wet Balance D63>W~D=W~D

11 Delay Mix 0~127 0-127 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Rotor Speed Slow 0.0~2.65Hz 0-63 table#1 2 Horn Speed Slow 0.0~2.65Hz 0-63 table#1 3 Rotor Speed Fast 2.69~39.7Hz 64-127 table#1 4 Horn Speed Fast 2.69~39.7Hz 64-127 table#1 5 Slow-Fast Time of R 0~127 0-127 6 Slow-Fast Time of H 0~127 0-127 7 Drive Low 0~127 0-127 8 Drive High 0~127 0-127 9 Low/High Balance L63>H ~ L=H ~ L

10

11 EQ Low Frequency 32~2.0kH 4-40 table#3 12 EQ Low Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 13 EQ High Frequency 500 ~ 16.0kHz 28-58 table#3 14 EQ High Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 15 Mic L-R Angle 0 ~ 180deg 0-60 16 Speed Control Slow/Fast 0/1

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Delay Time 64th/3 ~ 4thx6 0-19 table#14 2 Delay Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 1-127 3 Delay Mix 0 ~ 127 0-127 4 Dist Drive 0 ~ 127 0-127 5 Dist Output Level 0 ~ 127 0-127 6 Dist EQ Low Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 7 Dist EQ High Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 8 L/R Diffusion 1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms) 1-127 9 Lag 1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms) 1-127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Delay Time 64th/3 ~ 4thx6 0-19 table#14 2 Delay Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 1-127 3 Delay Mix 0 ~ 127 0-127 4 Dist Drive 0 ~ 127 0-127 5 Dist Output Level 0 ~ 127 0-127 6 Dist EQ Low Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 7 Dist EQ High Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 8 L/R Diffusion 1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms) 1-127 9 Lag 1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms) 1-127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Comp. Attack 1ms ~ 40ms 0-19 12 Comp. Release 10ms ~ 680ms 0-15 13 Comp. Threshold -48dB ~ -6dB 79-121 14 Comp. Ratio 1.0 ~ 20.0 0-7 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Delay Time 64th/3 ~ 4thx6 0-19 table#14 2 Delay Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 1-127 3 Delay Mix 0 ~ 127 0-127 4 Dist Drive 0 ~ 127 0-127 5 Dist Output Level 0 ~ 127 0-127 6 Dist EQ Low Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 7 Dist EQ High Gain -12 ~ +12dB 52-76 8 L/R Diffusion 1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms) 1-127 9 Lag 1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms) 1-127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D

11 Wah Sensitive 0 ~ 127 0-127 12 Wah Cutoff Freq Offset 0 ~ 127 0-127 13 Wah Resonance 1.0 ~ 12.0 10-120 14 Wah Release 10 ~ 680mS 52-67 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 Overdrive 0~100% 0-100 2 Device Transister/Vintage Tube/ 0-4

Dist1/Dist2/Fuzz 3 Speaker Flat/Stack/Combo/Twin/ 0-5

Radio/Megaphone 4 Presence 0~20 0-20 5 Output Level 0~100% 0-100 6 Delay Time 64th/3 ~ 4thx6 0-19 table#14 7 Delay Feedback Level -63 ~ +63 1-127 8 L/R Diffusion 1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms) 1-127 9 Lag 1(-63ms)~64(0ms)~127(63ms) 1-127

10 Dry/Wet Balance D63>W~D=W~D

11 Delay Mix 0~127 0-127 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16

600

Effect Data Value Assign Table/Effektdatenwert- Zuord-

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 227

Zuordnungstabelle/Table d'affectation des valeurs pour les donnes d'effets Table #1 LFO Frequency

Table #2 Modulation Delay Offset

Table #3 EQ Frequency

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value 0 0.00 32 1.35 64 2.69 96 8.41 1 0.04 33 1.39 65 2.78 97 8.75 2 0.08 34 1.43 66 2.86 98 9.08 3 0.13 35 1.47 67 2.94 99 9.42 4 0.17 36 1.51 68 3.03 100 9.76 5 0.21 37 1.56 69 3.11 101 10.1 6 0.25 38 1.60 70 3.20 102 10.8 7 0.29 39 1.64 71 3.28 103 11.4 8 0.34 40 1.68 72 3.37 104 12.1 9 0.38 41 1.72 73 3.45 105 12.8

10 0.42 42 1.77 74 3.53 106 13.5 11 0.46 43 1.81 75 3.62 107 14.1 12 0.51 44 1.85 76 3.70 108 14.8 13 0.55 45 1.89 77 3.87 109 15.5 14 0.59 46 1.94 78 4.04 110 16.2 15 0.63 47 1.98 79 4.21 111 16.8 16 0.67 48 2.02 80 4.37 112 17.5 17 0.72 49 2.06 81 4.54 113 18.2 18 0.76 50 2.10 82 4.71 114 19.5 19 0.80 51 2.15 83 4.88 115 20.9 20 0.84 52 2.19 84 5.05 116 22.2 21 0.88 53 2.23 85 5.22 117 23.6 22 0.93 54 2.27 86 5.38 118 24.9 23 0.97 55 2.31 87 5.55 119 26.2 24 1.01 56 2.36 88 5.72 120 27.6 25 1.05 57 2.40 89 6.06 121 28.9 26 1.09 58 2.44 90 6.39 122 30.3 27 1.14 59 2.48 91 6.73 123 31.6 28 1.18 60 2.52 92 7.07 124 33.0 29 1.22 61 2.57 93 7.40 125 34.3 30 1.26 62 2.61 94 7.74 126 37.0 31 1.30 63 2.65 95 8.08 127 39.7

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value 0 0.0 32 3.2 64 6.4 96 9.6 1 0.1 33 3.3 65 6.5 97 9.7 2 0.2 34 3.4 66 6.6 98 9.8 3 0.3 35 3.5 67 6.7 99 9.9 4 0.4 36 3.6 68 6.8 100 10.0 5 0.5 37 3.7 69 6.9 101 11.1 6 0.6 38 3.8 70 7.0 102 12.2 7 0.7 39 3.9 71 7.1 103 13.3 8 0.8 40 4.0 72 7.2 104 14.4 9 0.9 41 4.1 73 7.3 105 15.5

10 1.0 42 4.2 74 7.4 106 17.1 11 1.1 43 4.3 75 7.5 107 18.6 12 1.2 44 4.4 76 7.6 108 20.2 13 1.3 45 4.5 77 7.7 109 21.8 14 1.4 46 4.6 78 7.8 110 23.3 15 1.5 47 4.7 79 7.9 111 24.9 16 1.6 48 4.8 80 8.0 112 26.5 17 1.7 49 4.9 81 8.1 113 28.0 18 1.8 50 5.0 82 8.2 114 29.6 19 1.9 51 5.1 83 8.3 115 31.2 20 2.0 52 5.2 84 8.4 116 32.8 21 2.1 53 5.3 85 8.5 117 34.3 22 2.2 54 5.4 86 8.6 118 35.9 23 2.3 55 5.5 87 8.7 119 37.5 24 2.4 56 5.6 88 8.8 120 39.0 25 2.5 57 5.7 89 8.9 121 40.6 26 2.6 58 5.8 90 9.0 122 42.2 27 2.7 59 5.9 91 9.1 123 43.7 28 2.8 60 6.0 92 9.2 124 45.3 29 2.9 61 6.1 93 9.3 125 46.9 30 3.0 62 6.2 94 9.4 126 48.4 31 3.1 63 6.3 95 9.5 127 50.0

Data Value Data Value 0 THRU(0) 32 800 1 22 33 900 2 25 34 1.0k 3 28 35 1.1k 4 32 36 1.2k 5 36 37 1.4k 6 40 38 1.6k 7 45 39 1.8k 8 50 40 2.0k 9 56 41 2.2k

10 63 42 2.5k 11 70 43 2.8k 12 80 44 3.2k 13 90 45 3.6k 14 100 46 4.0k 15 110 47 4.5k 16 125 48 5.0k 17 140 49 5.6k 18 160 50 6.3k 19 180 51 7.0k 20 200 52 8.0k 21 225 53 9.0k 22 250 54 10.0k 23 280 55 11.0k 24 315 56 12.0k 25 355 57 14.0k 26 400 58 16.0k 27 450 59 18.0k 28 500 60 THRU(20.0k) 29 560 30 630 31 700

Table #4 Reverb time

Table #5 Delay Time(200.0ms)

Table #6 Room Size

Data Value Data Value Data Value 0 0.3 32 3.5 64 17.0 1 0.4 33 3.6 65 18.0 2 0.5 34 3.7 66 19.0 3 0.6 35 3.8 67 20.0 4 0.7 36 3.9 68 25.0 5 0.8 37 4.0 69 30.0 6 0.9 38 4.1 7 1.0 39 4.2 8 1.1 40 4.3 9 1.2 41 4.4

10 1.3 42 4.5 11 1.4 43 4.6 12 1.5 44 4.7 13 1.6 45 4.8 14 1.7 46 4.9 15 1.8 47 5.0 16 1.9 48 5.5 17 2.0 49 6.0 18 2.1 50 6.5 19 2.2 51 7.0 20 2.3 52 7.5 21 2.4 53 8.0 22 2.5 54 8.5 23 2.6 55 9.0 24 2.7 56 9.5 25 2.8 57 10.0 26 2.9 58 11.0 27 3.0 59 12.0 28 3.1 60 13.0 29 3.2 61 14.0 30 3.3 62 15.0 31 3.4 63 16.0

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value 0 0.1 32 50.5 64 100.8 96 151.2 1 1.7 33 52.0 65 102.4 97 152.8 2 3.2 34 53.6 66 104.0 98 154.4 3 4.8 35 55.2 67 105.6 99 155.9 4 6.4 36 56.8 68 107.1 100 157.5 5 8.0 37 58.3 69 108.7 101 159.1 6 9.5 38 59.9 70 110.3 102 160.6 7 11.1 39 61.5 71 111.9 103 162.2 8 12.7 40 63.1 72 113.4 104 163.8 9 14.3 41 64.6 73 115.0 105 165.4

10 15.8 42 66.2 74 116.6 106 166.9 11 17.4 43 67.8 75 118.2 107 168.5 12 19.0 44 69.4 76 119.7 108 170.1 13 20.6 45 70.9 77 121.3 109 171.7 14 22.1 46 72.5 78 122.9 110 173.2 15 23.7 47 74.1 79 124.4 111 174.8 16 25.3 48 75.7 80 126.0 112 176.4 17 26.9 49 77.2 81 127.6 113 178.0 18 28.4 50 78.8 82 129.2 114 179.5 19 30.0 51 80.4 83 130.7 115 181.1 20 31.6 52 81.9 84 132.3 116 182.7 21 33.2 53 83.5 85 133.9 117 184.3 22 34.7 54 85.1 86 135.5 118 185.8 23 36.3 55 86.7 87 137.0 119 187.4 24 37.9 56 88.2 88 138.6 120 189.0 25 39.5 57 89.8 89 140.2 121 190.6 26 41.0 58 91.4 90 141.8 122 192.1 27 42.6 59 93.0 91 143.3 123 193.7 28 44.2 60 94.5 92 144.9 124 195.3 29 45.7 61 96.1 93 146.5 125 196.9 30 47.3 62 97.7 94 148.1 126 198.4 31 48.9 63 99.3 95 149.6 127 200.0

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value 0 0.1 32 5.1 64 10.1 96 15.1 1 0.3 33 5.3 65 10.3 97 15.3 2 0.4 34 5.4 66 10.4 98 15.5 3 0.6 35 5.6 67 10.6 99 15.6 4 0.7 36 5.7 68 10.8 100 15.8 5 0.9 37 5.9 69 10.9 101 15.9 6 1.0 38 6.1 70 11.1 102 16.1 7 1.2 39 6.2 71 11.2 103 16.2 8 1.4 40 6.4 72 11.4 104 16.4 9 1.5 41 6.5 73 11.5 105 16.6

10 1.7 42 6.7 74 11.7 106 16.7 11 1.8 43 6.8 75 11.9 107 16.9 12 2.0 44 7.0 76 12.0 108 17.0 13 2.1 45 7.2 77 12.2 109 17.2 14 2.3 46 7.3 78 12.3 110 17.3 15 2.5 47 7.5 79 12.5 111 17.5 16 2.6 48 7.6 80 12.6 112 17.6 17 2.8 49 7.8 81 12.8 113 17.8 18 2.9 50 7.9 82 12.9 114 18.0 19 3.1 51 8.1 83 13.1 115 18.1 20 3.2 52 8.2 84 13.3 116 18.3 21 3.4 53 8.4 85 13.4 117 18.4 22 3.5 54 8.6 86 13.6 118 18.6 23 3.7 55 8.7 87 13.7 119 18.7 24 3.9 56 8.9 88 13.9 120 18.9 25 4.0 57 9.0 89 14.0 121 19.1 26 4.2 58 9.2 90 14.2 122 19.2 27 4.3 59 9.3 91 14.4 123 19.4 28 4.5 60 9.5 92 14.5 124 19.5 29 4.6 61 9.7 93 14.7 125 19.7 30 4.8 62 9.8 94 14.8 126 19.8 31 5.0 63 10.0 95 15.0 127 20.0

Table #7 Delay Time(400.0ms) Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 0.1 32 100.9 64 201.6 96 302.4 1 3.2 33 104.0 65 204.8 97 305.5 2 6.4 34 107.2 66 207.9 98 308.7 3 9.5 35 110.3 67 211.1 99 311.8 4 12.7 36 113.5 68 214.2 100 315.0 5 15.8 37 116.6 69 217.4 101 318.1 6 19.0 38 119.8 70 220.5 102 321.3 7 22.1 39 122.9 71 223.7 103 324.4 8 25.3 40 126.1 72 226.8 104 327.6 9 28.4 41 129.2 73 230.0 105 330.7

10 31.6 42 132.4 74 233.1 106 333.9 11 34.7 43 135.5 75 236.3 107 337.0 12 37.9 44 138.6 76 239.4 108 340.2 13 41.0 45 141.8 77 242.6 109 343.3 14 44.2 46 144.9 78 245.7 110 346.5 15 47.3 47 148.1 79 248.9 111 349.6 16 50.5 48 151.2 80 252.0 112 352.8 17 53.6 49 154.4 81 255.2 113 355.9 18 56.8 50 157.5 82 258.3 114 359.1 19 59.9 51 160.7 83 261.5 115 362.2 20 63.1 52 163.8 84 264.6 116 365.4 21 66.2 53 167.0 85 267.7 117 368.5 22 69.4 54 170.1 86 270.9 118 371.7 23 72.5 55 173.3 87 274.0 119 374.8 24 75.7 56 176.4 88 277.2 120 378.0 25 78.8 57 179.6 89 280.3 121 381.1 26 82.0 58 182.7 90 283.5 122 384.3 27 85.1 59 185.9 91 286.6 123 387.4 28 88.3 60 189.0 92 289.8 124 390.6 29 91.4 61 192.2 93 292.9 125 393.7 30 94.6 62 195.3 94 296.1 126 396.9 31 97.7 63 198.5 95 299.2 127 400.0

Table #8 Compressor Attack Time Data Value

0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10

10 12 11 14 12 16 13 18 14 20 15 23 16 26 17 30 18 35 19 40

Table #9 Compressor Release Time

Table #10 Compressor Ratio

Data Value 0 10 1 15 2 25 3 35 4 45 5 55 6 65 7 75 8 85 9 100

10 115 11 140 12 170 13 230 14 340 15 680

Data Value 0 1.0 1 1.5 2 2.0 3 3.0 4 5.0 5 7.0 6 10.0 7 20.0

Table #11 Reverb Width;Depth;Height Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 0.5 32 8.8 64 17.6 96 27.5 1 0.8 33 9.1 65 17.9 97 27.8 2 1.0 34 9.4 66 18.2 98 28.1 3 1.3 35 9.6 67 18.5 99 28.5 4 1.5 36 9.9 68 18.8 100 28.8 5 1.8 37 10.2 69 19.1 101 29.2 6 2.0 38 10.4 70 19.4 102 29.5 7 2.3 39 10.7 71 19.7 103 29.9 8 2.6 40 11.0 72 20.0 104 30.2 9 2.8 41 11.2 73 20.2

10 3.1 42 11.5 74 20.5 11 3.3 43 11.8 75 20.8 12 3.6 44 12.1 76 21.1 13 3.9 45 12.3 77 21.4 14 4.1 46 12.6 78 21.7 15 4.4 47 12.9 79 22.0 16 4.6 48 13.1 80 22.4 17 4.9 49 13.4 81 22.7 18 5.2 50 13.7 82 23.0 19 5.4 51 14.0 83 23.3 20 5.7 52 14.2 84 23.6 21 5.9 53 14.5 85 23.9 22 6.2 54 14.8 86 24.2 23 6.5 55 15.1 87 24.5 24 6.7 56 15.4 88 24.9 25 7.0 57 15.6 89 25.2 26 7.2 58 15.9 90 25.5 27 7.5 59 16.2 91 25.8 28 7.8 60 16.5 92 26.1 29 8.0 61 16.8 93 26.5 30 8.3 62 17.1 94 26.8 31 8.6 63 17.3 95 27.1

Table #12 Wah Release Time Data Value

52 10.0 53 15.0 54 25.0 55 35.0 56 45.0 57 55.0 58 65.0 59 75.0 60 85.0 61 100.0 62 115.0 63 140.0 64 170.0 65 230.0 66 340.0 67 680.0

Table #14 Tempo Delay Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 64th/3 32 4thX19 64 4thX51 1 64th. 33 4thX20 65 4thX52 2 32th 34 4thX21 66 4thX53 3 32th/3 35 4thX22 67 4thX54 4 32th. 36 4thX23 68 4thX55 5 16th 37 4thX24 69 4thX56 6 16th/3 38 4thX25 70 4thX57 7 16th. 39 4thX26 71 4thX58 8 8th 40 4thX27 72 4thX59 9 8th/3 41 4thX28 73 4thX60

10 8th. 42 4thX29 74 4thX61 11 4th 43 4thX30 75 4thX62 12 4th/3 44 4thX31 76 4thX63 13 4th. 45 4thX32 77 4thX64 14 2nd 46 4thX33 15 2nd/3 47 4thX34 16 2nd. 48 4thX35 17 4thX4 49 4thX36 18 4thX5 50 4thX37 19 4thX6 51 4thX38 20 4thX7 52 4thX39 21 4thX8 53 4thX40 22 4thX9 54 4thX41 23 4thX10 55 4thX42 24 4thX11 56 4thX43 25 4thX12 57 4thX44 26 4thX13 58 4thX45 27 4thX14 59 4thX46 28 4thX15 60 4thX47 29 4thX16 61 4thX48 30 4thX17 62 4thX49 31 4thX18 63 4thX50

Table #13 Sampling Freq Control Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 44.1K 32 1.34K 64 678.0 96 455.0 1 22.1K 33 1.30K 65 668.0 97 450.0 2 14.7K 34 1.26K 66 658.0 98 445.0 3 11.0K 35 1.23K 67 649.0 99 441.0 4 8.8K 36 1.19K 68 639.0 100 437.0 5 7.4K 37 1.16K 69 630.0 101 432.0 6 6.3K 38 1.13K 70 621.0 102 428.0 7 5.5K 39 1.10K 71 613.0 103 424.0 8 4.9K 40 1.08K 72 604.0 104 420.0 9 4.5K 41 1.05K 73 596.0 105 416.0

10 4.0K 42 1.03K 74 588.0 106 412.0 11 3.7K 43 1.00K 75 580.0 107 408.0 12 3.4K 44 980.0 76 573.0 108 405.0 13 3.2K 45 959.0 77 565.0 109 401.0 14 2.9K 46 938.0 78 558.0 110 397.0 15 2.8K 47 919.0 79 551.0 111 394.0 16 2.6K 48 900.0 80 544.0 112 390.0 17 2.5K 49 882.0 81 538.0 113 387.0 18 2.3K 50 865.0 82 531.0 114 383.0 19 2.2K 51 848.0 83 525.0 115 380.0 20 2.1K 52 832.0 84 519.0 116 377.0 21 2.0K 53 817.0 85 513.0 117 374.0 22 1.92K 54 802.0 86 507.0 118 371.0 23 1.84K 55 788.0 87 501.0 119 368.0 24 1.76K 56 774.0 88 496.0 120 364.0 25 1.70K 57 760.0 89 490.0 121 361.0 26 1.63K 58 747.0 90 485.0 122 359.0 27 1.58K 59 735.0 91 479.0 123 356.0 28 1.52K 60 723.0 92 474.0 124 353.0 29 1.47K 61 711.0 93 469.0 125 350.0 30 1.42K 62 700.0 94 464.0 126 347.0 31 1.38K 63 689.0 95 459.0 127 345.0

Effect Data Value Assign Table 60

1

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes

228 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

Many MIDI messages listed in the MIDI Data Format are expressed in decimal numbers, binary numbers and hexadecimal numbers. Hexa- decimal numbers may include the letter H as a sufx. Also, n can freely be dened as any whole number. To enter data/values, refer to the table below.

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary 0 00 0000 0000

1 01 0000 0001

2 02 0000 0010

3 03 0000 0011

4 04 0000 0100

5 05 0000 0101

6 06 0000 0110

7 07 0000 0111

8 08 0000 1000

9 09 0000 1001

10 0A 0000 1010

11 0B 0000 1011

12 0C 0000 1100

13 0D 0000 1101

14 0E 0000 1110

15 0F 0000 1111

16 10 0001 0000

17 11 0001 0001

18 12 0001 0010

19 13 0001 0011

20 14 0001 0100

21 15 0001 0101

22 16 0001 0110

23 17 0001 0111

24 18 0001 1000

25 19 0001 1001

26 1A 0001 1010

27 1B 0001 1011

28 1C 0001 1100

29 1D 0001 1101

30 1E 0001 1110

31 1F 0001 1111

32 20 0010 0000

33 21 0010 0001

34 22 0010 0010

35 23 0010 0011

36 24 0010 0100

37 25 0010 0101

38 26 0010 0110

39 27 0010 0111

40 28 0010 1000

41 29 0010 1001

42 2A 0010 1010

43 2B 0010 1011

44 2C 0010 1100

45 2D 0010 1101

46 2E 0010 1110

47 2F 0010 1111

48 30 0011 0000

49 31 0011 0001

50 32 0011 0010

51 33 0011 0011

52 34 0011 0100

53 35 0011 0101

54 36 0011 0110

55 37 0011 0111

56 38 0011 1000

57 39 0011 1001

58 3A 0011 1010

59 3B 0011 1011

60 3C 0011 1100

61 3D 0011 1101

62 3E 0011 1110

63 3F 0011 1111

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary 64 40 0100 0000

65 41 0100 0001

66 42 0100 0010

67 43 0100 0011

68 44 0100 0100

69 45 0100 0101

70 46 0100 0110

71 47 0100 0111

72 48 0100 1000

73 49 0100 1001

74 4A 0100 1010

75 4B 0100 1011

76 4C 0100 1100

77 4D 0100 1101

78 4E 0100 1110

79 4F 0100 1111

80 50 0101 0000

81 51 0101 0001

82 52 0101 0010

83 53 0101 0011

84 54 0101 0100

85 55 0101 0101

86 56 0101 0110

87 57 0101 0111

88 58 0101 1000

89 59 0101 1001

90 5A 0101 1010

91 5B 0101 1011

92 5C 0101 1100

93 5D 0101 1101

94 5E 0101 1110

95 5F 0101 1111

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary 96 60 0110 0000

97 61 0110 0001

98 62 0110 0010

99 63 0110 0011

100 64 0110 0100

101 65 0110 0101

102 66 0110 0110

103 67 0110 0111

104 68 0110 1000

105 69 0110 1001

106 6A 0110 1010

107 6B 0110 1011

108 6C 0110 1100

109 6D 0110 1101

110 6E 0110 1110

111 6F 0110 1111

112 70 0111 0000

113 71 0111 0001

114 72 0111 0010

115 73 0111 0011

116 74 0111 0100

117 75 0111 0101

118 76 0111 0110

119 77 0111 0111

120 78 0111 1000

121 79 0111 1001

122 7A 0111 1010

123 7B 0111 1011

124 7C 0111 1100

125 7D 0111 1101

126 7E 0111 1110

127 7F 0111 1111

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary

Except the table above, for example 144-159(decimal)/9nH/1001 0000-1001 1111(binary) denotes the Note On Message for each channel (1-16). 176-191/BnH/1011 0000-1011 1111 denotes the Control Change Message for each channel (1-16). 192-207/CnH/ 1100 0000-1100 1111 denotes the Program Change Message for each channel (1-16). 240/FOH/1111 0000 denotes the start of a Sys- tem Exclusive Message. 247/F7H/1111 0111 denotes the end of a System Exclusive Message.

aaH (hexidecimal)/0aaaaaaa (binary) denotes the data address. The address contains High, Mid, and Low.

bbH/0bbbbbbb denotes the byte count. ccH/0ccccccc denotes the check sum. ddH/0ddddddd denotes the data/value.

MIDI Data Format 602

MIDI

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 229

Channel/Mode/Realtime Messages/ Kanal / Modus / Realtime-Meldungen/ Messages canal/de mode/temps rel

o : available

MIDI Events Status byte 1st Data byte 2nd Data byte Recognized

Status Data (HEX) Parameter Data (HEX) Parameter XG/ GM

Key- board

R1 R2 R3 Left Acmp

Key Off 8nH (n:channel no.) kk Key no. (0~127) vv Velocity(0~127) o o o o o o o

Key On 9nH kk Key no. (0~127) vv Key On :vv=1~127 Key Off :vv=0 o o o o o o o

Control Change

BnH 0 (00H) Bank Select MSB 0 64 126 127

(00H) (40H) (7EH) (7FH)

Normal SFX voice SFX kit Drum o o o o o o o

32 (20H) Bank Select LSB 0~ 112~

(0...) (70H...)

XG voice Panel voice

1 (01H) Modulation 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

5 (05H) Portament Time 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o x

6 (06H) Data Entry MSB 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

38 (26H) Data Entry LSB 0~127 (...7FH)

7 (07H) Main Volume 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

10 (0AH) Panpot 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

11 (0BH) Expression 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

64 (40H) Sustain(Damper) 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o x

65 (41H) Portament 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o x

66 (42H) Sostenuto 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o x

67 (43H) Soft Pedal 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o x

The NRPN also contains these parame- ters.

71 (47H) Harmonic Content 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

72 (48H) Release Time 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

73 (49H) Attack Time 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

74 (4AH) Brightness 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

84 (54H) Portamento Control 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

91 (5BH) Effect1 Depth (Reverb Send Level)

0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

93 (5DH) Effect3 Depth (Chorus Send Level)

0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

94 (5EH) Effect4 Depth (Variation Send Level)

0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

96 (60H) Increment 0~127 (...7FH) o x o o o o o

97 (61H) Decrement 0~127 (...7FH)

98 (62H) NRPN LSB 0~127 (...7FH) o x o o o o o

99 (63H) NRPN MSB 0~127 (...7FH)

100 (64H) RPN LSB 0~127 (...7FH) o o o o o o o

101 (65H) RPN MSB 0~127 (...7FH)

Mode Message

BnH 120 (78H) All sound off 0 o o o o o o o

121 (79H) Reset all controller 0 o x x x x x x

122 (7AH) Local control dd dd=00H: Off 7FH: On x x x x x x x

123 (7BH) All note off 0 o o o o o o o

124 (7CH) OMNI OFF 0 o o o o o o o

125 (7DH) OMNI ON 0 o o o o o o o

126 (7EH) MONO 0~16 (...10H) o x x x x x x

127 (7FH) POLY 0 o x x x x x x

Program Change

CnH pp Voice number(0~127) - - o o o o o o o

Channel After Touch

DnH vv - o o o o o o x

Polyphonic After Tch

AnH kk vv x x x x x x x

Pich Bend Change

EnH cc LS Byte dd MS Byte o o o o o o o

RealTime Message

F8H MIDI Clock - - o o o o o o o

FAH Start - - o o o o o o o

FBH Continue - - x x x x x x x

FCH Stop - - o o o o o o o

FEH Active Sens - - o o o o o o o

FFH System Reset - - x x x x x x x

60 3

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDII I I I I I

230 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

NRPN

NRPN MSB : 14H-1FH(for drums) message is accepted as long as the channel is set with a drum voice. Data Entry LSB : Ignored.

NRPN (VocalHarmony)
RPN

o : available NRPN DATA ENTRY

Parameter Recognized

MSB LSB MSB LSB XG/GM Keyboard R1 R2 R3 Left Acmp 01H 08H mmH -- Vibrato Rate o x o o o o o 01H 09H mmH -- Vibrato Depth o x o o o o o 01H 0AH mmH -- Vibrato Delay o x x x x x o 01H 20H mmH -- Filter Cutoff Frequency o x x x x x o 01H 21H mmH -- Filter Resonance o x x x x x o 01H 24H mmH -- HPF Cutoff Frequency x x x x x x x 01H 30H mmH -- EQ BASS o x x x x x o 01H 31H mmH -- EQ TREBLE o x x x x x o 01H 34H mmH -- EQ BASS Frequency o x x x x x o 01H 35H mmH -- EQ TREBLE Frequency o x x x x x o 01H 63H mmH -- EG Attack Time o x x x x x o 01H 64H mmH -- EG Decay Time o x x x x x o 01H 66H mmH -- EG Release o x x x x x o 14H rrH mmH -- Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency o x x x x x o 15H rrH mmH -- Drum Filter Resonance o x x x x x o 16H rrH mmH -- Drum EG Attack Rate o x x x x x o 17H rrH mmH -- Drum EG Decay Rate o x x x x x o 18H rrH mmH -- Drum Pitch Coarse o x x x x x o 19H rrH mmH -- Drum Pitch Fine o x x x x x o 1AH rrH mmH -- Drum Level o x x x x x o 1CH rrH mmH -- Drum Pan o x x x x x o 1DH rrH mmH -- Drum Reverb Send Level o x x x x x o 1EH rrH mmH -- Drum Chorus Send Level o x x x x x o 1FH rrH mmH -- Drum Variation Send Level o x x x x x o

NRPN DATA ENTRY Parameter

Recognized MSB LSB MSB LSB XG/GM Keyboard R1 R2 R3 Left Acmp

00H 00H mmH -- Harmony Mute o x x x x x x

00H 01H mmH -- Harmony Mode o x x x x x x

00H 02H mmH -- Vocoder Mode Parameter o x x x x x x

00H 03H mmH -- Chromatic Mode Parameter o x x x x x x

00H 04H mmH -- Detune Mode Parameter o x x x x x x

00H 05H mmH -- Chordal Mode Parameter o x x x x x x

01H 1AH mmH -- Detune Modulation o x x x x x x

02H 00H mmH -- Harmony Gender Type o x x x x x x

02H 01H mmH -- Auto Upper Gender Threshold o x x x x x x

02H 02H mmH -- Auto Lower Gender Threshold o x x x x x x

02H 03H mmH -- Upper Gender Amound o x x x x x x

02H 04H mmH -- Lower Gender Amound o x x x x x x

02H 10H mmH -- Harmony1 Volume o x x x x x x

02H 11H mmH -- Harmony2 Volume o x x x x x x

02H 12H mmH -- Harmony3 Volume o x x x x x x

02H 20H mmH -- Harmony1 Pan o x x x x x x

02H 21H mmH -- Harmony2 Pan o x x x x x x

02H 22H mmH -- Harmony3 Pan o x x x x x x

02H 30H mmH -- Harmony1 Detune o x x x x x x

02H 31H mmH -- Harmony2 Detune o x x x x x x

02H 32H mmH -- Harmony3 Detune o x x x x x x

03H 00H mmH -- Lead Gender Type o x x x x x x

03H 01H mmH -- Lead Gender Amount o x x x x x x

RPN DATA ENTRY Parameter

Recognized MSB LSB MSB LSB XG/GM Keyboard R1 R2 R3 Left Acmp 00H 00H mmH -- Pitch Bend Sensitivity o o o o o o o 00H 01H mmH llH Fine Tune o o o o o o o 00H 02H mmH -- Coarse Tune o o o o o o o 7FH 7FH -- -- Null o o o o o o o

604

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDI

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDII I I I I I

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 231

System Exclusive Messages/ Systemexklusive Meldungen/ Messages exclusifs au systme System Exclusive Messages Accompaniment Control Data Format Recognized Section Control F0H 43H 7EH 00H ss dd F7H o

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01000011 43 = YAMAHA ID 01111110 7E = Style 00000000 00 = 0sssssss ss = Switch No.

00H-01H: INTRO II 02H-03H: INTRO III 04H-07H: INTRO I 08H: MAIN A 09H: MAIN B 0AH: MAIN C 0BH-0FH: MAIN D 10H: FILL IN A 11H: FILL IN B 12H: FILL IN C 13H-17H: FILL IN D 18H: BREAK FILL A 19H: BREAK FILL B 1AH BREAK FILL C 1BH-1FH: BREAK FILL D 20H-21H: ENDING II 22H-23H: ENDING III 24H-27H: ENDING I

0ddddddd dd = Swith On/Off 00H Off 7FH On

11111110 F7 = End of Exclusive

Tempo Control F0H 43H 7EH 01H t4 t3 t2 t1 F7H o

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01000011 43 = YAMAHA ID 01111110 7E = Style 00000001 01 = 0ttttttt t4 = tempo4 0ttttttt t3 = tempo3 0ttttttt t2 = tempo2 0ttttttt t1 = tempo1 11111110 F7 = End of Exclusive

Chord Control F0H 43H 7EH tt dd F7H o

Type1 (tt=02) 11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01000011 43 = YAMAHA ID 01111110 7E = Style 00000010 02 = type 1(tt) 0ddddddd dd = chord root(cr) 0ddddddd dd = chord type(ct) 0ddddddd dd = bass note(bn) 0ddddddd dd = bass type(bt)

cr : Chord Root 0fffnnnn fff: b or #, nnnn: note(root) 0000nnnn 0n bbb 0fff0000 x0 reserved 0001nnnn 1n bb 0fff0001 x1 C 0010nnnn 2n b 0fff0010 x2 D 0011nnnn 3n natural 0fff0011 x3 E 0100nnnn 4n # 0fff0100 x4 F 0101nnnn 5n ## 0fff0101 x5 G 0110nnnn 6n ### 0fff0110 x6 A

0fff0111 x7 B ct : Chord Type 0 - 34,127

00000000 00 0 Maj 00010010 12 18 dim7 00000001 01 1 Maj6 00010011 13 19 7th 00000010 02 2 Maj7 00010100 14 20 7sus4 00000011 03 3 Maj7(#11) 00010101 15 21 7b5 00000100 04 4 Maj(9) 00010110 16 22 7(9) 00000101 05 5 Maj7(9) 00010111 17 23 7(#11) 00000110 06 6 Maj6(9) 00011000 18 24 7(13) 00000111 07 7 aug 00011001 19 25 7(b9) 00001000 08 8 min 00011010 1A 26 7(b13) 00001001 09 9 min6 00011011 1B 27 7(#9) 00001010 0A 10 min7 00011100 1C 28 Maj7aug 00001011 0B 11 min7b5 00011101 1D 29 7aug 00001100 0C 12 min(9) 00011110 1E 30 1+8 00001101 0D 13 min7(9) 00011111 1F 31 1+5 00001110 0E 14 min7(11) 00100000 20 32 sus4 00001111 0F 15 minMaj7 00100001 21 33 1+2+5 00010000 10 16 minMaj7(9) 00100010 22 34 cc 00010001 11 17 dim

bn : On Bass Chord Same as Chord root, 127:No bass chord

bt : Bass Chord Same as Chord type 127:No bass chord

11111110 F7 = End of Exclusive

60 5

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDII I I I I I

232 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

System Exclusive Messages (Universal System Exclusive)

System Exclusive Messages (XG standard)

Type2 (tt=03) (Receive only) o

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01000011 43 = YAMAHA ID 01111110 7E = 00000011 03 = type 2(tt) 0ddddddd dd = note1 0ddddddd dd = note2 0ddddddd dd = note3 : : : 0ddddddd dd = ...note10 11111110 F7 = End of Exclusive

MIDI Event Data Format Recognized MIDI Master Volume F0H 7FH 7FH 04H 01H l l mm F7H o

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01111111 7F = Universal Real Time 01111111 7F = ID of target device 00000100 04 = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message 00000001 01 = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume 0lllllll ll = Volume LSB 0mmmmmmm mm = Volume MSB 11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive

or

F0H 7FH XN 04H 01H l l mm F7H

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01111111 7F = Universal Real Time 0xxxnnnn XN = When N is received N=0-F,whichever is received.

X=ignored 00000100 04 = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message 00000001 01 = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume 0lllllll ll = Volume LSB 0mmmmmmm mm = Volume MSB 11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive

GM System On F0H 7EH 7FH 09H 01H F7H o

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01111110 7E = Universal Non-Real Time 01111111 7F = ID of target device 00001001 09 = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message 00000001 01 = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On 11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive

or

F0H 7EH XN 09H 01H F7H

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01111110 7E = Universal Non-Real Time 0xxxnnnn XN = When N is received N=0-F,whichever is received.

X=ignored 00001001 09 = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message 00000001 01 = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On 11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive

MIDI Event Data Format Recognized XG Parameter Change F0H 43H 1nH 4CH hh mm l l dd F7H o

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01000011 43 = YAMAHA ID 0001nnnn 1n = Device Number n=always 0(when transmit), n=0-F(when recieve) 01001100 4C = Model ID 0hhhhhhh hh = Address High 0mmmmmmm mm = Address Mid 0lllllll ll = Address Low 0ddddddd dd = Data : : 11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive

Bulk Dump F0H 43H 0nH 4CH aa bb hh mm l l dd dd cc F7H o

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01000011 43 = YAMAHA ID 0000nnnn 0n = Device Number n=always 0(when transmit), n=0-F(when recieve) 01001100 4C = Model ID 0aaaaaaa aa = Byte Count MSB 0bbbbbbb bb = Byte Count LSB 0hhhhhhh hh = Address High 0mmmmmmm mm = Address Mid 0lllllll ll = Address Low 0ddddddd dd = Data : : 0ddddddd dd = Data 0ccccccc cc = Checksum 11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive

606

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDII I I I I I

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 233

System Exclusive Messages (Clavinova compliance)

System Exclusive Messages Special Operators

Parameter Request F0H 43H 3nH 4CH hh mm l l F7H o

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01000011 43 = YAMAHA ID 0011nnnn 3n = Device Number n=always 0(when transmit), n=0-F(when recieve) 01001100 4C = Model ID 0hhhhhhh hh = Address High 0mmmmmmm mm = Address Mid 0lllllll ll = Address Low 11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive

Dump Request F0H 43H 2nH 4CH hh mm l l F7H o

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01000011 43 = YAMAHA ID 0010nnnn 2n = Device Number n=always 0(when transmit), n=0-F(when recieve) 01001100 4C = Model ID 0hhhhhhh hh = Address High 0mmmmmmm mm = Address Mid 0lllllll ll = Address Low 11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive

MIDI Event Data Format Recognized Internal Clock F0H 43H 73H 01H 02H F7H o

00000010 02 = Internal Clock Substatus

External Clock F0H 43H 73H 01H 03H F7H o

00000011 03 = External Clock Substatus

Organ Flutes data Bulk Dump

F0H 43H 73H 01H 06H 0BH 00H 00H 01H 06H 0nH [BULK DATA] sum F7H o

01H Model ID (Clavinova common ID) 06H Bulk ID 0BH Bulk No. (Organ Flutes data Bulk Dump) 00H,00H,01H,06H Data Length :16bytes

1st 0nH n: channel No. [BULK DATA] Organ Flutes data

2nd Footage [1'] 00 - 07H data: 0: -, 1: -12, 2: -9, 3: -6, 4: -4.5, 3rd [1 1/3'] 00 - 07H 5: -3, 6: -1.5: 7: 0[dB] 4th [1 3/5'] 00 - 09H 5th [2'] 00 - 07H 6th [2 2/3'] 00 - 07H 7th [4'] 00 - 07H 8th [5 1/3'] 00 - 07H 9th [8'] 00 - 07H

10th [16'] 00 - 07H 11th [Attack 2'] 00 - 07H 12th [Attack 2 2/3'] 00 - 07H 13th [Attack 4'] 00 - 07H 14th Settings [Attack Length] 00 - 07H 15th [Response] 00 - 07H 16th [Attack Mode] 00 - 01H 00H: Each, 01H: First 17th [Wave Variation] 00 - 01H 00H: Sine, 01H: Tone Wheel 18th [Volume] 00 - 07H 19th [aux 4] 00H 20th [aux 5] 00H 21th [aux 6] 00H 22th [aux 7] 00H

sum Check Sum = 0-sum(BULK DATA)

DOC Multi Timbre OFF F0H 43H 73H 01H 13H F7H o

DOC Multi Timbre ON F0H 43H 73H 01H 14H F7H

00010011 13 = DOC Multi Timbre OFF Substatus 00010100 14 = DOC Multi Timbre ON Substatus

When the DOC Multi Timbre ON is accepted, the MIDI receive mode is set as listed below : Channel No Part 1~10 Manual Part (Melody Part) 15 Rhythm 16 Control (Including the System Exclusive messages,)

MIDI FA Cancel F0H 43H 73H 01H 61H F7H x

01100001 61 = MIDI FA Cancel Substatus

MIDI FA Cancel Off F0H 43H 73H 01H 62H F7H x

01100010 62 = MIDI FA Cancel Off Substatus

MIDI Event Data Format Recognized Volume & Expression & Pan Realtime control off (Voice Reserve)

F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 0nH 45H dd F7H o

0000nnnn 0n = Channel No.(00H~0FH) 01000101 45 = Volume & Expression Control No. 0ddddddd dd = Value (Available only for the specified channel)

00H : Realtime On 7FH : Realtime Off

60 7

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDII I I I I I

234 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

System Exclusive Messages Special Operators (Vocal Harmony Additional Parameters)

System Exclusive Messages (the other)

MIDI Event Data Format Recognized Vocal Harmony Pitch to Note ON/OFF

F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 00H ss F7H o

00000000 00 = Channel No.(always 00) 01010000 50 = Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No. 00000000 00 = Pitch to Note Parameter No. 0sssssss ss = Pitch To Note Switch

00H: Off 01H: On

Vocal Harmony Pitch to Note Part

F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 01H ss F7H o

00000000 00 = Channel No.(always 00) 01010000 50 = Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No. 00000001 01 = Pitch to Note Part Parameter No. 0sssssss ss = Pitch To Note Part No.

00H: RIGHT1 01H: RIGHT2 02H: LEFT 03H: LEAD 04H: UPPER

Vocal Harmony Vocoder Part (Harmony Part(Panel))

F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 10H ss F7H o

00000000 00 = Channel No.(always 00) 01010000 50 = Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No. 00010000 10 = Vocoder Part Parameter No. 0sssssss ss = Harmony Part No.

00H: Off 01H: Upper 02H: Lower

Vocal Harmony Additional Reverb Depth

F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 11H ss F7H x

00000000 00 = Channel No.(always 00) 01010000 50 = Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No. 00010001 11 = Voval Harmony Additional Reverb Depth Parameter No. 0sssssss ss = Value(0...7FH)

Vocal Harmony Additional Chorus Depth

F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 12H ss F7H x

00000000 00 = Channel No.(always 00) 01010000 50 = Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No. 00010010 12 = Voval Harmony Additional Chorus Depth Parameter No. 0sssssss ss = Value(0...7FH)

Vocal Harmony Panel Variation LED On/Off

F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 00H 50H 13H ss F7H x

00000000 00 = Channel No.(always 00) 01010000 50 = Vocal Harmony Additional Parameter Control No. 00010011 13 = Voval Harmony Panel Variation LED On/Off Parameter No. 0sssssss ss = Switch On/Off

00H: Variation LED Off 7FH: Variotion LED On

MIDI Event Data Format Recognized MIDI Master Tuning F0H 43H 1nH 27H 30H 00H 00H mm l l cc F7H o

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01000011 43 = YAMAHA 0001nnnn 1n n= always 0(when transmit), n=0-F(when receive) 00100111 27 00110000 30 = sub ID 00000000 00 00000000 00 0mmmmmmm mm = Master Tune MSB 0lllllll ll = Master Tune LSB 0ccccccc cc ignored 11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive

MWCAT parameter flag F0H 43H 73H 01H 11H 0nH 54H dd F7H o

0000nnnn 0n = Sequencer Track No. 01010100 54 = MWCAT parameter flag 0ddddddd dd = Value (ignored)

608

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDII I I I I I

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 235

MIDI Parameter Change Table/ nderungstabelle der MIDI-Parameter/ Tableau des changements de paramtres MIDI

MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (SYSTEM)Address

(H) Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default value(H)

0 0 0 4 0000 - 07FF

MASTER TUNE o -102.4 - +102.3[cent] 00 04 00 00 1 1st bit3-0bit15-12 2 2nd bit3-0bit11-8 3 3rd bit3-0bit7-4

4th bit3-0bit3-0 4 1 00 - 7F MASTER VOLUME o 0 - 127 7F 5 1 (MASTER ATTENUATOR) x 6 1 28 - 58 TRANSPOSE o -24 - +24[semitones] 40

7D n DRUM SETUP RESET o n=Drum setup number 7E 0 XG SYSTEM ON o 00=XG sytem ON 7F 0 ALL PARAMETER RESET o 00=ON

TOTAL SIZE 7

MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (System information)Address

(H) Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default

1 0 0 E 20 - 7F Model Name x 32-127(ASCII) :

0D 20 - 7F 0E 1 0 0 0F 1 0 0

TOTAL SIZE 10

Transmitted by Dump Request. Not Received.

MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (EFFECT 1)Address

(H) Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default

2 1 0 2 00-7F REVERB TYPE MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT MAP 01(=HALL1) 00-7F REVERB TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00

2 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 1 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 3 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 2 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 4 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 3 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 5 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 4 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 6 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 5 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 7 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 6 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 8 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 7 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 9 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 8 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type

0A 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 9 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 0B 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 10 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 0C 1 00-7F REVERB RETURN o -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 40 0D 1 01-7F REVERB PAN o L63...C...R63(1...64...127) 40

TOTAL SIZE 0E

2 1 10 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 11 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 11 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 12 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 12 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 13 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 13 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 14 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 14 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 15 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type 15 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 16 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on reverb type

TOTAL SIZE 6

2 1 20 2 00-7F CHORUS TYPE MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT MAP 41(=CHORUS1) 00-7F CHORUS TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00

22 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 1 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 23 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 2 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 24 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 3 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 25 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 4 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 26 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 5 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 27 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 6 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 28 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 7 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 29 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 8 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 2A 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 9 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 2B 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 10 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 2C 1 00-7F CHORUS RETURN o -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 40 2D 1 01-7F CHORUS PAN o L63...C...R63(1...64...127) 40 2E 1 00-7F SEND CHORUS TO REVERB o -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 00

TOTAL SIZE 0F

2 1 30 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 11 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 31 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 12 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 32 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 13 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 33 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 14 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 34 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 15 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type 35 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 16 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on chorus Type

TOTAL SIZE 6

60 9

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDII I I I I I

236 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

2 1 40 2 00-7F VARIATION TYPE MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT MAP 05(=DELAY L,C,R) 00-7F VARIATION TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00

42 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 1 MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 1 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type

44 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 2 MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 2 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type

46 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 3 MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 3 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type

48 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 4 MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 4 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type

4A 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 5 MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 5 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type

4C 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 6 MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 6 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type

4E 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 7 MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 7 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type

50 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 8 MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 8 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type

52 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 9 MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 9 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type

54 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 10 MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 10 LSB Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type

56 1 00-7F VARIATION RETURN o -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 40 57 1 01-7F VARIATION PAN o L63...C...R63(1...64...127) 40 58 1 00-7F SEND VARIATION TO REVERB o -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 00 59 1 00-7F SEND VARIATION TO CHORUS o -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 00 5A 1 00-01 VARIATION CONNECTION o 0:INSERTION,1:SYSTEM 00 5B 1 00-7F VARIATION PART o Part1...16(0...15) 7F

AD1(64) OFF(16...63, 65...127)

5C 1 MW VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH o -64 - +63 40 5D 1 BEND VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH o -64 - +63 40 5E 1 CAT VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH o -64 - +63 40 5F 1 AC1 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH x -64 - +63 40 60 1 AC2 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH x -64 - +63 40

TOTAL SIZE 21

2 1 70 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 11 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 71 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 12 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 72 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 13 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 73 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 14 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 74 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 15 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type 75 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 16 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on variation type

TOTAL SIZE 6

MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (MASTER EQ)Address

(H) Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default value(H)

2 40 0 1 00 - 04 EQ type o 0:FLAT 0 1:JAZZ 2:POPS 3:ROCK 4:CLASSIC

1 1 34 -4C EQ gain1 o -12 - +12[dB] 40 2 1 04-28 EQ frequency1 o 32-2000[Hz] 0C 3 1 01-78 EQ Q1 o 0.1-12.0 7 4 1 00-01 EQ shape1 o 00:shelving, 01:peaking 0 5 1 34 -4C EQ gain2 o -12 - +12[dB] 40 6 1 0E-36 EQ frequency2 o 100-10.0[kHz] 1C 7 1 01-78 EQ Q2 o 0.1-12.0 7 8 1 not used x 9 1 34 -4C EQ gain3 o -12 - +12[dB] 40

0A 1 0E-36 EQ frequency3 o 100-10.0[kHz] 22 0B 1 01-78 EQ Q3 o 0.1-12.0 7 0C 1 not used x 0D 1 34 -4C EQ gain4 o -12 - +12[dB] 40 0E 1 0E-36 EQ frequency4 o 100-10.0[kHz] 2E 0F 1 01-78 EQ Q4 o 0.1-12.0 7 10 1 not used x 11 1 34 -4C EQ gain5 o -12 - +12[dB] 40 12 1 1C-3A EQ frequency5 o 0.5-16.0[kHz] 34 13 1 01-78 EQ Q5 o 0.1-12.0 7 14 1 00-01 EQ shape5 o 00:shelving, 01:peaking 0

TOTAL SIZE 15

MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (EFFECT 2)Address

(H) Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default

3 0n 0 2 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n TYPE MSB o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT MAP 49(=DISTORTION) 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00

2 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER1 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

3 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER2 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

4 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER3 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

5 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER4 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

610

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDII I I I I I

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 237

6 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER5 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

7 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER6 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

8 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER7 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

9 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER8 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

0A 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER9 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

0B 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER10 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

0C 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PART o Part1...16(0...15) 7F AD1(64) OFF(16...63, 65...127)

0D 1 00-7F MW INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH o -64 - 63 40 0E 1 00-7F BEND INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH o -64 - 63 40 0F 1 00-7F CAT INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH o -64 - 63 40 10 1 00-7F AC1 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH x -64 - 63 40 11 1 00-7F AC2 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH x -64 - 63 40

TOTAL SIZE 12

20 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER11 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

21 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER12 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

22 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER13 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

23 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER14 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

24 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER15 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

25 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER16 o Refer to the MIDI EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

TOTAL SIZE 6

30 2 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER1 MSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER1 LSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

32 2 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER2 MSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER2 LSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

34 2 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER3 MSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER3 LSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

36 2 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER4 MSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER4 LSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

38 2 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER5 MSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER5 LSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

3A 2 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER6 MSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER6 LSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

3C 2 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER7 MSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER7 LSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

3E 2 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER8 MSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER8 LSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

40 2 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER9 MSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER9 LSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

42 2 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER10 MSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT n PARAMETER10 LSB

o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

TOTAL SIZE 14

0n: insertion effect number

Note : For effect types that do not require MSB, the Parameters for Address 02-0B will be received and the Parameters for Address 30-42 will not be received. For effect types that require MSB, the Parameters for Address 30-42 will be received and the Parameters for Address 02-0B will not be received. When Bulk Dumps that include Effect Type data are transmitted, the Parameters for Address 02 - 0B will always be transmitted. But, effects that require MSB, when the bulk dump is received the Parameters for Address 02 - 0B will not be received. The following four effect types require MSB:

DelayLCR, DelayLR, Echo, CrossDelay, Dist+Delay, Comp+Dist+Delay, Wah+Dist+Delay, VDistortion *Data Range is different according to the Effect type value.

61 1

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDII I I I I I

238 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (SPECIAL EFFECT)Address

(H) Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default

04 00 00 2 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT TYPE MSB o Refer to the XG EFFECT MAP 49(=DISTORTION) 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT TYPE LSB o 00 : basic type 00

02 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER1 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

03 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER2 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

04 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER3 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

05 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER4 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

06 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER5 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

07 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER6 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

08 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER7 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

09 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER8 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

0A 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER9 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

0B 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER10 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

0C 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PART x Part1...16(0...15) 7F AD1(64) OFF(16...63, 65...127)

0D 1 00 - 7F MW INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH o 40 0E 1 00 - 7F BEND INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH o 40 0F 1 00 - 7F CAT INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH o 40 10 1 00 - 7F AC1 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH x 40 11 1 00 - 7F AC2 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH x 40

TOTAL SIZE 12

04 00 14 1 00 - 7F UNIQUE INSERTION EFFECT EXTER- NAL

o 1...16(0...15), off(127) 7F

CONTROL CH1(HARMONY CHANNEL*) 15 1 00 - 7F UNIQUE INSERTION EFFECT EXTER-

NAL o 1...16(0...15), off(127) 7F

CONTROL CH2 (MELODY CHANNEL*) TOTAL SIZE 2

04 00 20 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER11 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

21 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER12 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

22 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER13 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

23 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER14 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

24 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER15 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

25 1 00 - 7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER16 o Refer to the XG EFFECT PARAMETER LIST depends on insertion 1 type

TOTAL SIZE 6

*HARMONY CHANNEL and MELODY CHANNEL About these settings, the last message is effective. When the Melody channel is 3 and a message that set the Harmony Channel to 3 is received, the Melody channel is set to OFF and the Harmony channel is set to 3.

MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (DISPLAY DATA)AddressSize

(H) Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default

6 0 0 20 (DISPLAY LETTER) x :

1F TOTAL SIZE 20

7 vh 0 30 (DISPLAY BITMAP Data0) x : :

2F (Data47) TOTAL SIZE 30

MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (MULTI PART)Address

(H) Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default value(H)

X G

/G M

K ey

bo ar

d

R 1

R 2

R 3

Le ft

A cm

p

8 nn 0 1 00 - 20 ELEMENT RESERVE o x x x x x x 0 - 32 part10=0, other =2 nn 1 1 00 - 7F BANK SELECT MSB o x o o o o o 0 - 127 part10=7F, other=0 nn 2 1 00 - 7F BANK SELECT LSB 0 - 127 0 nn 3 1 00 - 7F PROGRAM NUMBER o x o o o o o 1 - 128 0 nn 4 1 00 -

0F, 7F Rcv CHANNEL o x x x x x x 1 - 16,OFF Part No.

nn 5 1 00 - 01 MONO/POLY MODE o x o o o o x 0:MONO 1 1:POLY

612

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDII I I I I I

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 239

nn 6 1 00 - 02 SAME NOTE NUMBER o x o o o o o 0:SINGLE 1 KEY ON ASSIGN 1:MULTI

2:INST (for DRUM) nn 7 1 00 - 05 PART MODE o x x x x x x 0:NORMAL 00 (Except Part10)

1:DRUM(ROM) 02 (Part10) 2 - 3:DRUMS1~ (RAM) 04,05 = [L3-80] 4-5:DRUM(ROM)

nn 8 1 28 - 58 NOTE SHIFT o x o o o o o -24 - +24[semitones] 40 nn 9 2 00 - FF DETUNE o x o o o o o -12.8 - +12.7[Hz] 08 00 nn 0A 1st bit3-0bit7-4 (80)

2nd bit3-0bit3-0 nn 0B 1 00 - 7F VOLUME o x o o o o o 0 - 127 64 nn 0C 1 00 - 7F VELOCITY SENSE DEPTH o x o o o o o 0 - 127 40 nn 0D 1 00 - 7F VELOCITY SENSE OFFSET o x o o o o o 0 - 127 40 nn 0E 1 00 - 7F PAN o x o o o o o 0:random 40

L63...C...R63(1...64...127) nn 0F 1 00 - 7F NOTE LIMIT LOW o x o o o o o C-2 - G8 0 nn 10 1 00 - 7F NOTE LIMIT HIGH o x o o o o o C-2 - G8 7F nn 11 1 00 - 7F DRY LEVEL o x o o o o o 0 - 127 7F nn 12 1 00 - 7F CHORUS SEND o x o o o o o 0 - 127 0 nn 13 1 00 - 7F REVERB SEND o x o o o o o 0 - 127 28 nn 14 1 00 - 7F VARIATION SEND o x o o o o o 0 - 127 0

nn 15 1 00 - 7F VIBRATO RATE o x o o o o o -64 - +63 40 nn 16 1 00 - 7F VIBRATO DEPTH o x o o o o o -64 - +63 40 nn 17 1 00 - 7F VIBRATO DELAY o x o o o o o -64 - +63 40 nn 18 1 00 - 7F FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY o x o o o o o -64 - +63 40 nn 19 1 00 - 7F FILTER RESONANCE o x o o o o o -64 - +63 40 nn 1A 1 00 - 7F EG ATTACK TIME o x o o o o o -64 - +63 40 nn 1B 1 00 - 7F EG DECAY TIME o x o o o o o -64 - +63 40 nn 1C 1 00 - 7F EG RELEASE TIME o x o o o o o -64 - +63 40

nn 1D 1 28 - 58 MW PITCH CONTROL o x o o o o o -24 - +24[semitones] 40 nn 1E 1 00 - 7F MW FILTER CONTROL o x o o o o o -9600 - +9450[cent] 40 nn 1F 1 00 - 7F MW AMPLITUDE CONTROL o x o o o o o -100 - +100[%] 40 nn 20 1 00 - 7F MW LFO PMOD DEPTH o x o o o o o 0 - 127 0A nn 21 1 00 - 7F MW LFO FMOD DEPTH o x o o o o o 0 - 127 0 nn 22 1 00 - 7F MW LFO AMOD DEPTH o x o o o o o 0 - 127 0

nn 23 1 28 - 58 BEND PITCH CONTROL o x o o o o o -24 - +24[semitones] 42 nn 24 1 00 - 7F BEND FILTER CONTROL o x o o o o o -9600 - +9450[cent] 40 nn 25 1 00 - 7F BEND AMPLITUDE CONTROL o x o o o o o -100 - +100[%] 40 nn 26 1 00 - 7F BEND LFO PMOD DEPTH o x o o o o o 0 - 127 0 nn 27 1 00 - 7F BEND LFO FMOD DEPTH o x o o o o o 0 - 127 0 nn 28 1 00 - 7F BEND LFO AMOD DEPTH o x o o o o o 0 - 127 0

TOTAL SIZE 29

Address (H)

Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default value(H)

X G

/G M

K ey

bo ar

d

R 1

R 2

R 3

Le ft

A cm

p

nn 30 1 (Rcv PITCH BEND) x x x x x x x nn 31 1 (Rcv CH AFTER TOUCH(CAT)) x x x x x x x nn 32 1 (Rcv PROGRAM CHANGE) x x x x x x x nn 33 1 (Rcv CONTROL CHANGE) x x x x x x x nn 34 1 (Rcv POLY AFTER TOUCH(PAT)) x x x x x x x nn 35 1 Rcv NOTE MESSAGE o x x x x x x OFF, ON 1 nn 36 1 (Rcv RPN) x x x x x x x nn 37 1 (Rcv NRPN) x x x x x x x nn 38 1 (Rcv MODULATION) x x x x x x x nn 39 1 (Rcv VOLUME) x x x x x x x nn 3A 1 (Rcv PAN) x x x x x x x nn 3B 1 (Rcv EXPRESSION) x x x x x x x nn 3C 1 (Rcv HOLD1) x x x x x x x nn 3D 1 (Rcv PORTAMENTO) x x x x x x x nn 3E 1 (Rcv SOSTENUTO) x x x x x x x nn 3F 1 (Rcv SOFT PEDAL) x x x x x x x nn 40 1 (Rcv BANK SELECT) x x x x x x x

nn 41 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING C o x o o o o o -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 42 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING C# o x o o o o o -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 43 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING D o x o o o o o -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 44 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING D# o x o o o o o -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 45 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING E o x o o o o o -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 46 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING F o x o o o o o -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 47 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING F# o x o o o o o -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 48 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING G o x o o o o o -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 49 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING G# o x o o o o o -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 4A 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING A o x o o o o o -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 4B 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING A# o x o o o o o -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 4C 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING B o x o o o o o -64 - +63[cent] 40

61 3

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDII I I I I I

240 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

nn 4D 1 CAT PITCH CONTROL o x o o o o x -24 - +24[semitones] 40 nn 4E 1 CAT FILTER CONTROL o x o o o o x -9600 - +9450[cent] 40 nn 4F 1 CAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL o x o o o o x -100 - +100[%] 40 nn 50 1 CAT LFO PMOD DEPTH o x o o o o x 0 - 127 0 nn 51 1 CAT LFO FMOD DEPTH o x o o o o x 0 - 127 0 nn 52 1 CAT LFO AMOD DEPTH o x o o o o x 0 - 127 0

nn 53 1 PAT PITCH CONTROL x x x x x x x 40 nn 54 1 PAT FILTER CONTROL x x x x x x x 40 nn 55 1 PAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL x x x x x x x 40 nn 56 1 PAT LFO PMOD DEPTH x x x x x x x 0 nn 57 1 PAT LFO FMOD DEPTH x x x x x x x 0 nn 58 1 PAT LFO AMOD DEPTH x x x x x x x 0

nn 59 1 AC1 CONTROLLER NUMBER x x x x x x x 10 nn 5A 1 AC1 PITCH CONTROL x x x x x x x 40 nn 5B 1 AC1 FILTER CONTROL x x x x x x x 40 nn 5C 1 AC1 AMPLITUDE CONTROL x x x x x x x 40 nn 5D 1 AC1 LFO PMOD DEPTH x x x x x x x 0 nn 5E 1 AC1 LFO FMOD DEPTH x x x x x x x 0 nn 5F 1 AC1 LFO AMOD DEPTH x x x x x x x 0

nn 60 1 AC2 CONTROLLER NUMBER x x x x x x x 11 nn 61 1 AC2 PITCH CONTROL x x x x x x x 40 nn 62 1 AC2 FILTER CONTROL x x x x x x x 40 nn 63 1 AC2 AMPLITUDE CONTROL x x x x x x x 40 nn 64 1 AC2 LFO PMOD DEPTH x x x x x x x 0 nn 65 1 AC2 LFO FMOD DEPTH x x x x x x x 0 nn 66 1 AC2 LFO AMOD DEPTH x x x x x x x 0

nn 67 1 PORTAMENTO SWITCH o x o o o o x OFF/ON 0 nn 68 1 PORTAMENTO TIME o x o o o o x 0 - 127 0

nn 69 1 PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL x x x x x x x 40 nn 6A 1 PITCH EG ATTACK TIME x x x x x x x 40 nn 6B 1 PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL x x x x x x x 40 nn 6C 1 PITCH EG RELEASE TIME x x x x x x x 40 nn 6D 1 VELOCITY LIMIT LOW x x x x x x x 1 nn 6E 1 VELOCITY LIMIT HIGH x x x x x x x 7F

TOTAL SIZE 3F

Address

(H) Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default value(H)

X G

/G M

K ey

bo ar

d

R 1

R 2

R 3

Le ft

A cm

p

08 nn 70 1 NOT USED x x x x x x x 3E nn 71 1 NOT USED x x x x x x x 40 nn 72 1 00 - 7F EQ BASS o x o o o o o -64 - +63(-12 - +12[dB]) 40 nn 73 1 00 - 7F EQ TREBLE o x o o o o o -64 - +63(-12 - +12[dB]) 40

TOTAL SIZE 04

XG ADDITIONAL PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (MULTI PART)Address

(H) Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default value(H)

X G

/G M

K ey

bo ar

d

R 1

R 2

R 3

Le ft

A cm

p

08 nn 74 1 NOT USED x x x x x x x 40 75 1 NOT USED x x x x x x x 40 76 1 04 - 28 EQ BASS frequency o x o o o o o 32-2.0k[Hz] 0C 77 1 1C - 3A EQ TREBLE frequency o x o o o o o 500-16.0k[Hz] 36 78 1 NOT USED x x x x x x x 22 79 1 NOT USED x x x x x x x 2E 7A 1 NOT USED x x x x x x x 7 7B 1 NOT USED x x x x x x x 7 7C 1 NOT USED x x x x x x x 7 7D 1 NOT USED x x x x x x x 7 7E 1 NOT USED x x x x x x x 0 7F 1 NOT USED x x x x x x x 0

TOTAL SIZE 0C

0A nn 10 1 00,08, 28-2D

OUTPUT SELECT x x x x x x x 0:stereo out,8:indiv1+2 0 40:indiv1,41:indiv2,

TOTAL SIZE 1

nn: PartNumber If there is a Drum Voice assigned to the Part, the following parameters are ineffective.

BANK SELECT LSB PORTAMENTO SOFT PEDAL MONO/POLY SCALE TUNING POLY AFTER TOUCH PITCH EG

614

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDII I I I I I

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 241

MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (A/D PART)Address

(H) Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default value(H)

10 nn 0 1 00 - 01 INPUT GAIN x 0:MIC,1:LINE 0 1 1 00 - 7F BANK SELECT MSB x 0 - 127 0 2 1 00 - 7F BANK SELECT LSB x 0 - 127 0 3 1 00 - 7F PROGRAM NUMBER x 1 - 128 0 4 1 00 -

1F, 7F Rcv CHANNEL o A1 - A16,B1 - B16,OFF 7F

5 1 NOT USED 6 1 NOT USED 7 1 NOT USED 8 1 NOT USED 9 1 NOT USED

0A 1 NOT USED 0B 1 00 - 7F VOLUME o 0 - 127 0 0C 1 NOT USED 0D 1 NOT USED 0E 1 01 - 7F PAN o L63...C...R63(1...64...127) 40 0F 1 NOT USED 10 1 NOT USED 11 1 00 - 7F DRY LEVEL o 0 - 127 7F 12 1 00 - 7F CHORUS SEND o 0 - 127 0 13 1 00 - 7F REVERB SEND o 0 - 127 0 14 1 00 - 7F VARIATION SEND o 0 - 127 0

TOTAL SIZE 15

Address (H)

Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default value(H)

10 nn 30 1 NOT USED 31 1 NOT USED 32 1 00 - 01 Rcv PROGRAM CHANGE x 1 33 1 00 - 01 Rcv CONTROL CHANGE x 1 34 1 NOT USED 35 1 NOT USED 36 1 NOT USED 37 1 NOT USED 38 1 NOT USED 39 1 00 - 01 Rcv VOLUME x 1 3A 1 00 - 01 Rcv PAN x 1 3B 1 00 - 01 Rcv EXPRESSION x 1 3C 1 NOT USED 3D 1 NOT USED 3E 1 NOT USED 3F 1 NOT USED 40 1 00 - 01 Rcv BANK SELECT x 1

41 1 NOT USED 42 1 NOT USED 43 1 NOT USED 44 1 NOT USED 45 1 NOT USED 46 1 NOT USED 47 1 NOT USED 48 1 NOT USED 49 1 NOT USED 4A 1 NOT USED 4B 1 NOT USED 4C 1 NOT USED

4D 1 NOT USED 4E 1 NOT USED 4F 1 NOT USED 50 1 NOT USED 51 1 NOT USED 52 1 NOT USED

53 1 NOT USED 54 1 NOT USED 55 1 NOT USED 56 1 NOT USED 57 1 NOT USED 58 1 NOT USED

59 1 00 - 5F AC1 CONTROLLER NUMBER x 10 5A 1 NOT USED 5B 1 NOT USED 5C 1 NOT USED 5D 1 NOT USED 5E 1 NOT USED 5F 1 NOT USED

60 1 00 - 5F AC2 CONTROLLER NUMBER x 11 TOTAL SIZE 31

61 5

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format de donnes MIDII I I I I I

242 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

11 00 nn 64 00-01 A/D SETUP x TOTAL SIZE 64

12 nn 10 1 00,08, 28-2D

OUTPUT SELECT x 0:stereo out,8:indiv1+2 0 40:indiv1,41:indiv2,

TOTAL SIZE 1 nn: A/D Part number( 0 - 63 )

MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (DRUM SETUP)Address

(H) Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default

3n rr 0 1 00 - 7F PITCH COARSE o -64 - +63 40 3n rr 1 1 00 - 7F PITCH FINE o -64 - +63[cent] 40 3n rr 2 1 00 - 7F LEVEL o 0 - 127 depend on the note 3n rr 3 1 00 - 7F ALTERNATE GROUP o 0:OFF depend on the note

1 - 127 3n rr 4 1 00 - 7F PAN o 0:random depend on the note

1:L63 : 64:C(center) : 127:R63

3n rr 5 1 00 - 7F REVERB SEND o 0 - 127 depend on the note 3n rr 6 1 00 - 7F CHORUS SEND o 0 - 127 depend on the note 3n rr 7 1 00 - 7F VARIATION SEND o 0 - 127 7F 3n rr 8 1 00 - 01 KEY ASSIGN o 0:SINGLE 0

1:MULTI 3n rr 9 1 00 - 01 Rcv NOTE OFF o OFF/ON depend on the note 3n rr 0A 1 00 - 01 Rcv NOTE ON o OFF/ON 1 3n rr 0B 1 00 - 7F FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY o -64 - +63 40 3n rr 0C 1 00 - 7F FILTER RESONANCE o -64 - +63 40 3n rr 0D 1 00 - 7F EG ATTACK o -64 - +63 40 3n rr 0E 1 00 - 7F EG DECAY1 o -64 - +63 40 3n rr 0F 1 00 - 7F EG DECAY2 o -64 - +63 40 TOTAL SIZE 10

XG ADDITIONAL PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE (DRUM SETUP)Address

(H) Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default

3n rr 20 1 00 - 7F EQ BASS x 40 21 1 00 - 7F EQ TREBLE x 40 22 1 NOT USED x 40 23 1 NOT USED x 40 24 1 04 - 28 EQ BASS frequency x 0C 25 1 1C - 3A EQ TREBLE frequency x 36 26 1 NOT USED x 22 27 1 NOT USED x 2E 28 1 NOT USED x 7 29 1 NOT USED x 7 2A 1 NOT USED x 7 2B 1 NOT USED x 7 2C 1 NOT USED x 0 2D 1 NOT USED x 0

TOTAL SIZE 0E

3n rr 40 1 00,08, 28-2D

OUTPUT SELECT x 0:stereo out,8:indiv1+2 0 40:indiv1,41:indiv2,

TOTAL SIZE 1

n: Drum Setup Number(0 - 1) rr: note number(0DH - 5BH)

If XG SYSTEM ON and/or GM On message is received, all Drum Setup Parameter will be reset to default values. According to the Drum Setup Reset message, individual Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to default values. According to the Program Change for Drum Kit, Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to default values.

MIDI Parameter Change table (PLUGIN BOARD ) [XG]Address

(H) Size (H)

Data (H)

Parameter Recognized Description Default

70 tt nn 1 00 - 0F, 7F

Part Assign Part1 ...16,OFF 00

TOTAL SIZE 1

71 tt mm 1 00 - 0F Note Filter Part1 ...16 - - TOTAL SIZE 1

tt: Board type (00:PLG100-VL, 02:PLG100-DX ...) nn: Serial Number mm: part number (00 - 0F ) These are recognized when the corresponding board is installed.

616

M IDI Data Form

at/M IDI-Datenform

at/Form at de donnes M

IDI M

IDI Data Form at/M

IDI-Datenform at/Form

at de donnes M IDI

A p

p e

n d

ix /A

n h

a n

g /A

n n

e x

e 243

617

Functions of the MIDI B Port when Connected to the MFC10/ Funktionen des MIDI B Ports bei Verbindung mit dem MFC10/ Fonctions du port MIDI B lors de la connexion au MFC10 The MIDI B port can also be used for operation with the MFC10 MIDI Foot Controller.

MIDI B INMIDI EventsStatus byte1st Data byte2nd Data byteMFC10 channel numberRemarks

Status Data (HEX) Parameter Data (HEX) Parameter When n matches the MFC10s channel number.

When n does not match the MFC10s channel number.

Key Off 8nH (n:channel no.) kk Key no. (0~127) vv Velocity(0~127) Handled as a message for control by the MFC10.

Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.

Key On 9nH kk Key no. (0~127) vv Key On :vv=1~127 Key Off :vv=0

Handled as a message for control by the MFC10.

Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.

Control Change BnH 0 (00H) Bank Select MSB 0 (00H) Normal Handled as a message for control by the MFC10.

Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.126 (7EH) SFX kit

127 (7FH) Drum 1 (01H) Modulation 0~127 (...7FH) Handled as a message for control by the

MFC10. Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.

2 (02H) No Assign 0~127 (...7FH) Handled as a message for control by the MFC10.

Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.

3 (03H) No Assign 0~127 (...7FH) Handled as a message for control by the MFC10.

Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.

4 (04H) Foot Control 0~127 (...7FH) Handled as a message for control by the MFC10.

Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.

7 (07H) Main Volume 0~127 (...7FH) Handled as a message for control by the MFC10.

Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.

Other - - - Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.

RealTime Message F8H MIDI Clock - - Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.

Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.

FEH Active Sens - - Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.

Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.

Other Other - - - - Handled as a normal Channel/Mode/Re- altime message.

MIDI B OUTMIDI EventsStatus byte1st Data byte2nd Data byteTransmitRemarks

Status Data (HEX) Parameter Data (HEX) Parameter RealTime Message FEH Active Sens - - o Transmits every 200msec. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

MFC10 Bulk Dump o Transmits after checking the connection with the MFC10 and changing the MFC10s channel number.

Other - - - x

MIDI Implementation Chart/MIDI-Implementierungstabelle/

244 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

I l i t/ I I-I l ti t ll / YAMAHA [ Professional Workstation ] Date:9-SEP-1999

Model 9000Pro MIDI Implementation Chart Version : 1.0

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function...

Basic Default 1 - 16 *1 1 - 16 *2 Channel Changed 1 - 16 *1 1 - 16 *2

Default 3 3 Mode Messages x x

Altered ************** x

Note 0 - 127 0 - 127 Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127

Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127 Note OFF x 9nH,v=0 x

After Key's x x Touch Ch's o o

Pitch Bend o o 0-24 semi

0,32 o o *1 Bank Select 1,5,7,10,11 o o *1

6,38 o o *1 Data Entry 64-67 o o *1

Control 71,74 o o *1 Sound Controller 72,73 x *3 o *1 Sound Controller

Change 84 x *3 o *1 Portamento Cntrl

96,97 x o *1 Data Inc,Dec 98,99 o o *1 NRPN LSB,MSB

100,101 o o *1 RPN LSB,MSB

91,93,94 o o *1 Effect Depth

Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127 Change : True # **************

System Exclusive o o

: Song Pos. x x Common : Song Sel. x x : Tune x x

System :Clock o o Real Time:Commands o o

Aux :All Sound OFF x o(120,126,127) :Reset All Cntrls x o(121) :Local ON/OFF x x :All Notes OFF x o(123-125) Mes- :Active Sense o o sages:Reset x x

Notes: *1,*2,*3 see next page.

Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No

MIDI Implementation Chart 618

Feuille dimplmentation MIDI

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 245

*1 The tracks for each channel can be selected on the panel. See page 175 for more information.

*2 The tone generator normally functions as a 16-channel multi-timbre tone generator in response to MIDI input. MIDI messages therefore do not nor- mally affect the panel voices or other panel settings. The MIDI messages listed below, however, do affect the panel voice, style, Multi Pad, and song settings.

MIDI MASTER TUNE, XG System parameter MASTER TUNE XG System parameter TRANSPOSE System exclusive messages which change the REVERB, CHORUS or

DSP EFFECT settings. XG MULTI EQ parameters

Also, the MIDI messages affect the panel settings when one of the following MIDI reception modes is selected. These modes can be selected on the panel (see page 176).

RIGHT1, RIGHT2, RIGHT3, LEFT, KEYBOARD, ACMP RHYTHM1, ACMP RHYTHM2, ACMP BASS, ACMP CHORD1, ACMP CHORD2, ACMP PAD, ACMP PHRASE1, ACMP PHRASE2

CHORD ROOT OFF

*3 These Control Change Messages are not transmitted by 9000Pro panel operation, but may be transmitted by the ACCOMPANIMENT or SONG playing.

*1 Die Tracks knnen fr jeden Channel auf dem Panel eingestellt werden. Weitere Informationen nden Sie auf Seite 175.

*2 Der Ton-Generator funktioniert normalerweise in Antwort auf MIDI-Input als Multi-Timbre-Ton-Generator mit 16 Channels. MIDI-Nachrichten haben demnach keinen Einu auf die Panel-Voices oder andere Panel-Einstel- lungen. Die unten aufgefhrten MID-Meldungen wirken sich jedoch auf Frontplat- ten-Voices, Style-, Multi Pad-und Songeinstellungen aus.

MIDI MASTER TUNE, XG System-Parameter MASTER TUNE XG System-Parameter TRANSPOSE System Exclusive-Nachrichten, welche die Einstellungen REVERB,

CHORUS oder DSP EFFECT ndern. XG MULTI EQ-Parameter

MIDI-Nachrichten haben auch Einu auf die Panel-Einstellungen, wenn einer der folgenden MIDI-Empfangsmodi gewhlt ist. Diese Modi knnen auf der Frontplatte ausgewhlt werden (siehe Seite 176).

RIGHT1, RIGHT2, RIGHT3, LEFT, KEYBOARD, ACMP RHYTHM1, ACMP RHYTHM2, ACMP BASS, ACMP CHORD1, ACMP CHORD2, ACMP PAD, ACMP PHRASE1, ACMP PHRASE2

CHORD ROOT OFF

*3 Diese Control Change-Nachrichten werden nicht durch die Panel-Bedie- nung des 9000Pro bermittelt, sondern knnen durch die ACCOMPANI- MENT (Begleitung) oder die SONG-Wiedergabe bermittelt werden.

*1 Les pistes de chaque canal peuvent tre slectionnes sur le panneau. Pour plus d'informations, voir page 175.

*2 Le gnrateur de son fonctionne normalement comme un gnrateur de son multi-timbre 16 canaux en rponse une entre MIDI. Par cons- quent, les messages MIDI n'affectent gnralement pas les voix de pan- neau ou les autres rglages de panneau. Toutefois, les messages MIDI lists ci-dessous affectent les rglages de la voix du tableau, du style, des multitouches, des morceaux.

MIDI MASTER TUNE, paramtres du systme XG MASTER TUNE Paramtres du systme XG TRANSPOSE Messages exclusifs au systme qui modient les rglages REVERB,

CHORUS ou EFFET DSP. Paramtres XG MULTI EQ

De plus, les messages MIDI affectent les rglages du panneau lorsque l'un des modes de rception MIDI suivants est slectionn. Ces modes peuvent tre slectionns sur le tableau (voir page 176).

RIGHT1, RIGHT2, RIGHT3, LEFT, KEYBOARD, ACMP RHYTHM1, ACMP RHYTHM2, ACMP BASS, ACMP CHORD1, ACMP CHORD2, ACMP PAD, ACMP PHRASE1, ACMP PHRASE2

CHORD ROOT OFF

*3 Ces messages de modication de commandes ne sont pas transmis par l'opration du panneau du 9000Pro, mais peuvent tre transmis par la reproduction ACCOMPANIMENT (Accompagnement) ou SONG (Morceau).

61 9

Specications/Technische Daten/Spcications

246 Appendix/Anhang/Annexe

Keyboard: 76 Keys (E0 ~ G6) Weighted with Touch Response (Initial/After)

Polyphony: 126 Notes max

Voices: Preset 848 342 Voices + 480 XG Voices + 24 Drum Kits + 2 SFX Kits Custom 32 User programmable Organ Flute 20 10 Preset + 10 User, 9 Footages; with Modeling Technology

Orchestration: Right 3 PART RIGHT1, RIGHT2, RIGHT3 Left 1 PART

Plug-In System: Slots 2 Supported Boards PLG100-DX, PLG100-VL, PLG150-AN, PLG150-PF, PLG150-DX, PLG150-VL, PLG100-XG Edit Plug-in Custom Voice Creator

Sampling: Quality 16bit 44.1KHz File Import AIFF, WAV Edit Resampling/Loop Point/Normalize/Volume/Tune RAM Capacity 1MByte 11.8sec Expanded Capacity 9M/17M/33M/65MByte 106.9/202.1/392.3/772.7sec Consecutive Record Time 380sec max When 2 SIMM modules (16MB or 32MB) are installed..

Effects: Reverb 29 Preset + 3 User Chorus 25 Preset + 3 User DSP Effect 164 Preset for Style and Song DSP Effect (164 Preset + 10 User) x 4 Blocks for R1, R2, R3, LEFT Number of Effects in DSP Max. 3 DSP Effect 84 Preset + 10 User for Mic/Line In DSP Variation Slow/Fast for R1, R2, R3, LEFT POLY/MONO Yes Vocal Harmony 59 Preset + 10 User 3 notes polyphony Harmony/Echo 17 Preset Master EQ 2 Preset + 2 User 5 Band Part EQ 29 Part 2 Band, 29 Part (R1, R2, R3, LEFT, ACMPx8, SONGx16, M.PAD) Touch Response 5 Preset Tempo 32 ~ 280 Transpose -24 ~ 0 ~ 24 Tuning 414.6 ~ 440 ~ 466.8Hz Octave -1, 0, +1 only for Upper Pitch Bend Wheel Modulation Wheel Left Hold Yes

Auto Accompaniment: Preset 125 Flash 87 Up to 1.8MByte, 120 style max. Disk 66 (included in the accessory disk) DISK DIRECT function is available. Custom Style 1 Pattern Assembly, Realtime/Step Rec, Event Edit, Full Parameter Edit Format Style File Format Control INTRO x 3

FILL IN x 4 BREAK FILL x 1 MAIN x 4 ENDING x 3 FADE IN/OUT TAP TEMPO

Fingering Single Finger, Multi Finger, Fingered, Fingered Pro, On Bass, On Bass Pro, Full Keyboard

One Touch Setting: 4/Style Fully programmable

Music Database: 616 Fully programmable

Multi Pad: 4Pads x 60 Banks 58 Multi Pad Bank, 1 MIDI Control Bank, 1 Scale Tune Bank

Realtime/Step Rec, Event Edit

Song: Playback Disk Direct Playback with Ultra Quick Start function Track 16 Recording RAM Recording Quick/Multitrack/Step/Chord Step Rec, Event Edit RAM Capacity 300kbyte Approximately 38,000 notes max.

Specications 620

Specications/Technische Daten/Spcicationsi i i i i

Appendix/Anhang/Annexe 247

Registration Memeory: 512 8 Switches x 64 Banks, Freeze function

Language: 5 languages English, German, French, Spanish, Italian

Display: Back Lit Graphic LCD 240 x 320 Dots, video out capability

Disk: Floppy Disk Drive 3.5" 2HD/2DD Built-in Hard Disk Optional

Demonstations: 18 songs

Connectors: MIDI MIDI A/B (IN/OUT) MIDI A can switch to TO HOST.

TO HOST HOST SELECT SW (Mac/PC1/PC2/MIDI) Foot Pedal FOOT SWITCH1

FOOT SWITCH2 FOOT VOLUME

SCSI D-sub Half Pitch 50pins VIDEO OUT Pin Type NTSC/PAL Composite Signal PC KEYBOARD Mini DIN Type PC/AT Standard Console Lamp Socket 2 for gooseneck lamp Analog PHONES

LOOP SEND(L/L+R,R) LINE OUT MAIN (L/L+R,R), SUB (1/2/3/4) AUX IN/LOOP RETURN(L/L+R,R), TRIM VOL MIC/LINE IN (XLR/PHONE Plug Compatible) LEVEL (MIC1/MIC2/LINE), INPUT VOLUME, Indicator

Power Consumption: 47W (120V), 47W (220 ~ 240V)

Weight: 20.5Kg (45lbs. 3oz)

Dimensions: W x H x D 1269 x 407.5 x 140mm without Music Stand

(49-15/16" x 16-1/16" x 5-1/2")

Supplied Accessories: Music Stand 1 AC Power Cord 1 AC Plug Adaptor 1 in applicable areas only Floppy Disk 4 Disk Styles, Factory Data Backup Disk, Plug-in Custom Voice Disk Owner's Manual 1

Optional Accessories: Foot Switch FC5 Foot Volume FC7 Headphones HPE-150,160 Mic MZ106s Dynamic Microphone IMP.250 Keyboard Stand LG-100 Hard Disk 2.5inch IDE Height 12.5mm max, 8GByte max SIMM 4M/8M/16M/32MByte 72pin SIMM, 16bit BUS, JEDEC SCSI Device SCSI-2 Hard Disk, CD-ROM*, ZIP, MO, Jaz (Iomega), 8GByte max per device PC Keyboard PC/AT Standard CRT Display NTSC or PAL Gooseneck Lamp 4 Pin XLR Connector DC 12V / 5 W max.

* Supports ISO9660 Level1 except Multi Session Disk Format. Audio-CD Format is not supported.

Specications and descriptions in this owners manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or mod- ify products or specications at any time without prior notice. Since specications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Die technischen Daten und Beschreibungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung dienen nur der Information. Yamaha Corp. behlt sich das Recht vor, Produkte oder deren technische Daten jederzeit ohne vorherige Ankndigung zu verndern oder zu modizieren. Da die techni- schen Daten, das Gert selbst oder Sonderzubehr nicht in jedem Land gleich sind, setzen Sie sich im Zweifel bitte mit Ihrem Yamaha- Hndler in Verbindung.

Les caractristiques techniques et les descriptions du mode demploi ne sont donnes que pour information. Yamaha Corp. se rserve le droit de changer ou modier les produits et leurs caractristiques techniques tout moment sans aucun avis. Du fait que les caractristi- ques techniques, les quipements et les options peuvent diffrer dun pays lautre, adressez-vous au distributeur Yamaha le plus proche.

62 1

622

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con- tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s sup- plied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instruc- tions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class B digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential envi- ronment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not

guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON, please try to elimi- nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line lter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

The serial number of this product may be found on the rear of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identication in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

(rear)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor- dance with the following code:

GREEN-AND-YELLOW:EARTH BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be con- nected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN-and-YEL- LOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the ter- minal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. (3 wires)

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-3273

[PK] 19

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de dtails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous gurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgefhrten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshndlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungslndern erhltlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha ms cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouas 2636, So Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Argentina S.A. Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panama S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanizacin Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panam, Panam Tel: 507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstrae 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030

AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Tel: 030-2828411

BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Tel: 02-7258220

FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Claviers BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Valle Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A., Home Keyboard Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain Tel: 91-201-0700

GREECE Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111

SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Gteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofce Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY Norsk lial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Nringspark 1 N-1345 sters, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstrae 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030

Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstrae 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971-4-81-5868

HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3486-0011

MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900

PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374

TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999

THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLES REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317

AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. 17-33 Market Street, South Melbourne, Vic. 3205, Australia Tel: 3-699-2388

NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the 9000 Pro Yamaha works, you can view and download the Yamaha 9000 Pro Keyboard Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Yamaha 9000 Pro as well as other Yamaha manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Yamaha 9000 Pro. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Yamaha 9000 Pro Keyboard Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Yamaha 9000 Pro Keyboard Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Yamaha 9000 Pro Keyboard Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Yamaha 9000 Pro Keyboard Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Yamaha 9000 Pro Keyboard Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.